1. OMS Online Help
  2. Merchandising

9 Merchandising

Setting Up the Item Supporting Tables

Supporting tables: This part describes how to set up the item supporting tables. Generally, these tables contain codes and associated descriptions which you use to define and classify items.

Working with Hazardous Item Codes (WHAZ)

Hazard codes identify hazardous items and indicate if special storage and/or handling is required. You assign a Hazard code to an item in Work with Item/SKUs.

In this topic:

Work with Hazard Codes Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WHAZ in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Hazardous Item Codes at a menu.

Field Description
Code

A code that identifies the hazard type.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the hazard code.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional

Screen Option Procedure

Create a new code

Select Create to advance to the Create Hazard Code Screen.

Change a hazard code

Select Change for a hazard code to advance to the Change Hazard Code screen. At this screen, you can change any information except the hazard code. See Create Hazard Code Screen for field descriptions.

Delete a hazard code

Select Delete for a hazard code to delete it.

Note:

You can delete a code even if it is assigned to an item. The next time you maintain the item, a message similar to the following indicates that the hazard code assigned to the item does not exist:

Hazard not found.

Display a hazard code

Select Display for a hazard code to advance to the Display Hazard Code screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Hazard Code Screen for field descriptions.

Create Hazard Code Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create new hazard codes.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Hazard Codes Screen, select Create.

Field Description
Code

A code used to categorize an item as a hazardous material that requires special storage and/or handling. You can assign hazard codes to an item through Work with Item/SKUs.

Numeric, 2 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Description

The hazardous materials description.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; required.

Class

A class of hazardous materials such as flammable or radioactive. These codes are assigned by the Department of Transportation (DOT). The Class field is used for information and reporting only.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; required.
Label type

The type of label that should be produced for this type of hazardous material. The label identifies the hazardous item as flammable or radioactive to warehouse personnel or shippers.

The Label type field is used for information and reporting only. The system will not automatically print a label.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; required.

Working with Item Category Codes (WITG)

Item category codes classify and group similar items on a level below Item Class. For example, you can assign a group of items within the same item class an Item category of “printers only” to differentiate printers from the other items under that item class.

In this topic:

How Items are Classified and Grouped

This image shows a flowchart on how items are classified and grouped

Where you can use item category codes:

Work with Item Categories Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WITG in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Item Categories at a menu.

Field Description
Category

A code that identifies the item category.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions in alphanumeric order; optional.
Description

The description of the item category.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a new code

Select Create to advance to the Create Item Category Screen.

Change an item category code

Select Change for an item category code to advance to the Change Item Category screen. At this screen you can change only the description. See Create Item Category Screen for field descriptions.

Delete an item category code

Select Delete for an item category code to delete it.

Note:

You can delete a code even if it is assigned to an item. The next time you maintain the item a message such as the following indicates that the code assigned to the item does not exist:

Item Category not found.

Display an item category code

Select Display for an item category code to advance to the Display Item Category screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Item Category Screen for field descriptions.

Create Item Category Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create new item category codes.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Item Categories Screen, select Create.

Instructions:

Field Description
Cat (Category)

A code that classifies items that are related to, or compatible with each other. You can assign an Item category to an item in Work with Item/SKUs.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Description

The description of the item category.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.

Working with Item Classes (WICL)

Purpose: Use item class codes to group items for inventory and demand reporting. For example, you can use item class to:

Uploading: You can use the Submit Supporting Data Upload Screen (SDUP) to upload new item class codes. See Importing Item-Related Supporting Data (SDUP) for an overview.

In this topic:

Work with Item Class Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WICL in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Item Class from a menu.

Field Description
Class

A code that identifies the item class.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the item class.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create an item class code

Select Create to advance to the Create Item Class Screen.

Change an item class code

Select Change for an item class code to advance to the Change Item Class screen. On this screen, you can change any information except the item class. See Create Item Class Screen.

Delete an item class code

Select Delete for an item class code to delete it.

Note:

You can delete an item class code even if it is assigned to an item. The next time you maintain the item you will receive a message indicating that the code assigned to the item is not found.

Display an item class code

Select Display for an item class code to advance to the Display Item Class screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Item Class Screen for field descriptions.

Define a customer class restriction

Select Cust Class Restric for an item class code to advance to the Item Class Restrictions by Customer Class Screen (Working with Restrictions).

Define a city restriction

Select City/State Restrict. for an item class code to advance to the Work with Item Restrictions by City Screen (Defining City/State Restrictions).

Work with special handling restrictions

Select Special Handling Restrict. for an item class code to advance to the Special Handling Restrictions by Item Class Screen.

Create Item Class Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create an item class.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with Item Class Screen.

Field Description
Item Class

A code to identify a group of items, such as computer hardware or computer software. Item Class codes are used as a high-level method to sort and classify inventory. You assign an item Class to an item in the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Description

A description of the item class, such as furniture or computer hardware. The item class description prints on several inventory reports.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.

Commission %

Not currently implemented.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2 place decimal; optional.
Estimate freight

Your “best guess” on the vendor's freight charges for items defined in this item class. This unit amount is added to an item's cost to represent the estimated freight charges. Including estimated freight charges is helpful if you sell merchandise before the actual freight charges are known.

The system includes estimated freight in the cost of an item when determining gross profit in order entry, maintenance, inquiry and item availability. Gross profit margin is the amount of the item's price that exceeds your cost of the item. You can use gross margin to determine the profit of an item on an order based on the item's selling price, or to determine the profit of an entire order. Determining Gross Profit for more information.

Numeric, 7 with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Estimated freight %

Your “best guess” on the vendor's freight charges for items defined in this item class. This percentage amount is added to an item's cost to represent the estimated freight charges. Including estimated freight charges is helpful if you sell merchandise before the actual freight charges are known.

The system includes estimated freight in the cost of an item when determining gross profit in order entry, maintenance, inquiry and item availability. Gross profit margin is the amount of the item's price that exceeds your cost of the item. You can use gross margin to determine the profit of an item on an order based on the item's selling price, or to determine the profit of an entire order. See Determining Gross Profit for more information.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Availability threshold (item class-level)

Use this field to indicate when to trigger an automatic download of item availability information through the generic inventory API. The system creates a trigger record for an item when its available quantity breeches the threshold, and an integration layer process generates the Inventory Download XML Message (CWInventoryDownload) message to send inventory information to an external system. See Generic Inventory Download API in the Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1) for an overview of message generation rules and processing.

Availability threshold hierarchy: The system checks this setting if there is no Avail thrshld (Item-level availability threshold) specified for the individual item. If both the item-level or item class-level thresholds are blank, the system checks the Quantity Available Threshold for Inventory Downloads (G36) system control value. See this system control value for a complete description of how the availability threshold hierarchy works, and for a description of the e-commerce download.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.

Item Class Restrictions by Customer Class Screen (Working with Restrictions)

Purpose: Item class restriction by customer class is used to prevent the sale of an item to certain customers. For example, if you sell lethal weapons you will need to restrict customers who are under 21 years of age from purchasing them. By creating and using customer class restrictions, you can prevent a class of customers from ordering a class of items. When you define a customer class restriction for an item class, the system:

  • displays a message in Order Entry informing you that a particular item is restricted for a certain class of customer
  • does not allow you to enter the item on an order for that class of customer

Use this screen to create and delete customer class restrictions.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Item Class Screen, select Customer Class Restriction for an item class.

Field Description
Item class

The item class for which you are creating a customer class restriction.

Item class code: alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Item class description: alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Customer class

A code that identifies a class of customers such as for an item restriction, list selection, or reporting purposes.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a new restriction by customer class

Select Create to advance to the Restrict Item Class by Customer Class (Creating a Restriction).

Delete a restriction by customer class

Select Delete for a customer class restriction to delete it.

Restrict Item Class by Customer Class (Creating a Restriction)

Purpose: Use this screen to restrict a customer class from ordering a specific item class.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Item Class Restrictions by Customer Class Screen (Working with Restrictions).

Field Description
Item class

The item class code and description for which you wish to create a customer class restriction.

Item class code: alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Item class description: alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

Customer class

The customer class code you wish to restrict from a specific item class. Customer Class codes are defined in and validated against the Customer Class table. See Setting Up the Customer Class Table (WCCL).

Numeric, 2 positions; required.

Work with Item Restrictions by City Screen (Defining City/State Restrictions)

Purpose: Item class restrictions by city/state prevent the sale of certain items where it is illegal for them to be sold. For example, it is illegal to sell lethal sprays in Massachusetts. By creating and using City/State restrictions, you can prevent customers in a certain location from ordering a class of items. When you define a city/state restriction for an item class, the system:

  • displays a message in Order Entry indicating that the item is restricted for the location
  • does not allow you to enter the item on an order for that city/state

How to display this screen: At the Work with Item Class Screen, select City/State Restriction for an item class.

Field Description
Item class

The item class code and description for which you are creating a city restriction.

Item class: Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Item class description: Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
City

The city where an item class restriction applies.

Alphanumeric, 25 positions; optional.
State

The two-letter code for the state or province where the city is located.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a new restriction by city

Select Create to advance to the Create Item Restriction by City Screen.

Delete a restriction by city

Select Delete for a city/state restriction to delete it.

Create Item Restriction by City Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to restrict a city from a specific item class.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Item Restrictions by City Screen (Defining City/State Restrictions), select Create.

Field Description
Item class

The item class code and description for which you are creating a city restriction.

Item class code: alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Item class description: alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
City

The city where an item class restriction applies.

Alphanumeric, 25 positions; required.
State

The two-letter code for the state or province. State codes are defined in and validated against the State table, which is accessible through the Work with Countries menu option; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY).

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; required.

Special Handling Restrictions by Item Class Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to restrict the type of special handling that a customer can order based on item class. For example, you might want to restrict personalizing a t-shirt with an emblem if the process used to attach the emblem damages the t-shirt.

A message similar to the following indicates when you define a special handling code for an item assigned to a restricted item class:

Additional charge code (EM) cannot be used with this item class (RST).

How to display this screen: At the Work with Item Class Screen, select Special Handling Restriction for an item class.

Field Description
Item class

The item class code and description that is restricted from special handling.

Item class code: alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Item class description: alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
S/H code (Special handling code)

The code for the type of special handling that is restricted. Special handling codes are defined in and validated against Work with Additional Charges (fast path = WADC); see Establishing Additional Charge Codes (WADC).

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Description (Special handling code description)

The description of the type of special handling that is restricted.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Delete a special handling restriction

Select Delete for the special handling restriction to delete it.

Create a special handling restriction

Select Create to advance to the Restrict Special Handling by Item Class Screen.

Restrict Special Handling by Item Class Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to restrict special handling codes from being used by an item class.

How to display this screen: On the Special Handling Restrictions by Item Class Screen, select Create.

Field Description
Item class

The item class code and description for which you are creating a special handling restriction.

Item class code: alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Item class code description: alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
S/H code (Special handling code)

The special handling code you wish to restrict for this item class.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; required.

Working with Item Status (WIST)

Purpose: Use the Work with Item Status Codes function to define an item status such as obsolete, discontinued, future ship or soldout, which you can then use for:

  • selecting items for inventory inquiries and reports
  • displaying message lines in Order Entry and Order Maintenance
  • assigning a future arrival date
  • controlling the display of the item

Assigning to an item: You use the Status field on the first Create Item Screen or Change Item screen to assign a status code to an item. If the item has SKUs, you can also assign a status to the individual SKUs. The SKU status overrides the status of the base item.

Future arrival date: You can default a future ship arrival date to an item in order entry through the Future Orders Item Status (E52) system control value. The date defaults from the Default Future Orders Arrival Date (E53) system control value.

Grouping items: The item status code is one of several types of codes you can use to define and group items. Other codes include department, item class, item category, long SKU class, and long SKU department. See Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM) for information on assigning these codes to items.

Preventing display at the Item Selection screen: The Item Selection screen does not list Items that are assigned to the Item Status for Suppressing Item During Item Selection (L21), provided the status is assigned at the item level rather than the SKU level.

Uploading: You can use the Submit Supporting Data Upload Screen (SDUP) to upload new item status codes. See Importing Item-Related Supporting Data (SDUP) for an overview.

In this topic:

Work with Item Status Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WIST in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Item Status from a menu.

Field Description
Sts (Status)

A code that identifies the item status.

Alphanumeric, 1 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the item status.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a new code

Select Create to advance to the Create Item Status Screen.

Change an item status code

Select Change for a code to advance to the Change Item Status screen. At this screen, you can change any information except the code. See Create Item Status Screen for field descriptions.

Delete an item status code

Select Delete for a code to delete it.

Note:

You can delete a code even if it is assigned to items. The next time you maintain any items associated with this status code a message will display indicating that the code assigned to the item is not found.

Display an item status code

Select Display for a code to advance to the Display Item Status Screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Item Status Screen for field descriptions.

Create Item Status Screen

To create: At the Work with Item Status Screen, select Create.

Field Description
Status

A code that represents an item's status, such as obsolete, discontinued, soldout, etc. You can use item status codes as selection criteria for inventory reporting or to create status message lines to display in Order Entry or Order Maintenance.

Alphanumeric, 1 position.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Description

A description of the item status code.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
O/E message 1 and 2

The two message lines to display in the Item Status Message Window in Order Entry and Order Maintenance for items with this status code.

Alphanumeric, two lines of 50 positions each; optional.
Return disposition

A code that identifies how a returned item assigned to this item status code will be handled by the system, in terms of whether the return updates inventory and the warehouse and location to which the item will be returned.

Note:

When you return an item that is assigned to an item status code that has a return disposition code defined, the system does not default the return disposition code to the return.

Return disposition codes are defined in and validated against the Return Disposition table.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.

Working with Long SKU Classes (WLSC)

Purpose: Long SKU classes represent class codes for a SKU. For example, you may want to assign a long SKU class code to items that differ from the mail order class codes for the same group of items. These codes are typically used in a retail environment; however, they can be used for other classifications.

Long SKU Class codes are used in conjunction with Long SKU Department codes for reporting purposes. A long SKU class is assigned to an item in the L/S class (Long SKU class) field of the Item table; the system will validate your entry to this field against the Long SKU Class table.

Retail integration (external system to Order Management System): If you are using Retail Integration (external system to Order Management System) by selecting the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value, you define a retail class within the long SKU department assigned to an item rather than a using a long SKU class. For example, retail class 10 might be Ties within Department 20 (Men’s Apparel), but within Department 30 (Women’s Apparel) class 10 might be Slacks.

As a result, when you are using the Retail Integration (external system to Order Management System), the system validates retail classes against the Retail Class table and denies access to the Work with Long SKU Class menu option. If you attempt to use the menu option, the screen displays an error message: Work with Long SKU Class Not Allowed with SCV H26.

Require long SKU class: If the Require L/S Class (I93) system control value is selected, the system requires you to enter a long SKU class when you create or maintain an item.

Long SKU elements: The entire Long SKU consists of the following elements:

  • L/S Style
  • L/S Vendor
  • L/S Department
  • L/S Class
  • L/S Color
  • L/S Size
  • L/S Width

If the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected, the system requires you to enter a L/S style, L/S subclass, L/S department, and L/S class when you create or maintain an item.

Uploading: If the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is unselected, you can use the Submit Supporting Data Upload Screen (SDUP) to upload new long SKU class codes. See Importing Item-Related Supporting Data (SDUP) for an overview.

In this topic:

Work with Long SKU Classes Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WLSC in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Long SKU Classes from any menu.

Field Description
Class

A code that represents the long SKU class.

Numeric, 4 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the long SKU class.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a new long SKU class

Select Create to advance to the Create Long SKU Class Screen.

Change a long SKU class

Select Change for a long SKU class to advance to the Change Long SKU Class Screen. At this screen you can change any information except the long SKU class code. See Create Long SKU Class Screen for field descriptions.

Delete a long SKU class

Select Delete for a long SKU class to delete it.

Note:

You can delete a code even if it is assigned to an item. The next time you maintain the item you will receive a message indicating that the code assigned to the item is not found.

Display a long SKU class

Select Display for a long SKU class to advance to the Display Long SKU Class Screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Long SKU Class Screen for field descriptions.

Create Long SKU Class Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a long SKU class.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Long SKU Classes Screen, select Create.

Field Description
Class

A user-defined code that defines the long SKU class.

Long SKU Class codes are used in conjunction with Long SKU Department codes for reporting purposes.

Numeric, 4 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Description

The description of the long SKU class code.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.

Working with Long SKU Departments (WLSD)

Purpose: Use the Work with Long SKU Departments menu option to create or work with department codes for a SKU, or if you are using Retail Integration (external system to Order Management System), to assign a retail class code to a long SKU department. For example, you might want to use a long SKU department code that differs from the mail order department codes you assign to a group of items. These codes are typically used in a retail environment; however, they are sometimes used for other classifications.

Long SKU department codes are used in conjunction with long SKU class codes for reporting purposes and to create a hierarchy within a company or entity. If you have the Require Long SKU Division with Long SKU Department (E85) system control value selected, you must specify a long SKU division when creating or maintaining long SKU departments.

Retail integration (external system to Order Management System): If you are using Retail Integration (external system to Order Management System), long SKU class codes are linked to long SKU department codes to create retail classes. See the Work with Retail Class Screen.

A long SKU department is assigned to an item in the L/S dept (Long SKU department) field of the Item table; the system will validate your entry to this field against the Long SKU Department table.

Require long SKU department: If the Require L/S Department (I92) system control value is selected, the system requires you to enter a long SKU department when you create or maintain an item.

Long SKU elements: The entire Long SKU consists of the following elements:

  • L/S Style
  • L/S Vendor
  • L/S Department
  • L/S Class
  • L/S Color
  • L/S Size
  • L/S Width
  • L/S Subclass

If the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected, the system requires you to enter a L/S style, L/S subclass, L/S department, and L/S class when you create or maintain an item; also, it is possible to assign a retail class to a long SKU department.

Uploading: Options include:

In this topic:

Work with Long SKU Departments Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WLSD in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Long SKU Department from a menu.

Note:

The Assign Retail Class option is not available if the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value unselected.
Field Description
Dept. (Department)

A code that represents the long SKU department.

Numeric, 4 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the long SKU department.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Division

The division associated with the long SKU department. Not validated by any Order Management System table, but can be used for sorting purposes on reports.

Note:

The Importing Item-Related Supporting Data (SDUP) and Working with Retail Integration Item Upload (RIIU) options support a maximum of 3 positions for the long SKU division code.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a new long SKU department

Select Create to advance to the Create Long SKU Department Screen.

Change a long SKU department

Select Change for a long SKU department to advance to the Change Long SKU Department screen. At this screen, you can change any information except the long SKU department code. See Create Long SKU Department Screen field descriptions.

Delete a long SKU department

Select Delete for a long SKU department to delete it.

Note:

You can delete a code even if it is assigned to an item. The next time you maintain the item you will receive a message indicating that the code assigned to the item is not found.

Display a long SKU department

Select Display for a long SKU department to advance to the Display Long SKU Department Screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Long SKU Department Screen for field descriptions.

Assign a long SKU department to a retail class

Select Assign Retail Class for a long SKU department to advance to the Work with Retail Class Screen.

This option is available only if you have the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value selected.

Create Long SKU Department Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a long SKU department.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with Long SKU Departments Screen.

Field Description
Department

A user-defined code that identifies a long SKU department. Long SKU department codes are used in conjunction with long SKU class codes for reporting purposes.

Numeric, 5 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Description

The description of the long SKU department code.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
L/S division (Long SKU division)

The code identifying the long SKU division. Long SKU divisions are defined in and validated against the Long SKU Division table. You use the division code to establish a hierarchy and to sort item information when you generate reports. See Creating and Maintaining Long SKU Divisions (WLDV).

Required if the Require Long SKU Division with Long SKU Department (E85) system control value is selected.

Note:

The Importing Item-Related Supporting Data (SDUP) and Working with Retail Integration Item Upload (RIIU) options support a maximum of 3 positions for the long SKU division code.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; required if system control value is selected.

Work with Retail Class Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create, change, delete or display a retail class within the long SKU department.

The creation and assignment of retail classes is part of integrating retail operation into Order Management System and is controlled through the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value. A retail class is a long SKU class that you have assigned to a specific long SKU department. You can create retail classes either through this screen by selecting Create or through a Retail Class File conversion program.

How to display this screen: If the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected, select Assign Retail Class for a long SKU department at the Work with Long SKU Departments Screen.

Field Description
L/S Department

The code and description of the long SKU department to which you will assign a long SKU class. Long SKU departments are linked with long SKU classes in Retail Integration (external system to Order Management System) for creating an organizational hierarchy and for reporting purposes.

Department code: Numeric, 4 positions; display-only.

Department description: Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Class

A code that represents a retail class. A long SKU class that is assigned to a long SKU department is called a retail class. Retail classes are department specific whereas regular long SKU classes are unique and remain constant across departments. For example, Retail Class 10 may be Ties within Department 20 (Men’s Apparel), but within Department 30 (Women’s Apparel) Retail Class 10 may be Slacks. With regular long SKU classes, Class 15 may be Shoes, and will remain Shoes regardless of the department.

Retail classes are defined in and validated against the Retail Class table whereas long SKU classes are defined in and validated against the Long SKU Class table. Therefore, when the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected, you can not access the Work with Long SKU Class menu option or the WLSC fast path.

Numeric, 4 positions; optional.
Description

The description of a retail class. If you ran the Retail Class Table conversion program to populate the Retail Class table, the existing long SKU class description defaults for the retail class description.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions, optional.

Option Procedure

Create a retail class

Select Create to advance to the Create Retail Class Screen.

Change a retail class

Select Change for a retail class to advance to the Maintain Retail Class Screen. At this screen you can change the description for a retail class. If you want to change the retail class code (L/S Class), you must delete (Delete) the existing code and create (Create) a new retail class code. See Create Retail Class Screen for field descriptions.

Delete a retail class

Select Delete for a retail class to delete it.

Note:

You can delete a code even if it is assigned to an item. The next time you maintain the item you will receive a message indicating that the code assigned to the item is not found within the long SKU department.

Display a retail class

Select Display for a retail class to advance to the Display Retail Class Screen. You can not change any information on this screen. See Create Retail Class Screen for field descriptions.

Print a list of retail classes

Select Print List to print a list of the retail class(es) assigned to the long SKU department. The system submits the job RETAIL_CLS.

Create Retail Class Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a retail class within the particular long SKU department.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with Retail Class Screen.

Field Description
L/S Department

The code and description of the long SKU department to which you will assign a long SKU class. Long SKU departments are used with long SKU classes in Retail Integration (external system to Order Management System) to create an organizational hierarchy and for reporting purposes.

Department code: Numeric, 4 positions; display-only.

Department description: Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

L/S Class (Long SKU Class)

A code that represents a retail class. A long SKU class that is assigned to a long SKU department is called a retail class. Retail classes are department-specific, while regular long SKU classes are unique and remain constant across departments. For example, Retail Class 10 might be Ties within Department 20 (Men’s Apparel), but within Department 30 (Women’s Apparel) Retail Class 10 might be Slacks. With regular long SKU classes, Class 15 might be Shoes, and remain Shoes regardless of the department.

Retail classes are defined in and validated against the Retail Class table, while long SKU classes are defined in and validated against the Long SKU Class table. As a result, when the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected, you can not access the Work with Long SKU Class menu option.

Numeric, 4 positions; required.
Retail Class Description

The description of a retail class. If you ran the Retail Class Table conversion program to populate the Retail Class table, the existing long SKU class description defaults for the retail class description.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions, required.

Completing this screen: Enter the L/S Class (Retail Class) code and Retail Class Description and select OK. The system clears the fields and indicates: Retail Class (xxx) created.

Working with Units of Measure (WUOM)

Purpose: Use this option to defines the standard units of measure by which items are purchased and sold. Typical units of measure include cases, pounds, dozens, and “eaches.” You define a unit of measure for each item in the Item and Vendor Item tables.

After setting up units of measure, use Working with Unit of Measure Conversions (WUMC) to set up conversions so that units and costs calculate correctly in PO Maintenance and PO Receipts.

In this topic:

Work with Units of Measure Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WUOM in the Fast Path field in the top of any menu or select this option from a menu.

Field Description
UOM (Unit of measure)

A code that represents the unit of measure.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the unit of measure.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Units

The number of units (single items) represented by this unit of measure, such as 12 units in a case.

Numeric, 4 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a new unit of measure

Select Create to advance to the Create Unit of Measure Screen.

Change a unit of measure

Select Change for a unit of measure to advance to the Change Unit of Measure screen. At this screen you can change any information except the unit of measure. See Create Unit of Measure Screen for field descriptions.

Delete a unit of measure

Select Delete for a unit of measure to delete it.

Note:

You can delete a unit of measure even if it is assigned to an item. The next time you maintain the item you will receive a message indicating that the unit of measure assigned to the item is not found.

Display a unit of measure

Select Display for a unit of measure to advance to the Display Unit of Measure Screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Unit of Measure Screen for field descriptions.

Create Unit of Measure Screen

To create: At the Work with Units of Measure Screen, select Create.

You must create units of measure before working with unit of measure conversions. See Working with Unit of Measure Conversions (WUMC).

Field Description
Unit of measure

A code that represents a unit of measure for an item. Typical units of measure include:

EA - each

IN - inches

C12 - case of 12

Alphanumeric, 3 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Description

A description of the vendor unit of measure such as each, 12 cases, or inches.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Units

The number of units (single items) represented by this unit of measure, such as 12 units in a case.

Numeric, 4 positions; optional.

Working with Item Subscriptions (WISB)

Purpose: Use the Item Subscriptions function to define the particulars of a subscription item you sell to your customers. You must define a record in this table for each subscription item you create.

Overview: Defining and selling subscriptions through Order Management System involves the following process:

  • Define the subscription in the Item table. Select the Subscription field and the Non/inv (non-inventory item) field. See Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM).
  • Define the subscription in the Item Subscription table.
  • Enter orders and pick slips. You enter a subscription on an order as you do other items. When you accept the order, the system creates a separate pre-generated pick for the subscription item. When you generate pick slips for the order, the system bills the subscription item immediately and indicates on the pick slip that the subscription is shipping separately. See Preparing Orders for Pick Slip Generation and Performing Pick Slip Generation for more information on preparing and generating picks.
  • Generate the Subscription Extract file. See Generating the Subscription Extract Table (WGSE) for information on creating a file of customers to receive subscription items.
  • Purge the Subscription Extract file. Periodically, you can use the purge function to clear the file of closed or canceled subscriptions. You can also clear the file completely. See Generating the Subscription Extract Table (WGSE) for more information on purging subscription records or clearing the file.

You can also review, cancel, or change a specific customer's subscription information through the Work with Customers function and in standard Order Inquiry. See Displaying More Options in OIOM.

In this topic:

Work with Item Subscriptions Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WISB in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select this option from a menu.

Field Description
Item

The item code that identifies the subscription. An item is designated as a subscription by a selected Subscription field of the Item (Base Information) record.

Items are defined in and validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions.
Cur iss (Current issue number)

The number of the subscription that will be the first issue sent when the customer orders the subscription or the issue presently being mailed.

Numeric, 3 positions.
# of int (Number of intervals)

The number of issues the customer should receive when purchasing the subscription.

Numeric, 3 positions.
# of Days

The number of days between each issue.

Numeric, 3 positions.
Orig item (Original item)

The original subscription item number associated with this subscription. This is used when a subscription item is offered with different intervals (such as a subscription with a multi-period offering). This is used so that the customer can extend the length of a subscription.

Example: The customer purchased a year's subscription (item SUBSCR#1). Near the end of the subscription period, the customer calls back and orders another year's subscription (item SUBSCR#2).

The system:

  1. checks the Customer Subscription table to see if the original subscription (for SUBSCR#1) is still active (has not expired)
  2. checks to see if there is a value in the Original item/SKU field in the Item Subscription record (SUBSCR#2, which was ordered, references original subscription item SUBSCR#1)
  3. creates a Customer Subscription record for the original subscription item number (SUBSCR#1) and extends the original subscription for the period of the new subscription (in SUBSCR#2), after the initial subscription expires
 

Items are defined in and validated against the Item table.

Note:

The system validates that the item number entered is a subscription item (Subscription = Selected and Non/inv = Selected for the item).

Alphanumeric, 12 positions.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a new item subscription

Select Create to display the Create Item Subscription Screen.

Change an item subscription

Select Change for an item subscription to advance to the Change Item Subscription Screen. At this screen you can change any information except the subscription item code and description. See Create Item Subscription Screen for field descriptions.

Note:

Changing subscription information does not change existing subscriptions; however, new subscriptions will reflect these changes.

Delete an item subscription

Select Delete for an item subscription to delete it.

Note:

The system does not allow you to delete an item subscription if there are open subscriptions for the item. The system issues the following message if you attempt to delete an active subscription:

Open subscriptions exist for this item -- cannot delete

Display an item subscription

Select Display for an item subscription to advance to the Display Item Subscription Screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Item Subscription Screen for field descriptions.

Create Item Subscription Screen

To create: At the Work with Item Subscriptions Screen, select Create.

Note:

You must create an Item Subscription for each subscription item you create in the Item table.
Field Description
Item/SKU

The item code (optionally, the SKU) that identifies the subscription item. You designate an item as a subscription by selecting the Subscription and Non/inv fields of the Item table; see Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM).

The description of the item appears below the item/SKU at the Change Item Description screen, and is display-only.

Item code: Alphanumeric, 12 positions.

SKU: Three 4-position fields.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Current issue# (Current issue number)

The number of the subscription that will be the first issue sent when the customer orders the subscription or the number of the issue presently being mailed.

Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Issue description

The description associated with the current issue of the subscription item.

Alphanumeric, 25 positions; required.
# of intervals

The number of issues the customer should receive when purchasing the subscription item.

Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Interval days

The number of days between each issue.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Original item/SKU

The original subscription item code associated with this subscription, if any.

See the field description above for more information.

Item code: alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.

SKU: three 4-position fields; required.

Working with Item Keywords (WKEY)

Purpose: Use item keywords as a way to identify and scan for items other than by item number and item description. For example, if you sell books and the item number is a code, AN8975H, and the description is the title of the book, "The Outer Ring," you may want to use the author's name as a keyword: "Newbold." This way you can scan for items (books) that have been written by the author, instead of scanning for a specific item (by item code or the title of a specific book).

You can create as many keywords for an item as you want. For example, if you sell books and create the author's name as a keyword for each book, you could further define the item by creating a keyword for the type of book it is, for example, “Science Fiction.”

Web storefront: Keywords are included in the information you can download to the web storefront to make customers’ item searches easier. See Downloading E-Commerce Offer Files (EOFR).

Retail integration (external system to Order Management System) item upload: If the Auto-Generate Item Keywords from Description (F79) system control value is selected, the system automatically creates keywords for items created or updated through the RI Item Upload process for record type 01 Item/SKU; see Working with Retail Integration Item Upload (RIIU).

Note:

You can create item keywords only at the item level, not at the SKU level.

In this topic:

For more information: See Working with Item Keyword Exclusions (WEXC).

Generating Keywords During Item Entry

Keyword creation/automatic advancement: There are two system control values that control automatic keyword creation and screen advancement at item entry:

SCV setting Create Keywords at Item Entry (F78) Auto-Generate Item Keywords from Description (F79) SCV setting Result when you create a new item

Selected

Selected

You advance to the First Work with Keywords for Item Screen. The system generates a keyword for each word in the item description.

Selected

Unselected

You advance to the Second Work with Keywords for Item Screen (ADD Mode). The system has not created any keywords.

Unselected

Selected

You do not advance automatically to either of the Work with Keywords screens; however, the system generates a keyword for each word in the item description.

Unselected

Unselected

You do not advance automatically to either of the Work with Keywords screens, and the system does not generate keywords.

Note:

If system control value Create Keywords at Item Entry (F78) is selected, you first advance to the Create Vendor Item screen when you create an item; then, when you complete the Create Vendor Item screen, to the Work with Keywords for Item screen.

First Work with Keywords for Item Screen

Purpose:

  • During item entry: Use this screen to review the keywords the system has created automatically, if any, and to delete or create keywords.
  • To work with keywords: You can also use this screen at any time to review or delete existing keywords for an item, or create new keywords.

About item keywords: see Working with Item Keywords (WKEY) for an overview, and Keyword Selection Screen (Scanning for Items Using Item Keywords) for sample keyword selection when scanning for an item.

How to display this screen:

Field Description
Item

The code and description for the item you are creating or working with.

Item code: alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

Item description: alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Keyword

A word to further define an item. Item keywords are used to scan for a specific item based on information that is not found in the item code or item description.

During item entry: Depending on your system control value settings, the system may automatically create a keyword using each word in the item description (see Generating Keywords During Item Entry). You can delete any unneeded keyword at this screen by selecting Delete for it.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Delete an item keyword

Select Delete for a keyword to delete it.

Add item keywords

Select Create to switch to the Second Work with Keywords for Item Screen (ADD Mode).

Second Work with Keywords for Item Screen (ADD Mode)

Purpose: Use this screen to create item keywords.

About item keywords: see Working with Item Keywords (WKEY) for an overview, and Keyword Selection Screen (Scanning for Items Using Item Keywords) for sample keyword selection when scanning for an item.

How to display this screen:

Field Description
Item code

A user-defined code that represents a unit of inventory. Item codes are validated against the Item table. The item description appears to the right.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; display-only.
Keyword

A word to further define an item. Item keywords are used to scan for a specific item based on information other than the item code or item description.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; required.

Screen Option Procedure

Create item keywords

Use each enterable line to enter a separate item keyword.

Review existing item keywords

Select Display to advance to the First Work with Keywords for Item Screen.

Work with Item Keywords Screen (WKEY)

Purpose: Use this screen to create, delete and review item keywords.

About item keywords: see Working with Item Keywords (WKEY) for an overview, and Keyword Selection Screen (Scanning for Items Using Item Keywords) for sample keyword selection when scanning for an item.

How to display this screen:

  • enter WKEY in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select this option from a menu, or
  • select Item Keywords on the Item Support Maintenance pop-up window in Work with Item/SKUs
Field Description
Keyword

A word to further define an item. Item keywords are used to scan for a specific item based on information other than the item code or item description.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
Item

A user-defined code that represents a unit of inventory. Item codes are validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Delete an item keyword

Select Delete for the item keyword you wish to delete.

Create an item keyword

Select Create to advance to the Create Item Keyword Screen.

Create Item Keyword Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a keyword for an item.

How to display this screen: Select Create on the Work with Item Keywords Screen (WKEY).

Field Description
Item

A user-defined code that represents a unit of inventory. Item codes are validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; required.
Keyword

A word to further define an item. Item keywords are used to scan for a specific item based on information other than the item code or item description.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; required.

Keyword Selection Screen (Scanning for Items Using Item Keywords)

Purpose: Use this screen to scan for an item by keyword and to then select the item. You would scan for an item by keyword if you did not know the item code or item description.

Example: You sell books. An item code is TB7528J, the item description is the title of the book, “Collective Thoughts.” You do not know the item code or item description, only that the author of the book is Thomas Briggs and the book is a collection of his poems. You could scan for the item in order entry or order maintenance by the keyword BRIGGS or the keyword POETRY.

How to display this screen: On the Item Selection screen, selecting Scan by Keyword. You can advance to the Item Selection screen by clicking on an Item scan field. You also advance to this screen in order entry by prompting on the Item field if the Auto-Generate Item Keywords from Description (F79) system control value is selected.

Field Description
Keyword

A word to further define an item. Item keywords are used to scan for a specific item using information other than the item code or item description.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
Item

A user-defined code that represents a unit of inventory. Item codes are validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Select an item

Select an item keyword to select the item.

Switch to the Item Selection screen

Select Scan by Description.

Working with Item Keyword Exclusions (WEXC)

Purpose: Use Work with Keyword Exclusions to exclude certain words in the item description from being created as item keywords, if these words would not be useful for keyword scanning.

About item keywords: You can use item keywords as a way to identify and scan for an item other than by item number. For example, if you sell books and the item number is a code, AN8975H, and the description is the title of the book, “The Outer Ring,” you may want to use the author's name as a keyword: “Newbold.” This way you can scan for items (books) that have been written by the author, instead of scanning for a specific item (by item code or the title of a specific book).

When to use exclusions? The system automatically creates item keywords based on the words from the item's description if the Auto-Generate Item Keywords from Description (F79) system control value is selected. You might want to exclude words such as “the,” “with,” and “on” from being created as keywords; although these words might be part of an item descriptions, they would not be useful for scanning.

Related topic: See Working with Item Keywords (WKEY), for more information on creating item keywords and scanning for an item using item keywords.

In this topic:

First Work with Keyword Exclusions Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WEXC in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Keyword Exclusions from a menu.

Field Description
Exclusion

A word that has been excluded from automatically generating a keyword from the item's description when you create an item.

The system automatically generates item keywords from the item's description when you create an item if the Auto-Generate Item Keywords from Description (F79) system control value is selected.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Delete a keyword exclusion

Select Delete for a keyword exclusion to delete it.

Create keyword exclusions

Select Create to advance to the Second Work with Keyword Exclusions Screen.

Second Work with Keyword Exclusions Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create keyword exclusions.

How to display this screen: Select Create on the First Work with Keyword Exclusions Screen.

Field Description
Exclusion

A word that has been excluded from automatically generating a keyword from the item's description when you create an item.

The system automatically generates item keywords from the item's description when you create an item if the Auto-Generate Item Keywords from Description (F79) system control value is selected.

The system displays 17 exclusion fields where you can enter words to exclude when creating keywords automatically.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create keyword exclusions

Use each enterable line to enter a separate keyword exclusion.

Display keyword exclusions

Select Display to advance to the First Work with Keyword Exclusions Screen

Working with Tax Product Code Cross References (WTPC)

Purpose: Use this menu option to create a cross reference between a tax product code and an item class, long SKU division, long SKU department, and long SKU class combination.

Avalara Tax Integration: The Avalara AvaTax integration uses the tax product code to determine the tax for a particular product class. If a tax code is not associated with an item, AvaTax assigns a default tax code of U0000000, indicating an unknown tax code. See the Avalara AvaTax Interface and Avalara AvaTax Setup for more information.

Determining a match: In order to be considered a match to a tax product code, the item class, long SKU division, long SKU department, and long SKU class combination values must exactly match the values defined for an item.

Example: The following tax product code cross references are defined.

Item Class L/S Division L/S Department L/S Class Tax Product Code

NA

NA

100

100

PG068810

NA

100

100

NA

PC040111

ACC

NA

NA

NA

PA028802

ACC

100

100

NA

NA

ACC

100

100

100

98922

The system assigns the tax product code to each item using the item class, long SKU division, long SKU department, and long SKU class combination to find an exact match to a tax product code cross reference.

Item Item Class L/S Division L/S Dept L/S Class Results

A101

ACC

100

100

200

no match found

A202

ACC

NA

100

200

no match found

A303

  

100

100

100

no match found

A404

ACC

NA

NA

NA

match to tax product code PA028802

A505

NA

NA

100

100

match to tax product code PG068810

In this topic:

Work with Tax Product Code Cross Reference Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to work with tax product code cross references.

How to display this screen: Enter WTPC in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Tax Product Code Cross Reference from a menu.

Field Description
Item Class

A code to identify a group of items, such as computer hardware or computer software. Item Class codes are used as a high-level method to sort and classify inventory. You assign an item class to an item in the Item table (MITM).

Enter a valid item class code and select OK to display tax product code cross references that match your entry.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

L/S Division

A code that represents a long SKU division. L/S divisions are used in conjunction with long SKU departments and long SKU classes for reporting purposes and to create a hierarchy within a company or entity. Long SKU division codes are defined in and validated against the L/S Division table (WLDV).

Enter a valid long SKU division code and select OK to display tax product code cross references that match your entry.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.

L/S Department

A code that represents a long SKU department. L/S departments are used in conjunction with long SKU divisions and long SKU classes for reporting purposes and to create a hierarchy within a company or entity. Long SKU department codes are defined in and validated against the L/S Department table (WLSD).

Enter a valid long SKU department code and select OK to display tax product code cross references that match your entry.

Alphanumeric, 5 positions; optional.

L/S Class

A code that represents a long SKU class. L/S classes are used in conjunction with long SKU departments and long SKU divisions for reporting purposes and to create a hierarchy within a company or entity. Long SKU class codes are defined in and validated against the L/S Class table (WLSC).

Enter a valid long SKU class code and select OK to display tax product code cross references that match your entry.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.

Tax Product Code

A code used to determine the tax for a particular item.

Enter a valid tax product code and select OK to display tax product code cross references that match your entry.

Alphanumeric, 24 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a tax product code cross reference

Select Create to advance to the Create Tax Product Code Cross Reference Screen.

Change a tax product code cross reference

In the Action column, select Change for a tax product code cross reference to advance to the Change Tax Product Code Cross Reference screen. At this screen, you can change the Tax Product Code. See Create Tax Product Code Cross Reference Screen for field descriptions.

Delete a tax product code cross reference

In the Action column, select Delete for a tax product code cross reference to delete it.

Create Tax Product Code Cross Reference Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a cross reference between a tax product code and an item class, long SKU division, long SKU department, and long SKU class combination.

How to display this screen: Select Create on the Work with Tax Product Code Cross Reference Screen.

Field Description
Item Class

A code to identify a group of items, such as computer hardware or computer software. Item Class codes are used as a high-level method to sort and classify inventory. You assign an item class to an item in the Item table (MITM).

Item class codes are defined in and validated against the Item Class table; see Working with Item Classes (WICL).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions.

Create screen: optional.

Change screen: display-only.

L/S Division

A code that represents a long SKU division. L/S divisions are used in conjunction with long SKU departments and long SKU classes for reporting purposes and to create a hierarchy within a company or entity.

Long SKU division codes are defined in and validated against the L/S Division table; see Creating and Maintaining Long SKU Divisions (WLDV).

Alphanumeric, 4 positions.

Create screen: optional.

Change screen: display-only.

L/S Department

A code that represents a long SKU department. L/S departments are used in conjunction with long SKU divisions and long SKU classes for reporting purposes and to create a hierarchy within a company or entity.

Long SKU department codes are defined in and validated against the L/S Department table; see Working with Long SKU Departments (WLSD).

Alphanumeric, 5 positions.

Create screen: optional.

Change screen: display-only.

L/S Class

A code that represents a long SKU class. L/S classes are used in conjunction with long SKU departments and long SKU divisions for reporting purposes and to create a hierarchy within a company or entity.

Long SKU class codes are defined in and validated against the L/S Class table; see Working with Long SKU Classes (WLSC).

Alphanumeric, 4 positions.

Create screen: optional.

Change screen: display-only.

Tax Product Code

A code used to determine the tax for a particular item.

If you use the AvaTax interface, this is a tax code defined in AvaTax.

Alphanumeric, 24 positions; required.

Setting Up the Purchasing Tables

Purpose:

Working with Buyers (WBUY)

Buyers are eligible to create purchase orders and may be assigned to purchase specific items. A record must be established on the system for every buyer. The Buyer table is required in order to use the Purchase Order function.

In this topic:

Work with Buyers Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create, change, delete, or display buyer information. Buyers are eligible to create purchase orders and may be assigned to purchase specific items. A record must be established on the system for every buyer.

How to display this screen: Enter WBUY in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Buyers from a menu.

Field Description
Buyer

A code to identify a buyer. This code could be the Buyer's initials or any other coding system to identify the buyers.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Description

The buyer's name, which is used on selected reports where the Buyer is included.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a new buyer

Select Create to advance to the Create Buyer Screen.

Change buyer information

Select Change for a buyer to advance to the Change Buyer Screen. At this screen you can change any information except the buyer. See Create Buyer Screen for field descriptions.

Delete buyer information

Select Delete for a buyer to delete it.

Display buyer information

Select Display for a buyer to advance to the Display Buyer Screen. You cannot update any information on this screen. See Create Buyer Screen for field descriptions.

Create Buyer Screen

To create: At the Work with Buyers Screen, select Create.

Field Description
Buyer

The code that identifies a buyer on the system. A buyer is someone who creates the purchase order for an item. A Buyer manages inventory purchases which could be both initial and rebuy purchases or just rebuys. This code could represent the Buyer's initials or any other coding system to identify the Buyer.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Description

The buyer's name, which is used on selected reports where the Buyer is included.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.

Working with Purchase Order Ship Via (WPSV)

Purpose: Use the Purchase Order Ship Via function to add or maintain purchase order ship via codes. The system uses purchase order ship via codes during Purchase Order Maintenance to designate your preferred shipping method for the inventory. The system prints ship via information on the purchase orders.

In this topic:

Drop Ship Purchase Order Setup for Purchase Order Ship Vias

Overview: When you generate drop ship purchase orders, the system defaults the ship via code from the order, as set up through Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA), onto the header of the drop ship purchase order, even though the Ship via field on the purchase order header is validated against the Purchase Order Ship Via table rather than the regular (order) Ship Via table.

The description of the purchase order ship via prints on the standard purchase order. As a result, if you generate drop ship purchase orders and use the standard purchase order print programs, you will need to set up purchase order ship via codes that match the regular (order) ship vias, so that the ship via is identified correctly to your drop ship vendors.

Example: A customer places an order for drop ship item DS123, and the ship via on the order is 10: UPS two-day. When you run Selecting Vendors for Drop Ship Processing (MDSP), it generates a drop ship purchase order to the vendor for the item, and sets the purchase order ship via for the generated drop ship purchase order to 10. When you print the drop ship purchase order using the standard purchase order print programs, the description of the purchase order ship via 10, set up through Working with Purchase Order Ship Via (WPSV), prints. In order to indicate the correct ship via to your vendor, the description of regular (order) ship via 10 and purchase order ship via 10 should be the same.

Specifying purchase order print programs: You use the PO Print Program (C64) and PO Print Program for PO Print in PO Sequence (C76) system control values to specify the regular and drop ship purchase order print program(s). Standard setting for both values are PURCHORDG (graphical format). See the Purchase Order for samples and field descriptions.

Assigning a purchase order ship via to a drop ship vendor item: If you assign a purchase order ship via to a vendor item that will be included on a drop ship purchase order, this purchase order ship via is assigned to the drop ship purchase order detail line; however, the ship via for the purchase order detail line is included on the printed drop ship purchase order only if your unique print program supports it. The ship via from the originating order prints on the standard drop ship purchase order, as described above. As a result, specifying a purchase order ship via for the vendor/item of a drop ship item is not recommended unless you use your own unique print program that indicates the purchase order ship via on the purchase order detail line. See Working with Vendor Items (WVNI) for more information on setting up vendor items.

Supplier Direct Fulfillment integration: The ship via defined for the vendor item of the first line on a drop ship purchase order defaults to the header of a purchase order sent to Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module; otherwise, if no ship via is defined for the vendor item on the first purchase order line, the ship via from the sales order header is assigned. If you use this integration to fulfill drop ship orders, you need to complete carrier setup in Order Broker for these ship vias, including making sure that the ship via codes map to the codes set up for an integrated shipping system that vendors use to confirm shipments of drop ship purchase orders. See Working with Vendor Items (WVNI) and Interface with Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment Module: Overview and Setup for more information.

Work with Purchase Order Ship Via Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WPSV in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with PO Ship Via from a menu.

Field Description
Code

A code that represents a shipper used for shipping merchandise to your company.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the purchase order ship via code.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Lead days

The number of days it takes the shipper to deliver merchandise to your company. Informational only.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a ship via code

Select Create to advance to the Create Purchase Order Ship Via Screen.

Change a ship via code

Select Change for a ship via code to advance to the Change Purchase Order Ship Via Screen.At this screen you can change any information except the ship via code. See Create Purchase Order Ship Via Screen for field descriptions.

Delete a ship via code

Select Delete for a ship via code to delete it.

Display a ship via code

Select Display for a ship via code to advance to the Display Purchase Order Ship Via Screen. You cannot update any information on this screen. See Create Purchase Order Ship Via Screen for field descriptions.

Create Purchase Order Ship Via Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a purchase order ship via code.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with Purchase Order Ship Via Screen.

Field Description
PO shipper

A code that represents a shipper used for shipping merchandise to your company. Purchase order shipper codes are entered on the Ship via field for a purchase order and can be entered in the Ship via field for the Vendor/Item. These codes do not necessarily have to be the same codes defined for shippers of your consumer orders. Purchase Order Maintenance and Vendor/Item Maintenance validates against this table.

Numeric, 2 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Description

The description of the purchase order ship via code. This text prints on the purchase order.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Lead days

The number of days it takes the shipper to deliver merchandise to your company. Informational only.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.

Working with Vendors (WVEN)

Vendors are companies who supply you with merchandise or services. A record must be established on the system for every vendor from whom you purchase merchandise.

In this topic:

Upload vendors: You can upload vendor information into Order Management System using the Load Vendor Upload menu option; see Working with Vendor Upload (LVUP).

Work with Vendors Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WVEN in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select the Work with Vendors option from the menu.

Field Description
Vendor #

A code that identifies a supplier who sells you goods or services.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Name

The name of the vendor.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
State

A code representing a state or province where a vendor's business is located.

State codes are defined in and validated against the State table, which is accessible through the Work with Countries menu option; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY).

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Postal

The vendor's postal (zip) code.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Telephone #

The vendor’t telephone number.

Alphanumeric, 14 positions; optional.
Ext

The vendor’s telephone number extension.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a new vendor

Select Create to advance to the First Create Vendor Screen.

Change vendor information

Select Change for a vendor to advance to the First Change Vendor Screen.

Delete vendor information

Select Delete for a vendor to delete it.

An error message displays if vendor items exist for the vendor: WARNING - VENDOR ITEMS EXIST. Press ENTER or Click OK to confirm delete of Vendor & Vendor’s Items.

Display vendor information

Select Display for a vendor to advance to the First Display Vendor Screen.

Create a vendor discount

Select Discounts for a vendor to advance to the Work with Vendor Discounts Screen.

Display vendor history

Select History for a vendor to advance to the Display Vendor History Screen.

Work with vendor contacts

Select Contacts for a vendor to advance to the Work with Vendor Contacts Screen.

Work with vendor FOB addresses

Select FOB for a vendor to advance to the Work with Vendor FOB Address Screen.

Display vendor notes

Select Notes for a vendor to advance to the Work with Vendor Notes Screen.

Work with user defined fields

Select User Field for a vendor to advance to the Work with User Fields Screen.

First Create Vendor Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to begin to create a vendor. This is the first of two Create Vendor screens; when you complete this screen, you advance to the Second Create Vendor Screen.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with Vendors Screen.

Field Description
Vendor

A code that identifies a supplier.

Numeric, 7 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Name

The name of the vendor or the vendor's company.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Address

The vendor's address, as it should appear on purchase orders.

Alphanumeric, 3 lines with 32 positions each line; required.
City/State/Postal/Country

The city, state, postal zip code, and country associated with the vendor.

If the Require state field for the country in the vendor address is selected, the system requires a state code for the vendor address: State is required for this country.

Note:

The system does not validate the vendor’s address in the same way it validates a customer’s address, as in order entry. For example, it does not validate that the state is associated with the SCF for the postal code.

City: alphanumeric, 25 positions; required.

State: alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.

Postal code: alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.

Country code: alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Contact name

The name of your primary contact at the vendor site. This name prints on purchase orders. You can create additional contacts for a vendor from the Work with Vendor Contacts Screen.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Phone #/Ext (Telephone number and extension)

The vendor's telephone number and extension. You can define a telephone number format to map to the phone numbers operators enter into the system. Telephone number formats are defined by arranging numbers and special characters such as hyphens and parenthesis in the same order and position as the numbers in a phone number would display. When an operator enters a phone number, the system compares the number of numeric characters in the phone number with the telephone number formats you have defined. In order to match a format, the phone number must have the same number of numeric positions as a telephone number format. If the system cannot find a match, the phone number does not map to a telephone number format and is saved as it was entered by the operator.

Phone #: alphanumeric, 14 positions; optional.

Extension: alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Fax#

The telephone number for the vendor's fax machine.

Faxing purchase orders or drop ship picks to the vendor is not currently implemented.

Alphanumeric, 14 positions; optional.
Email

The vendor’s email address. See Email Address Validation for information on how the system verifies that your entry is formatted correctly.

Emailing Purchase Orders

If the Email Purchase Order (K80) system control value and the vendor’s Email P/O flag are selected, the system sends the purchase order to the vendor as an email attachment. See the Email Purchase Order (K80) system control value for more information.

Alphanumeric, 50 positions; optional.
Email P/O

Indicates whether to send the purchase order to the vendor’s email address as an attachment. Valid values are:

Selected = Email the purchase order to the vendor. The .PDF file is attached to a plain-text email that is sent to the vendor’s Email address.

Note:

If this field is selected, then you need to specify a valid Email address for the vendor.

Unselected = Generate a .PDF file for printing.

Regardless of the setting of this flag, you cannot send purchase orders by email unless the Email Purchase Order (K80) system control value is selected. See that system control value and Purchase Order Emails for more information on sending purchase orders to the vendor by email.

Remit to

The name of the person or company you send payment to for vendor invoices.

The remit-to address prints on checks for the vendor.

Note:

If any portion of a name or address appears in the Remit to fields, the system will bypass the vendor name and address and print the Remit to name and address on checks. If you enter any information in the Remit to fields, be sure that it is correct and complete.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Address

The address where you mail checks for the vendor.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
City/State/Postal/Country

The city, state, postal zip code, and country where you should mail payment to the vendor.

If the Require state field for the country in the vendor address is selected, the system requires a state code for the vendor address: State is required for this country.

Alphanumeric, 25 positions; optional.
Email

The remit to vendor’s email address. Informational only. See Email Address Validation for information on how the system verifies that your entry is formatted correctly.

Alphanumeric, 50 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Complete creation of a vendor

Select OK to advance to the Second Create Vendor Screen.

Create the Vendor Extended record

Select Create Vend Ext to advance to the Change Vendor Extended Screen.

Second Create Vendor Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to complete entry of a vendor.

How to display this screen: Select OK at the First Create Vendor Screen.

Field Description
Print PO

Indicates whether purchase order forms print or are emailed for this vendor. If so, you order products on the purchase order, print it, then mail it to the vendor.

  • Selected = Print or email purchase orders for this vendor.
  • Unselected = Do not print or email purchase orders for this vendor.

Note:

If the Email P/O flag is selected, then this flag also needs to be selected.
Drop ship output

Indicates whether to process drop ship orders by printing purchase orders, pick slips/invoices, or transmitting information through the Order Broker interface for internet-based drop ship processing. Drop ship merchandise is merchandise that you sell but do not stock. Only items flagged as Drop ship are eligible for drop ship processing.

  • Drop ship pick = Print drop ship pick slips/invoices for this vendor.
  • Drop ship purchase order = Print drop ship purchase orders for this vendor. When you print a drop ship purchase order, the system also prints a drop ship pick slip/invoice.
  • OROB drop shipping = Send drop ship purchase orders to Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module for internet-based processing.

See Selecting Vendors for Drop Ship Processing (MDSP) for information on generating drop ship pick slips or purchase orders.

Drop Ship integrations

The Order Broker Drop Ship Integration provide access to internet-based, collaborative environments for retailers and vendors to share and process information related to drop ship orders. If you use either of these integrations, your system generates drop ship purchase orders and automatically distributes them to the integrated application.

OROB drop shipping is a valid selection only if the Use OROB Drop Shipping (H13) system control value is selected. If this system control value is unselected when you try to select OROB drop shipping, a message indicates Collaborative shipping vendor is not allowed.

If you select OROB drop shipping, the Email Address for Drop Ship Vendor Window opens unless you have entered a vendor email address on the Create Vendor Contact Screen.

Generating CWPickOut messages: The system also creates pick download triggers (File code of PCH) in the IL Outbound Trigger table when you generate a drop ship invoice if the Create Generic Pick Download Triggers (I31) system control value is selected. The PICK_OUT process in Working with Integration Layer Processes (IJCT) generates the Pick Message from Order Management System (CWPickOut) for each of these trigger records.

NA

Scheduling: See Process Drop Ship Orders to process drop ship picks or purchase orders using the periodic function DSHPROC.

Alphanumeric, required.
Cutover date

The date when you switched a vendor’s Drop ship output to OROB drop shipping, indicating when the system sends all new drop ship purchase orders for the vendor to Order Broker’s Drop Ship Manager module.

No cutover date is indicated if you did not switch the vendor’s Drop ship output setting to OROB drop shipping: for example, if you assigned the vendor to OROB drop shipping at initial creation.

Included on the Change and Display screen only.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display only.
D/S batch size (drop ship batch size)

The number of picks to include in a drop ship batch when you are Processing Drop Ship Orders by Batch (MDSB) for this vendor. The drop ship batch size determines the number of pick slips that print in one batch before the system creates a new batch.

Example:

Batch size = 2

# of picks to release = 5

In this situation, the system generates 3 batches:

Batch 1 contains 2 pick slips

Batch 2 contains 2 pick slips

Batch 3 contains 1 pick slip

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
PO ship via

A code that represents the shipper used for shipping merchandise to your company from this vendor.

Purchase order ship via codes are defined in and validated against the PO Ship Via table; see Working with Purchase Order Ship Via (WPSV).

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Terms

A code for the terms and conditions for payment to the vendor, such as 30 days after invoice date or at the end of the month.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Discount % (Primary discount percentage)

The primary discount percentage applied towards items purchased from this vendor.

This discount is applied to the dollar value of merchandise and is taken during Purchase Order Maintenance. Any other discounts from the Vendor Discount table are applied after the primary discount has been calculated. See Work with Vendor Discounts Screen.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2 place decimal; optional.
Surcharge %

A standing surcharge added to purchases from this vendor.

A surcharge is typically added to purchases from a broker. The percentage is based on the item price in Purchase Order Maintenance.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2 place decimal; optional.
Quality rating

The vendor's quality rating, as calculated by the quality assurance database. Not currently implemented.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2 place decimal; system-assigned.
A/P interface vendor

The vendor code on your third party Accounts Payable system. This code is used as a bridge between Order Management System and your own Accounts Payable system.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Parent vendor

A code for a company that is made up of one or more subsidiary vendors. If your unique interface program supports it, you can define a vendor as a parent vendor if you wish to pay the main (parent) vendor for the merchandise you received from each subsidiary (child) vendor.

  • If the vendor code defined in this field matches the code you are creating, this vendor represents a parent vendor.
  • If the vendor code defined in this field does not match the code you are creating, this vendor represents a child vendor.

NA

Example: Vendors 101, 102, and 103 all report to vendor 10123. Instead of paying vendors 101, 102, and 103 separately for the merchandise you received, you can pay vendor 10123 for all of the merchandise you received from each of the subsidiary vendors.

If the Require Entry of Parent Vendor system control value is selected, you must enter a valid vendor code in this field or an error message indicates:

Parent Vendor number is required.

Note:

Used only if your unique interface program supports it.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Currency code

A code to identify a currency type. This code is used by the Purchase Order system to identify a vendor's currency and to perform currency conversion processing if the vendor's currency is different from yours. Currency codes are defined in and validated against the Currency Code table (fast path = WCUR). Defaults from the Local Currency Code (A55) system control value, but you can override it.

The currency code you enter here defaults when you enter purchase orders, but you can override it.

Note:

The Supplier Direct Fulfillment integration does not support currency conversion.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Vendor price currency

Indicates whether the prices from this vendor are in the system's currency or the vendor's own currency and controls how and when currency conversion takes place.
Vendor Price Currency Chart

NA

NA

Note:

If this field is set to N or V, you must define vendor items in the Vendor Item table for the system to calculate the cost at the time of receiving.

If you override the currency rate during Purchase Order Receiving, the system uses the following calculation:

Price from Purchase Order/current currency conversion rate.

Note:

The Supplier Direct Fulfillment integration does not support currency conversion.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; required.
VAT number

A number used when calculating foreign currency.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
Type of vendor

Identifies whether the vendor is an actual vendor or a manufacturer. Valid values are:

  • Manufacturer
  • Vendor
User fields

Use these fields to enter additional vendor information.

The system defaults the Vendor user field 3 to the Item user field 3 field in Work with Item/SKUs (see Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM)) when you create or change an item and the program name INR1156 has been defined in the User function field for the CHGITEM and ADDITMSKU user exit points. .

Alphanumeric, three 10-position fields; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create the Vendor Extended record

Select Create Vendor Ext to advance to the Change Vendor Extended Screen.

Email Address for Drop Ship Vendor Window

Purpose: Use this window to enter an email address for a vendor when you use the interface with Order Broker’s Drop Ship Manager to process drop ship orders for the vendor.

Order Broker automatically sends email notification to vendors when you create and send drop ship purchase orders or when you request cancellation of an order line or change an order’s shipping address.

How to display this screen: Select OROB Drop Shipping in the Drop ship output field on the Second Create Vendor Screen If you have not entered an email address for the vendor in the Create Vendor Contact Screen, this pop-up window opens.

Field Description
Email address

The vendor contact's email address. See Email Address Validation for information on how the system verifies that your entry is formatted correctly.

Alphanumeric, 50 positions; optional.

First Change Vendor Screen

To change: Select Change for a vendor at the Work with Vendors Screen to advance to the first Change Vendor screen. At this screen you can change any information except the vendor code. Select OK to advance to the Second Change Vendor Screen.

See First Create Vendor Screen and Second Create Vendor Screen for field descriptions.

Second Change Vendor Screen

How to display this screen: Select OK at the First Change Vendor Screen.

See Second Create Vendor Screen for field descriptions.

Screen Option Procedure

Display vendor history

Select Display Vendor Hist to advance to the Display Vendor History Screen.

Display vendor extended information

Select Change Vendor Ext to advance to the Display Vendor Extended Screen.

Work with vendor contacts

Select Vendor Contacts to advance to the Work with Vendor Contacts Screen.

Display vendor notes

Select Notes/comments to advance to the Work with Vendor Notes Screen.

First Display Vendor Screen

To display: Select Display for a vendor at the Work with Vendors Screen to advance to the first Display Vendor screen. You cannot update any information on this screen. Select OK to advance to the Second Display Vendor Screen.

See First Create Vendor Screen for field descriptions.

Second Display Vendor Screen

How to display this screen: Select OK at the First Display Vendor Screen.

See Second Create Vendor Screen for field descriptions.

Screen Option Procedure

Display vendor history

Select Display Vendor Hist to advance to the Display Vendor History Screen.

Display vendor extended information

Select Display Vendor Ext to advance to the Display Vendor Extended Screen.

Work with vendor contacts

Select Vendor Contacts to advance to the Work with Vendor Contacts Screen.

Display vendor notes

Select Notes/comments to advance to the Work with Vendor Notes Screen.

Display Vendor History Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review performance statistics for this vendor. The OTHR_ASYNC job updates this information.

Note:

Purchase orders that you unlock through the Unlock Purchase Order (MUPO) option are not submitted (or resubmitted) to the OTHR_ASYNC job. As a result, there is no mechanism to Vendor History based on activity that occurred during the creation or maintenance session that resulted in the lock.

How to display this screen: Select History for a vendor at the Work with Vendors Screen or select Display Vendor Hist at the First Display Vendor Screen or the Second Display Vendor Screen.

Field Description
Vendor

A code for the supplier of a product or service you purchase.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Number POs

The number of purchase orders to date, since adding the vendor to the system. This information is also broken out into open POs (not received or partially received), held POs, and canceled POs. The fields are updated appropriately if you purge purchase orders.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Value POs

The value of the purchase orders to date. This information is also broken out into open POs (unreceived or partially received), held POs, and canceled POs. These fields are updated appropriately if you purge purchase orders.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Year

The current fiscal year.

Numeric, 2 positions (YY format); optional.
Period

The current period. A period is user-defined, but usually refers to an accounting month.

Accounting periods are defined in and validated against the Accounting Periods table.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
# POs

The number of purchase orders for the year and period. These fields are not updated when you purge purchase orders, and contain true historical (life-to-date) information.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Value POs

The value of the purchase orders for the year and period. These fields are not updated when you purge purchase orders and contain true historical (life-to-date) information.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Change Vendor Extended Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to:

  • review the dollar value of outstanding (unreceived or partially received) purchase orders for the vendor
  • review or define the discount calculation method used for discounts in the Vendor Discount table

How to display this screen: Select Change Vendor Ext at the First Change Vendor Screen or the Second Change Vendor Screen.

Field Description
Vendor

A code that identifies the supplier from whom you purchase goods or services.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Vendor description (Unlabeled field to the right of the Vendor field)

The name of the vendor.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
On order

The total dollar value of purchase orders which are outstanding (unreceived or partially received) for this vendor.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Priority

The Cash Disbursement priority, in a range from 9 (highest priority) to 0 (lowest priority).

Numeric, 1 position; optional.
Discount calculation method

A code that defines the calculation method used for the three discounts from the Vendor Discounts table.

Valid values are:

  • Combined = This discount method combines the total dollar amount of all 3 discounts to determine the net cost.
  • Tiered = This discount method calculates the largest discount against the purchase order's gross cost, then the second largest discount is calculated against the net result of the first discount, and the third largest discount is calculated against the net result of the second discount.
  • Blank = No discount is applied.
  • If you leave this field blank, you will not be able to apply any discounts when working with a purchase order, regardless of your entries in the discount fields.
  • These discounts do not apply to drop ship purchase orders.

See Combined Discount Calculation and Tiered Discount Calculation for examples of each discount calculation.

Required if using vendor discounts.

Display Vendor Extended Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review:

  • the dollar value of outstanding (unreceived or partially received) purchase orders for the vendor
  • the discount calculation method used for discounts in the Vendor Discount table
  • the dollar amount of cash that should be paid against outstanding invoices for the vendor and the weeks on which these payments should be disbursed

How to display this screen: Select Display Vendor Ext at the First Display Vendor Screen or the Second Display Vendor Screen.

For more information: See Change Vendor Extended Screen for a screen sample and field descriptions. You cannot change any information on this screen.

Work with Vendor Discounts Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create vendor discounts to apply against the gross cost of the purchase order in Purchase Order Maintenance (see Purchase Order Line Discount Screen),

Note:

These discounts do not apply to drop ship purchase orders.

How to display this screen: Select Discounts for a vendor on the Work with Vendors Screen.

The following message indicates that you have not defined a Discount calculation method in the Vendor Extended table:

Discount Calculation Method not defined for Vendor.

Field Description
Vendor #

A user-defined code to identify the supplier of an item. Vendor codes are defined in and validated against the Vendor table. See

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Vendor description (Unlabeled field to the right of the Vendor field)

The name of the vendor.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Discount (Discount fields)

The names of the three discount fields. These fields are controlled by the Discount 1 Field (D97), Discount 2 Field (D98), and Discount 3 Field (D99) values in the System Control table. The discount fields are blank if values have not been defined.

Note:

The system calculates the primary discount on a purchase order before calculating any discounts from the Vendor Discount table.

Alphanumeric, 11 positions; display-only.
Percent

The percentage the system applies against the unit cost of an item on the purchase order. If you enter a discount percentage, you cannot enter a unit discount for the same discount field. The system calculates discount percentages before subtracting any dollar discounts.

Note:

The system calculates percentage discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Combined Discount Calculation and Tiered Discount Calculation for examples of each.

Numeric, 11 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Unit discount

The dollar amount the system subtracts from the unit cost of an item on the purchase order. If you enter a unit discount amount, you cannot enter a discount percentage for the same discount field.

Note:

The system calculates percentage discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Combined Discount Calculation and Tiered Discount Calculation for examples of each.

Numeric, 11 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.

Instructions: Use the following steps to create a vendor discount:

  1. Complete the Percent or Unit discount field for each discount field label. If you leave both the Percent and Unit discount fields blank, no discount will apply for this label.
  2. Select OK. The system validates your entries and highlights any fields you need to correct. Correct any fields again.
  3. The discounts you have entered will apply to all purchase orders entered for this vendor. These discounts are calculated based on the method you have entered in the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table.

See Combined Discount Calculation and Tiered Discount Calculation.

Note:

The calculation of discounts in a foreign currency is not currently implemented.

Combined Discount Calculation

The combined discount calculation method combines the values of all 3 discounts to determine the net cost. Any discount percentages defined for the discounts are calculated before the unit discounts are applied.

The Combined Discount Calculation does not apply to drop ship purchase orders.

Example: An example of the combined discount calculation method is:

Cost of item = $100.00

Primary discount (defined in Vendor table) = 10%

Discount 1 = $10.00 (unit discount)

Discount 2 = 20% (percentage discount)

Discount 3 = 10% (percentage discount)

Step 1: Calculate the primary discount percentage

cost ($100.00) x primary discount (10%) = unit discount amount for primary discount ($10.00)

Step 2: Subtract the primary discount amount from the cost

cost ($100.00) - primary discount ($10.00) = cost after primary discount ($90.00)

Step 3: Calculate discount 2 percentage

cost ($90.00) x discount 2 (20%) = unit discount amount for discount 2 ($18.00)

Step 4: Calculate discount 3 percentage

cost (90.00) x discount 3 (10%) = unit discount amount for discount 3 ($9.00)

Step 5: Add discount amounts 1, 2 and 3 together

discount 2 ($18.00) + discount 3 ($9.00) + discount 1 ($10.00) = combined discount ($37.00)

Step 6: Subtract the total combined discount amount from the cost

cost ($90.00)- total combined discount (37.00) = net cost ($53.00)

Tiered Discount Calculation

The tiered discount calculation method calculates:

  • the largest discount against the item's cost, then
  • the second largest discount is calculated against the net result of the first discount, then
  • the third largest discount is calculated against the net result of the second discount

Any discount percentages defined for the discount fields are calculated before the unit discounts are applied.

Note:

The Tiered Discount Calculation does not apply to drop ship purchase orders.

Example: An example of the tiered discount calculation method is:

Cost of item = $100.00

Primary discount (defined in Vendor table) = 10%

Discount 1 = $10.00 (unit discount)

Discount 2 = 20% (percentage discount)

Discount 3 = 10% (percentage discount)

Step 1: Calculate the primary discount percentage

cost ($100.00) x primary discount (10%) = unit discount amount for primary discount ($10.00)

Step 2: Subtract the primary discount amount from the cost

cost ($100.00) - primary discount ($10.00) = cost after primary discount ($90.00)

Step 3: Calculate the largest discount percentage

cost ($90.00) x discount 2 (20%) = largest discount amount ($18.00)

Step 4: Subtract the largest discount amount from cost

gross cost ($90.00) - largest discount ($18.00) = net of first calculation ($72.00)

Step 5: Calculate the 2nd largest discount percentage

net of first calculation ($72.00) x discount 3 (10%) = second largest discount amount ($7.20)

Step 6: Subtract the 2nd largest discount amount from cost

net of first calculation ($72.00) - second largest discount amount ($7.20) = net of second calculation ($64.80)

Step 7: Subtract the 3rd largest discount amount from cost

net of second calculation ($64.80) - third largest discount amount ($10.00) = net of third calculation ($54.80)

Work with Vendor Contacts Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create, change, delete or display contacts for a specific vendor.

How to display this screen: Select Contacts for a vendor on the Work with Vendors Screen, or select WW vend cntct on the First Change Vendor Screen, First Display Vendor Screen, Second Change Vendor Screen, or Second Display Vendor Screen.

Field Description
Vendor

The vendor number and description associated with the vendor contacts.

Vendor number: numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Vendor description: alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Seq # (Sort sequence number)

The sort sequence number assigned to this vendor contact. This number determines how the vendor contacts display on the screen and on the Vendor Contact Listing (Print List to print). If you do not define a sort sequence number, the system assigns a sequence number of 0 to the vendor contact.

Note:

If you are using Order Broker Drop Ship Integration to automatically process drop ship orders for this vendor, you must enter the sequence number 999 to insure that email notifications are automatically sent to the vendor when you create drop ship purchase orders for this vendor. See Email Address for Drop Ship Vendor Window for more information.

NA

You can select Resequence to resequence each vendor contact that displays on the screen in increments of 2. For example

contact 1 = sequence # 0

contact 2 = sequence # 0

contact 3 = sequence # 5

contact 4 = sequence # 8

When you select Resequence, the system resequences the vendor contacts in the following order:

contact 1 = sequence # 1

contact 2 = sequence # 3

contact 3 = sequence # 5

contact 4 = sequence # 7

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Contact name

The name of the vendor contact.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Title

The contact's title within the organization.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Type

A user-defined field to identify the address type. Informational only.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a vendor contact

Select Create to advance to the Create Vendor Contact Screen.

Change a vendor contact

Select Change for a vendor contact to advance to the Change Vendor Contact screen. You can change any information on this screen except the vendor. See Create Vendor Contact Screen.

Delete a vendor contact

Select Delete for a vendor contact to delete it.

Display a vendor contact

Select Display for a vendor contact to advance to the Display Vendor Contact screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Vendor Contact Screen.

Resequence the sequence number for each vendor contact

Select Resequence. The system assigns sequence numbers to each vendor contact in increments of 2.

Create Vendor Contact Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a vendor contact.

How to display this screen: Select Create on the Work with Vendor Contacts Screen.

Field Description
Vendor

The vendor number and description associated with the vendor contact you are creating.

Vendor number: numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Vendor description: alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Contact name

The name of the vendor contact.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Contact title

The contact's title within the company.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Address

Address lines 1, 2 and 3 for the vendor contact. The vendor's address defaults.

Alphanumeric, 32 positions; address line 1 required, address lines 2 and 3 optional.
City/State/Postal/Country

The city, state, postal zip code and country associated with the vendor contact. The vendor's city, state, postal code and country defaults.

If the Require state field for the country in the vendor contact address is selected, the system requires a state code for the vendor address: State is required for this country.

Note:

The system does not validate the contact’s address in the same way it validates a customer’s address, as in order entry. For example, it does not validate that the state is associated with the SCF for the postal code.

City: alphanumeric, 25 positions; required.

State: alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.

Postal code: numeric, 10 positions; optional.

Country: alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Phone #/Ext (Telephone number and extension)

The vendor contact's telephone number and extension. You can define a telephone number format to map to the phone numbers operators enter into the system.

See Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY) for information on telephone number formats.

Phone #: alphanumeric, 14 positions; optional.

Extension: alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Fax #/Ext

The telephone number for the vendor's fax machine. Faxing purchase orders is not currently implemented.

Fax number: alphanumeric, 14 positions; optional.

Extension: alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Email address

The vendor contact's email address. See Email Address Validation for information on how the system verifies that your entry is formatted correctly.

Alphanumeric, 50 positions; optional.
Address type

A user-defined field to identify the address type. Informational only.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Sort sequence #

The sort sequence number assigned to this vendor contact. This number determines how the vendor contacts display on the screen and on the Vendor Contact Listing (Print List to print). If you do not define a sort sequence number, the system assigns a sequence number of 0 to the vendor contact.

Note:

If you are using Order Broker Drop Ship Integration to automatically process drop ship orders for this vendor, you must enter the sequence number 999 to insure that email notifications are automatically sent to the vendor when you create drop ship purchase orders for this vendor. See Email Address for Drop Ship Vendor Window for more information.

NA

You can select Resequence on the Work with Vendor Contacts Screen to resequence each vendor contact that displays on the screen in increments of 2. For example

contact 1 = sequence # 0

contact 2 = sequence # 0

contact 3 = sequence # 5

contact 4 = sequence # 8

When you select Resequence, the system resequences the vendor contacts in the following order:

contact 1 = sequence # 1

contact 2 = sequence # 3

contact 3 = sequence # 5

contact 4 = sequence # 7

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.

Work with Vendor FOB Address Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create, change, delete or display multiple FOB addresses for a specific vendor.

FOB (freight on board) address is the location where title to merchandise being shipped passes from the seller to the buyer. If the FOB address is an Origin type, ownership of the merchandise passes from seller to buyer at the origin of the shipping route, and the buyer is responsible for transportation costs and risk of loss or damage from that point. If the FOB address is a Destination type, ownership of the merchandise passes from seller to buyer at the receiving point for the merchandise, and the seller is responsible for transportation costs and risk of loss or damage until the merchandise reaches its destination.

How to display this screen: Select FOB for a vendor on the Work with Vendors Screen.

Field Description
Vendor

The vendor number and description associated with the vendor.

Vendor number: numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Vendor description: alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Type

This code identifies the address as an Origin (O) or Destination (D) type.

  • Origin = An Origin type FOB address specifies the location from which merchandise is being shipped, and indicates that ownership of merchandise being shipped transfers to the buyer when it leaves the vendor's warehouse (at the point of its shipping origin).
  • Destination = A Destination type FOB address specifies the location to which merchandise is being shipped, and indicates that ownership of the merchandise transfers to the buyer when it arrives at its destination.

Alphanumeric, display-only.
City

The city of the FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 25 positions; display-only.
State

The state of the FOB address. The system validates that the state you enter is assigned to the SCF in the first three positions of the postal code.

Alphanumeric, 2 postions; display-only.
Postal code

The zip code of the FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 10 postions; display-only.
Freight Terms

The freight terms for this vendor and this FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 10 postions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a vendor FOB address

Select Create to advance to the Create Vendor FOB Address Screen.

Change a vendor FOB address

Select Change for a Vendor FOB address to advance to the Change Vendor FOB Address screen. You can change any information on this screen except vendor number and vendor name. See Create Vendor FOB Address Screen for field descriptions.

Delete a vendor FOB address

Select Delete for a vendor FOB address to delete it.

Display a vendor FOB address

Select Display for a vendor FOB address to advance to the Display Vendor FOB Address screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Vendor FOB Address Screen for field descriptions.

Create Vendor FOB Address Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a vendor FOB address.

How to display this screen: Select Create on the Work with Vendor FOB Address Screen.

Field Description
Vendor

The vendor number and description of the vendor for whom you are creating an FOB address.

Vendor number: numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Vendor description: alphanumeric, 30 postions; display-only.
Postal code

The zip code of the Vendor FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 10 postions; required.
City

The city of the vendor FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 25 positions; required.
State

The state of the vendor FOB address.

If the Require state field for the country in the vendor FOB address is selected, the system requires a state code for the vendor address: State is required for this country.

Alphanumeric, 2 postions; required.
Country

The country of the vendor FOB address

Note:

If the system control value Use Zip/City/State Defaulting? (B13) is selected, the City, State and Country fields will automatically display the correct address information when you enter a zip code in the Postal Code field.

Alphanumeric, 3 postions; required.
Freight terms

A brief description of the freight terms for this vendor FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; required.
FOB type

Identifies the FOB type for this address. Valid types are Destination (D) and Origin (O).

  • Destination = the FOB address is the location to which merchandise is being shipped; this indicates that title to the merchandise passes from the seller to the buyer when the merchandise reaches its destination.
  • Origin = the FOB address is the location from which merchandise is being shipped; this indicates that title to the merchandise passes from the seller to the buyer as soon as the merchandise leaves the seller's dock (its shipping origin).

Alphanumeric, required.

Work with Vendor Notes Screen

Purpose: Messages that apply to the vendor from whom the merchandise was purchased can be added, changed or viewed during Purchase Order Receipts. The Vendor table is updated with any changes made to the vendor notes during Purchase Order Receipts.

Optionally, you can choose whether to print the vendor notes on the purchase order form and the receiver's worksheet.

Vendor notes can also be entered, changed, or viewed using Maintaining Purchase Orders (MPOE) and Receiving Purchase Orders (PORC).

How to display this screen: At the Work with Vendors Screen, select Notes for a vendor; or select Notes from the:

Field Description
Message

The message text for this vendor. Previously entered messages display when you access the screen. Additional lines are available to enter new messages. Scroll or Page Down to view additional messages or to access additional lines.

Alphanumeric, 60 positions each line; optional.
Print

Indicates whether this message text on the line will print on the purchase order. You can choose which lines you want to print.

The valid values are:

  • Unselected = Do not print the line information
  • Selected = Print the line text on the purchase order

Adding a new vendor note:

  1. Enter the information you want on the first available line in the message section.
  2. Use Tab to move to or click on the Print field. Enter a print code, if applicable.
  3. When you finish the note, select OK. The system accepts the entry and updates the Vendor table.

Changing a vendor note:

  1. Select Add/Change. The existing messages can now be changed.
  2. Enter the changes as needed. The system accepts the entry and updated the Vendor table.

Working With PO Additional Charges (WPAC)

Purpose: Use Purchase Order (PO) Additional Charges to change, delete, display or create additional charges for purchase orders. Type of additional charges that can be added to a purchase order detail line include freight, brokerage, commission, duty, import, surcharge, or "other" fees.

Vendor/item assignment: You can also define additional charges that apply automatically to the vendor/item price (See Working with Vendor Items (WVNI)).

In this topic:

Work with PO Additional Charges Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WPAC in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Purchase Order Additional Charges from a menu.

Field Description
Code

A code that represents a type of additional charge for a purchase order detail line.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the additional charge.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create additional charges

Select Create to advance to the Create PO Additional Charge Screen.

Change additional charges

Select Change for a code to advance to the Change PO Additional Charge screen. At this screen you can change any information except the code. See Create PO Additional Charge Screen for field descriptions.

Delete additional charges

Select Delete for a code to delete it.

Note:

When you delete additional charges, the system does not check to see whether you added this charge to an existing purchase order.

Display additional charges

Select Display for a code to advance to the Display PO Additional Charge Screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create PO Additional Charge Screen for field descriptions.

Create PO Additional Charge Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create an additional charge.

How to display this screen: Select Create on the Work with PO Additional Charges Screen.

Field Description
Code

A code that represents a type of additional charge for a purchase order detail line, such as for brokerage, commission, duty, freight, import, or surcharge.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Description

The description of the additional charge.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Type

Identifies the type of charge being added to the purchase order.

Valid system-supplied types:

B - Brokerage

C - Commission

D - Duty

F - Freight

I - Import

O - Other

P - Prep

R - Royalty

S - Surcharge

You can define estimated additional charges for a purchase order during PO maintenance. The actual charges are captured for a purchase order during PO Receipts. You can also assign additional charges to a vendor item.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; required.

Working with Unit of Measure Conversions (WUMC)

Purpose: Use this option to add or maintain unit of measure conversions between your selling Unit of measure and the vendor's unit of measure.

This table is used in Maintaining Purchase Orders (MPOE) and Purchase Order Receipts.

Conversion requirements: In order for costs to be calculated and printed correctly on the Purchase Order, you need to set up conversions:

  • from the vendor’s unit of measure to your unit of measure, and
  • from your unit of measure to the vendor’s unit of measure

Example:

You sell an item in single units (“eaches”), but buy them from the vendor in dozens. Set up:

  • Conversion from dozens to eaches:

    • factor for dozens = 1

    • factor for eaches = 12

  • Conversion from eaches to dozens:

    • factor for eaches = 12

    • factor for dozens = 12

Note:

You must define units of measure before creating Unit of Measure Conversions. See Working with Units of Measure (WUOM). In addition, your items should have units of measure in the Item table and in the Vendor/Item table; see Working with Vendor Items (WVNI).

In this topic:

Work with Unit of Measure Conversions Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WUMC in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Unit of Measure from a menu.

Field Description
From (Unit of measure)

A code that represents the starting Unit of measure for conversion.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Unit of measure

The description of the “from” unit of measure code.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
To (Unit of measure)

A code that represents the destination Unit of measure for conversion.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Unit of measure

The description of the “to” unit of measure code.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create unit of measure conversion

Select Create to advance to the Create Unit of Measure Conversion Screen.

Change unit of measure conversion

Select Change for a unit of measure conversion to advance to the Change Unit of Measure Conversion Screen. At the Change screen you can change any information except the from and to codes and the conversion rate. See Create Unit of Measure Conversion Screen for field descriptions.

Delete unit of measure conversion

Select Delete for a unit of measure conversion to delete it.

Display unit of measure conversion

Select Display for a unit of measure conversion to advance to the Display Unit of Measure Conversion Screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Unit of Measure Conversion Screen for field descriptions.

Create Unit of Measure Conversion Screen

To create: At the Work with Unit of Measure Conversions Screen, select Create to display the Create Unit of Measure Conversion screen.

Note:

You must define units of measure before creating Unit of Measure Conversions. See Working with Units of Measure (WUOM). In addition, your items should have units of measure in the Item table and in the Vendor/Item table; see Working with Vendor Items (WVNI).
Field Description
From unit of measure

The Unit of measure code to convert from (e.g., EA = each). Validated against the Unit of Measure table; see Working with Units of Measure (WUOM).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
From factor

The number by which you multiply the From unit of measure to calculate the total quantity of the To unit of measure.

(From factor) X (From unit of measure) = (To factor) X (To unit of measure).

In other words:

2 EACHES = 1 PAIR

12 EACHES = 1 DOZEN

1 PAIR = 2 EACHES

1 DOZEN = 12 EACHES

Numeric, 7 positions with a 2-place decimal; required.
To unit of measure

The Unit of measure to convert to (e.g., C24 = case of 24). Validated against the Unit of Measure table.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
To factor

The number of the To unit of measure that equals the total quantity of the From unit of measure. See From factor.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 2-place decimal; required.
Round

Specifies whether the system should round to the nearest value or truncate (cut off additional numbers from the end of the value).

Selected = The system round up or down to the nearest value. For example, if the conversion ends up with 1.6 units, the system rounds up to 2 units.

Unselected = The system truncates. For example, if the conversion ends up with 1.6 units, the system truncates to 1 unit.

Conversion rate

The conversion rate for the unit of measure. The system calculates the conversion rate automatically, using the factors. The conversion rate is calculated by taking the To factor divided by the From factor. Otherwise, select Enter Factor/Rate to enter an actual conversion rate, instead of supplying the factor information.

Example: If the From unit of measure was EA for each and the To unit of measure was C24 for case of 24, the From factor would be 24, the To factor would be 1, and the calculated conversion rate would be 1/24, or 0.0416667.

Numeric, 12 positions with 7-place decimal; required, or system-calculated.

Working with Vendor Items (WVNI)

Purpose: You can use the Work with Vendor Items screen to create, change, delete or display vendor item information. Vendor items are a reference between the vendor's item information and the item information used by your company. This bridge between your inventory and the vendor's equivalent inventory allows you to define default information for pricing, ordering and shipping. This information defaults onto the purchase order for this item and vendor, unless you enter other information to override the default.

Additionally, this function allows you to:

  • work with special quantity break or promotional pricing offers for a vendor item
  • review cumulative history for this vendor item
  • use the Vendor Item Notes function to review, delete or maintain notes about this item; you have the option of printing these notes on the purchase order and on reports
  • update multiple SKUs of a vendor item with information such as vendor price and ship weight
  • update an item's standard cost

In this topic:

Work with Vendor Item Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to change, delete, display or create the reference between the vendor's item information and the item information used by your company.

How to display this screen: Enter WVNI in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Vendor Item from a menu.

Field Description
Vendor #

A code that identifies the supplier of an item.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Item

The vendor's item code.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the vendor's item.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a vendor item

Select Create to advance to the Create Vendor Item Screen.

Change vendor item information

Select Change for a vendor item to advance to the Change Vendor Item Screen. At this screen you can change any information except the vendor item code. See Create Vendor Item Screen for field descriptions.

Delete vendor item information

Select Delete for a vendor item to delete it.

Note:

If there are dependent records associated with this vendor item, the system checks for the existence of:
  • vendor/item additional charges
  • vendor/item notes
  • vendor/item price breaks
  • vendor/item history

There are no restrictions when deleting vendor item records; however, the dependent records listed above will also be deleted.

Display vendor item information

Select Display for a vendor item to advance to the Display Vendor Item Screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Vendor Item Screen for field descriptions.

Note:

From this screen, you can update the item's standard cost or advance to the following screens:

Add or change vendor item price breaks

Select Price Break for an item to advance to the Work with Vendor Item Price Break Screen.

Display vendor item history

Select History for a vendor item to advance to the Display Vendor Item History Screen.

Add or change vendor item additional charges

Select Charges for a vendor item to advance to the Work with Vendor Item Add’l Charges Screen.

Update the item's standard cost

Select Update Standard Cost for a vendor item. See Updating Standard Cost.

Add or change vendor item notes

Select Notes for a vendor item to advance to the Work with Vendor Item Notes Screen.

Work with user defined fields

Select User Field for a vendor item to advance to the Work with User Fields Screen.

Update multiple SKUs

Select Update multiple SKUs to advance to the Multiple Vendor Item Update Screen.

Create Vendor Item Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a vendor item.

How to display this screen:

Field Description
Vendor

A user-defined code that defines the supplier of an item. Validated against the Vendor table. See Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Numeric, 7 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Vendor item

The number or code the vendor uses to identify the item. This information prints on purchase orders.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; required.
Description

The description of the item, as defined by the vendor. This information prints on purchase orders.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Item/Colr Size Othr

The item and SKU you use to identify the item. Items and SKUs are validated against the Item/SKU tables. If you advance to the Create Vendor Item screen through Work with Item/SKUs, the item/SKU you are creating displays.

Item: alphanumeric, 12 position; required.

SKU: alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; optional.
Price

Represents the vendor's list price for this item. When you enter a purchase order, this price defaults unless there is a price override or special pricing set up for the vendor item. See the Work with Vendor Item Price Break Screen for more information.

Note:

The Display Cost in Inventory (A38) secured feature controls whether the Change Vendor Item and Display Vendor Item screens display the price.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Minimum qty (Minimum quantity)

The minimum unit quantity (in retailer’s unit of measure) of merchandise you are required to order from the vendor. You cannot create a purchase order for fewer than this amount. A message similar to the following in purchase order maintenance indicates that you entered a quantity lower than the minimum:

Minimum order quantity is 6.

Note:

The minimum quantity is not enforced when creating sales orders for drop ship items.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Lead days

The number of days it takes a vendor to deliver this item when it is ordered through a purchase order. The system adds this value to the current date to determine the due date on a drop ship purchase order detail line and to calculate the expected ship date for drop ship items (see Assign Drop Ship Expected Ship Date (I59) for more information).

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Order multiple

The number of units (in retailer’s unit of measure) by which your order quantity must be divisible when you order this item from this vendor. For example, your vendor might have an item that he sells only by whole cartons of twelve. In this situation, the system displays a message such as the following if the quantity you enter on a purchase order is not divisible by 12:

Vendor requires that Item is ordered in multiples of 12

Note:

If your vendor’s unit of measure differs from your unit of measure, you do not need to enter a multiple number in the Order multiple field as long as you have set up correct conversion ratios through the Working with Unit of Measure Conversions (WUMC) menu option. For example, if your vendor’s unit of measure is pairs, and your unit of measure is single items, the system will automatically calculate the conversion and display a message such as the following if the quantity you enter on a purchase order does not convert to the vendor’s unit of measure:

Order quantity 5 must be able to divide evenly by vendor UOM 2.

Note:

The order multiple is not enforced for the creation of sales orders for drop ship items. Unit of measure conversion is not supported by the Order Broker Supplier Direct Fulfillment integration.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Cubic volume

The cubic volume of the item, as defined by the vendor, used for informational purposes only. The cubic volume can refer to any dimensions. The system calculates the cube of each line when you enter a purchase order and arrives at a total cube for the order.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Ship weight

The shipping weight of the item, as defined by the vendor. Prints with the item on the purchase order and is used for informational purposes only. No calculations are performed for this value. Not included on a drop ship purchase order sent to Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 3-place decimal; optional.
Ship via

A code that represents the carrier used when shipping this item to your company. If you enter a PO ship via code here, this code defaults on the vendor item purchase order line automatically. Validated against the PO Ship Via table; see Working with Purchase Order Ship Via (WPSV) for more information.

See Drop Ship Purchase Order Setup for Purchase Order Ship Vias for considerations related to specifying a vendor item ship via for items that you will include on drop ship purchase orders.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Unit of measure

The vendor's Unit of measure for an item (e.g., C12 = case of 12, GRS = gross). The system validates this unit of measure against the Unit of Measure table.

In PO Maintenance and Receiving, the system will convert your unit of measure into the vendor's unit of measure using the information provided in the Unit of Measure table.

Example: If you sell an item in eaches, but the vendor sells the item to you in cases of 12 and you place an order for 36 units, the system will convert the vendor's quantity to 3 units. You enter the retailer’s quantity on the PO; however, both quantities can be seen in PO Inquiry, Maintenance, and Receiving.

A message similar to the following indicates that you entered an order amount that is not divisible by the unit of measure:

Order qty 7 must be able to divide evenly by vendor UOM 12.

Note:

For a drop ship item, the vendor item unit of measure must match the item’s unit of measure if you use the Order Broker Drop Ship Integration to process drop ship orders for this vendor.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Message

An informational message that you can use for reporting purposes. Up to 3 lines of messages are available for free-form text, such as special packing instructions. Not included on a drop ship purchase order sent to Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions (each line); optional.

Completing this screen:

  • If you are creating a vendor item in Working with Vendor Items (WVNI), the system clears the data from the screen.
  • If you are creating a vendor item for a non-SKUed item in Work with Item/SKUs, you advance to the Create Item Offer screen, where you can enter offer information for the item you are creating.
  • If you are creating a vendor item for a SKUed item in Work with Item/SKUs, you advance to the Create SKU (With Overrides) screen, where you can create another SKU for the item you are creating.

For more information: See Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM).

Work with Vendor Item Price Break Screen

Purpose: You can use this screen to display, add or change price break information. Price breaks might be a special price promotion or a series of quantity break prices for this item and this vendor.

Note:

The Display Cost in Inventory (A38) secured feature controls the display of this screen.

Quantity Break Pricing Tables

Quantity break pricing tables allow you to define:

  • a start and end date,
  • the purchase quantity of the item required, and
  • the special price at which the item may be purchased when the quantity requirements are met.

A quantity break pricing table is defined in tiers. For example:

Tier Purchase Quantity Required Special Price

1

1 - 9

$10.00

2

10 - 20

$9.50

3

21 - 30

$9.00

You receive the quantity price break for the next tier only if you order an amount greater than or equal to the quantity required.

How to display this screen: Select Price Break for a vendor item at the Work with Vendor Item Screen.

Field Description
Start Date

The date when the special price promotion or quantity break price begins.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Stop Date

The date when the special price promotion or quantity break price ends.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Quantity

The quantity, in your own unit of measure, not the vendor’s, that you must purchase to receive the special promotional price or quantity break price on this item from the vendor.

Example:

Qty=1 Price=$10.00

Qty=10 Price=$9.50

If you purchase between 1-9, the price is $10.00.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Price

The vendor's special price, per vendor’s unit of measure, for this item if you order the quantity required (in retailer’s unit of measure).

Example: If the vendor sells the item in pairs, but you sell the item as single units (eaches):

Vendor’s base price is $12.00/pair

Quantity: you enter a quantity on this screen of 12.

Price: you enter a price for the quantity 12 of $10.00

When you enter a purchase order, you order 12 of the item.

Result: The system converts the quantity 12 (single units) to vendor’s quantity of 6 (pairs), but prices the item at $10.00/pair, or total of $60.00, because you ordered, in retailer’s unit of measure, enough units to qualify for the discount price.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.

Using this screen: To add or change a price break, select Add/Change. The screen changes to CHANGE mode, which means the fields are enterable, so you can enter or change information.

  • If the screen is in ADD mode, any prices that are already displayed are locked and the cursor is positioned at the next available line.
  • If the screen is in CHANGE mode, the cursor is positioned at the top of the screen and all fields are available for entry.

Display Vendor Item History Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review performance statistics for this item, as supplied by this vendor. All information on this screen is updated by the system, either through Maintaining Purchase Orders (MPOE) or Purchase Order Receipts. This information represents an aggregate history of this item across all purchase orders for this vendor.

How to display this screen: Select History for a vendor item at the Work with Vendor Item Screen.

Field Description
Vendor

A numeric code that defines the supplier of an item. See Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only
Vendor item

The number or code the vendor uses to identify the item.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only.
Last purchase price

The price at which this item was last purchased from this vendor, expressed per retailer’s unit of measure. For example, if the vendor sells the item in pairs, priced at $12.00/ pair, but you sell the item as single units (eaches), the price displayed here would be $6.00. See Working with Unit of Measure Conversions (WUMC).

Note:

The Display Cost in Inventory (A38) secured feature controls the display of the Last purchase price field.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Orders

The number of purchase orders placed with the vendor for this item. This number includes every PO that has been placed, including cancelled POs.

The system updates this field only once, regardless of the number of times the item is entered on a PO.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Shipments

The total number of shipments of this item. Updated by PO Receiving and the number increases each time the item is received. For example, if 100 items were ordered, and 25 were received one day and 75 were received the next day, the number of shipments is 2.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Overships

The number of times the vendor has shipped more of this item than was requested on purchase orders. Updated by PO Receiving and is determined when the PO is closed.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Underships

The number of times the vendor has shipped fewer of this item than was requested on purchase orders. Updated by PO Receiving and is determined based on the PO line being closed and order entry does not match.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Late shipments

The number of times the vendor has shipped this item late. If the receiving date is greater than the original PO due date, the system considers this a late shipment. Updated by PO Receiving.

Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Defects

The number of items that have been identified as defective at PO Receiving.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Units received

The quantity of this item received by this vendor life-to-date, in retailer’s unit of measure. Updated by PO Receiving.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Units purchased

The quantity of this item purchased from this vendor, in retailer’s unit of measure. This number includes cancellations (i.e., cancellation does not decrease this number).

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Value purchases

The merchandise dollar value of purchases of this item from this vendor. Updated by PO Maintenance and includes cancellations.

Note:

The Display Cost in Inventory (A38) secured feature controls the display of the Value purchases field.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Elapsed days

An accumulation of the number of days it takes the vendor to ship this item to you. The system calculates as follows: each time the item is received, the system subtracts the PO date from the Receipt date and adds it to the field. The average elapsed days can be calculated by dividing elapsed days by the number of shipments.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Late days

The accumulated number of days this item is received late from the vendor. The system calculates by subtracting the PO Receipt date from the original due date.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Work with Vendor Item Add’l Charges Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to display, add or change additional charge information.

If the Default Vendor Item Additional Charges (I21) system control value is selected, the system defaults the vendor item additional charges to the purchase order. You can review the defaulted vendor item additional charges on the purchase order at the Work with PO Detail Estimated Charges Screen.

Receipt cost calculation: The system calculates all vendor item additional charges into the costing calculations for a purchase order if the Default Vendor Item Additional Charges (I21) system control value is selected and the Include PO Estimated Charges in Receipt Cost Calculation (G29) system control value is selected.

See Distributing Overhead Costs for more information on the calculations the system performs when distributing overhead costs across purchase orders.

How to display this screen: On the Work with Vendor Item Screen, select Charges for a vendor item.

Field Description
Charge

A user-defined code that identifies a purchase order detail line for brokerage, commission, duty, freight, import, surcharge, or other user-defined fees. Additional charges are validated against the PO Additional Charge table; see Working With PO Additional Charges (WPAC).

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; required.
Description

A description of the additional charge.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Unit amount

The dollar amount to add to the purchase order for each unit (in retailer’s unit of measure) of the vendor item.

Numeric, 12 positions; required if you do not specify a percent.
Percent

The percent of the total merchandise amount to add to the purchase order for total orders of the vendor item.

Numeric, 6 positions; required if you do not specify a unit amount.

Screen Option Procedure

Add or change an additional charge

Select Add/Change to toggle between add and change mode. Change mode is available only if you have already created additional charges for the vendor item. When in change mode, the existing additional charge code and unit amount or percent becomes enterable.

Multiple Vendor Item Update Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to update selected fields for all the SKUs of a specific vendor item. You can also choose to update only those SKUs that share the first SKU element.

How to display this screen: Select Update Multiple SKUs on the Work with Vendor Item Screen.

Field Description
Vendor

A numeric code that defines the supplier of an item.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Item/SKU

Your item number or code (not the vendor item code).

To update all vendor item SKUs: enter the base item code only. To update all SKUs with the same first SKU element: enter the first SKU only to update only matching SKUs for the vendor item; for example, enter BLUE to update all blue SKUs of the vendor item

Item: Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.

SKU: Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; optional.
Price

The vendor's list price for this item. This price defaults on the purchase order

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Minimum qty (Minimum quantity)

The minimum unit quantity of the vendor item that you can order.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Lead days

The number of days it takes a vendor to deliver this item to you.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Order multiple

The number by which the purchase order quantity must be divisible.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Cubic volume

The cubic volume of the item, as defined by the vendor, used for informational purposes only.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Ship weight

The shipping weight of the item, as defined by the vendor.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 3-place decimal; optional.
Ship via

A code that represents the carrier used when shipping this item to your company.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Unit of measure

The vendor's unit of measure for an item (e.g., C12 - case of 12, GRS - gross). The system validates this unit of measure against the Unit of Measure table.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Message

An informational message that can be used for reporting purposes. Up to 3 lines of messages are available for free-form text, such as special packing instructions.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions (each line); optional.

Instructions: To update the SKUs for a specific vendor item:

  1. Complete the vendor number, the item code, and (optionally) the SKU.
  2. Complete any of the remaining fields to indicate which information you want to update. Only the fields you enter will be updated for the target vendor item SKUs; any fields you leave blank on the Multiple Vendor Item Update field will remain unchanged.
  3. The Confirm Multi Vendor Item Update pop-up window opens.
  4. Select OK to update the SKUs for the vendor item or select Exit to cancel. You can also select Review Select SKUs to review the SKUs that are being updated. See Multiple SKU Updates Screen (Reviewing SKUs for Update).
  5. If you select OK, the following message informs you the SKU updates have completed: Vendor Item updates have been completed.
Screen Option Procedure

Review the SKUs being updated

Select Review Select SKUs to advance to the Multiple SKU Updates Screen (Reviewing SKUs for Update).

Multiple SKU Updates Screen (Reviewing SKUs for Update)

Purpose: Use this screen to review the SKUs for the vendor item you wish to update.

How to display this screen: Select Review Select SKUs on the Multiple Vendor Item Update Screen.

Field Description
Vendor

The code and name of the vendor who supplies the item you wish to update.

Vendor code: numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Vendor name: alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

Item

The item number and description of the item you wish to update.

Item number: alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

Description: alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Colr, size othr

The SKU you use to identify the item you wish to update. SKUs are validated against the Item/SKU table.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Vendor item

The vendor item number of the item you wish to update.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only.

Updating Standard Cost

Purpose: You can update an item's or SKU's standard cost through the Work with Vendor Item Screen, Change Vendor Item screen, or Display Vendor Item screen. There is also a periodic function available to update standard cost.

How to update: You can update the standard cost for a selected item by:

  • selecting Update Standard Cost for a vendor item at the Work with Vendor Item Screen
  • selecting Update Standard Cost at the Change Vendor Item screen or Display Vendor Item screen

Note:

Access to updating standard cost is controlled by the Display Cost in Inventory (A38) secured feature. If you do not have authority under that secured feature, the system displays an error message when you select Update Standard Cost at the Work with Vendor Item Screen: Not authorized to change Standard Cost.

If the vendor is not the item's primary vendor: The vendor item you select must be associated with the item's primary vendor (the primary vendor is the vendor you enter at the first Create or Change Item screen in Work with Items; see Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM)). If you attempt to update item cost but the vendor item is not associated with the item's primary vendor, a message such as the following indicates:

Can't update standard cost. Vendor# 12 is not item's primary vendor

Pop-up window: The Confirm Update of Item’s Standard Cost window opens when you choose to update the standard cost for an eligible vendor item.

Processing the update: After you select OK at the confirmation window, a message such as the following indicates:

SKU standard cost has been updated (WA123 10.6000)

The message includes your item code for the item you have just updated, and the new standard cost.

Working with Vendor Upload (LVUP)

Purpose: You use information in the Vendor Upload table to create, update, or delete a vendor record in Order Management System.

When you transfer vendor information into Order Management System, the system validates each record in the table:

  • if a vendor upload record contains any errors, Order Management System prints the record on the Vendor Upload Error Report and places the record in an error status. You need to correct the error and resend the record through the vendor upload batch program.
  • if a vendor upload record does not contain errors, Order Management System creates or updates the vendor record. See Working with Vendors (WVEN) for more information on vendors in Order Management System.

Vendor upload process:

This image is a flowchart showing the vendor upload process.

Note:

You can also schedule this process to run periodically by setting up the VNUPLD function using the PRF0086 program. See Scheduling Jobs for background.

In this topic:

Create Vendor Upload File

You can create a Vendor Upload file by:

  • creating your own pipe delimited file, using a text editor or spreadsheet application, or
  • copying the sample file upload data, pasting the data into a text editor, and saving it with the file extension .txt.
  • If you wish to leave any field in the upload file blank, pass a space in an alphanumeric field and a 0 in a numeric field so that the file can be processed without errors. Leaving a field with no space or 0 is interpreted as null in the database and causes errors.

The file name should be VNDUPL.TXT.

Sample vendor upload data:

007|7|A|EXAMPLE VENDOR |1234 SAMPLE STREET |SECOND ADDRESS LINE |THIRD ADDRESS LINE |FOURTH ADDRESS LINE |WESTBOROUGH |MA|01581 |US |JOHN SMITH |5085550100| |0|ROBERT JONES |1234 REMIT SAMPLE ST |SECOND ADDRESS LINE |THIRD ADDRESS LINE |FOURTH ADDRESS LINE |SPRINGFIELD |MA|01119 |US |Y|N|Y|P|0|0|N|N|N|N|N |0|.00|.00|.00| |0| |S| |V| |VENDOR@EXAMPLE.COM |REMIT@EXAMPLE.COM |USR1 |USR2 |USR3 | |Y

Transfer the Vendor Upload File to Order Management System

Use the File Storage API if it is enabled and run the UPVENDR Upload Vendor File (Program name PFR0134, Parameter VNDUPL) periodic function, or

Place the file in the CWDIRECTCP_UPLOAD_ DIRECTORY, and run the UPVENDR Upload Vendor File (Program name PFR0134, Parameter VNDUPL) periodic function, or

Use the Work with File Uploads (WUPL) menu option to select and process the Vendor Upload file. The system inserts the records in the Vendor Upload file into the Order Management System Vendor Upload table. See File Upload Process for processing information.

Submit Vendor Upload Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to submit a batch program to transfer the records in the Vendor Upload table to the Order Management System Vendor table.

How to display this screen: Enter LVUP in the Fast path field at the top of a menu or select Load Vendor Upload from a menu.

Screen Option Procedure

Submit a batch program to upload the vendor upload records to the Vendor table

Select Submit. See Vendor Upload Process.

Periodic function: You can also schedule this process to run periodically by setting up the VNUPLD function using the PRF0086 program. See Scheduling Jobs for background.

Vendor Upload Process

To process: Select Submit at the Submit Vendor Upload Screen to submit the vendor upload batch program.

If you try to submit the vendor upload batch program while a vendor upload is in progress, a message indicates: VENDOR UPLOAD in progress.

The Vendor Upload batch program:

  • determines if an active procedure indicates that a vendor upload batch program is already running for the company.

    • If an active procedure exists, an error message indicates: Vendor Upload in progress. You cannot submit another vendor upload batch job until the job currently running is complete.

    • If no active procedure exists, the system creates an active procedure for this vendor upload batch job.

  • validates each vendor upload record in the Vendor Upload Table (VNDUPL)

    • if the vendor upload record contains an error, the system updates the Vendor upload error field with the error message and does not transfer the record to the Vendor table. You can review vendor upload records in error on the Vendor Upload Error Report

    • if the vendor upload record is a D (delete) record type, the system updates the Vendor upload error field with the error message Delete and does not delete the Vendor record. You must manually delete the vendor.

    • if the vendor upload record is an A (add) record type and passes validation, the system creates a record in the Vendor table and Vendor Extended table and deletes the corresponding vendor upload record from the Vendor Upload table.

    • if the vendor upload record is an M (modify) record type and passes validation, the system updates the existing record in the Vendor table and Vendor Extended table and deletes the corresponding vendor upload record from the Vendor Upload table. Note: The system updates the existing vendor record with the information in the vendor upload record, including blanks. For example, if the vendor record has a value in the remit to name and address fields but the vendor upload record does not have these fields populated, the system updates the remit to name and address fields for the vendor to blank.

    .
  • produces the Vendor Upload Error Report, which lists each vendor upload record that contains an error. Note: Each vendor upload record in an error status is associated with only one error (the first error the system finds for the record). Once you correct the error and resubmit the vendor upload batch program, the system validates the record for additional errors.

    • deletes the active procedure for the vendor upload batch program.

Vendor upload validation: The vendor upload batch program validates that:

Vendor Upload Errors

If a vendor upload record is in error, the vendor upload batch program assigns an error status and prints the record on the Vendor Upload Error Report.

A field that is required is blank:

Note:

Faxing is not currently implemented.

A field contains an invalid value:

  • Company field contains a company code that does not exist: Invalid Company
  • Record type field contains an invalid value: Record Type Invalid
  • Vendor state field contains an invalid value: State Does Not Exist
  • Vendor country field contains an invalid value: Country Does Not Exist
  • Remit to country field contains an invalid value: Remit To Country Does Not Exist
  • Remit state field contains an invalid value: Remit To State Does Not Exist
  • Print PO? field contains an invalid value: Print PO Invalid
  • Fax? field contains an invalid value: Fax PO Invalid
  • Print checks? field contains an invalid value: Print Checks Invalid
  • Drop ship pick field contains an invalid value: Drop Ship Output Invalid
  • Drop ship pick field contains a C or L, but the Use OROB Drop Shipping (H13) system control value is not selected: OROB vendor is not allowed
  • Ship via code field contains an invalid value: PO Ship Via Does Not Exist
  • Factor? field contains an invalid value: Vendor Factor Invalid
  • EDI? field contains an invalid value: EDI P/O Invalid
  • Terms code field contains an invalid value: Invalid Terms Code
  • Type field contains an invalid value: Type of Vendor Invalid
  • Currency code field contains an invalid value: Currency Code Invalid
  • Price currency type field contains an invalid value: Vendor Price Currency Invalid
  • Parent vendor number contains an invalid value: Parent Vendor does not exist
  • Vendor e-mail address is not formatted correctly (does not include an @ sign prior to a period, with characters between): Vendor e-mail address Invalid
  • Remit e-mail address is not formatted correctly (does not include an @ sign prior to a period, with characters between): Remit e-mail address Invalid
  • Email PO is not set to Y, N, or blank: Invalid Email PO Flag

The Vendor # for an A (add) record type vendor upload record contains a vendor number that already exists in Work with Vendors: Vendor Already Exists

A vendor upload record for a D (delete) record type exists: Delete. This error message does not indicate an error; rather, you use this message as a reminder to manually delete the corresponding vendor record from the Vendor table.

The Drop ship pick field is set to Collaborative Shipping and the Use OROB Drop Shipping (H13) system control value is unselected: Collaborative Shipping vendor is not allowed

The Vendor # for an M (modify) or D (delete) record type vendor upload record does not exist in the Vendor table: Vendor Does Not Exist

Vendor Upload Table (VNDUPL)

Field Description
Company

The code for the Order Management System company where you wish to upload the vendor upload record.

Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Vendor #

A code that identifies a supplier.

Numeric, 7 positions; required.
Record type

A code that identifies whether the vendor upload record is an add, change, or delete.

Valid values:

A = Add. The vendor upload record creates a new vendor record.

M = Modify. The vendor upload record updates an existing record.

D = Delete. The vendor upload record deletes an existing record.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; required.
Vendor name

The name of the vendor or the vendor’s company.

Updates the Name field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Vendor address line 1

Address line 1 defined for the vendor’s address.

Updates the Address line 1 field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 32 positions; required.
Vendor address line 2

Address line 2 defined for the vendor’s address.

Updates the Address line 2 field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 32 positions; optional.
Vendor address line 3

Address line 3 defined for the vendor’s address.

Updates the Address line 3 field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 32 positions; optional.
Vendor address line 4

Address line 4 defined for the vendor’s address.

Updates the Address line 4 field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 32 positions; optional.
Vendor city

The city defined for the vendor’s address.

Updates the City field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 25 positions; required.
Vendor state

The state defined for the vendor’s address.

Updates the State field in the Vendor table.

Validation

State codes are defined in and validated against the State table. The system requires a state code if the Require state field for the country in the vendor address is selected.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; required.
Vendor zip

The postal code defined for the vendor’s address.

Updates the Zip field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; required.
Vendor country

The country defined for the vendor’s address. Updates the Country field in the Vendor table.

Validation

Country codes are defined in and validated against the Country table.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Vendor contact name

The name of your primary contact at the vendor site.

Updates the Contact name field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Vendor telephone

The vendor’s telephone number.

Updates the Telephone # field in the Vendor table.

Numeric, 11 positions; optional.
Vendor ext

The vendor’s telephone number extension.

Updates the Extension field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Vendor fax #

The telephone number for the vendor’s fax machine. Faxing is not currently implemented.

Updates the Fax number field in the Vendor table.

Numeric, 11 positions; optional.
Remit name

The name of the person or company you send payment to for vendor invoices. The remit-to address prints on checks for the vendor.

Updates the Remit name field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Remit address line 1

Address line 1 defined for the remit-to address.

Updates the Remit address 1 field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 32 positions; optional.
Remit address line 2

Address line 2 defined for the remit-to address.

Updates the Remit address 2 field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 32 positions; optional.
Remit address line 3

Address line 3 defined for the remit-to address.

Updates the Remit address 3 field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 32 positions; optional.
Remit address line 4

Address line 4 defined for the remit-to address.

Updates the Remit address 4 field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 32 positions; optional.
Remit city

The city defined for the remit-to address.

Updates the Remit city field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 25 positions; optional.
Remit state

The state defined for the remit-to address.

Updates the Remit state field in the Vendor table.

Validation

State codes are defined in and validated against the State table. The system requires a state code if the Require state field for the country in the vendor address is selected.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Remit zip

The postal code defined for the remit-to address.

Updates the Remit zip field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Remit to country

The country defined for the remit-to address.

Updates the Country field in the Vendor table.

Validation

Country codes are defined in and validated against the Country table.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Print PO?

Indicates whether purchase order forms print for the vendor. If so, you order products on the purchase order, print it, then mail it to the vendor.

Updates the Print PO field in the Vendor table.

Valid values:

Y = Print purchase orders for the vendor.

N = Do not print purchase orders for the vendor.

Fax?

Indicates whether purchase orders should be faxed to the vendor. This option is not currently implemented.

Updates the Fax flag field in the Vendor table.

Validation

If you select this field, you must enter a number in the Vendor fax # field.

Print checks?

Indicates whether to print checks to the vendor to pay for products or services purchased.

Updates the Fax flag field in the Vendor table and the Print checks field in the Vendor table.

Valid values:

Y = Print checks for the vendor.

N = Do not print checks for the vendor.

Drop ship pick

Indicates whether to process drop ship orders by printing picks, printing purchase orders, or transmitting information through an interface for internet-based drop ship processing. Drop ship merchandise is merchandise you sell but do not stock.

Updates the Fax flag field in the Vendor table the Print checks field in the Vendor table.the Drop ship pick field in the Vendor table.

Valid values:

P = Print drop ship picks for the vendor.

O = Print drop ship purchase orders for the vendor.

L = Use the Order Broker Supplier Direct Fulfillment interface for the vendor. L is a valid entry only if the Use OROB Drop Shipping (H13) system control value is selected.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; required.
Drop ship batch size

The number of picks to include in a drop ship batch when you are Processing Drop Ship Orders by Batch (MDSB) for the vendor. The drop ship batch size determines the number of picks that print in one batch before the system creates a new batch.

Updates the Drop ship batch size field in the Vendor table.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Ship via code

A code that represents the shipper used for shipping merchandise to your company from the vendor.

Updates the Ship via code field in the Vendor table.

Validation

Purchase order ship via codes are defined in and validated against the PO Ship Via table; see Working with Purchase Order Ship Via (WPSV).

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Factor?

Indicates whether you are sending payment to a factor.

Updates the Factor field in the Vendor table.

Valid values:

Y = Payment on invoices goes to a factor.

N = Payment on invoices goes directly to the vendor.

If you select this flag, enter the factor’s address in the Remit to fields.

EDI?

Indicates whether you transmit purchase order information electronically to the vendor using EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) telecommunications.

Valid values:

Y = Transmit an EDI file with purchase orders to the vendor.

N = Do not use EDI.

If you select this flag, the Wait for ASN? field and Include hold? field default to unselected.

Updates the EDI file field in the Vendor table.

Wait for ASN?

Indicates you would like to wait for Advanced Shipment Notice from the EDI service provider. Not currently implemented.

Include hold?

Indicates you would like to include held invoices in the EDI transmission. Not currently implemented.

EDI file

The EDI file used for EDI transmission. Not currently implemented.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Terms code

A code for the terms and conditions for payment to the vendor, such as 30 days after invoice date or at the end of the month.

Validation

Term codes are defined in and validated against the Terms table.

Updates the Code field in the Terms table.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Disc% (Primary discount percentage)

The primary discount percentage applied towards items purchased from the vendor.

Updates the Discount % field in the Vendor table.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Surcharge%

A standing surcharge added to purchases from the vendor.

Updates the Surcharge % field in the Vendor table.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Rating

The vendor’s quality rating.

Updates the Rating field in the Vendor table.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Interface vendor code

The vendor code on your third party A/P system.

Updates the Interface vendor code field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Parent vendor number

A code for the company that is made up of one or more subsidiary vendors. If your unique interface program supports it, you can define a vendor as a parent vendor if you wish to pay the main (parent) vendor for the merchandise you receive from each subsidiary (child) vendor.

  1. If the vendor code defined in this field matches the code from the Vendor # field, the vendor represents a parent vendor.
  2. If the vendor code defined in this field does not match the code from the Vendor # field, the vendor represents a child vendor.

Updates the Parent vendor number field in the Vendor Extended table.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Currency code

A code to identify the vendor’s currency type.

If you leave this field blank, the Local Currency Code (A55) system control value defaults.

Validation

Currency codes are defined in and validated against the Currency Code table; see Working with Currency (WCUR).

Updates the Currency code field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Price currency type

Indicates whether the prices from the vendor are in the system’s currency or the vendor’s currency and controls how and when currency conversion takes place.

Updates the Price currency type field in the Vendor table.

Valid values:

S = System currency. The price from the Vendor Item table is in your local currency.

V = Vendor currency. The price in the Vendor Item table is in the vendor’s currency.

N = No conversion. The price in the Vendor Item table is in the current currency.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; required.
VAT number

The tax ID number defined for the vendor; this field is informational-only.

Updates the VAT number field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
Type

Identifies whether the vendor is an actual vendor or a manufacturer.

Valid values are:

M = The person is a manufacturer.

V = The person is a vendor.

Updates the Type field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; required.
EFT account #

The electronic fund transfer account number for this vendor.

Updates the EFT account # field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
Vendor e-mail address

The email address for the vendor. If the Email Purchase Order (K80) system control value is selected, you can send purchase orders to the vendor by email. See that system control value for more information. Required if the Email PO flag is set to Y.

Updates the E-mail address field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 50 positions; optional.
Remit e-mail address

The e-mail address defined for the remit-to address.

Updates the Remit e-mail address field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 50 positions; optional.
User field 1

Additional vendor information.

Updates the User field 1 field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
User field 2

Additional vendor information.

Updates the User field 2 field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
User field 3

Additional vendor information.

Updates the User field 3 field in the Vendor table.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Vendor upload error

The error message associated with the vendor upload record. The Vendor Upload batch process assigns an error message to a vendor upload record if the record contains an error; vendor upload records in error display on the Vendor Upload Error Report. Vendor upload records that contain an error are not uploaded to the Order Management System Vendor table. You need to correct the error and resubmit the vendor upload batch process or delete the vendor upload record.

Alphanumeric, 60 positions; optional.
Email PO

Indicates whether to send purchase orders to the vendor by email. Valid values are:

Y = Send purchase orders to the vendor through email. If this field is set to Y, then the Vendor e-mail address must contain a valid email address.

N = Do not send purchase orders by email.

Updates the Email PO field in the Vendor table. If this field is not populated, the vendor upload program sets the field in the Vendor table to N.

Emailing purchase orders is available only if the Email Purchase Order (K80) system control value is selected. See that system control value for more information.

Work with Item/SKUs (MITM)

For information on: See:

Creating new items

Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM)

Reviewing and working with existing items, with links to additional options

Working with Existing Items (MITM)

Working with SKUs

Working with SKUs

Working with item or SKU offer records and set up price breaks, aliases, and accompanying items

Assigning Items/SKUs to Offers

Working with item warehouse and item location records

Assigning Items to Warehouses

Working with additional item options, including comments, source prices, item coordinates, UPC codes, and item categories

Entering Additional Item Information

Set up eligible shippers for an item

Working with Item Ship Via Overrides

Copying item information from an existing item to a newly-created item

Copying Items

Creating and Working with Items

Purpose: The following chapters describe how to create and work with items.

Working with Item Coordinates (WCIO)

Overview: Use the Work with Item Coordinates Screen to specify related items or SKUs for a selected item, so that when a customer orders the primary item you can cross-sell the coordinates. For example, if you sell a blazer, you might also sell a related skirt, blouse, and scarf.

In this topic:

About Item Coordinates

Setting up a primary item and coordinates: The item you select at the Work with Items Screen, and match related items to, is the “primary item”; the related items are “coordinate items.” Item coordination does not automatically work in both directions; in other words, designating a skirt as a coordinate to a blazer does not automatically designate the blazer as a coordinate to the skirt. You must select the Work with Item Coordinates option for each item that you would like to designate as a primary item, and then select the related coordinates for cross-selling.

Order entry: When you enter an order for an item that is associated with any item coordinates:

  • If the Automatically Display Coordinate Items in Order Entry (I53) system control value is selected and the Promo flag for the order type is set to Promo Price, you advance to the Display Coordinate Items Window when you add an item associated with coordinate items to an order.
  • If the Automatically Display Coordinate Items in Order Entry (I53) system control value is unselected or blank, a coordinate message indicates when you add an item associated with coordinate items to an order: Coordinate items exist for base item entered. You select Coordinates for the primary item to advance to the Display Coordinate Items Window.

The system will cross-sell coordinates even if the primary item is soldout, on backorder, is a drop ship item, non-inventory item, or main set item. Additionally, the system will cross-sell coordinates that are a drop ship item, non-inventory item, or main set item.

For more information: See the Automatically Display Coordinate Items in Order Entry (I53) system control value for a discussion on when screens prompt you to add coordinate items in Classic View and Modern View.

Pricing: When you add an item coordinate to an order, the system selects a price the same way as if you had entered the item at an ordinary order line. If the system cannot find a price for the item coordinate, you will not be able to add it to the order from the item coordinate pop-up window.

Auto linking: The SKU Element for Auto Linking Coordinates (F39) system control value controls which coordinates the system creates automatically when you specify a SKUed item to coordinate with a primary item at the Work with Item Coordinates Screen (you can also select any SKU of an item or a non-SKUed item manually; see below for more information). For example, SKU element one is color, and you set this system control value to 1 so that auto linking will be based on color. When you enter an item to coordinate at the Work with Item Coordinates Screen, the system will create coordinate records only for SKUs of the coordinate that find a color match with SKUs of the primary item.

Example:

Item AB100 (blazer), primary item, sold in colors NAVY, WHIT and BLCK, sizes SMLL, MEDM, LRGE

Item BB100 (skirt), coordinate item, sold in colors NAVY, BLCK, and PURP, sizes 6, 8, 10, 12, 14

SKU element 1 (color) specified as SKU element to use for auto linking

Result: System automatically creates item coordinate records for item BB100 in the following SKUs, because SKU element 1 finds a match with AB100's SKU element 1:

  • NAVY 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
  • BLCK 6, 8, 10, 12, 14

Contact Center: You can also select coordinate items to add to an order in Contact Center; however, the Automatically Display Coordinate Items in Order Entry (I53) system control value does not apply in Contact Center. See the Select Coordinate Items page in the Modern View online help for more information.

Selected SKU values: You also have the option at the Work with Item Coordinates Screen to create coordinate records for a specific SKU value of the primary item only. In the example above, for instance, you could indicate that you want to create coordinates only for SKUs whose first SKU element, color, is set to NAVY.

Important:

The item coordinates are associated with the base primary item, and are not restricted to the individual, matching SKUs. In the above example, each coordinate SKU you create for the skirt would be associated with all SKUs of the blazer. If you enter an order for the blazer in white, size 12, you will still be able to select the skirt in navy, size 10, as a coordinate. However, you can control which SKUs display in order entry through the SKU Element for Order Entry Filtering (F40) system control value.

Manual linking: In addition to auto linking, you can also relate a primary item to any SKUed or non-SKUed coordinate item, even if there is no match in the selected SKU element.

Example:

Additional item coordinates for item AB100:

Item CB100 (blouse) available in WHIT and PINK, sizes 6,8, 10, 12, 14

Item DB100 (scarf), a non-SKUed item

Since the above items and SKUs do not match the selected SKU element of the primary item, you would create the item coordinate records manually, and so are not restricted to the item coordinates the system creates automatically.

Item Coordinate Creation Summary

The following table summarizes the guidelines for creating item coordinates for a SKU and a non-SKUed primary item:

Primary Item is: Coordinate Item is: Result:

SKUed

SKUed

If you specify a matching SKU: Creates coordinates only for SKUs of the coordinate item that match your entry. However, if your entry doesn't find a matching SKU for the primary item, no coordinate SKUs are created.

If you do not specify a matching SKU: Selects only SKUs that exist for both the primary item and the coordinate item to create as coordinates SKUs

non-SKUed

SKUed

You cannot create an item coordinate at the Work with Item Coordinates screen; instead, you must Select Items to advance to the Select SKU Coordinates screen.

SKUed or non-SKUed

non-SKUed

Creates the item coordinate for the non-SKUed item.

Create by offer: You can also use the Work with Coordinates by Offer menu option (WCIO) to set up coordinates for a primary item. This menu option restricts the display and creation of coordinate items to those that are in the same offer as the primary item. Additionally, the alias for each item, if any, is displayed, and you can enter the alias rather than the actual item code.

Work with Item Coordinates Screen

How to display this screen: Select Coordinates for an item at the Work with Items Screen, or enter WCIO in the Fast path field at the top of any menu and complete the Item and Offer fields.

Field Description
Primary item

The item you are relating coordinates to. This is the item you selected at the Work with Items Screen.

Note:

Item coordinates are related to the base item; you will be able to select item coordinates in order entry if you enter an order line for any SKU of the primary item.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
Description (unlabeled field)

The description of the primary item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Coordinate item

Use this field to enter the related item you are coordinating to the primary item for cross-selling purposes. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions.

Work with: required.

Change: display-only.
Matching SKU

The SKU element specified in the SKU Element for Auto Linking Coordinates (F39) system control value. Included only if the primary item is a SKUed item.

Enter a SKU value here if you want to create item coordinates only for SKUs that match your entry. There must also be a match for the SKU value for the primary item. In other words, if this field represents color and you enter NAVY, the system validates that there are SKUs of both the primary item and coordinate item whose color is NAVY, and creates item coordinate records for the NAVY SKUs only.

 

Leave this field blank to have the system automatically create item coordinates for each SKU of the coordinate item whose SKU value matches a SKU for the primary item. See the discussion earlier in this topic for examples.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Coordinate type

A code representing a type of item coordinate, such as mandatory or optional.

Coordinate type codes are defined in and validated against the Item Coordinate Type table; see Working with Item Coordinate Types (WICT).

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Message

A persuasive or descriptive message to display on the item coordinate pop-up window in order entry.

Alphanumeric, 70 positions; optional.
Coordinate

To scan, enter a full or partial item code to display existing coordinates for the primary item that match your entry.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the coordinate, from the Item table record for the coordinate item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Seq (sequence)

The sequence number assigned to the item coordinate type, indicating the sequence in which coordinate items assigned to this type display on the Display Coordinate Items window in order entry.

If you change the sequence number assigned to a coordinate type in Working with Item Coordinate Types (WICT), the system does not automatically update the sequence number for item coordinates that are assigned to the coordinate type.

For example, if the sequence number for coordinate type R is 3, any item assigned to coordinate type R will have a sequence number of 3. If you change the sequence number for coordinate type R from 3 to 5, any items assigned to coordinate type R will still have a sequence number of 3.

To update the sequence number assigned to coordinate items, select Submit Update at the Work with Item Coordinate Type Screen. See Updating Coordinate Type Sequence for more information.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Type

A code representing the coordinate type assigned to the coordinate item, such as mandatory or optional.

Coordinate type codes are defined in and validated against the Item Coordinate Type table; see Working with Item Coordinate Types (WICT).

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.

Creating item coordinates: Follow the steps below to create item coordinates for the primary item.

  1. Enter the base item code of the item you want to coordinate with the primary item.
  2. Optionally, enter the matching SKU value if you want to create only the item coordinate SKUs that match this value. This field is available only if the primary item has SKUs.
  3. Optionally, enter a coordinate type code if you want to control the sequence in which coordinate items display on the Display Coordinate Items window in order entry.
  4. Optionally, enter a message to display at the pop-up window in order entry.
  5. Select OK. The system validates your entries and highlights any fields you need to correct. See below for more information.
  6. When no errors exist, the system creates a record for the base item coordinate in the Item Coordinate table, and a record for each matching SKU of the item coordinate in the SKU Coordinate table. A message such as the following indicates: Coordinate items created = 1. Coordinate SKUs created = 20.

The number of coordinate items created will always be 1. In the case of non-SKUed coordinates, the number of SKUs will be 1 also.

Correcting errors:

  • Coordinate item errors: If the coordinate item you entered does not exist, a message such as the following indicates: Item (AB1000) does not exist.
  • If the coordinate item you entered does not have any SKUs that match your entry in the Matching SKU field, a message such as the following indicates: SKU element (WHIT) does not exist for item (AB1000).

Correct the coordinate item information.

  • Matching SKU errors: If your entry in the Matching SKU field does not match any of the SKUs for the primary item, or if there are no matching SKUs for the primary and coordinate item based on the selected SKU element, a message such as the following indicates: Coordinate item (ANGELSET) has no matching SKUs to primary item - use F7.

Select Select Items to advance to the Select SKU Coordinates Screen, where you can select any item or SKU to create as an item coordinate.

Screen Option Procedure

Change an item coordinate

Select Change for an item coordinate to advance to the Change Item Coordinate Screen.

Delete an item coordinate and all of its related SKUs

Select Delete for an item to delete it. The Confirm Delete window opens; select OK to delete the coordinate and its SKUs.

Work with SKUs for an item coordinate

Select Work with SKU coordinates for an item coordinate to advance to the Work with SKU Coordinates Screen.

Copy the coordinates for one primary item to another

Select Copy to display the Copy Coordinate Item Pop-Up Window.

Select additional items or SKUs to coordinate to the primary item

Select Select Items to advance to the Select SKU Coordinates Screen.

Change Item Coordinate Screen

To change: Select Change for a coordinate item at the Work with Item Coordinates Screen to advance to the Change Item Coordinate screen. You can change the Coordinate type and Message fields. See Work with Item Coordinates Screen for field descriptions.

Coordinate types:

  • If the sequence number for the coordinate type assigned to the item coordinate has since been updated to a new sequence number, the system will automatically update the item coordinate to the new sequence number when you advance to this screen.
  • If the coordinate type that is assigned to the item coordinate has since been deleted, you will receive an error message at this screen: Item Coordinate Type not found.

Copy Coordinate Item Pop-Up Window

Purpose: Use this window to copy the items and SKUs coordinated with the current primary item to a new primary item.

How to display this window: Select Copy at the Work with Item Coordinates Screen.

To copy: Enter the code of the item to be associated with the same coordinate items and SKUs as the “copy from” primary item. The code you enter must represent a valid item in your company.

The confirm prompt window opens. Select to confirm the copy; otherwise, select Exit to cancel.

Work with SKU Coordinates Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to work with the SKUs of an item that are currently coordinated with the primary item, or to coordinate additional SKUs.

When you first advance to this screen, the screen will be blank since you have not yet created any SKU coordinates.

How to display this screen: Select Work with SKU Coordinates for a SKUed coordinate item at the Work with Item Coordinates Screen.

Field Description
Primary item

The item you are relating coordinates to. This is the item you selected at the Work with Items Screen.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
Description

The description of the primary item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Coordinate item

The base item for which you are defining coordinate SKUs.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.
Description

The description of the coordinate item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.

SKUs

The item's unique characteristics, such as its color or size.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Description

The description of the SKU.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a new SKU coordinate for the primary item

Select Create to advance to the Create SKU Coordinate Screen.

Delete a SKU coordinate

Select Delete for a SKU to delete it.

Create SKU Coordinate Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to add a new SKU to an item coordinate.

Create a SKU coordinate: Complete the three 4-position fields to create a new SKU coordinate for the primary item. You can prompt on the SKU field to display a list of valid SKUs for the base item.

A message such as the following indicates: Coordinate SKU created for primary item (BU001).

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with SKU Coordinates Screen.

Field Description
Primary item

The code and description of the primary item for which you are creating coordinates.

Item: Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

Description: Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Coordinate item

The code and description of the base item for which you are defining SKU coordinates.

Item: Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

Description: Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
SKU

The item's unique characteristics, such as its color or size.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.

Select SKU Coordinates Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to select SKUs to coordinate with a primary item. You can also use this screen to select additional SKUs of a coordinate item that already has one or more SKUs selected to coordinate with the primary item.

You can also use the Work with SKU Coordinates Screen to create additional coordinated SKUs of a coordinate item.

How to display this screen: Select Select Items at the Work with Item Coordinates Screen.

Field Description
Primary item

The code and description of the item you are relating coordinates to. This is the item you selected at the Work with Items Screen.

Item code: Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

Item description: Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Msg (Message)

Enter the descriptive or persuasive message for the system to assign to each item or SKU you add as a coordinate.

Alphanumeric, 70 positions; optional.
Coord item (Coordinate item)

The items and SKUs available to link to the primary item as coordinates.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.
SKU

The item’s unique characteristics, such as its color or size.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Description

The description of the SKU.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.
Categ (Item category)

The category associated with the item. You can use item category to associate items that are related to or compatible with one another, both for selection in order entry and for reporting.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.

To select an item or SKU: To select one or more items or SKUs to coordinate with the primary item:

  1. Optionally, enter a descriptive message in the Message field for the item that you are adding as a coordinate to the primary item.
  2. Optionally, use the Coordinate item, Description, and Category scan fields to position to the desired item.
  3. Select the item/SKU you would like to add as an item coordinate to the primary item. The system adds the item/SKU as a coordinate and returns you to the Work with Item Coordinates Screen, where the newly created item coordinate displays.

Note:

No message indicates that your selections have been added to the Item Coordinate or SKU Coordinate tables; similarly, no error message indicates if you select an item or SKU that is already designated as a coordinate to the primary item.

Working with Item Tax Exemptions (WITX)

Purpose: Use the Item Tax Exemptions function to define tax exemptions for items based on their tax status in certain U.S. states. You can define the exemption for individual items or classes of items; exemptions can specify that items are either taxable or tax exempt, whichever is the exception to the norm. The item tax exemptions function also lets you define a dollar level at which an item's tax status changes.

For instance, you would use this function if:

  • a class of apparel you sell is taxable only in three states
  • a particular item is taxable only up to a certain dollar amount
  • with few exceptions, your merchandise is taxable in all states

Note:

If you use an external tax system, the item tax exemptions you set up with this function are not used. You must set up all tax exemptions in the tax system. See Vertex Setup and Avalara AvaTax Setup.

In this topic:

For more information: You can create tax exemptions and exceptions for items in Canadian provinces through Working with GST Tax Exemption Status (MGTX). You can use the Work with Items/SKUs menu option to flag an item as VAT-exempt; see Create Item (Base Information) Screen or Create SKU 1 of 2 (With Overrides) Screen.

Work with Item Tax Exemptions Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WITX in the Fast path field at the top of any menu, or select this option from a menu.

Field Description
St (State)

A code that represents the state where an item tax exemption applies.

State codes are defined in and validated against the state table, which is accessible through the Work with Countries menu option; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY).

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.

Cmp (Company)

A code that represents the company carrying the item.

The code of the current company appears in this field as the default.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Class

A code that represents a group of similar items.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Item

A code representing a unit of inventory.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.
Exempt

This code represents whether the item is tax exempt. Valid values are:

selected = The item is tax exempt.

unselected = The item is not tax exempt.

Tax Value

The dollar value up to which the item is taxable. If the value in the Exmpt field is N, the portion of the item price up to this value taxable; the portion of the item price above this value is tax exempt.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
No Tax Value

The dollar value that is tax exempt. If the value in the Exmpt field is N, and the item price is this value or less, the item is tax exempt; if the item price greater than this value, then the amount of the item price that exceeds this value is taxable.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Change an item tax exemption

Select Change for a tax exemption to advance to the Change Item Tax Exemptions Screen.

Delete an item tax exemption

Select Delete for a tax exemption to delete it.

Display an item tax exemption

Select Display for a tax exemption to advance to the Display Item Tax Exemption Screen.

Create an item tax exemption

Select Create to advance to the Create Item Tax Exemption Screen.

Create Item Tax Exemption Screen

Purpose: At the Work with Item Tax Exemptions Screen, select Create.

Field Description
Country

A code that represents the country in which an item tax exemption occurs. Country codes are defined in and validated against the Country table; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
State

A code that represents the state in which an item tax exemption applies. State codes are defined in and validated against the state table, which is accessible through the Work with Countries menu option; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY).

Alphanumeric, 2 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Company

A code that represents the company you are currently working with.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Item class

A code that represents a group of similar items. Item class codes are defined in and validated against the Item Class table. See Working with Item Classes (WICL).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Item

A code representing a unit of inventory. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table.

Note:

You can select either an item class or an item, but not both.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.
Exempt

A code indicating whether the item is tax exempt. Valid values are:

Selected = The item is tax exempt. The system does not use the Tax value or No tax value entries at this screen.

Unselected = The item is not tax exempt. The system uses the Tax value and No tax value entries at this screen to determine the amount of tax to charge.

Tax value

The dollar value up to which the item is taxable. The portion of the item price above this value is tax exempt. The value in the Exempt field must be unselected for this field to work.

Example: You sell an item for $250.00, and its Tax value is $200.00. If the regular tax rate is 5%, the system charges tax for the Tax value of $200.00, or $10.00. The remaining $50.00 that exceeds the Tax value of $200.00 is not taxed.

Note:

You cannot enter both a Tax value and a No tax value.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
No tax value

The dollar value that is tax exempt. If the item price is this value or less, the item is tax exempt; if the item price is greater than this value, then the amount of the item price that exceeds this value is taxable. The value in the Exempt field must be unselected for this field to work.

Example: You sell an item for $250.00, and its No tax value is $200.00. If the regular tax rate is 5%, the system charges tax for the $50.00 that exceeds the No tax value, or $2.50. The first $200.00 is not taxed.

Note:

You cannot enter both a Tax value and a No tax value.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Change Item Tax Exemptions Screen

To change: Select Change for an item tax exemption at the Work with Item Tax Exemptions Screen to advance to the Change Item Tax Exemption screen. You can change any field at this screen except the State or Company. See Create Item Tax Exemption Screen for field descriptions.

Display Item Tax Exemption Screen

To display: Select Display for an item tax exemption record at the Work with Item Tax Exemptions Screen to advance to the Display Item Tax Exemption screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Item Tax Exemption Screen for field descriptions.

Working with GST Tax Exemption Status (MGTX)

Purpose: Use the GST Tax Exemption Status to define tax exemptions for items based on their status in particular provinces.

Overview: The Canadian GST (Goods and Service Tax) is a federal tax; the PST (Provincial Services Tax) is a province-level tax. You can use Order Management System to calculate either, both, or neither of these taxes based on the shipping address on the order.

You can specify a GST rate:

  • as a default in the System Control table
  • for each SCF in the SCF table
  • for each postal code in the Postal Code table

You can specify a PST rate:

  • for each SCF in the SCF table
  • for each postal code in the Postal Code table

The GST rate from the SCF table, if any, overrides the rate from the System Control table, and the GST or PST rates from the Postal Code table, if any override the rates from the SCF table.

In addition to defining rates for each of these taxes, you must define a method for computing them. You define these methods in the SCF and, optionally, the Postal Code tables. To define specific items as exceptions to the PST and GST methods for a province, you use the Work with GST Tax Exemption Status function.

You can also define an exemption or exception for a specific customer. See Working with Customer Tax Status.

For more information:

Note:

If you are using this function to define tax exceptions for items, you should set the GST Item Status Default (A91) system control value to B (calculate both GST and PST tax).

In this topic:

Calculation Methods and Exemptions

To understand the effect of different tax exemptions, it is useful to look at the calculation methods that may apply to GST and PST.

Method Description Calculation/Example (where the order total subject to tax = Example with Exemption Type of G or P

G

Calculate the GST on the order, including freight and handling, if applicable. Add this amount to the order total, then calculate the PST on the result.

Calculation:

ORDER * GST rate = GST amount

GST amount + ((GST amount + ORDER) * PST rate) = order tax

Example: The order total subject to tax = $10.00

GST rate = 10%

PST rate = 5%

$10 * 10% = $1.00 GST amount

$1 GST amount + (($1 + $10) * 5%) = $1 + ($11 * 5%) = $1.60

G = GST only; the amount subject to PST is 0

Example:

$10 * 10% = $1.00 GST amount

$1 GST amount + (($1 + 0) * 5%) = $1 + ($1 + 5%) = $1.05

P = PST only; the amount subject to GST is 0

Example:

0 * 10% = 0 GST amount

0 GST amount + ((0 + $10) * 5%) = 0 + ($10 * 5%) = $.50

P

Calculate the PST on the order, including freight and handling, if applicable. Add this amount to the order total, then calculate the GST on the result.

Calculation:

O * PST rate = PST amount

PST amount + ((PST amount + O) * GST rate) = order tax

Example: (with same assumptions as above)

$10 * 5% = $.50 PST amount

$.50 PST amount + (($.50 + $10) * 10%) = $.50 + ($10.50 * 10%) = $1.55

G = GST only; the amount subject to PST is 0

Example:

0 * 5% = 0 PST amount

0 PST amount + ((0 +$10) * 10%) = 0 + ($10 * 10%) = $1.00

P = PST only; the amount subject to GST is 0

Example:

$10 * 5% = $.50 PST amount

$.50 PST amount + (($.50 + 0) * 10%) = $.50 + ($.50 * 10%) = $.55

S

Calculate GST and PST separately; neither tax is subject to the other.

Calculation:

(O * GST) + (O * PST)

Example: (with same assumptions as above

($10 * 10%) + ($10 * 5%) =

$1 + $.50) = $1.50

G = GST only; the amount subject to PST is 0

Example:

(0 * 10%) + ($10 * 5%) = $.50

P = PST only; the amount subject to GST is 0

Example:

($10 * 10%) + (0 * %) = $1.00

If You Tax Freight and Handling

You can tax freight and handling on orders as well as merchandise. In order to tax freight and/or handling, you must select the Tax on Freight (B14) and/or Tax on Handling (B15) fields in the System Control table. You must then select the corresponding fields in the SCF or Postal Code tables for the location where you tax freight or handling as well.

An item tax exemption by province affects the calculation of tax on freight and handling for items shipped to that province. Assuming that GST and PST normally apply to the order, the system uses the following logic to calculate tax on freight and handling:

Order-level freight method:

  • If all items on the order are exempt from PST, the system does not calculate PST on freight or handling.
  • If at least one item on the order is subject to PST, the system calculates PST on freight and handling.
  • If all items on the order are exempt from GST, the system does not calculate GST on freight or handling.
  • If at least one item on the order is subject to GST, the system calculates GST on freight and handling.

Line-level freight method:

  • If the item is exempt from PST, the system does not calculate PST on freight or handling for that line.
  • If the item is exempt from GST, the system does not calculate GST on freight or handling for that line.
  • If the item is subject to PST, the system calculates PST on freight and handling for that line.
  • If the item is subject to GST, the system calculates GST on freight and handling for that line.

The system determines the freight method on an order from the source code. See Working with Source Codes (WSRC).

You can also flag a special handling code as exempt from tax. See Establishing Additional Charge Codes (WADC).

\

Work with GST Tax Exemption Status Screen (Selecting an Item)

Use this screen to select an item for creation, review, change or deletion of GST tax exemption status.

How to display this screen: Enter MGTX in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with GST Tax Exemption Status from a menu.

Item field: Use the item field to enter the item code that you want to work with. This is a 12-position, alphanumeric field. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table; see Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM).

Work with GST Tax Exempt Status Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to select an item tax exemption by province to work with, or to create a new record.

How to display this screen: Enter a valid item code at the Work with GST Tax Exemption Status Screen (Selecting an Item).

Field Description
Item

The code that represents the item subject to tax exemption by province. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table; see Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM).

Alphanumeric, 14 positions; display-only.
Item description (Unlabeled field to the right of the item code)

The description associated with the item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Prov (Province)

A code that represents the province where a tax exemption applies for this item.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.

Sts (Status)

A code that represents the override tax status for the item in this province. Valid values are:

  • Both = Calculate both GST and PST
  • GST = Calculate GST only
  • Neither = Calculate neither GST or PST
  • PST = Calculate PST only

Optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Change GST tax exemption

Select Change for a province to advance to the Change GST Tax Exemption Status Screen. See the Create GST Tax Exempt Status Screen for field descriptions.

Delete a GST tax exemption

Select Delete for a province to delete it.

Display a GST tax exemption

Select Display for a province to advance to the Display GST Tax Exempt Status Screen. See the Create GST Tax Exempt Status Screen for field descriptions.

Create a tax exemption record

Select Create to advance to the Create GST Tax Exempt Status Screen.

Create GST Tax Exempt Status Screen

Purpose: At the Work with GST Tax Exempt Status Screen, select Create.

Field Description
Item

The code that represents the item subject to tax exemption by province. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 14 positions; display-only.
Item description (Unlabeled field to the right of the item code)

The description associated with the item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Province

A code that represents the province where a tax exemption applies for this item.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Override tax status

A code that represents the override tax status for this item in this province. Valid values are:

  • Both = Calculate both GST and PST
  • GST = Calculate GST only
  • Neither = Calculate neither GST or PST
  • PST = Calculate PST only

Required.

Updating Harmonize Codes (UPHC)

Purpose: Use the Update Harmonize Codes function to update harmonize codes quickly for multiple items or SKUs.

The system uses an item's harmonize code to determine whether to add a duty charge to an order. Duty is a tax that you may be required to add to orders shipping to certain countries. The system performs the following checks to determine whether to add duty for an item a customer orders:

The system checks the duty rates defined for the country on the order's shipping address. If the system finds a duty rate whose harmonize code matches the item's harmonize code, it adds the duty amount or percentage to the order. Two blank records are a match; that is, if both the item's and the duty rate's harmonize codes are blank, the system will add the duty to the order. See Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY) for more information on setting up duty rates for countries.

For more information: You can also update harmonize codes through the Work with Items/SKUs option; see Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM).

Update Harmonize Codes Screen

Use this screen to update the harmonize codes of multiple items and SKUs quickly.

How to display this screen: Enter UPHC in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Update Harmonize Codes from a menu.

Field Description
Item

A code representing a unit of inventory that you sell. Items are defined in and validated against the Item table; see Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM).

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.
Harmonize code

A code that prints on customers documents for international shipments.

The system determines whether to add duty charges to an order by comparing an item's harmonize code with the harmonize codes associated with the duty rates for the customer's country.

You can also create, change, delete or display an item's harmonize code on the second screen in Work with Items for a non-SKU’d item, or on the SKU screen for SKU’d items; see Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM).

Alphanumeric, 16 positions; required.

Instructions:

  1. Complete the Item and Harmonize code fields for each item that you want to update, pressing Tab to move from field to field. If you reach the bottom of the screen, select Next to advance to another screen.
  2. Press Enter. The system validates the item codes and highlights any fields you need to correct. Correct any fields and press Enter again.
  3. Select Accept to accept your entries or Reject to reject. If you select Accept, the confirm accept pop-up window, displayed below, appears.
  4. Select OK to accept, or select Exit to cancel. If you select OK, the system updates the harmonize code field for each item you entered. If an item has SKUs, the system updates the harmonize code field for each SKU.

To exit the screen without submitting any updates to harmonize codes, select Reject.

Working with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI)

Purpose: Use Work with Freight Exempt Items to exclude items from freight charges.

You may wish to exclude certain items from freight, such as memberships or subscriptions which do not have any freight costs. Also, if the price of an item already includes the cost of freight, you may wish to exclude the item from freight so that you do not charge the customer double the amount of freight.

In this topic:

Freight Exempt Items Setup

Before you can exclude items from freight, you must perform the required setup.

System Control Values Related to Freight Exemption

System Control Value Description

Use Item Freight Exemption File (E73)

Select this system control value if you want the system to exclude items from freight based on the Working with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI) menu option.

Include Handling in Freight Charge Calculation (D77)

Select this system control value if you want to include handling charges in the total dollar amount on an order subject to freight charges.

If this system control value is selected and a freight exempt item is defined with a handling charge, the handling charge will not be included in the freight calculation.

Eligible Freight Methods for Freight Exemption

You can exclude items from freight on orders using the following freight methods, as defined in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). See Introducing Offer and Source Codes for more information about each freight method.

Flagging an Item as Freight Exempt

Use the Working with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI) menu option to define which items are exempt from freight charges. You can flag an item as freight exempt at the ship via level, offer level, source code level, or item level.

To flag an item as freight exempt across all ship vias, offers, and source codes: At the Create Freight Exempt Item Screen, enter the Item and leave the Offer and Source blank. Do not define records at the Select Ship Via for Exemption Screen. Note: If the item is a SKUed item, all of the SKUs for the item are exempt from freight.

To flag an item as freight exempt at the source code level: At the Create Freight Exempt Item Screen, enter the Item and Source. Leave the Offer blank. Do not define records at the Select Ship Via for Exemption Screen. The item will be exempt from freight only if the specified source code is defined on the order header. Note: The system does not look at the source code defined at the order line level to determine if the item is exempt from freight.

To flag an item as freight exempt at the offer level: At the Create Freight Exempt Item Screen, enter the Item and Offer. Leave the Source blank. Do not define records at the Select Ship Via for Exemption Screen. The item will be exempt from freight only if the specified offer is associated with the source code on the order header. Note: The system does not look at the offer code defined at the order line level to determine if the item is exempt from freight.

To flag an item as freight exempt at the ship via level:

The item will be exempt from freight only if the selected ship via(s) is defined for the item on the order detail line or order header (if a ship via is not defined at the order line level).

Freight exempt items at the ship via level: When the system applies a ship via override to a pick slip, the system does not look at the Freight Exempt Item Ship Via table to determine if one or more of the items on the pick slip is excluded from freight for the ship via override. The system retains the freight that was applied to the order during order entry and prints this freight amount on the pick slip. See Determining the Shipper for the Pick Slip.

To flag an item as freight exempt at the ship via level for a specified source code:

  • At the Create Freight Exempt Item Screen, enter the Item and Source. Leave the Offer blank.
  • At the Select Ship Via for Exemption Screen, select the ship vias for which the item is exempt from freight.

The item will be exempt from freight only if the specified source code is defined on the order header and the selected ship via(s) is defined for the item on the order detail line or order header (if a ship via is not defined at the order line level).

To flag an item as freight exempt at the ship via level for a specified offer:

  • At the Create Freight Exempt Item Screen, enter the Item and Offer. Leave the Source blank.
  • At the Select Ship Via for Exemption Screen, select the ship vias for which the item is exempt from freight.

The item will be exempt from freight only if the specified offer is associated with the source code on the order header and the selected ship via(s) is defined for the item on the order detail line or order header (if a ship via is not defined at the order line level).

For more information: See Freight Exempt Hierarchy for more information on how the system determines when an item is exempt from freight.

Include Freight on Pick Slips?

There will be no freight charge on a pick slip, even if there are non-freight exempt items on the order, under the following conditions:

Freight Exempt Items Processing

When you add an item to an order in regular order entry/maintenance or receive an order through the Generic Order Interface (Order API), the system uses the following steps to determine if the item is excluded from freight.

For more information see the Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1).

Use Item Freight Exemption File (E73) Selected?

The system checks the setting of the Use Item Freight Exemption File (E73) system control value.

  • If unselected, items defined in the Working with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI) menu option are included in the freight calculation.
  • If selected, items defined in the Working with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI) menu option are exempt from freight.

Eligible Freight Method on Order?

The system determines if the freight method on the order is eligible for freight exempt items. You can exclude items from freight on orders using the following freight methods:

If the order does not use one of these freight methods, the system includes the items on the order in the freight calculation.

If the order uses one of these freight methods, the system excludes the freight exempt items on the order from the freight calculation.

Item on Order Defined in Work with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI)?

The system determines if the item added to the order is defined in the Working with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI) menu option.

  • If the item is not defined in Work with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI), the system includes the item in the freight calculation.
  • If the item is defined in Work with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI), the system determines how the item is exempt from freight. See Freight Exempt Hierarchy.

Freight Exempt Hierarchy

If the item qualifies for freight exemption (see Use Item Freight Exemption File (E73) Selected?, Eligible Freight Method on Order?, and Item on Order Defined in Work with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI)?), the system uses the following hierarchy to determine how the item is exempt from freight.

# Step

1.

Ship via level: If records exist for the item on the Select Ship Via for Exemption Screen, the item is exempt from freight only for those ship vias selected. The item is excluded from the freight calculation only if the specified ship via is defined on the order. The system uses the ship via defined for the order line; if a ship via is not defined on the order line, the system uses the ship via defined on the order header.

In addition:

  • If an offer is defined for the item on the Work with Freight Exempt Items Screen, the item is exempt from freight only for those ship vias selected and if the specified offer is associated with the source code on the order header.
  • If a source code is defined for the item on the Work with Freight Exempt Items Screen, the item is exempt from freight only for those ship vias selected and if the specified source code is defined on the order header.

2.

Offer level: If records do not exist for the item on the Select Ship Via for Exemption Screen, but an offer is defined for the item on the Work with Freight Exempt Items Screen, the item is exempt from freight only if the specified offer is associated with the source code on the order header. Note: The system does not look at the offer code defined at the order line level to determine if the item is exempt from freight.

3.

Source code level: If records do not exist for the item on the Select Ship Via for Exemption Screen, but a source code is defined for the item on the Work with Freight Exempt Items Screen, the item is exempt from freight only if the specified source code is defined on the order header. Note: The system does not look at the source code defined at the order line level to determine if the item is exempt from freight.

4.

Item level: If records do not exist for the item on the Select Ship Via for Exemption Screen, and an offer or source code is not defined for the item on the Work with Freight Exempt Items Screen, then the item is always exempt from freight. If the item is a SKUed item, all of the SKUs for the item are exempt from freight.

Freight Exempt Hierarchy Example

The following items are defined in the Working with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI) menu option.

Item Offer Source Ship Via Results

ITM1

      

When you add ITM1 to an order, the item is always excluded from the freight calculation.

ITM2

    

1 - UPS

2 - FEDEX

When you add ITM2 to an order, the item is excluded from the freight calculation only if:

  • the ship via on the order detail line is 1 or 2, or
  • if a ship via is not defined on the order detail line, the ship via on the order header is 1 or 2.

ITM3

7

  

1- UPS

2 - FEDEX

When you add ITM3 to an order, the item is excluded from the freight calculation only if:

  • the ship via on the order detail line is 1 or 2 (or, if a ship via is not defined on the order detail line, the ship via on the order header is 1 or 2), and
  • the source code on the order header is associated with offer 7.

ITM4

  

S7

1 - UPS

When you add ITM4 to an order, the item is excluded from the freight calculation only if:

  • the ship via on the order detail line is 1 (or, if a ship via is not defined on the order detail line, the ship via on the order header is 1), and
  • the source code on the order header is S7.

ITM5

7

    

When you add ITM5 to an order, the item is excluded from the freight calculation only if the source code on the order header is associated with offer 7.

ITM6

  

S7

  

When you add ITM6 to an order, the item is excluded from the freight calculation only if the source code on the order header is S7.

Freight Exemption and Extra Charges

Ship via additional charges: Any additional charges associated with a ship via, such as service charges or charges for a federal express service, are still added to an order even when the order contains only freight exempt items.

Extra recipient charges: Extra recipient charges are not added to an order if the recipient has only ordered a freight exempt item.

Handling charges: If the Include Handling in Freight Charge Calculation (D77) system control value is selected and a freight exempt item is defined with a handling charge, the handling charge will not be included in the freight calculation.

Freight Exempt Item Example

The following items are defined in Working with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI).

Item Offer Source Ship Via

ITM1

  

S7

1 - UPS

ITM2

  

S9

1 - UPS

2 - FEDEX

ITM3

  

S7

  

You create an order with the following information with the ship via code of 1 and a source code of S7 on the order header:

Order Detail Line Item Results

Line 1

ITM1

no ship via code defined

Line 1 is exempt from freight because the ship via and source code on the order header match the ship via and source code requirements in Working with Freight Exempt Items for ITM1.

Line 2

ITM2

ship via code 3

Line 2 is not exempt from freight because the ship via on the order detail line and the source code on the order header does not match the ship via and source code requirements in Working with Freight Exempt Items for ITM2.

Line 3

ITM3

ship via code 5

Line 3 is exempt from freight because the source code on the order header matches the source code requirements in Working with Freight Exempt Items for ITM3 and ship via requirements have not been defined in Work with Freight Exempt Items for ITM3.

Line 4

ITM4

no ship via code defined

Line 4 is not exempt from freight because it does not exist in the Working with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI).

Work with Freight Exempt Items Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to work with freight exempt items.

How to display this screen: Enter WFEI in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Freight Exempt Items from a menu.

Field Description
Item

An item defined as freight exempt. If the item is a SKUed item, all of the SKUs for the item are exempt from freight.

Enter a full or partial item code and select OK to display items in alphanumeric order beginning with your entry.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the item.

Alphanumeric, 35 positions; display-only.
Offer

The offer in which the item is exempt from freight.

Enter a valid offer code and select OK to display offers that match your entry.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Source

The source in which the item is exempt from freight.

Enter a valid source code and select OK to display source codes that match your entry.

Alphanumeric, 9 positions; optional.
Ship via

Defines whether the item is freight exempt at the ship via level.

Valid values:

  • Y = The item is exempt from freight at the ship via level. The Select Ship Via for Exemption Screen indicates for which ship vias that item is exempt from freight.
  • N = The item is exempt from freight across all ship vias.

See Freight Exempt Hierarchy for more information on how the system determines when an item is exempt from freight.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a freight exempt item

Select Create to advance to the Create Freight Exempt Item Screen.

Change a freight exempt item

Select Change for a freight exempt item to advance to the Change Freight Exempt Item Screen. See the Create Freight Exempt Item Screen for field descriptions.

Delete a freight exempt item

Select Delete for a freight exempt item to delete it. Any freight exemptions defined for the item on the Select Ship Via for Exemption Screen are also deleted.

Display a freight exempt item

Select Display for a freight exempt item to advance to the Display Freight Exempt Item Screen. See the Create Freight Exempt Item Screen for field descriptions.

Flag an item as freight exempt at the ship via level

Select Ship Via for a freight exempt item to advance to the Select Ship Via for Exemption Screen.

Create Freight Exempt Item Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to define an item as exempt from freight.

See Flagging an Item as Freight Exempt for instructions on how to flag an item as freight exempt at the ship via, offer, source code, or item level.

How to display this screen: Select Create on the Work with Freight Exempt Items Screen.

Field Description
Item

The item you wish to exempt from freight. Items are defined in and validated against the Item table. If the item contains SKUs, each SKU will be exempt from freight.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Offer

The offer in which the item is exempt from freight. There will be no freight for the item if this source code is associated with the source code on the order header.

Note:

The system does not look at the offer code defined at the order line level to determine if the item is exempt from freight.

Offer codes are defined in and validated against the Offer table. See Working with Offers (WOFR).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Source

The source code in which the item is exempt from freight. There will be no freight for the item if this is the source code on the order header.

Note:

The system does not look at the source code defined at the order line level to determine if the item is exempt from freight.

Source codes are defined in and validated against the Source Code table. See Working with Source Codes (WSRC).

Alphanumeric, 9 positions; optional.

Instructions:

  1. Enter a valid item in the Item field. If the item contains SKUs, each SKU will be exempt from freight.
  2. Enter a valid offer in the Offer field if you want to define a specific offer in which the item is exempt from freight, or
  3. Enter a valid source code in the Source field if you want to define a specific source code in which the item is exempt from freight, or
  4. Leave the Offer and Source fields blank in order to define the item as exempt from freight on all orders. An error message displays if you enter both an offer and source for an item: Only Offer OR Source may be entered, not both.
  5. Select OK. The system validates your entries and highlights any fields you need to correct. Correct and fields and select OK again.
  6. A message similar to the following informs you the item freight exemption has been created: Freight Exempt Item FRT8769 was created.

Select Ship Via for Exemption Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to flag an item as exempt from freight at the ship via level. If you do not flag any ship vias on this screen, the item is exempt from freight for all ship vias.

See Freight Exempt Hierarchy for more information on how the system determines when to exclude an item from the freight calculation.

Which ship vias display? The first time you advance to this screen, or if you have not selected any ship vias on this screen, all ship via codes defined in Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA) display on the screen. If you flag an item as exempt from freight for a particular ship via on this screen, the next time you advance to this screen only those ship vias you have selected display on the screen. You can use the Toggle All/Selected option to switch between displaying all ship vias or only those ship vias that have been selected for freight exemption. The Selected field indicates whether the item is exempt from freight for a particular ship via.

Ship via overrides during pick slip generation: The system reevaluates freight exempt items at the ship via level during pick slip generation if the system applies a ship via override to the pick slip. See Determining the Shipper for the Pick Slip.

How to display this screen: Select Ship Via for a freight exempt item at the Work with Freight Exempt Items Screen.

Ship vias display on this screen in ascending ship via code order.

Field Description
Item

The code and description of the item that you wish to exempt from freight at the ship via level. This is the item you selected at the Work with Freight Exempt Items Screen.

Item code: Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

Item description: Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.

Via

A code for a ship via for which you can flag the item as exempt from freight.

Ship via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table.

Enter a ship via code and select OK to display ship via codes in numeric order, beginning with your entry.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.

Description

A description of the ship via.

Enter a full or partial description and select OK to display ship vias that contain your entry.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Priority

The priority assigned to the ship via in the Ship Via table, where 0 is the lowest priority and 9 is the highest priority.

Enter a valid priority and select OK to display ship vias that match your entry.

Numeric, 1 position; optional.

Selected

Indicates whether the item is exempt from freight at the ship via level.

  • If this field is NO for all ship vias on this screen, the item is not exempt from freight at the ship via level. The Work with Freight Exempt Items Screen indicates whether the item is exempt from freight for a specific offer, source code, or across all offers and source codes.
  • If this field is YES for one or more ship vias on this screen, the item is exempt from freight only for those ship vias selected.

See Freight Exempt Hierarchy for more information on how the system determines when the exclude an item from the freight calculation.

Screen Option Procedure

Flag the item as exempt from freight for a ship via

Select a ship via code or select Select for a ship via code to update the Selected flag for the ship via to YES.

Unflag the item as exempt from freight for a ship via

Select Deselect for the ship via code to update the Selected flag for the ship via to NO.

Flag the item as exempt from freight for all ship vias

Select Select All to update the Selected flag for all ship vias on this screen to YES.

Switch between displaying all ship vias on this screen and only those ship vias that have been selected as freight exempt for the item

Select Toggle All/Selected. The system switches between displaying all ship vias on this screen and only those ship vias that have been selected as freight exempt for the item.

Working with Item Coordinate Types (WICT)

Purpose: Item coordinate types allow you to group item coordinates by category to help identify which coordinate items are more important to upsell. You can assign a coordinate type to a coordinate item at the Work with Item Coordinates Screen.

A sequence number is assigned to each coordinate type, indicating the order (from lowest to highest) in which coordinate items assigned to the coordinate type display on the Display Coordinate Items Window in order entry.

In this topic:

Item Coordinate Type Example

You offer the following coordinates for a hammock:

  • hammock stand
  • hanging kit
  • storage bag
  • pillow
  • blanket
  • canopy

For each of these item coordinates, you assign a type to indicate its importance:

Coordinate Type Seq Results

hammock stand:

  • metal
  • wooden

hanging kit:

  • standard
  • deluxe

M (mandatory)

1

The customer is required to order either a hammock stand or hanging kit.

Item coordinates assigned to type M display first on the Display Coordinate Items window.

storage bag

S (strongly recommended)

2

A storage bag is strongly recommended for off-season storage.

Item coordinates assigned to type S display after type M item coordinates on the Display Coordinate Items window.

pillow:

  • cotton filled
  • down filled

R (recommended)

3

A pillow is recommended, but not required.

Item coordinates assigned to type R display after type S item coordinates on the Display Coordinate Items window.

blanket:

  • fleece
  • cotton

canopy:

  • green
  • striped
  • mosquito netting

O (optional)

4

A blanket or canopy is an optional accessory.

Item coordinates assigned to type O display after type R item coordinates on the Display Coordinate Items window.

Updating Coordinate Type Sequence

If you change the sequence number assigned to a coordinate type, the system does not automatically update the sequence number for item coordinates that are assigned to the coordinate type.

For example, if the sequence number for coordinate type R is 3, any item assigned to coordinate type R will have a sequence number of 3. If you change the sequence number for coordinate type R from 3 to 5, any items assigned to coordinate type R will still have a sequence number of 3.

To update the sequence number assigned to item coordinates, select Submit Update at the Work with Item Coordinate Type Screen.

When you submit the Update Coordinate Type job, the system evaluates each item in the Item Coordinate table. If the item is assigned to a coordinate type, the system updates the sequence number defined for the item coordinate to match the sequence number defined for the coordinate type in the Item Coordinate Type table. Additionally, if the coordinate type has been deleted, the system will update the coordinate type and sequence number defined for the coordinate item to blank.

Note:

You can also update the sequence number assigned to item coordinates by advancing to the Change Item Coordinate Screen for each item coordinate you wish to update; however, if you have deleted the coordinate type, you will receive an error message at the Change Item Coordinate screen: Item Coordinate Type not found.

Work with Item Coordinate Type Screen

Use this screen to review and work with item coordinate types.

How to display this screen: Enter WICT in the Fast path field at the top of a menu or select Work with Item Coordinate Types from a menu.

Field Description
Type

A code representing a type of item coordinate, such as mandatory or optional.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Description

A description of the item coordinate type.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Seq (sequence)

The sequence number assigned to the item coordinate type, indicating the sequence in which coordinate items assigned to this type display on the Display Coordinate Items window in order entry.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Create an item coordinate type

Select Create to advance to the Create Item Coordinate Type Screen.

Change an item coordinate type

Select Change for an item coordinate type to advance to the Change Item Coordinate Type Screen. See the Create Item Coordinate Type Screen for field descriptions.

Delete an item coordinate type

Select Delete for an item coordinate type to delete it.

Update the sequence number assigned to each coordinate item to match the sequence number defined for the coordinate type in the Item Coordinate Type table.

Select Submit Update. The system displays the message Job (UPD_ITMTYP) has been submitted to batch at the bottom of the screen. See Updating Coordinate Type Sequence.

Create Item Coordinate Type Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create an item coordinate type.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with Item Coordinate Type Screen.

Field Description
Coordinate type

A code representing a type of item coordinate, such as mandatory or optional.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions.

Create: required.

Change: display-only.
Description

A description of the item coordinate type.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Sequence

The sequence number assigned to the item coordinate type, indicating the sequence in which coordinate items assigned to this type display on the Display Coordinate Items window in order entry.

Numeric, 3 positions; required.

Setting up SKUs

Purpose: The following topics describe working with SKU elements, groups, split SKUs, and using the SKU generator.

Working with SKU Elements (WSK1, WSK2, WSK3)

Purpose: The SKU Element function defines the valid values for the three SKU elements (for example, style, color and size). The values defined in this record will be validated throughout the system. For example, if the SKU element is color, you must enter all your valid colors in the SKU Element table.

The SKU Element 1, 2 and 3 tables must be completed if you use SKUs.

When defining SKU elements in the SKU table, the SKU Element 1 field defines the primary SKU element (e.g., style), the Element 2 field defines the secondary SKU element (e.g., color), and the Element 3 field defines the third SKU element (e.g., size).

The Work with SKU Element 1, 2, and 3 screens appear identical.

Uploading: You can use the Submit Supporting Data Upload Screen (SDUP) to upload new SKU elements. See Importing Item-Related Supporting Data (SDUP) for an overview.

In this topic:

Work with SKU Element Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create, change, delete or display a SKU element.

How to display this screen: Enter:

  • WSK1 in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with SKU Element 1 from a menu to work with the primary SKU elements
  • WSK2 in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with SKU Element 2 from a menu to work with the secondary SKU elements
  • WSK3 in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with SKU Element 3 from a menu to work with the third SKU elements
Field Description
Element

The code that represents a valid SKU element.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the SKU element.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Sort sequence # (Sort collating sequence number)

The sequence number used to determine how SKUs sort for an item. See Create SKU Element Screen for a complete description.

Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Create SKU element

Select Create to advance to the Create SKU Element Screen.

Change SKU element

Select Change for a SKU element to advance to the Change SKU Element Screen. See the Create SKU Element Screen for field descriptions.

Delete SKU element

Select Delete for a SKU element to delete it.

Display SKU element

Select Display for a SKU element to advance to the Display SKU Element Screen. See the Create SKU Element Screen for field descriptions.

Create SKU Element Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a SKU element.

How to display this screen: Select Create on the Work with SKU Element Screen.

Field Description
Element

The code that represents a valid SKU element. Values defined in this record will be validated throughout the system. For example, if the SKU element is color, enter all your valid colors in this table.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Description

The description associated with the SKU element code. For example, if the SKU element code is BLK, the description might be black.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; required.
Sort sequence # (Sort collating sequence number)

The sequence number used to determine how SKUs sort for an item.

The system assigns a SKU sort sequence number in increments of 10 to each SKU of an item based on the sort collating sequence number defined for each SKU element:

See Assigning SKU Sort Sequence Numbers Based on SKU Element for an overview.

You can also manually assign a SKU sort sequence number to a SKUI; see SKU Sort Sequence Numbers for an overview.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.

Work with SKU Element 2 (WSK2)

See Working with SKU Elements (WSK1, WSK2, WSK3).

Work with SKU Element 3 (WSK3)

See Working with SKU Elements (WSK1, WSK2, WSK3).

Working with SKU Groups (WISG)

Purpose: Use the Work with SKU Groups menu option to set up standard combinations of SKU elements for the types of items you sell. For example, you could set up a group for shoes that includes standard sizes and widths.

Use in SKU generator: You can use SKU groups to reduce data entry when you use the SKU generator. By assigning an item to a SKU group, or specifying a group when you use the SKU generator, you automatically default each element in the group onto the SKU Generator Screen (Entering SKU Information). You can then edit these defaulted elements as needed before generating the SKU combinations.

SKU group structure: You can set up a SKU group to contain one or two SKU elements.

Example: A SKU group for shoes might contain two elements, size and width; or a SKU group for baby clothes might contain one element, standard baby sizes such as 3 months, 6 months, etc.

Additionally, you can designate a SKU group as a primary group, consisting of the primary element only.

Example: If your first SKU element is color, a primary SKU group is restricted to color SKU values.

You cannot set up a SKU group that contains all three SKU elements.

Assigning to an item: If you assign a SKU group to an item through the Work with Item/SKUs menu option (fast path = MITM), the SKU group defaults in the SKU Generator and is display-only. See Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM). If you do not assign a default SKU group to an item, you can specify a group at the time you use the SKU Generator.

Exclusions: When setting up a SKU group, you can identify certain combinations that you typically want to exclude when you use the SKU generator. For example, you might not ordinarily carry narrow-width shoes in sizes larger than 10. You can flag these SKU combinations so that the SKU generator does not automatically create them unless you reset the exclusion flag.

In this topic:

For more information: See Using the SKU Generator (ESKG) for more information on how to use SKU groups within the SKU generator.

Work with SKU Groups Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WISG in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu, or select Work with SKU Groups from a menu.

Field Description
Group

A code that represents a group of standard combinations of SKUs for an item.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the SKU group.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Clr element

Indicates whether this SKU Group contains only the first, or primary, SKU element. Valid values are:

YES = This SKU group contains the primary SKU element only.

NO = This SKU group is not limited to the primary SKU element.

Note:

The abbreviation from the Split SKU Element Column 1 Heading (A34) system control value is listed above the word “Element.”

Screen Option Procedure

Create a SKU group

Select Create to advance to the Create SKU Group Screen.

Change a SKU group

Select Change for a group to advance to the Change SKU Group Screen. See the Create SKU Group Screen for field descriptions.

If the SKU group contains two elements, you advance to the Change SKU Group Exclusion Screen (Creating or Changing) when you complete this screen.

Delete a SKU group

Select Delete for a group to delete it.

Display a SKU group

Select Display for a group to advance to the Display SKU Group Screen. See the Create SKU Group Screen for field descriptions.

Select OK to advance to the Display SKU Group Exclusion screen if there are two SKU elements in the SKU group, or select Exit to return to the Work with SKU Groups screen.

Create SKU Group Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to define a new SKU group.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with SKU Groups Screen.

Field Description
SKU group

A code that represents a group of standard combinations of SKUs for an item. You can use SKU groups to reduce the data entry required for the SKU generator.

Numeric, 3 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Description

The description of the SKU group.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
COLOR

Defines whether this SKU group includes only the primary SKU element (SKU element 1). Valid values are:

selected = This group contains only the primary SKU element. You must enter 1 in the Element field, below, and can enter values for only the first SKU element.

Example: If your three SKU elements are color, size, and width, the group can contain only the first SKU element, color.

unselected = This group is not restricted to the primary SKU element. The group can include SKU values from one or two SKU elements.

Example: If your three SKU elements are color, size, and width, the group can contain any one or two of these elements.

Note:

The code from the SKU Element Description 1 (G37) system control value is listed here as the field name.
Element (First SKU group element)

The first SKU element to include in the SKU group. You must include at least one but not more than two elements.

If you set the previous field to Y, then you must enter 1 here, and can enter values for only this SKU element. If you set the previous field to N, you can enter 1, 2, or 3, to select any of the SKU elements.

Numeric, 1 position; required.
SKU values (Unlabeled fields below the first SKU element)

The SKU values to include in the SKU group. You must enter at least one SKU value, and can enter up to 30. Your entries are validated against the SKU Element 1, 2, or 3 table, depending on your entry in the first SKU group element field, above.

Example: If your SKU elements are color, size, and width, and you entered 2 in the element field, above, you use these fields to enter sizes such as 2, 4, 6, and so on, or SMLL, MEDM, or LRGE. The system validates your entries against the SKU Element 2 table.

Note:

The system does not prevent you from entering the same SKU value more than once. For example, if a valid SKU value is SMLL, the system does not prevent you from entering SMLL more than once. However, the SKU generator will still work correctly; the system will not attempt to create multiple copies of the same SKU combination.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions each; required.

Element (Second SKU group element)

The second SKU element to include in the SKU group. You can enter values for a second SKU element only if this is not a primary SKU group. You can enter 1, 2, or 3, to select any of the SKU elements, excluding the element you specified for the first SKU element, above.

Example: If your SKU elements are color, size, and width, and you entered sizes for the first SKU group element fields, above, you can enter 1 (color) or 3 (width) here.

Numeric, 1 position; optional.
SKU values (Unlabeled fields below the second SKU element)

The SKU values to include in the SKU group. You must enter at least one SKU value if you specified a second SKU element, and can enter up to 30. Your entries are validated against the SKU Element 1, 2, or 3 table, depending on your entry in the second SKU group element field, above.

Example: If your SKU elements are color, size, and width, and you entered 3 in the element field, above, you use these fields to enter widths such as A, B, C, D, and so on. The system validates your entries against the SKU Element 3 table.

Note:

The system does not prevent you from entering the same SKU value more than once. For example, if a valid SKU value is AA, the system does not prevent you from entering AA more than once. However, the SKU generator will still work correctly; the system will not attempt to create multiple copies of the same SKU combination.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions each; required.

Instructions:

  1. Complete the necessary fields for the group and the first SKU element. Enter each value to include for the first SKU element. If you designate the SKU group as a primary group, then you must enter 1 in the first SKU group element field, and only values from SKU element one.
  2. Optionally, complete the second SKU element and values if this is not a primary SKU group.

When you complete this screen, you advance to the Change SKU Group Exclusion Screen (Creating or Changing), unless the SKU group contains only one SKU element.

Change SKU Group Exclusion Screen (Creating or Changing)

Purpose: Use this screen to identify the SKU combinations to flag for deletion when you use the SKU generator.

Example: You have a SKU group for sportcoats that includes sizes from 38 to 50, and lengths of short, regular, and long. If you do not ordinarily offer long sportcoats in sizes under 40, you use this screen to flag any 38 long SKU combination for deletion. When you use the SKU generator, this SKU combination will have the Delete flag selected, although you can override it at that point if you want to create the SKU for an item.

How to display this screen: Complete the Create SKU Group Screen or the Change SKU Group Screen; however, you do not advance to this screen if the SKU group contains only one SKU element.

Field Description
SKU group

A code representing the SKU group you are working with.

Numeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Description

The description of the SKU group you are working with.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
SIZE/Elem 2

The first SKU element in the SKU group. Depending on how you have set up your SKU elements, the description of this field will vary.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
WDTH/Elem 3

The second SKU element in the SKU group. Depending on how you have set up your SKU elements, the description of this field will vary.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Exclude

Indicates whether the SKU generator should create this SKU combination with the Delete flag selected, indicating that the SKU combination will not be created unless you override this setting. Valid values are:

YES = When you use the SKU generator, the Delete flag for this SKU combination will be selected.

No = When you use the SKU generator, the Delete flag for this SKU combination will be blank.

Completing this screen: To identify SKU combinations that should be created in the SKU generator with the Delete flag selected:, select each SKU combination you normally exclude in the SKU generator, Tab through each excluded combination that you would like to include when generating SKUs.

Using the SKU Generator (ESKG)

Purpose: The SKU generator creates SKUs for an item by allowing you to specify the valid SKU elements (for example, size, color and width) and using them to create an array of valid SKU combinations.

You can use the SKU generator repeatedly for the same item. For example, if you initially create SKUs for an item in one color with various sizes, and later determine that the item is available in a second color, you can create SKUs for the new color and sizes.

SKU groups: You can use SKU groups to facilitate SKU building by reducing data entry. SKU groups allow you to define common sizes, etc. for types of items.

When generating SKUs for an item, you can accept the defaults as defined in a SKU groups, or you can add or subtract individual SKUs.

Create SKU Offers? The Automatically Create SKU Offers (J71) system control value indicates whether the SKU generator automatically creates SKU Offers and single-unit SKU Prices based on current or future Item Offers and Item Prices. See that system control value for more information.

In this topic:

SKU Generator Prompt Screen (Selecting an Item)

Purpose: Use this screen to select an item and begin the process of generating SKUs.

How to display this screen: Enter ESKG in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select SKU Generator from a menu.

Entering an item: Enter a valid item code to proceed to the SKU Generator Screen (Entering SKU Information). The item must be SKU’ed (have a selected SKU field in the Item table), or an error message indicates: SKU Generation is not allowed for non-SKU items.

You cannot use the SKU generator if it is already in use by another person; instead, an error message such as the following indicates: EJOHNSON already active in the SKU Generator.

SKU Generator Screen (Entering SKU Information)

Purpose: Use this screen to enter the information to default for the SKU combinations you are creating. The information includes SKU group, vendor item information, and individual SKU elements.

How to display this screen:

Field Description
Item

The code and description of the item for which you are generating SKUs.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions (item code) 30 positions (description); display-only.
SKU group

If you have assigned the item to a SKU group in the Item table, the group appears here and is display-only; the associated SKU elements appear on the screen. Otherwise, you can enter a valid SKU group to default the related SKU elements.

Note:

Enter the SKU group before entering any SKU values, or the system will clear your SKU value entries when it defaults the values from the SKU group.

SKU groups are defined in and validated against the SKU Group table; see Working with SKU Groups (WISG).

Numeric, 3 positions; optional or display-only.
SKU default cost

The cost of the SKU. The default cost you entered when you created the item defaults here, but you can override it here or for individual SKUs. Overriding the cost here does not update the default cost for the item.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.

Original retail price

Not currently implemented.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
List price

The price at which manufacturers recommend retailers sell a product.

The system uses this price when you process item to item transfers (inventory transaction code = G). The list price of the source and target items must be identical, or the system will not allow you to process the transfer. If you are changing the quantity as part of the transfer, the system will confirm that the list price of the source item is the same as the list price of the target item based on the target item's quantity. For example, if the target item will constitute a set of three of the source item, the list price of the target item should be three times the list price of the source item.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional (required if you process item to item transfers).
Create vendor items

Defines whether you want to create vendor items. Valid values are:

  1. Selected = Create vendor items for each SKU you create. The vendor item code defaults on the Work with SKU Generator Screen as described below under Item.

If the Default SKU generator vendor item system control value is selected: The system defaults the SKU information to the vendor item code field. Typically, you would default this information if your company's SKU codes are the same as your vendor's SKU codes. Having the system create the vendor item codes can save you data entry. You can override the vendor item codes if necessary.

If the Default SKU generator vendor item system control value is unselected: You will need to edit the vendor item codes for the SKUs so that they are each unique, or the system displays an error message.

 
  1. Unselected = Do not create vendor items. The vendor item information is display-only on the Work with SKU Generator Screen. You should not complete any of the vendor-related fields described below.
Vendor

The code used to identify the vendor. Vendor codes are defined in and validated against the Vendor table. The vendor you assigned to the item, if any, defaults. Enter a vendor code only if you are creating vendor items.

See Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Numeric, 7 positions; optional (required if you are creating vendor items).
Vendor name

The name of the vendor.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Item

The vendor's item code. The same item code will be used for all the SKUs you create, unless you change the vendor item code on the Work with SKU Generator Screen. If the Default SKU Generator Vendor Item (C61) system control value is selected, and you enter an item here, the system appends the SKU information to your entry in this field to compose the vendor item code.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
Description

The vendor's description of the item.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional (required if creating vendor items).
Price

The vendor's price for the item. When you enter a purchase order, this price defaults.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Lead days

The number of days it takes a vendor to deliver this item when you place a purchase order. The system adds the lead days to the current date to determine the due date for an item on a purchase order.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
U/M (Unit of measure)

A standard by which a vendor's item is sold. Typical units of measure include:

  • EA - each
  • IN - inch
  • C12 - case of 12

Unit of measure is defined in and validated against the Unit of Measure table. See Working with Units of Measure (WUOM).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Duty (Duty percent)

The percentage of duty or tariff charges applicable to foreign orders.

Update vendor item additional charge: The system creates an additional charge for each vendor item, using the first purchase order additional charge code whose type is D (duty). If there is no duty additional charge code defined in your company, the system creates a blank additional charge for the vendor item. See Working With PO Additional Charges (WPAC), and Working with Vendor Items (WVNI).

Calculate receiving cost: When you enter or receive purchase orders, the system uses this percentage to calculate the amount of duty that applies to the item. This duty percentage will not be visible when you review the purchase order in purchase order inquiry; however, it will be added to the last purchase cost in the SKU table. See Purchase Order Receiving Overview.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Color/style/size (SKU elements)

Use these three levels to define the elements to create the various SKU combinations. You can enter up to 30 different elements for each type. If the item is assigned to a SKU group, or if you entered a SKU group at this screen, the SKUs for the group default; however, you can override these defaults.

SKU elements are validated against the SKU Element 1, 2, and 3 tables (fast paths = WSK1, WSK2, WSK3). If you enter a SKU element that has not been created, an error message indicates:

SKU Element (xxxx) does not exist.

See Working with SKU Elements (WSK1, WSK2, WSK3).

Note:

No error message indicates if you enter the same SKU element value more than once; however, the system still creates the SKU combinations normally, without duplicates.

Alphanumeric, thirty 4-position fields for each element; required.

Completing this screen: Select Accept to accept and begin the SKU generation, or select Reject to reject the SKU generator information. If you select Accept, you advance to the Work with SKU Generator Screen.

Work with SKU Generator Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review the SKU combinations generated based on your entries at the SKU Generator screen, and to change this information as needed. At this screen, you can:

  • delete unnecessary SKUs which were created by the SKU generator
  • add SKUs which weren't created
  • override information for each SKU or vendor item

How to display this screen: The system creates SKU s (and, optionally, vendor items) and then advances to this screen when you select Accept to accept your entries at the SKU Generator Screen (Entering SKU Information).

Field Description
Item

The code and description of the item.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions (item code) 30 positions (description); display-only.
Vendor

The numeric code that identifies the supplier of an item.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Default cost

The default cost of the item from the previous screen.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Create vendor items

Displayed regardless of your entry in the Create vendor items field on the previous screen.

Valid values are:

  • Selected = Create vendor items.
  • Unselected = Do not create vendor items. The related fields are not enterable.

blank = The vendor item-related fields are enterable on the screen.

Note:

The system does not create the vendor items when you accept your entries.

Your entry on the previous screen defaults. Enter a new value to change whether the vendor item-related fields are enterable.
Vendor item

The vendor's item code. Your entry at the SKU Generator Screen (Entering SKU Information) defaults.

If the Default SKU generator vendor item system control value is selected: The SKU information appears after the defaulted vendor item code. The SKU information appears by itself if you didn't enter a vendor item at the SKU Generator Screen (Entering SKU Information).

If the Default SKU generator vendor item system control value is unselected: This field is blank if you are not creating vendor items, or if you did not enter a vendor item code at the SKU Generator Screen (Entering SKU Information).

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
Description

The vendor's description of the item, defaulted from the SKU Generator Screen (Entering SKU Information). You can override this information.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Price

The vendor's price for the item, defaulted from the SKU Generator Screen (Entering SKU Information). You can override this information.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Lead days

The number of days it takes a vendor to deliver this item when it is ordered through a purchase order. Added to the current date to determine the due date on a purchase order detail line.

Defaults from the SKU Generator Screen (Entering SKU Information). You can override this information.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Unit of measure

A standard by which a vendor's item is sold. Typical units of measure include:

  1. EA - each
  2. IN - inch
  3. C12 - case of 12

Unit of measure is validated against the Unit of Measure table.

Defaults from the SKU Generator Screen (Entering SKU Information). You can override this information.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Duty (Duty percent)

The percentage of duty or tariff charges applicable to foreign orders. You can override this information.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
SKU description

The SKU description.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.
SKU

The specific SKU elements.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Sort seq. (SKU sort sequence number)

The sequence number used to determine the order in which SKUs sort.

You can use the sort sequence to display SKUs in a different order, such as by size, rather than alphanumerically by SKU code. See SKU Sort Sequence Numbers for an overview.

Required if the Require Sort Sequence Number in the SKU File (F23) system control value is selected.

The system automatically assigns a SKU sort sequence number if the Auto Assign Sort Sequence Number During SKU Generation (F24) system control value is selected. If this system control value is selected, this field does not display.

Numeric, 5 positions; required if the Require Sort Sequence Number system control value is selected.

Cost

The cost of the SKU, defaulted from the Item table. You can override this value.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Delete

Defines whether you wish to delete this SKU.

Valid values are:

  • Selected = Delete this SKU.
  • Unselected = Do not delete this SKU; the SKU generator should create it.

Defaults to selected if you are using a SKU group, and you flagged the SKU combination for exclusion. See Working with SKU Groups (WISG).

L/S class (Long SKU class)

A code you can assign to SKUs for tracking and reporting purposes. The long SKU class you assigned to the base item defaults.

If the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected, long SKU classes are linked to long SKU departments and are called retail classes. Retail classes are department specific whereas regular long SKU classes are unique and remain constant across departments. For this reason, when the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected, you can only enter a retail class in this field that is assigned to the long SKU department of the base item. If you enter a long SKU class that is not linked to the long SKU department, the system will not let you proceed and displays an error message:

L/S Class (xxxx) was not found in L/S Department (xx).

Retail classes are defined in and validated against the Retail Class table; see the Work with Retail Class Screen for more information.

Long SKU classes are defined in and validated against the Long SKU Class table; see Working with Long SKU Classes (WLSC).

Note:

When the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected, you can not access the Work with Long SKU Class menu option or the WLSC fast path.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
L/S vendor (Long SKU vendor)

A code you can assign to SKUs for tracking and reporting purposes. The long SKU vendor you assigned to the item defaults.

Long SKU vendor codes are defined in the SKU table but are not validated in Order Management System.

Alphanumeric, 7 positions; optional.
L/S style (Long SKU style)

A code you can assign to SKUs for tracking and reporting purposes. Long SKU style is also used by external systems to identify the item.

If the Default SKU Generator L/S Style (J04) system control value is selected, the SKU generator automatically creates a Long SKU style for each SKU.

  • If a long SKU style code is defined for the base item, the system creates a long SKU style code for each SKU using the base long SKU style code + SKU code.
  • If a long SKU style code is not defined for the base item, the system creates a long SKU style code for each SKU using the item code + SKU code.

Note:

The Long SKU style field is 20 positions. If the generated long SKU style code is greater than 20 positions, the system will truncate the value to 20 positions.
 

If the Default SKU Generator L/S Style (J04) system control value is unselected and the Require L/S Style (I94) system control value is unselected, the system defaults the long sku style code defined for the base item to this field.

Required if the Require L/S Style (I94) system control value is selected: L/S Style Required. Additionally, the system validates that the value you enter is not assigned to another item or SKU: L/S Style is a duplicate.

Long SKU style codes are defined in the SKU table but are not validated in Order Management System.

Numeric, 20 positions; optional.
Original retail price

Not currently implemented.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
List price

The price at which manufacturers recommend retailers sell a product.

The system uses this price when you process item to item transfers (inventory transaction code = G). The list price of the source and target items must be identical, or the system will not allow you to process the transfer. If you are changing the quantity as part of the transfer, the system will confirm that the list price of the source item is the same as the list price of the target item based on the target item's quantity. For example, if the target item will constitute a set of three of the source item, the list price of the target item should be three times the list price of the source item.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional (required if you process item to item transfers).

Instructions: To accept the SKU information:

  1. Edit or add information to the necessary fields.
  2. To create additional SKUs, select Create and enter the SKU details at the Create SKU Generator Screen (Creating Individual SKUs).
  3. Select Accept to accept. The system displays an error message if any of the SKU combinations are duplicates of existing SKUs. Flag each duplicate for deletion by selecting the Delete field, or correct as desired.
  4. Select Accept again. You advance to the Enter SKU Base Information Pop-Up Window.

Enter SKU Base Information Pop-Up Window

Purpose: Use this window to define the information applicable to all the SKUs you are creating. The system copies this information to each SKU. You can override this information on the Change SKU screen.

How to display this screen: Select Accept at the Work with SKU Generator Screen.

Field Description
Item

The code and description of the base item for which you are creating SKUs.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions (item code) 30 positions (description); display-only.
U/M (Unit of measure)

A standard by which a vendor's item is sold. Typical units of measure include:

  • EA - each
  • IN - inch
  • C12 - case of 12

If you leave this field blank, the unit of measure defined for the base item defaults for the SKUs.

Unit of measure is validated against the Unit of Measure table. See Working with Units of Measure (WUOM).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Itm category (Item category)

A code assigned to the item to classify and group like items for use in the Item Relationships function. The Compatibility field should also be completed to fully use the Item Relationships function. See Working with Item Category Codes (WITG).

Numeric, 4 positions; optional.
Compatibility

A code assigned to an item or SKU which you can use in the Item Relationships function to display a list of other compatible items.

Example:

Item PC1 represents an IBM PC. You can assign a compatibility code of 01 (IBM Products) to this item and to other IBM items such as printers, network cards, etc.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Prep code

A code used to indicate any special preparation or handling required for the SKU. Informational only.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Return/vendor

Indicates whether the SKU can be returned; informational only.

Valid values are:

  • Selected = This SKU is returnable.
  • Unselected = This SKU is not returnable.
Country of origin

A code representing the country where the SKU originated. Used by the World Pack interface to determine duty for shipments to certain countries.

Country codes are defined in and validated against the Country table; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

S/O control (Soldout control)

This code, from the Soldout Control table, indicates when the item is considered sold out. An item can be sold out:

  • immediately
  • when the available quantity equals zero
  • when the available quantity plus any quantity due on purchase orders equals zero.

If you have specified a Default Soldout Control Code (D72) it defaults here, but you can override it.

If the Disregard Soldout Controls for Non-Allocatable Warehouses (J27) system control value is selected, the system disregards soldout control rules for items reserved against a non-allocatable warehouse. If the item cannot be reserved, the system backorders the item in the non-allocatable warehouse. See this system control value for more information.

See Working with Soldout Controls (WSLD) for more information on working with soldout controls.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Sup B/O card (Suppress backorder card)

Indicates whether to produce a backorder card for the SKUs. You might use this field to identify promotional items, free gifts, or catalogs, to prevent them from generating backorder cards or appearing on backorder lists.

Valid values are:

  • Selected = Suppress normal backorder card generation for this item.
  • Unselected = Do not suppress normal backorder card generation.

If the Unconditional Suppression of Backorder Card (F19) system control value is selected, suppressed SKUs will never appear on a backorder card. If this system control value is unselected, suppressed SKUs will appear only on the first backorder card for the order, and only if an unsuppressed item triggers the backorder card generation.

Zone reservation

A code assigned to weather-sensitive items or SKUs such as plant stock to insure that the SKUs will ship to different regions of the country within date windows suited to the regions.

Zone reservation coded items/SKUs will not be reserved during order entry; instead they will be assigned a backorder status of Z (Zoned reservation), and will be reserved during pick generation using the batch reservation function, at an optimal time for shipping.

 

Zone reservation logic requires:

  • The item/SKU must be assigned a zone reservation code. For SKU’ed items, the zone reservation code must be assigned at the SKU level.
  • The offer associated with the order must be assigned a season code
  • The shipping address for the order must be assigned to a geographic zone, using either the postal ZIP code of the ship to address, or the SCF (Sectional Center Facility) code of the ship to address. The SCF code consists of the first three digits of the ZIP code.
  • For each zone reservation code, you must define zone date windows for all geographic zones in the country

See Creating and Maintaining Geographic Zones (WGZN).

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Warehouse

A code that represents the warehouse where you will keep the SKU. The default warehouse from the System Control table defaults.

Warehouse codes are validated against the Warehouse table. See Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS).

Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Whs max (Warehouse maximum)

The recommended maximum quantity of the SKU to keep in the warehouse.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Whs min (Warehouse minimum)

The recommended minimum quantity of the SKU to keep in the warehouse.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Allocation freeze

Indicates whether reservations can be performed against the SKU in the specified warehouse.

  • Selected = The SKU is on hold for item reservation. All other inventory transactions are allowed.
  • Unselected = The SKU is not on hold for item reservation.
Protected Quantity

An amount of inventory that is not reserved automatically for this SKU. You can reserve the protected quantity through Working with Interactive Reservation (MIRV) only, as in the case of large wholesale orders or preferred mail order customers. Protected quantity is included in on-hand quantity.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Reorder qty (Reorder quantity)

The quantity of this SKU that should be ordered when the on-hand quantity reaches the minimum from the Min Qty field.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Location

The default location in the warehouse where the item is kept. This location is sometimes referred to as the “primary primary.”The “primary primary” location is stored in the field in the SKU table.

Alphanumeric, 7 positions; optional.
Loc max (Location maximum)

The maximum quantity of the item to keep in this location.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Loc min (Location maximum)

The minimum quantity of the item to keep in this location.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Freeze flag

Indicates whether to generate pick slips for this item location.

Valid values are:

  • Selected = This item location is available for pick slips.
  • Unselected = This item location is not available for pick slips.
Restrict

Indicates whether you can accept an order for this item/SKU in and whether demand is captured.

  • Selected = The operator cannot accept an order for this item/SKU.
  • Unselected = The operator can accept an order for this item/SKU.

Create SKU Generator Screen (Creating Individual SKUs)

Purpose: Use this screen to add a SKU that was not generated based on the information from the SKU Generator screen. For example, if your SKU generator for Shoes does not generate a SKU for Size 11 shoes, you may want to add the SKUs Black, 11, B width, and Black, 11, A width to the SKUs for this item.

How to display this screen: Select Create on the Work with SKU Generator Screen.

Field descriptions: See SKU Generator Screen (Entering SKU Information) for field definitions.

Resequence the SKU Collating Sequence Number (RSCS)

Purpose: Use the Resequence SKU Collating Sequence Number Screen to assign a SKU sort sequence number to each SKU of an item.

In this topic:

SKU Sort Sequence Numbers

SKU Sort Sequence Numbers are sequence numbers assigned to SKUs to determine the order in which the SKUs sort. You can use the sort sequence to display SKUs in a different order, such as by size, rather than alphanumerically by SKU code.

Example: T-Shirts in sizes extra small, small, medium, large and extra large that are not assigned a SKU sort sequence number sort alphanumerically by SKU code:

  • t-shirt LRGE
  • t-shirt MEDM
  • t-shirt SMLL
  • t-shirt XLRG
  • t-shirt XSML

You can define a SKU sort sequence number for each SKU of the t-shirt so that they sort from smallest to largest size:

  • t-shirt XSML (sequence # 1)
  • t-shirt SMLL (sequence # 2)
  • t-shirt MEDM (sequence # 3)
  • t-shirt LRGE (sequence # 4)
  • t-shirt XLRG (sequence # 5)

Note:

If some SKUs of an item are not assigned a sort sequence number, the system sorts those SKUs first alphanumerically by SKU code, and then displays SKUs assigned to a sort sequence alphanumerically by sort sequence. For example, if sizes SMLL, MEDM, and LRGE are assigned a sort sequence number, but sizes XSML and XLRG are not assigned a sort sequence number, the system displays sizes XLRG and XSML first: XLRG, XSML, SMLL, MEDM, LRG.

Where is the Sort Sequence Number Used?

The sequence number is used to sort items:

  1. when scanning for a SKU during purchase order maintenance
  2. when scanning for a SKU during order entry and maintenance

How is a Sort Sequence Number Assigned?

You can assign a SKU sort sequence number to each SKU of an item in the following ways.

  1. Enter a SKU sort sequence number in the Sort sequence number field on the Create SKU 1 of 2 (With Overrides) Screen or the Change SKU screen.
  2. Select an item that contains SKUs at the Resequence SKU Collating Sequence Number Screen and select OK to have the system automatically assign a sort sequence number to each SKU, based on the SKU collating sequence number defined for each SKU element. See Assigning SKU Sort Sequence Numbers Based on SKU Element.
  3. Enter a SKU sort sequence number in the Sort sequence number field on the Work with SKU Generator Screen in Using the SKU Generator (ESKG).
  4. Select the Auto Assign Sort Sequence Number During SKU Generation (F24) system control value to have the system automatically assign a SKU sort sequence number to each SKU in the SKU Generator (fast path = ESKG).

Related System Control Values

System Control Value Description

Auto Assign Sort Sequence Number During SKU Generation (F24)

Defines whether the system automatically assigns a SKU sort sequence number to each SKU created in the SKU Generator.

Require Sort Sequence Number in the SKU File (F23)

Defines whether the Sort sequence number field on the Create SKU and Change SKU screens in Work with Item/SKUs is a required field.

Assigning SKU Sort Sequence Numbers Based on SKU Element

The system uses the sort collating sequence number defined in Working with SKU Elements (WSK1, WSK2, WSK3) to determine the SKU sort sequence number to assign to each SKU. The system assigns a sort sequence number to each SKU in increments of 10.

Example:

For example, you are generating SKUs for a skirt in colors black and navy, styles petite and regular and sizes small and medium.

In Work with SKU Elements, the sort sequence numbers are defined as follows:

  • SKU Element 1

  • black: sort sequence number is blank

  • navy: sort sequence number is blank

  • SKU Element 2

  • petite: sort sequence number is 1

  • regular: sort sequence number is 12

  • SKU Element 3

  • small: sort sequence number is 2

  • medium: sort sequence number is 5

To assign the sort sequence number, the system first retrieves the sort sequence number defined in Work with SKU Element 1. In this example, the colors black and navy are not assigned a sort sequence number. Since they are not assigned a sort number, the system sorts the elements defined in SKU Element 1 alphanumerically.

The system then retrieves the sort sequence number defined in Work with SKU Element 2. In the example, petite is assigned a sort sequence number of 1 and regular is assigned a sort sequence number of 12. The system sorts petite styles before regular styles.

The system then retrieves the sort sequence number defined in Work with SKU Element 3. In the example, small is assigned a sort sequence number of 2 and medium is assigned a sort sequence number of 5. The system sorts small sizes before medium sizes.

The system assigns SKU sort sequence numbers to each SKU based on the sort collating sequence numbers defined for each SKU element:

Item/ SKU Element 1/ Sequence # Element 2/ Sequence # Element 3/ Sequence # SKU Sort Sequence Number

skirt

black (blank)

petite (1)

small (2)

10

skirt

black (blank)

petite (1)

medium (5)

20

skirt

black (blank)

regular (12)

small (2)

30

skirt

black (blank)

regular (12)

medium (5)

40

skirt

navy (blank)

petite (1)

small (2)

50

skirt

navy (blank)

petite (1)

medium (5)

60

skirt

navy (blank)

regular (12)

small (2)

70

skirt

navy (blank)

regular (12)

medium (5)

80

Resequence SKU Collating Sequence Number Screen

Use this screen to select an item you wish to assign SKU sort sequence numbers to for each of the item's SKUs.

The following error message indicates if the Auto Assign Sort Sequence Number During SKU Generation (F24) system control value is unselected: Auto Assign Sort Seq# is not selected.

How to display this screen: Enter RSCS in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Resequence SKU Collating Sequence Number from a menu.

Field Description
Item number

The item you wish to assign SKU sort sequence numbers to for each of the item's SKUs.

The following error message indicates if you enter an item that does not contain SKUs: Item entered is a Non-SKU’d Item.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.

Working with Sets

In this part: The following topics describe how to create, change, delete, and display sets.

Entering Set Information (WSET)

Purpose: Use the Work with Sets function to indicate which component items make up a set. A set is a group of two or more items that you sell together as a unit, usually at a reduced price. The items that make up a set are often referred to as components. You can also offer these components individually.

The system identifies a set item by the setting of S in the Kit type field. When the Order Entry operator enters the set item, a line is added to the order for each component of the set. The set item itself is a non-inventory item. All inventory is kept at the component level.

The system tracks Unit Demand (Units Order) at both the component item level and set level, and Dollar Demand at the set level only. For example, a set is made up of 3 combs and 2 brushes. Someone orders the comb/brush set for $15.00. Units ordered for the comb/brush set increases by 1, units ordered for brushes increase by 2, and units ordered for combs increase by 3. Dollars ordered for the set item only increases by $15.00. Dollars orders for the component items increase only when you sell them as separate items.

Making sure the set ships together: You must make sure to coordinate group the components of the set; otherwise, it is possible for the main set item to print and bill even if there is not a sufficient quantity of the component items. Also, a set may split into several picks based on the warehouse, ship via, or location class assigned to the main set item and its components; see Splitting an Order Across Multiple Picks for a complete list of when the items on an order may split into several picks. Example: If the component items are assigned to location class B and the main set item is not, the main set item prints on a separate pick slip from the components.

Print set separately? If the main set item or its component items are flagged as ship alone items, a separate pick slip prints for each item included in the set with the message **Other Items Shipped Separately**. However, the system will include the main set item with one of the component items that is assigned to the same ship via in order to avoid printing the main set item on its own pick slip. If the main set item or its component items are not flagged to ship alone, the main set item and components are eligible to print on the same pick slip as the other items.

If set is on hold: If the main set item is on hold, the system does not perform pick slip preparation or produce a pick slip for the set and its components, regardless of whether the components of the set are coordinate grouped, until the main set item is released from hold. If another item on the order prints on a pick slip, the set and its components are listed as backordered on the pick slip.

If a component of the set is on hold:

  • The system does not perform pick slip preparation or produce a pick slip for the set and its components if the components of the set are coordinate grouped. If another item on the order prints on a pick slip, the set and its components are listed as backordered on the pick slip.
  • If the components of the set are not coordinate grouped, the system performs pick slip preparation and generates a pick slip for the main set item and the components that are not on hold. The component that is on hold is listed as backordered on the pick slip.

Secured feature: The Set Component Maintenance (J01) secured feature controls the ability to change, cancel, delete, or sell out a set component item in order entry and order maintenance. See that secured feature for more information.

Soldouts:

  • Component items(s):
  • If the Sell Out Set if Component is Sold Out (I05) system control value is selected: When any of the component items on a set are sold out based on the assigned soldout control code and the current inventory situation, the main set item and each of the component items are added to the order in a soldout status (S). For example, if the set includes five items, and one of the items is assigned a soldout control code indicating to sell the item out immediately, the main set item and all of the component items will be added to the order in a soldout status.
  • If this system control value is unselected: In the example described above, just the sold out component item is added to the order in a soldout status.
  • Main set item: If the main set item itself is assigned any soldout control code, the main set item and each of the component items are added to the order in a soldout status (S).

See Working with Soldout Controls (WSLD) for a discussion on how soldout controls indicate when an item is sold out.

Note:

When one or more of the set’s components are backordered (that is, they are unavailable, but no soldout control code has been assigned to them) the system will not perform pick slip preparation or generate a pick slip for the set item if the components are coordinate grouped.

Set component upload: You can use the set component upload option to create the set header and set components. See Importing Set Components (WCUP) for information.

Cannot add accompanying item with set: The system does not add an accompanying item to the order if it is associated with a set item.

In this topic:

Work with Sets Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WSET in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Sets from a menu.

Field Description
Item

The set item code.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.
Clr Size Wdth

The SKU elements. Scanning on these fields is not currently implemented.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; optional.
Description

The description of the set item.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional

Screen Option Procedure

Create a set

Select Create to advance to the Create Set Screen.

Delete a set

Select Delete for a set item to delete it. Deleting a set does not delete the set item or components, just the association (link) between the two.

Work with set component items

Select Work with for a set item to advance to the Work with Set Component Items Screen.

Create Set Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a set item.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Sets Screen, select Create.

Field Description
Set item

A set item/SKU. The set item/SKU is made up of two separate fields. The first part is the item code, which represents a unit of inventory. The second part is the SKU code, which represents the special characteristics of an item, such as color, size, width, etc.

The item code you enter must have an S in the Kit type field.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions (item), three 4-position fields (SKU); required.

Completing this screen: Enter the item number to advance to the Work with Set Component Items Screen.

Work with Set Component Items Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to add, change, delete, or display component items that make up a set (as defined by an S in the Kit Type field in the Item table).

How to display this screen:

Field Description
Item

A component item of the set. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table. You can define finished goods as component items; however, you cannot define other sets or variable sets as components.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.
SKU

The SKU elements that define the item.

Note:

If the item has SKUs, you must specify the specific SKU elements here. You do not have an opportunity in Order Entry to specify a component item's SKU.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; required if item has SKUs.
Qty

The number of units of this item to include in one set.

Numeric, 5 positions; required.
Cost % (Cost percentage)

The percentage of the set's cost that this item comprises. The total cost of all components must equal 100%.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
CG (Coordinate group)

A number that you can assign to components in a set to ensure that they will ship together. You should assign the same coordinate group number to all components of a set to ensure that they ship together. This coordinate group number will display in the order detail line in Order Entry.

Note:

You must make sure to coordinate group the components of the set; otherwise, it is possible for the main set item to print and bill even if there is not a sufficient quantity of the component items.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Avail

The total quantity available for the component item.

Note:

If you advanced to this screen from the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen, the available quantity reflects the selected warehouse only; otherwise, the quantity reflects all allocatable warehouses.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

To add components:

  1. Complete each required field for a component item and, optionally, the Coordinate group field.
  2. Select OK to add the new component item information and display it in the middle area of the screen.
  3. Continue with the above steps until you have defined all components of the set.
  4. Select Accept to accept the components. The system validates that the total cost percentage for all component items equals 100%. Correct any item's cost percentage, if necessary, by selecting Change for it to advance to the Change Set Component Item screen. Select Accept again when you are done.
Screen Option Procedure

Accept a set

Select Accept to accept the set information.

Change a component item

Select Change for a component item to advance to the Change Set Component Item Screen. See above for field descriptions.

Delete a component item

Select Delete for an item to delete it as a component of the set.

Display a component item

Select Display for an item to advance to the Display Set Component Item Screen. See above for field descriptions.

Entering Variable Set Information (WVST)

Overview: A variable set consists of a list of items that customers can choose from to make up the set they want to purchase. Individual items may also be selected from this screen. Typically, the items available in a variable set all exist on the same page of the catalog.

A variable set item is designated by a V in the Kit type field in the Item table. A variable set, for example a Wardrobe Set, may be a special collection of items such as: “Choose any 2 slacks, 1 jacket, and 1 belt from this page for only $200.00.” Variable set groups, in this case, must be defined for slacks, jackets, and belts, providing the customer with several combinations of colors and sizes.

In Order Entry, when the operator enters a variable set item, a pop-up window appears for each “group” of items in the variable set. Each pop-up window contains a list of valid items in the group. The operator must select the desired items from each group. The system will ensure that the customer orders the correct quantity from each variable set group by maintaining a counter of the number of items allowed as compared to the number of items selected. The variable set item does not appear on the order. Instead, the system creates order entry detail lines for each item picked from groups.

Unit Demand (units ordered) is tracked at the component item level only. For example: the variable set is made up of 2 pair of slacks, 1 jacket, and 1 belt. A customer orders the slacks, jacket, and belt as a variable set. Units ordered for the slacks increases by 2, units ordered for the jacket increases by 1, and units ordered for the belt increases by 1. Dollars ordered is tracked at the component item level only.

Note:

Variable sets are priced by item components; the price of the complete set is the total price of each of its components. Although you can enter a price for a variable set item at the item offer, the system does not use this price when totaling the price of the order.

Set component upload: You can use the set component upload option to create variable set groups and group components. See Importing Set Components (WCUP) for information.

In this topic:

Work with Variable Sets Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WVST in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu or select this option from a menu.

Field Description
Item

The variable set item number.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.
Clr Size Wdth

The SKU elements. SKU elements can be entered in conjunction with the item number to further narrow the scan. The system cannot display scan information without the item number. You must enter the item number in conjunction with one or more SKU elements.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; optional.
Description

The description of the item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display only.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a variable set

Select Create to advance to the Create Variable Set Screen.

Delete a variable set

Select Delete for a set to delete it.

Note:

Deleting a variable set does not delete the set item or components, just the association (link) between the two.

Work with a variable set group

Select Work with for a set to advance to the Work with a Variable Set Groups Screen.

Create Variable Set Screen

To create a variable set: At the Work with Variable Sets Screen, select Create.

Field Description
Variable set

The variable set item/SKU is made up of two separate fields. The first part is the item code which represents a unit of inventory.

The second part is the SKU code which represents the special characteristics of an item, such as color, size, width, etc.

The item code you enter must have the Kit Type field set to V.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions (item), three 4-position fields (SKU); required.

Instructions: Enter the item code to advance to the Create Variable Set Group Screen.

Create Variable Set Group Screen

To create a variable set group: Complete the Create Variable Set Screen. You can also display this screen by selecting Create at the Work with a Variable Set Groups Screen.

Field Description
Group

The numeric code that represents the group. The pop-up window in Order Entry will appear in group code sequence; therefore, if you want to be prompted for jackets before belts, you should create jackets with a lower group code number than belts.

Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Description

The description of your group. The description appears in the pop-up window in Order Entry.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
# of items

The number of units the customer must order from this group.

Note:

Multiple units of the same item may be ordered to achieve this number.

Numeric, 3 positions; required.

Completing this screen: When you complete this screen, you advance to the Work with Variable Set Components Screen.

Work with Variable Set Components Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to define each item available in a variable set group. You can define several variable set groups for one variable set item.

How to display this screen:

Field Descriptions
Variable set

The variable set item/SKU is made up of two separate fields. The first part is the item code which represents a unit of inventory.

The second part is the SKU code which represents the special characteristics of an item, such as color, size, width, etc.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions (item), three 4-position fields (SKU); display-only.
Group

The numeric code that represents the group.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
# of items

The number of units the customer must order from this group.

Note:

Multiple units of the same item may be ordered to achieve this number.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Item

The item to be included as part of the variable group. Validated against the Item table. A customer can order any combination of the component items to make up the number of items in the group.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.
SKU

The SKU elements used to further define the item.

Note:

If the item has SKUs, the specific SKU elements must be specified. The SKU scan screen will not display in Order Entry.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields (SKU); required (if the item has SKUs).
Description

Description of the item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Avail

The total quantity available for the component item.

Note:

If you advanced to this screen from the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen, the available quantity reflects the selected warehouse only; otherwise, the quantity reflects all allocatable warehouses.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Adding component items to a variable set: Enter each item code and the SKU information, if the item has SKUs. Each time you enter an item, the system validates the information and displays the item below the entry fields.

Work with a Variable Set Groups Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to change, delete, display, or create variable set groups for the variable set which are similar to option packages that specify the item quantity required from each group to make up the variable set.

This function allows you to define the variable set group codes and descriptions and provides access to the Work with Variable Set Components Screen, which allows you to identify each item available in the variable set group.

How to display this screen:

  1. Complete the Create Variable Set Screen.
  2. Select Work with for an item at the Work with Variable Sets Screen.
  3. Select Variable Sets for an item at the Work with Items Screen or Work with SKUs Screen.
Field Description
Group

The numeric code that represents your group.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional
Description

The description of your group.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.
# of items

The number of different items that make up your group.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a variable set group

Select Create to advance to the Create Variable Set Group Screen.

Change a variable set

Select Change for a variable set group to advance to the Change Variable Set Group Screen. See the Create Variable Set Group Screen for field descriptions.

Delete a variable set

Select Delete for a variable set group to delete it.

Work with variable set components

Select Work with for a variable set group to advance to the Work with Variable Set Components Screen.

Entering Finished Goods Information (WFGD)

Overview: A finished good is an item that requires assembly prior to picking and packing and is comprised of one or more component items that may also be sold individually, or of raw materials that are used only as components of a finished good. An item record must exist for each component item, including raw materials (so that you can track inventory and usage).

When an Order Entry operator places an order for a finished good, the components of the finished good do not appear on the Order Entry screen, only the finished good item.

Unit demand (units ordered) is tracked at the finished goods level. Dollar demand is tracked at the finished goods level. For example: the finished good is a sketch kit and its component items are 1 drawing pad, 3 charcoal pencils and 1 erasure. A customer orders the sketch kit for $20.00. Units ordered for the finished good increase by 1, and dollars ordered increase for the finished good by $20.00.

To assemble a finished good, you must perform a make up finished good inventory transaction (transaction code = M) which increases the quantity of the finished good and decreases the quantity of its component items. You can also reserve component items while you assemble the finished good through the finished good work order process. See Performing Inventory Transactions for more information on the make up finished good inventory transaction and on the finished good work order process.

Set component upload: You can use the set component upload option to create the Kit header and kit components. See Importing Set Components (WCUP) for information.

In this topic:

Work with Finished Goods Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WFGD in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Finished Goods from a menu.

Field Description
Item

The finished good item number.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.
Clr Size Width

The SKU elements.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; optional.
Description

The description of the item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a finished good

Select Create to advance to the Create Finished Good Screen.

Delete a finished good

Select Delete for a finished good to delete it.

Note:

Deleting a finished good does not delete the item or component items, just the association (link) between the two.

Work with finished good components

Select Work with for a finished good to advance to the Work with Finished Good Component Items Screen.

Create Finished Good Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a finished good.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Finished Goods Screen, select Create.

Field Description
Finished good

The finished good item/SKU. The item’s Kit type field must be set to F.

Item: alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.

SKU: three 4-position fields; required if the item has SKUs.

Work with Finished Good Component Items Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to add, change, delete, or display component items associated with a finished good (as defined by an F in the Kit type field for the item).

How to display this screen:

Field Description
Item

A component item that makes up the finished good.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions.

Work with screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
SKU

The SKU elements used to further define the item.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; required if the item has SKUs.
Qty

The number of items that are used to make up the finished good.

Numeric, 5 positions; required.
Avail

The total quantity available for the component item.

Note:

If you advanced to this screen from the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen, the available quantity reflects the selected warehouse only; otherwise, the quantity reflects all allocatable warehouses.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Add a finished good component item

Enter the item code (and SKU information if the item has SKUs) to add the item as a component to the finished good. The item is listed below the other component items in the center of the screen.

Note:

You cannot add a component if there is an open work order for the finished good. See Finished Good Work Order Processing (WWOR).

Change a finished good component item

Select Change for a component item to advance to the Change Finished Good Component Item Screen. See the Create Finished Good Screen for field descriptions.

Delete a finished good component item

Select Delete for a component item to delete it from the finished good.

Display a finished good component item

Select Display for a component item to advance to the Display Finished Good Component Items Screen. See the Create Finished Good Screen for field descriptions.

Updating the Cost of a Finished Good

Purpose: You can update the cost of a finished good when the cost of one or more of its component items changes by running a periodic function. This periodic function produces the Finished Good Items Average or Standard Cost Updated Report, which lists:

  • finished goods the system has updated
  • the cost of the finished good before the update
  • the cost of the finished good after the update.

The periodic function that updates the cost of a finished good is called PHR0049. See Executing Periodic Processes (EPRO) for more information on periodic processes.

Updating Items and SKUs

Topics in this part:

Creating Item/SKU Offers (MISO)

Purpose: Use Create Item/SKU Offers to indicate that an item is available in an offer and to enter the related pricing and return information.

Using this menu option may be more efficient than selecting the Work with Item/SKUs menu option (fast path = MITM) and advancing to the Create Item Offer or the Create SKU Offer screens if, for example, you are entering offer information for a group of existing items and SKUs.

In this topic:

For more information: See Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM) for more information on the screens you use to work with items or SKUs.

Create Item/SKU Offers Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create item and SKU offer information. This screen may be more efficient than selecting the Work with Item/SKUs menu option (fast path = MITM) and advancing to the Create Item Offer Screen if, for example, you are entering offer information for a group of existing items.

How to display this screen: Enter MISO in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Create Item/SKU Offer from a menu.

Field Description
Update SKUs

Indicates whether to update the SKU information.

  • Selected = Update the SKUs. You advance to the Create SKU Offers Screen when you press Enter so you can enter different information at the SKU level.
  • Unselected = Do not update the SKUs.
Item

A user-defined code that represents a new unit of inventory. Validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.
Offer

The offer you would like to include the item/SKU in. Validated against the Offer table.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Effective date

The date the price or quantity break discount becomes valid. This date should be on or after the effective date of the offer.

If there are multiple effective dates for the same item/offer, the system uses the price associated with the effective date closest to, but not greater than, the order date. For example, if there are effective dates of Feb. 20, and Mar. 31 and the customer placed an order on April 1, the customer receives the price associated with the effective date of March 31.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Sub page

Informational only. You can use this field to call an external program that creates an item alias outside of Order Management System. The system provides a “hook” to the program when a user defines a sub page code and completes this screen or the Create Item Offer Screen in Work with Item/SKUs (fast path = MITM). Once the program completes, Order Management System returns to normal processing.

Alphanumeric, 5 positions; optional.
Price

The price at which the item will be sold in this offer, if no discounts are applied and the order date is on or after the effective date. Multiple effective dates and prices can be established for the same item/offer.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required.
Associate price

The price at which the item will be sold in this offer to associate customers. Associate price is used when the Associate field on the order is selected and the order date is equal to or greater than the effective date.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Tax inclusive price

The price at which the item will be sold in this offer on orders subject to VAT. In tax-inclusive pricing, a "hidden tax" is included in the order detail line for the item rather than accumulating in the Tax bucket.

Included only if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Tax incl assoc price (Tax-inclusive associate price)

The price at which the item will be sold to associate customers on orders subject to VAT. In tax-inclusive pricing, a "hidden tax" is included in the order detail line for the item rather than accumulating in the Tax bucket.

Included only if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Special handling

Indicates whether this item is eligible for any type of special handling in this offer (such as monogramming, hemming, etc.).

  • Selected = This item is eligible for special handling.
  • Unselected = This item is not eligible for special handling.

If this field is selected and there is a default special handling code defined (see below), OR if you specify special handling for an item in order entry, you advance to the Work with Special Handling Screen or the Work with Custom Special Handling Screen; however, if the special handling code’s:

  • Suppress S/H window field is selected: the system adds the special handling code and charge to the item without displaying the special handling screen.
  • Bypass S/H field is selected: you do not advance automatically to the special handling screen unless you enter the special handling code when entering the item; however, you can still advance to the special handling screen by selecting Special Handling for the item.

See Special Handling Overview for more information.

S/H price (Special handling price)

The price to charge the customer for special handling. Use the Evaluate Special Handling Charges by Order Line (D67) system control value whether to add the price just once for each order line, or to multiply the special handling price by the unit quantity on the order.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
S/H code (Special handling code)

The additional charge code associated with the type of special handling you are offering for the item.

The system validates that the additional charge code is defined as special handling type standard or custom; the system handles each type in a different way. See Special Handling Overview for more information.

If you enter a special handling code here, you will advance to the Work with Special Handling Screen or Work with Custom Special Handling Screen automatically in order entry; however, if the special handling code’s:

  • Suppress S/H window field is selected: the system adds the special handling code and charge to the item without displaying the special handling screen.
  • Bypass S/H field is selected: you do not advance automatically to the special handling screen unless you enter the special handling code when entering the item; however, you can still advance to the special handling screen by selecting Special Handling for the item.

See Special Handling Overview for more information.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Gift wrap

Indicates whether you offer gift wrapping for this item in this offer. Defaults to selected if the Gift Wrap Default (F07) system control value is selected; however, you can override this default.

  • Selected = This item can be gift wrapped.
  • Unselected = This item cannot be gift wrapped.
G/W price (Gift wrap price)

The price you are charging to gift wrap this item. The G/W field must be selected to indicate that this item is eligible for gift wrap. The gift wrap price is multiplied by the unit quantity on the order line to arrive at the total gift wrap charge for the order line.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Freight

The freight amount to charge for this item. Multiplied by the unit quantity on the order line to determine the freight charge for this item. Used only if the Freight method field for the Source Code table is set to By Item or Flat Rt/Item.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Hidden freight

Used only with item level freight methods, such as flat rate by item, by item quantity, and by item source.

Hidden freight represents the portion of the item's catalog price that is used for freight. You might define a hidden freight value when the freight charge to ship the item is very high. The hidden freight charge is included in the price of the item so the actual freight charge is not visible to the customer.

Hidden freight is also know as "theoretical" or "buried" freight.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Sale item

Indicates whether the item is on sale.

Valid values are:

  • selected = This is a sale item.
  • unselected (default) = This is not a sale item.

If the Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) system control value is selected, this flag controls whether the item is included in prorated discounts or is included when determining whether an order qualifies for a promotion. See the system control value for more information.

Volume discount

Indicates whether this item is eligible for an end-of-order discount that will be applied when you accept the order during Order Entry.

  • selected = The item/SKU is eligible for the volume discount.
  • unselected = The item/SKU is not eligible for the volume discount.

See Item Volume Discounting.

Coupon discount $

Represents the amount that is subtracted from the price when the item is ordered from this offer.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Coupon expiration date

The date the coupon is effective until (i.e., when it expires).

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Feature/option

Indicates whether the item is considered a featured or optional item in a depiction. A depiction is a photograph or drawing of several items within an offer. The featured item is the focus of the depiction, whereas the optional items are less prominently displayed. For example, if a dining room is depicted, the dining room set may be the featured item and the individual place settings, crystal, and centerpiece may be the optional items.

Valid values are:

  • Feature = Item is the featured item in the depiction.
  • Option = Item is an optional item in the depiction.

Optional.
Pickup/new

Indicates whether the item has been carried over from a previous offer or is new to your product offerings.

Valid values are:

  • Pickup = Item is a pickup item, previously sold in another offer.
  • New = Item is a new addition in this offer.

Optional.
Warranty

Defines whether the item in this offer is a warranty item.

Valid values are:

  • Selected = The item in this offer is a warrant item. When an operator adds this item to an order in order entry or order maintenance, the system adds the item to the order at no charge.
  • Unselected = The item in this offer is not a warranty item.

If the Default Price Override Reason for Warranty Items (G01) system control value contains a price override reason code, the system defaults this code to the Price override code field; otherwise the operator must enter a code.

Required reason code

Defines whether an Order addition reason code is required when the item in this offer is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance. When you specify an add reason code for an item, there is a record of the add reason code stored in an order line history record, available for review at the Display Order Line History Screen.

Valid values are:

  • selected = The item in this offer requires an add reason code when the item is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance. The Enter Add Reason Window opens when an operator adds this item to an order in order entry or order maintenance.
  • unselected = The item is this offer does not require an add reason code when the item is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance.

Note:

When the item is added automatically to an order through the order API, the add reason code is not required. For example, an item might be added to an order automatically if it is set up as a free gift by source code.

Screen Option Procedure

Work with alias

Select Work with Alias to advance to the Work with Alias Screen.

Work with SKU offers

Select the Update SKUs field and select OK to advance to the Create SKU Offers Screen. Any information you have entered defaults to this screen.

Create SKU Offers Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to define offer information related to a specific SKU. This screen may be more efficient than selecting the Work with Item/SKUs menu option (fast path = MITM) and advancing to the Create SKU Offer Screen if, for example, you are entering offer information for a group of existing SKUs.

How to display this screen: Select the Update SKUs field at the Create Item/SKU Offers Screen. Any information you have entered at that screen defaults here.

Field Description
Item

A user-defined code that represents a new unit of inventory. Defaults from the previous screen.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
Offer

The offer in which you are presenting the SKU. Defaults from the previous screen.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Sel (Select)

Indicates whether the SKU is selected for update.

Valid values:

  • Select (default) = The SKU is selected for update.
  • Ignore = The SKU is not selected for update.

Required.

Colr Size Othr

The SKU code and description that is used to further define the item. Validated against the SKU Elements (1,2,3) tables; see Working with SKU Elements (WSK1, WSK2, WSK3).

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Price

The price at which you are selling the item/SKU in this offer, if no discounts are applied, and the offer date is equal to or greater than the effective date. Multiple effective dates and prices can be established for the same item/offer. To establish multiple effective dates, see Work with Item Prices Screen (Quantity Price Breaks by Offer).

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required.
Sale (Sale item)

Indicates whether the item/SKU is on sale in this offer.

Valid values are:

  • Yes = this item/SKU is on sale
  • No = this item/SKU is not on sale

If the Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) system control value is selected, this flag controls whether the item is included in prorated discounts or is included when determining whether an order qualifies for a promotion. See the system control value for more information.

Description

A description of the SKU.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; display-only.

SH? (Special handling)

Indicates whether this item/SKU is eligible for any type of special handling in this offer (such as, monogramming, hemming, etc.).

  • Yes = This item/SKU is eligible for special handling.
  • No = This item/SKU is not eligible for special handling.

If this field is set to Yes and there is a default special handling code defined (see below), OR IF you specify special handling for an item in Order Entry, a pop-up window opens for you to enter special handling instructions.

SH price (Special handling price)

The price that will be charged for special handling. Use the Evaluate Special Handling Charges by Order Line (D67) system control value to specify whether to add the price just once for each order line, or multiply the special handling price by the item quantity for the line.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
S/H (Special handling code)

A code that represents the type of special handling that is required for this item/SKU. The special handling can be either standard or custom; the system handles each type in a different way. See Establishing Additional Charge Codes (WADC) and Establishing Custom Special Handling Formats (WSHF).

If you enter a special handling code here, you will advance to the Work with Special Handling Screen or Work with Custom Special Handling Screen automatically in order entry.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
GW?(Gift wrap)

Indicates whether this SKU is eligible for gift wrap. If the Gift Wrap Default (F07) system control value is selected, this field defaults to Yes, although you can override it; otherwise, this field defaults to No.

  • Yes = The item/SKU can be gift wrapped.
  • No = In this offer, the item/SKU cannot be gift wrapped.
GW price (Gift wrap price)

The price to charge in this offer to gift wrap this item/SKU. The G/W field must be selected to indicate that this item/SKU is eligible for gift wrap. The gift wrap price is multiplied by the total unit that is gift wrapped.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Frt (Freight)

The freight amount to be charged for this item/SKU. Multiplied by the quantity ordered to determine the freight charge for this item. Used only if the Freight method field for the Source Code table is set to By Item or Flat Rt/Item.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Hdn frt (Hidden freight)

Used only with item level freight methods, such as: Flat rate by item, flat rate by item quantity, flat rate by item source, and by item.

Hidden freight represents the portion of the item's catalog price that is used for freight. You might define a hidden freight value when the freight charge to ship the item is very high. The hidden freight charge is included in the price of the item so the actual freight charge is not visible to the customer.

Hidden freight is also known as "theoretical" or "buried" freight.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
F/O (feature/option)

Indicates whether the item/SKU is considered a featured or optional item in a depiction in the offer. The featured item is the focus of the depiction; optional items are displayed less prominently. For example, in a depiction of a dress, the shoes and belt depicted may be the optional items.

Valid values are:

  • Feature = this is the featured item
  • Option = this is an optional item

Optional.
Pickup/new

Indicates whether the item has been carried over from a previous offer or you are presenting it for the first time in this catalog.

Valid values are:

  • Pickup = this is a pickup item
  • New = this is a new item

Optional.
Tax Inclusive Price

The price at which the item/SKU will be sold in this offer on orders subject to VAT. In tax-inclusive pricing, a "hidden tax" is included in the order detail line for the item rather than accumulating in the Tax bucket.

Included only if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Asso. price (associate price)

The price at which the item/SKU will be sold in this offer to associate customers. Associate price is used when the Associate field on the order is selected and the order date is equal to or greater than the effective date.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Updating Item/SKU Offers (MUSO)

Purpose: Use Update Item/SKU Offers to update information on multiple Item/SKU Offer records at one time.

The Update Item or SKU Offer(s) Screen is divided into two sections.

  • Use the top section to enter the item and SKU for the offers you wish to update, and the update information. You must complete at least one update field to continue.
  • Use the lower portion of the screen to enter the offers that you want to update.

The system updates only those fields in which you enter data; all other fields will remain as is.

You can update both the item offer and SKU offer by making changes for the “base” item and leaving the SKU field blank. When you select OK to accept the changes, you advance to the Confirm Multiple SKU Offer Update Window where you select the Update ALL SKU Offers for base item field.

Defaulting active offers: If the Default Active Offers (J07) system control value is selected and you do not manually enter an offer in the Offer fields, the system defaults the 20 most recent active offers to the Offer fields for the entered item: Offers have been defaulted - press Enter to update.

The offers default to the Offer fields in descending Start date sequence.

  • If you enter an item without a SKU code, the system defaults the 20 most recent active offers defined for the item.
  • If you enter an item and SKU code, the system defaults the 20 most recent active offers defined for the SKU. The system will not default any item offers, even if no SKU offers exist.

Note:

  • If the item is not assigned to 20 active offers, the system defaults the available active offers assigned to the item. For example, if the item is assigned to 25 offers, but only 8 offers are active, the system defaults the 8 active offers.
  • If the item is assigned to more than 20 active offers, the system evaluates the offer’s Start date to determine the 20 most recent active offers to default.
  • If active offers do not exist for the item, the Offer fields remain blank and you must manually enter offers in the Offer fields.
  • If you update the Item and/or SKU field, the system will not update the defaulted offers.
  • You can manually enter an offer that is a future offer or expired offer.

Update Item or SKU Offer(s) Screen

Use this screen to update information on multiple Item/SKU Offer records at one time.

How to display this screen: Enter MUSO in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu or select Update Item/SKU from a menu.

Field Description
Item

A unit of inventory. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.
Clr Size Wdth (SKU codes)

The item's unique characteristics, such as its color and size.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; required if SKU/offer records exist.
Effective date

The date the price or quantity break discount becomes valid. This date should be equal to or greater than the effective date of the offer. The customer receives this price when placing an order on this date or later, if the order is for a great enough quantity.

If you establish multiple effective dates for the same item/offer, the system uses the price associated with the effective date closest to, but not greater than, the order date.

Example: If you establish effective dates of Feb. 20, and Mar. 31 and the customer places an order on April 1, the customer receives the price associated with the effective date of March 31.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Price

The price at which you are selling the item in this offer, if no discounts are applied, and the order date is on or after the effective date. You can establish multiple effective dates and prices for the same item/offer. See Work with Item Prices Screen (Quantity Price Breaks by Offer).

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required.
Associate price

The price at which you are selling the item in this offer to associate customers. The system uses the associate price when the Associate field on the order is selected and the customer places the order on or after the effective date.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Tax inclusive price

The price at which the item will be sold in this offer on orders subject to VAT. In tax-inclusive pricing, a "hidden tax" is included in the order detail line for the item rather than accumulating in the Tax bucket.

Included only if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Tax-inclusive (Tax-inclusive associate price)

The price at which the item will be sold to associate customers on orders subject to VAT. In tax-inclusive pricing, a "hidden tax" is included in the order detail line for the item rather than accumulating in the Tax bucket.

Included only if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Sale item

Indicates whether the item is on sale in this offer.

Valid values are:

  • selected = this item is on sale
  • unselected = this item is not on sale

If the Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) system control value is selected, this flag controls whether the item is included in prorated discounts or is included when determining whether an order qualifies for a promotion. See the system control value for more information.

Freight

The freight amount to be charged for this item. Multiplied by the quantity ordered. Used only if the Freight method for the source code is By Item or Flat Rt/Item.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Hidden freight

The system uses this value only with item level freight methods such as flat rate by item, flat rate by item quantity, flat rate by item source, and by item.

Hidden freight represents the portion of the item's catalog price that pays freight. You can define a hidden freight value when the freight charge for the item is very high. You include the hidden freight charge in the item price so that the customer is not aware of the actual cost of shipping.

Hidden freight is also known as “theoretical” or “buried” freight.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
S/H (Special handling)

Indicates whether this item is eligible for any type of special handling in this offer (such as monogramming, hemming, etc.).

  • selected = This item is eligible for special handling.
  • unselected = This item is not eligible for special handling.

If this field is selected and there is a default special handling code defined (see below), OR if you specify special handling for an item in order entry, you advance to the Work with Special Handling Screen or the Work with Custom Special Handling Screen; however, if the special handling code’s:

  • Suppress S/H window field is selected: the system adds the special handling code and charge to the item without displaying the special handling screen.
  • Bypass S/H field is selected: you do not advance automatically to the special handling screen unless you enter the special handling code when entering the item; however, you can still advance to the special handling screen by selecting Special Handling for the item.

See Special Handling Overview for more information.

Volume discount

Determines whether you can apply discounts to the item for large order quantities.

  • selected = This item is eligible for volume discount.
  • unselected = This item is not eligible for volume discount.

See Item Volume Discounting.

S/H charge code (Special handling code)

The additional charge code associated with the type of special handling you are offering for the item.

The system validates that the additional charge code is defined as special handling type standard or custom; the system handles each type in a different way. See Special Handling Overview for more information.

If you enter a special handling code here, you will advance to the Work with Special Handling Screen or Work with Custom Special Handling Screen automatically in order entry; however, if the special handling code’s:

  • Suppress S/H window field is selected: the system adds the special handling code and charge to the item without displaying the special handling screen.
  • Bypass S/H field is selected: you do not advance automatically to the special handling screen unless you enter the special handling code when entering the item; however, you can still advance to the special handling screen by selecting Special Handling for the item.

See Special Handling Overview for more information.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Price (Special handling price)

The price to charge for special handling of the item. The system multiplies this charge by the total unit quantity if the Evaluate Special Handling Charges by Order Line (D67) system control value is unselected.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
G/W flag (Gift wrap flag)

Indicates whether this item is eligible for gift wrapping in this offer. If the Gift Wrap Default (F07) system control value is selected, this field will default to selected; however, you can override this value.

  • selected = The item can be gift wrapped.
  • unselected = The item cannot be gift wrapped.
Price (Gift wrap price)

The price to charge for gift wrapping the item. The system multiplies the gift wrap price by the total unit quantity gift wrapped.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Feature/option

Indicates whether the item is considered a featured or optional item in a depiction in the offer. The featured item is the focus of the depiction; optional items are displayed less prominently. For example, in a depiction of a dress, the shoes and belt depicted might be optional items.

Valid values are:

  • Feature = This is a feature item.
  • Option = This is an optional item.

Optional.
Pickup/new

Indicates whether the item has been carried over from a previous offer or you are presenting it for the first time in this offer.

Valid values are:

  • Pickup = This is a pickup item.
  • New = This is a new item.

Optional.
Warranty

Defines whether the item in this offer is a warranty item.

Valid values are:

  • selected = The item in this offer is a warranty item. When an operator adds this item to an order in order entry or order maintenance, the system adds the item to the order at no charge.
  • unselected = The item in this offer is not a warranty item.

If the Default Price Override Reason for Warranty Items (G01) system control value contains a price override reason code, the system defaults the code to the Price override code field; otherwise the operator must enter a code.

Required reason code

Defines whether an Order addition reason code is required when the item in this offer is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance. When you specify an add reason code for an item, there is a record of the add reason code stored in an order line history record, available for review at the Display Order Line History Screen.

Valid values are:

  • selected = The item in this offer requires an add reason code when the item is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance. The Enter Add Reason Window opens when an operator adds this item to an order in order entry or order maintenance.
  • unselected = The item is this offer does not require an add reason code when the item is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance.

Note:

When the item is added automatically to an order through the order API, the add reason code is not required. For example, an item might be added to an order automatically if it is set up as a free gift by source code.
Offers

The offers where the item/SKU should be updated.

If the Default Active Offers (J07) system control value is selected and you do not manually enter an offer in the Offer fields, the system defaults the 20 most recent active offers to the Offer fields for the entered item. The offers default to the Offer fields in descending Start date sequence.

Offers are defined in and validated against the Offer table. See Working with Offers (WOFR).

Alphanumeric, twenty 3 position fields; required.
Create if record does not exist

Controls whether to create the Item/offer or SKU/offer record automatically if it doesn't already exist.

  • selected = Create the record.
  • unselected (default) = Do not create the record.

Note:

If this field is unselected and the Update all SKU offers for base item field is selected, the system creates SKU Price records only for those SKUs that are already associated with the offer.

Screen Option Procedure

Display item/offer or SKU/offer records

Select Display Offers to advance to the Work with Item Offers Screen or Work with SKU Offers Screen.

If the item is a SKU’ed item, you must specify a SKU code before displaying offers.

Confirm Multiple SKU Offer Update Window

Use this window to update the item offer and all SKU offers for the item.

Select the Update ALL SKU Offers for base item field to update both the item offer and all SKU offers for this “base” item.

Note:

If the Update ALL SKU Offers for base item field is selected and the Create if record does not exist field is unselected, the system creates SKU Price records only for those SKUs that are already associated with the offer.

If you select Exit or select this field, the system updates the item or SKU offer(s) entered and clears the fields so that you can update another item/SKU offer if desired.

Deleting SKUs for an Item (MDLT)

Purpose: The Delete SKUs for Item function deletes all SKU records for an item.

Example: Item BK4000 (a blanket) has three SKUs (BLUE, BONE, and GOLD). If you enter the item number (BK4000) at the Delete SKUs for an Item screen, all the SKU records (BLUE, BONE, and GOLD) will be deleted.

How to display this screen: Enter MDLT in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu or select this option from a menu.

Field Description
Company

Defaults to the company in which you are working. You can override the company code to another valid company, as defined in the Company table.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Item number

A user-defined code that represents a unit of inventory. In this case, the item must have SKUs associated with it. Validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.

Important:

You cannot delete SKUs if there is on-hand quantity, open orders, or open purchase orders.

Copying SKU Offer Information (MCSO)

Purpose: Use Copy SKU Offer Information to copy item/SKUs from one offer to another offer by selecting an offer to copy "from" and the new offer to be created "to."

Copy SKU Offer Information allows you to:

  • copy all item/SKUs from one offer to another offer
  • copy item/SKUs from one offer to another offer by item class
  • update existing item/SKU offers in the "to" offer with information in the "from" offer
  • select which item/SKU information to copy

You can also copy a selected SKU offer record from one offer to another offer using the Copying SKU/Offer Records (CSKO) menu option.

Copy SKU/Offer Information Screen (Selecting Information to Copy)

How to display this screen: Enter MCSO in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Copy SKU Offer Information from a menu.

Field Description
From offer

The offer from which the information will be copied. This must be a valid offer in the Offer table. See Working with Offers (WOFR).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
To offer

The offer to which the information will be copied. This must be a valid offer in the Offer table.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Item class(es)

The item class(es) from which the information in the “from” offer will by copied. Each must be a valid item class in the Item Class table; see Working with Item Classes (WICL).

You can maintain item/SKU offers by item class through Working with Offer Overrides by Item Class (WSOI).

Alphanumeric, ten 3-position fields; optional.
Update SKU and item offers

Indicates whether the system updates existing item/SKU information in the “to” offer with the copied information in the “from” offer.

Valid values are:

unselected (default) = Existing item/SKU information in the “to” offer will not update with the copied information in the “from” offer.

selected = Existing item/SKU information in the “to” offer will update with copied information in the “from” offer.

Example:

Item "Sunglasses" exists in offers 1 and 2.

In offer 1, the price of the sunglasses is $10.00 and in offer 2 the price of the sunglasses is $20.00.

If you are copying information from offer 2 to offer 1 and this field is selected, the price in offer 1 will update to $20.00.

If this field is unselected, the price will not update and only new information will copy to offer 1.
  Note: Each of the field descriptions below describes the information to copy from the “from” offer to the “to” offer if the field is selected.
Freight

The freight amount to be charged for this item. Multiplied by the quantity ordered. Used only if the Freight method for the source code is By Item or Flat Rt /Item.

Valid values are:

unselected = In the “to” offer, the freight amount will not change.

selected (default) = Item/SKUs in the “to” offer will default the Freight from the “from” offer.

Sale item

Indicates whether the item is on sale.

Valid values are:

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the same Sale item setting as the items in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the Sale item setting for the item will not be changed.

If the Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) system control value is selected, this flag controls whether the item is included in prorated discounts or is included when determining whether an order qualifies for a promotion. See the system control value for more information.

S/H (Special handling)

This item is eligible for any type of special handling in this offer (such as, monogramming, hemming, etc.).

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the same special handling as the in “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the Special handling field for the items will not be changed.

Coupon discount

Represents the amount that is subtracted from the price when the item/SKU is ordered from this offer. Valid values are:

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the coupon discount amount as in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the Coupon discount $ (Coupon discount dollars) for the items will not change.

S/H code (Special handling code)

Represents the type of special handling that is required for this item. If you enter a special handling code, during Order Entry a pop-up window appears. When this item is ordered, you can specify the quantity ordered, a special handling charge (if different), and special handling instructions. Valid values are:

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the same special handling codes as in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the S/H code (Special handling code) for the items will not change.

S/H price (Special handling price)

The price to charge the customer for special handling. You can specify in the Evaluate Special Handling Charges by Order Line (D67) system control value whether to add the price just once for each order line, or multiply the special handling price by the item quantity for the line.

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the same special handling price as in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the S/H price (Special handling price) field for the items will not be changed.

G/W (Gift wrapping)

A value that indicates whether items can be gift wrapped.

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the gift wrap flag set the same way as in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the Gift wrap flag for the items will not be changed.

Hidden freight

Used only with item level freight methods, such as: Flat rate by item, flat rate by item quantity, flat rate by item source, and by item.

Hidden freight represents the portion of the item's catalog price that is used for freight. You might define a hidden freight value when the freight charge to ship the item is very high. The hidden freight charge is included in the price of the item so the actual freight charge is not visible to the customer.

Hidden freight is also known as “theoretical” or “buried” freight. Valid values are:

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the same hidden freight amount as in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the Hidden freight amount for the items will not be changed.

G/W price (Gift wrapping price)

The price in this offer that will be charged to gift wrap this item. The G/W field must be selected to indicate that this item is gift wrap-eligible. The gift wrap price will be charged for each unit of this item that is gift wrapped. The system will multiply this charge by the order quantity for the item.

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the same gift wrapping price as in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the G/W price (Gift wrap price) for the items will not be changed.

Volume discount

Indicates whether this item is eligible for an end-of-order discount that will be applied when you accept the order during Order Entry. See Item Volume Discounting. Valid values are:

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the same volume discount setting as in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the Volume discount field for the items will not be changed.

SKU price

The price at which the item/SKU will be sold in this offer. Valid values are:

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the same SKU price as in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the Price field for the items will not be changed.

If the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected, the message *Includes Tax price* displays next to this field. This message indicates that both the offer price and the tax-inclusive price will be copied if you set the SKU price flag to Y.

Associate price

The price at which the item will be sold in this offer to associate customers. A customer pays the associate price when the Associate flag on an order is selected. Valid values are:

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the same associate price as in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the Associate price field for the items will not be changed.

If the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected, the message *Includes Tax Price* displays next to this field. This message indicates that both the offer associate price and the tax-inclusive associate price will be copied if you set the Associate price flag to Y.

Coupon effective date

The date the coupon becomes effective. Valid values are:

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the same coupon effective date as in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the Coupon expiration date for the items will not be changed.

Warranty

Defines whether the item in this offer is a warranty item.

Valid values are:

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the same warranty setting as in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the Warranty field for the items will not be changed.

Feature/option

Indicates whether the item is considered a featured or optional item in a depiction. A depiction is a photograph or drawing of several items within an offer. The featured item is the focus of the depiction; whereas, the optional items are less prominently displayed. For example, if a dining room is depicted, the dining room set may be the featured item and the individual place settings, crystal, and centerpiece may be the optional items. Valid values are:

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the same feature/option setting as in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the Feature/option field for the items will not be changed.

Required reason

Defines whether an Order addition reason code is required when the item in this offer is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance. When you specify an add reason code for an item, there is a record of the add reason code stored in an order line history record, available for review at the Display Order Line History Screen.

Valid values are:

  • selected = The item in this offer requires an add reason code when the item is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance. The Enter Add Reason Window opens when an operator adds this item to an order in order entry or order maintenance.
  • unselected = The item is this offer does not require an add reason code when the item is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance.

Note:

When the item is added automatically to an order through the order API, the add reason code is not required. For example, an item might be added to an order automatically if it is set up as a free gift by source code
Pickup/new

Indicates whether the item has been carried over from a previous offer or is new to your product offerings. Valid values are:

selected (default) = The items in the “to” offer will have the same pickup/new setting as in the “from” offer.

unselected = In the “to” offer, the Pickup/new field for the items will not be changed.

Copying Item Warehouse Information (MCIW)

Purpose: Use this screen to copy Item Warehouse records from one warehouse to another. This function is useful if you are setting up a new warehouse that carries the same items as another warehouse.

You must specify the “from” and “to” warehouse and indicate whether to replace existing Item Warehouse records.

Note:

If Use Work Order Processing (E37) is selected in the System Control table, this function will not copy any items located in the Protected quantity field in the “from” warehouse to the “to” warehouse. See Finished Good Work Order Processing (WWOR).

How to display this screen: Enter MCIW in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Copy Item Warehouse Information from a menu.

Field Description
From warehouse

The numeric code that represents the source warehouse that you want to copy from. Validated against the Warehouse table. See Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS).

Numeric, 3 positions; required.
To warehouse

The numeric code that represents the target warehouse that you want to copy to.

Validated against the Warehouse table.

Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Replace existing records

Valid values are:

Selected = Any existing “to” warehouse records will be replaced during the copy procedure.

Unselected = Any existing “to” warehouse records will not be replaced during the copy procedure.

Records which may exist in the “to” warehouse but not the “from” warehouse will remain as is in the “to” warehouse.
Copy min/max (Copy minimum quantity/maximum quantity)

Indicates whether you wish to copy the minimum and maximum quantities defined for the item warehouse records in the "from" warehouse to the "to" warehouse.

Valid values are:

Selected = Copy the minimum and maximum quantities defined for the item warehouse records in the “from” warehouse to the “to” warehouse.

Unselected (default) = Do not copy the minimum and maximum quantities defined for the item warehouse record in the “from” warehouse to the “to” warehouse.

Copy prices (Copy retail prices)

Indicates whether you wish to copy the original retail price and current retail price defined for the item warehouse records in the "from" warehouse to the "to" warehouse.

Valid values are:

Selected = Copy the original retail price and current retail price defined for the item warehouse records in the “from” warehouse to the “to” warehouse.

Unselected (default) = Do not copy the original retail price and current retail price defined for the item warehouse records in the “from” warehouse to the “to” warehouse.

Submitting the job: If you choose to continue with the copy procedure, the system submits CPYITW_REC job.

Working with Offer Overrides by Item Class (WSOI)

Purpose: Use Work with Item Offer Overrides by Class to override existing item/offer and SKU/offer information by item class. You can update item offer information at different levels:

  • override the entire item class: update all items in the item class and offer with the information you enter
  • override a specific item: update only selected items in the item class and offer with the information you enter
  • override a specific SKU: update only selected SKUs in the item class and offer with the information you enter

Why use? Overriding existing item/SKU offer information by item class is helpful if you include an entire item class in one offer. You can copy item/SKUs from one offer to another by item class through Copying SKU Offer Information (MCSO).

Note:

You cannot use Item Offer Overrides by Class to override item/SKU pricing information that includes value added tax (VAT). On orders subject to VAT, tax does not accumulate in the Tax field; instead, the customer pays a tax-inclusive price for each item and the tax is “hidden” on the order detail line in the Hidden tax field. See the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value.

In this topic:

Item Offer Overrides by Item Class Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WSOI in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Item Offer Overrides by Class from a menu.

Field Description
Item class

The item class code for the items and SKUs you wish to update. See Working with Item Classes (WICL).

The item class code is used in conjunction with the offer code. This option only updates items and SKUs that are in the item class and offer you enter.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Offer

The offer you wish to update. See Working with Offers (WOFR).

The offer is used in conjunction with the item class code. This option only updates items and SKUs that are in the item class and offer you enter.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Effective date

The starting date for an item price break in this offer. This item quantity discount is available until the next effective date, if any. Effective date is from the Effective date field in the Item Price table.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Price

The offer price for item/SKUs in the offer and item class you selected.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Associate price

The associated offer price for item/SKUs in the offer and item class you selected.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Special handling

Indicates whether an item/SKU is eligible for any type of special handling (such as monogramming) in this offer.

Selected = The item/SKU is eligible for special handling.

Unselected = The item/SKU is not eligible for special handling.

S/H price (Special handling price)

The price to charge when for special handling. This is the price per unit for special handling, multiplied by the quantity ordered.

The following message indicates if you enter a price without selecting the Special handling field:

Special handling price not allowed when not eligible.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
S/H code (Special handling code)

The additional charge code for the type of special handling you are offering for the item. The special handling can be either standard or custom; the system handles each type in a different way. See Establishing Additional Charge Codes (WADC) and Establishing Custom Special Handling Formats (WSHF).

If you enter a special handling code here, you advance to the Work with Special Handling Screen or Work with Custom Special Handling Screen automatically in order entry.

The following message indicates if you enter a price without selecting the Special handling field:

Special handling price not allowed when not eligible.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Gift wrap (Gift wrap flag)

Indicates whether the item/SKU can be gift wrapped.

Valid values are:

Selected = Eligible for gift wrap.

Unselected = Not eligible for gift wrap.

G/W price (Gift wrap price)

The price in this offer to charge for gift wrapping. The gift wrap price is multiplied by the order quantity for the item/SKU.

The following message indicates if you enter a price without selecting the Gift wrap field:

Gift Wrap Price not allowed when gift wrap flag is No.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Freight

The freight amount to charge for this item, multiplied by the quantity ordered. Used only if the source code uses By Item or Flat Rt/Item.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Hidden freight

Used only with item level freight methods, such as: Flat rate by item, flat rate by item quantity, flat rate by item source, and by item.

What is hidden freight? Hidden freight represents the portion of the item/SKU's catalog price that is used for freight. You can define a hidden freight value when the freight charge to ship the item/SKU is very high. The hidden freight charge is included in the price of the item/SKU so the actual freight charge is not visible to the customer.

Hidden freight is also known as "theoretical" or "buried" freight.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Sale item

Indicates whether the item/SKU is on sale in this offer.

Valid values are:

Selected = The item/SKU is on sale.

Unselected = The item/SKU is not on sale.

If the Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) system control value is selected, this flag controls whether the item is included in prorated discounts or when determining whether an order qualifies for a promotion. See the system control value for more information.

Volume discount

Indicates whether this item is eligible for an end-of-order discount that will be applied when you accept the order during Order Entry.

  • selected = The item/SKU is eligible for the volume discount.
  • unselected = The item/SKU is not eligible for the volume discount.

See Item Volume Discounting.

Coupon discount $ (Coupon discount dollars)

The amount to subtract from the price when the item/SKU is ordered from this offer.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Coupon expiration date

The date the coupon is no longer valid.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Feature/option

Indicates whether the item/SKU is considered a featured or optional item in a depiction in the offer. The featured item is the focus of the depiction; optional items are displayed less prominently. For example, in a depiction of a dress, the shoes and belt depicted may be the optional items.

Valid values are:

Feature = This is the featured item/SKU.

Option = This is an optional item/SKU.

blank (default) = The existing value in the item/offer or SKU/offer remains unchanged.

Optional.
Pickup/new

Indicates whether the item/SKU has been carried over from a previous offer or you are presenting it for the first time in this catalog.

Valid values are:

Pickup = This is a pickup item/SKU.

New = This is a new item/SKU.

Optional.
Warranty required

Indicates whether the item is a warranty item.

Valid values are:

Selected = In this offer, the item is a warranty item. When an operator adds this item to an order in order entry or order maintenance, the system adds the item to the order at no charge.

Unselected = In this offer, the item is not a warranty item.

If there is a price override code specified in the Default Price Override Reason for Warranty Items (G01) system control value, the system defaults this code to the Price override code field; otherwise, the operator must enter a code.

Required reason code

Defines whether an Order addition reason code is required when the item in this offer is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance. When you specify an add reason code for an item, there is a record of the add reason code stored in an order line history record, available for review at the Display Order Line History Screen.

Valid values are:

  • selected = The item in this offer requires an add reason code when the item is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance. The Enter Add Reason Window opens when an operator adds this item to an order in order entry or order maintenance.
  • unselected = The item is this offer does not require an add reason code when the item is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance.

Note:

When the item is added automatically to an order through the order API, the add reason code is not required. For example, an item might be added to an order automatically if it is set up as a free gift by source code.

Instructions:

  1. Enter a valid item class in the Item class field and a valid offer in the Offer field.
  2. The system defaults the descriptions of the item class and offer and each additional field on this screen becomes enterable.
  3. Complete the additional fields as described above.
  4. Select OK once you have completed all the overrides. Any overrides you enter on this screen will update all item/SKUs in the item class and offer. You can then create exceptions to the override you entered for a specific item or SKU. See Overriding Item Offer Details and Overriding SKU Offer Details later in this topic for more information.
  5. Select Item/Offer Details to override information for a specific item, or
  6. If you do not want to override existing information for a specific item or SKU, you can select Accept to accept the overrides on this screen or select Exit to cancel. If you select Accept, the Confirm Accept pop-up window opens. Select OK to accept the overrides or select Exit to cancel.
  7. If you select OK to accept the changes, you return to the previous screen and the following message informs you that the overrides have been submitted: Job (ICL_OVRDS) has been submitted to batch.

Note:

Once you select Item/Offer Details to advance to the First Item/Offer Override Details Screen, you can no longer return to this screen.
Screen Option Procedure

Override offer details for a specific item

Select Item/Offer Details to advance to the First Item/Offer Override Details Screen.

Accept the overrides you have entered

Select Accept.

First Item/Offer Override Details Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to override a specific item in the item class and offer you entered on the Item Offer Overrides by Item Class Screen. Any information you entered on the Item Offer Overrides by Item Class Screen defaults.

How to display this screen: Select Item/Offer Details on the Item Offer Overrides by Item Class Screen.

Field descriptions: The Offer, Item class, Effective date, Special handling and Special handling code fields are described under Item Offer Overrides by Item Class Screen.

Field Description
Item

An item that belongs to the item class and offer you entered on the Item Offer Overrides by Item Class Screen

Note:

Item codes for items that have SKU/offer records but not item/offer records are in a different color than items with an item/offer record. You also cannot override the Page, Effective date, Special handling and Special handling code fields for an item that does not have an item/offer record. An item that does not have SKUs and that also does not an item/offer record is not listed on this screen.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.
SKU'ed

A value that identifies whether this item is a SKUed item.Valid values are:

Unselected = This item has SKU’s.

Selected = This item does not have SKU’s.

You can enter an override for a specific SKU by selecting SKU/Offer Details for the item whose SKUs you wish to work with. See First SKU/Offer Override Details Screen.

Instructions:

  1. Enter information as described above.
  2. Select OK.
  3. Select SKU/Offer Details for an item containing SKUs to change any of the override information for a specific SKU. See First SKU/Offer Override Details Screen, or
  4. If you do not want to override offer information for a specific SKU, select Accept to accept all of the overrides you have entered on Item Offer Overrides by Item Class Screen and the First Item/Offer Override Details Screen. Select OK at the confirmation window to accept the overrides or select Exit to cancel.
  5. You can also reject the overrides you have entered for items/SKUs in the item class and offer by selecting Reject.
Screen Option Procedure

Change additional information for a specific item

Select Copy for an item to advance to the Second Item/Offer Override Details Screen.

Override offer information for a specific SKU

Select SKU/Offer Details for an item to advance to the First SKU/Offer Override Details Screen.

Accept the overrides you have entered

Select Accept.

Reject the overrides you have entered

Select Reject.

Second Item/Offer Override Details Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to override item/offer details for a specific item.

How to display this screen: On the First Item/Offer Override Details Screen, select Change for an item.

Field descriptions: See First Item/Offer Override Details Screen for field descriptions.

Completing this screen: Once you have completed all the overrides you wish to make, select Exit to return to the First Item/Offer Override Details Screen.

First SKU/Offer Override Details Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to override item/offer details for a specific SKU.

How to display this screen: On the First Item/Offer Override Details Screen, select SKU/Offer Details for a SKUed item.

Field descriptions: Additional fields are described under First Item/Offer Override Details Screen.

Note:

If there is no SKU/Offer for a specific SKU, the SKU is not listed on this screen.
Field Description
Colr size othr (Stock keeping unit)

The special characteristics for this item.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Change additional information for a specific SKU

Select Change for a SKU to advance to the Second SKU/Offer Override Details Screen.

Second SKU/Offer Override Details Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to change additional SKU/offer information for a specific SKU.

How to display this screen: On the First SKU/Offer Override Details Screen, select Change for a SKU.

Field descriptions: See First Item/Offer Override Details Screen for field descriptions.

Maintaining SKU Cross Reference Codes (MSKR)

Purpose: Use Maintain SKU Cross Reference to create and work with SKU cross reference codes for each item or SKU sold in an offer. You can use SKU cross reference codes as a way to create a cross reference between a Order Management System item and SKU code and the item and SKU in another system, such as ChannelAdvisor.

About the ChannelAdvisor integration: See ChannelAdvisor Integration Overview and ChannelAdvisor Setup for more information.

Cross reference codes in OEOM: Creating cross reference codes for each item and SKU sold in an offer allows an operator to enter the cross reference code in the Item field when entering a line in order entry or order maintenance. When the operator adds the line to the order, the system searches the SKU Cross Reference table for the item or SKU that is associated with the cross reference code. When the system finds the item that is related to the cross reference code the operator entered, the system defaults the Order Management System item and SKU to the order.

Example:

Order Management System item/SKU: KAL555 GREY WMNS SMLL

SKU cross reference code: 525KL

When the operator enters 525KL in the Item field in order entry or order maintenance, the system defaults the Order Management System item KAL555 in the Item field and the Order Management System SKU GREY WMNS SMLL in the SKU field.

If the operator enters a SKU cross reference code that is not associated with a Order Management System item or SKU or if the operator enters a valid SKU cross reference code but also enters a SKU code, an error message such as the following indicates if the operator attempts to add the line to the order:

Base item (525KL) is missing or invalid.

Restrictions on using SKU cross references to identify items/SKUs:

  • Interactive order entry: Since the Item field is 12 positions, the SKU cross reference code cannot exceed 12 positions in order to identify the item/SKU in interactive order entry.
  • Order API: The generic order interface does not support using SKU cross reference codes to identify items. See Resolving the Item and SKU in the Order API for a discussion.

For more information see the Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1).

The ChannelAdvisor integration supports using a SKU cross reference of up to 40 positions. See ChannelAdvisor Integration Overview for background.

Which offer is used for the order detail line?

When an operator enters a SKU cross reference code in the Item field in order entry or order maintenance, the system uses the offer on the order detail line to determine the price of the item, not the offer where the SKU cross reference code was defined. If a price has not been defined for the item in the offer on the order detail line, the error message Price (.00) cannot be zero for item displays and the operator must manually enter a price.

What if more than one item and SKU is defined with the same cross reference number?

The system searches offers alphanumerically for an item and SKU that contain the cross reference number, selecting the first item and SKU it finds.

Example:

Offer Item SKU Reference Number

A01

A123

BLUE

321RG

A01

A123

RED

321RG

B01

B123

BLUE

321RG

B01

B123

RED

321RG

In order entry and order maintenance, the system defaults the Order Management System item A123 and the Order Management System SKU BLUE, when an operator enters the reference number 321RG in the Item field.

In this situation, when an operator enters the cross reference number 321RG in the Item field, the system searches offers in alphanumeric order for a Order Management System item and SKU. Then, within the first offer where the system finds a match, the system selects the first Order Management System item and SKU it finds containing the cross reference number. For example, if a Order Management System item and SKU in offer A01 was not associated with the cross reference number 321RG, the system would then search offer B01 for a Order Management System item and SKU that was associated with the cross reference number.

In this topic:

Work with SKU Cross Reference Screen (Selecting an Offer)

Purpose: Use this screen to identify the offer for which you wish to define a cross reference between item and SKU codes in Order Management System and another system.

How to display this screen: Enter MSKR in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Maintain SKU Cross Reference from a menu.

Field Description
Offer

A unique code for the catalog, space, or advertisement for which you wish to define a cross reference between a Order Management System item and SKU and another system's item and SKU.

Enter a valid offer code to advance to the Maintain SKU Cross Reference Screen.

ChannelAdvisor: To work with cross-references for the ChannelAdvisor integration, enter the offer code specified in the ChannelAdvisor SKU X-Ref Offer (L92) system control value.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.

Maintain SKU Cross Reference Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create, change, and delete SKU cross reference codes for Order Management System items and SKUs. SKU cross reference codes represent the code for an item and SKU as represented in another system.

How to display this screen: Enter an offer code on the Work with SKU Cross Reference Screen (Selecting an Offer).

Field Description
Offer

The code and description of the catalog, space, or advertisement for which you wish to create SKU cross reference numbers.

The system displays all existing Order Management System items and SKUs, regardless of whether the item or SKU is associated with this offer.

Offer code: Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Offer description: Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Item/desc (Item number/Item description)

The item code for which you wish to create a SKU cross reference number. The description of the item is listed below the item code.

Item number: Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.

Item description: Alphanumeric, 120 positions; optional.
Colo, styl, size

The first, second, and third SKU elements defined for an item in your company.nAlphanumeric, three 4-position fields; optional.
SKU description

The SKU description.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.
SKU cross reference

A code for an item and SKU as represented on another system.

Note:

To use a SKU cross reference in order entry, you cannot have the code exceed 12 positions.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.

Create SKU Cross Reference Codes

To create: Scan for the item and SKU for which you wish to create a SKU cross reference code, using the scan fields at the top of the screen. Enter a cross reference code in the SKU cross reference field next to the item and SKU you wish to update.

The system positions the cursor to the first scan field so that you can scan for the next item and SKU you wish to update.

Change SKU Cross Reference Codes

To change: Scan for the item and SKU for which you wish to change the SKU cross reference code, using the scan fields at the top of the screen. Enter the change you wish to make to the existing cross reference code in the SKU cross reference field next to the item and SKU you wish to update.

The system positions the cursor to the first scan field so that you can scan for the next item and SKU you wish to update.

Updating SKU Offer Prices (MUSK)

Purpose: Use the Update SKU/Offer screen to create or update a SKU/offer price for specific SKUs of an item.

You might want to use this menu option instead of maintaining SKU/offer prices through Work with Item/SKUs, if your company contains items with many SKUs and you want to update multiple SKUs for multiple offers at one time.

The SKU/Offer price information you can update for a SKU’ed item is:

  • effective date
  • price quantity
  • price of the SKU in the offer
  • associate price of the SKU in the offer
  • special handling flag
  • special handling price
  • special handling code
  • tax inclusive price of the SKU in the offer
  • tax inclusive associate price of the SKU in the offer

You can define SKU/offer prices for up to 10 offers at one time.

Number assignment: The SKU Quick Price Update Number number assignment allows more than one user to enter SKU/offer prices at one time. When a user creates a SKU/offer price, the system assigns the SKU/offer price the next number available for this number assignment. See Setting Up the Number Assignment Table (WNUM).

If the item/offer exists: The system creates a SKU/offer using the item/offer information, except for the information you defined for the SKU/offer price.

If the item/offer does not exist: The system creates a SKU/offer using the following information:

  • the Gift Wrap Default (F07) system control value defaults to the Gift order field.
  • the system defaults the Sale item field to unselected.
  • the system defaults the Volume discount field to unselected.
  • the system defaults the Column pricing field to unselected.
  • the information you defined for the SKU/offer price

The system leaves any remaining fields blank.

In this topic:

Update SKU/Offer Screen

Use this screen to create or update a SKU/offer price for specific SKUs of an item.

Defaulting active offers: If the Default Active Offers (J07) system control value is selected and you do not manually enter an offer in the Offer fields, the system defaults the 10 most recent active offers to the Offer field for the entered SKU’ed item: Offers have been defaulted - click OK to update.

The offers default to the Offer fields in descending Start date sequence.

Note:

The system does not default any offers until you enter a SKU’ed item, effective date, quantity, and price, and select OK.

You must enter a SKU’ed item on the Update SKU/Offer Screen; however, you cannot enter a SKU code. Because of this, the system always defaults the 10 most recent item offers to the Offer fields.

  • If the item is not assigned to 10 active item offers, the system defaults the available active offers assigned to the item. For example, if the item is assigned to 25 item offers, but only 8 item offers are active, the system defaults the 8 active item offers.
  • If the item is assigned to more than 20 active item offers, the system evaluates the offer’s Start date to determine the 20 most recent active item offers to default.
  • If active offers do not exist for the item, the Offer fields remain blank and you must manually enter offers in the Offer fields.
  • If you update the Item and/or SKU field, the system will not update the defaulted offers.
  • You can manually change a defaulted offer to another offer, even if the offer is a future offer or expired offer.

How to display this screen: Enter MUSK in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Update SKU Offer Prices from a menu.

Field Description
Item

A user defined code that represents an item. This is the item for which you wish to create or update SKU/offer prices.

An error message indicates if you enter a non-SKU’ed item in this field:

Invalid item - Item must be SKU’ed.

An error message indicates if you enter an item that is not associated with an item/offer:

Invalid item - Item/Offer must exist.

Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.
Description

A description of the item.

Updates when you enter an item code in the Item field.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Effective date

The date the price or quantity break discount becomes valid. This date should be on or after the effective date of the offer.

If there are multiple effective dates for the same SKU/offer, the system uses the price associated with the effective date closest to, but not greater than, the order date.

Example: If there are effective dates of Feb. 20 and Mar. 31 and the customer placed an order on April 1, the customer receives the price associated with the effective date of March 31.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Quantity

The amount of the item/SKU that the customer must order to receive the discounted (quantity break) price.

Numeric, 7 positions; required.
Tax inclusive price

The price at which the item will be sold in the specified offer(s) on orders subject to tax-inclusive pricing and VAT.

Included only if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected. If so, the following message indicates if you do not define a price in this field:

Tax Inclusive Price is required entry.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Price

The price at which the item will be sold in the specified offer(s) when the quantity and effective date are met.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required.
Associate price

The price at which the item will be sold in the specified offer(s) to associate customers. Included only if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Tax inclusive associated price

The price at which the item will be sold in the specified offer(s) to associate customers on orders subject to tax-inclusive pricing and VAT.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Spec. hand. (Special handling)

Indicates whether this item is eligible for any type of special handling in this offer, such as monogramming or hemming.

Valid values are:

Selected = This item is eligible for special handling. When you add this item to an order, you advance to another screen where you can enter special handling instructions.

Unselected (default) = This item is not eligible for special handling.

S/H price (Special handling price)

The price to charge the customer for special handling. You can specify in the Evaluate Special Handling Charges by Order Line (D67) system control value whether to add the price just once for each order line, or multiply the special handling price by the item quantity for the line.

An error message indicates if you define a special handling price and the Special handling field is unselected:

Special handling price not allowed when not eligible.

The following message indicates if you enter a special handling price and you defined a custom special handling code in the Special handling code field:

Special handling charge not allowed with custom format code.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
S/H code (Special handling code)

The additional charge code associated with the type of special handling you are offering for the item. The special handling can be either standard or custom; the system handles each type in a different way. See Establishing Additional Charge Codes (WADC) and Establishing Custom Special Handling Formats (WSHF).

If you enter a special handling code here, you will advance to the Work with Special Handling Screen or Work with Custom Special Handling Screen automatically in order entry.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
SKU element 1

The name of SKU element 1, based on the Split SKU Element Column 1 Heading (A34) system control value.

You can define up to 30 SKU element 1 codes for which you wish to create or update SKU/offer prices.

You can leave the SKU element 1 fields blank if you wish to update all of the SKU element 1 codes for the item.

Alphanumeric, thirty 4-position fields; optional.
SKU element 2

The name of SKU element 2, based on the Split SKU Element 2 Column Heading system control value.

You can define up to 30 SKU element 2 codes for which you wish to create or update SKU/offer prices.

You can leave the SKU element 2 fields blank if you wish to update all of the SKU element 2 codes for the item.

Alphanumeric, thirty 4-position fields; optional.
SKU element 3

The name of SKU element 3, based on the Split SKU Element 3 Column Heading system control value.

You can define up to 30 SKU element 3 codes for which you wish to create or update SKU/offer prices.

You can leave the SKU element 3 fields blank if you wish to update all of the SKU element 3 codes for the item.

Alphanumeric, thirty 4-position fields; optional.
Offers

The offers you wish to update with this SKU/offer price information. See Working with Offers (WOFR).

You can create or update SKU/offer prices for up to 10 different offers at one time.

If the Default Active Offers (J07) system control value is selected and you do not manually enter an offer in the Offer fields, the system defaults the 10 most recent active offers to the Offer fields for the entered item. The offers default to the Offer fields in descending Start date sequence.

An error message indicates if you enter the same offer in more than one field: More than one offer A01 has been entered.

An error message indicates if you do not define at least one offer: At least one (1) Offer must be entered.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.

Instructions:

  1. Complete each necessary field.
  2. If you did not define specific SKU codes you wish to update, the system displays the following message: Click OK to update ALL SKUs for Item.
  3. Select OK to update the SKU/offer price information, or select Exit to cancel.
  4. If you selected OK, you advance to the Exclude SKU Offer Prices Screen, where you can exclude specific SKUs from being updated with this SKU/offer price.

Exclude SKU Offer Prices Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to exclude a specific SKU from being updated with the SKU/offer price you defined.

The system displays all of the valid SKU combinations for the item, based on the SKU codes you entered on the Update SKU/Offer Screen. For example, if you sell mittens in small, medium, and large and in many colors, but only defined the SKU small on the Update SKU/Offer screen, the system would show mittens only in size small in all of the available colors.

How to display this screen: Complete the Update SKU/Offer Screen.

Field Description
Item

A user defined code that represents an item. This is the item for which you wish to create or update SKU/offer prices.

Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
Quantity

The amount of the item/SKU that the customer must order to receive the discounted (quantity break) price.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Description

A description of the item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Price

The price at which the item will be sold when the quantity and effective date are met.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Associate price

The price at which the item will be sold to associate customers.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Offers

The offers you selected on the Update SKU/Offer Screen. These are the offers for which you wish to create or update SKU/offer prices.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
SKU elements

The name of SKU elements 1, 2 and 3, based on the Split SKU Element Column 1 Heading (A34) system control value.

The system displays the valid SKU combinations that are eligible for a SKU/offer price update, based on the SKU codes you defined on the Update SKU/Offer screen.

Alphanumeric, thirty 4-position fields; optional.
Exclude?

Indicates whether you wish to exclude the valid SKU combination from creating a SKU/offer price.

Valid values are:

Selected = Exclude this SKU combination from creating a SKU/offer price.

Unselected = Do not exclude this SKU combination from creating a SKU/offer price.

Instructions:

  1. Select the SKU combinations you wish to exclude from creating a SKU/offer price; otherwise, leave the field blank if you want to create a SKU/offer price for the SKU.
  2. Select Process to create the SKU/offer prices, or select Exit to cancel.
  3. The system returns you to the Update SKU/Offer screen.

You can view the SKU/Offer prices you created on the Work with SKU Prices screen in Work with Item/SKUs. See Assigning Items/SKUs to Offers.

Note:

If the effective date of the SKU/offer price you created matches the effective date of an existing SKU/offer price, the system replaces the existing SKU/offer price with the new SKU/offer price.

Maintaining Item/SKU/Offer (CPIM)

Purpose: Use Maintain Item/SKU/Offer to recalculate the projected units or update other information in the Item/Offer table.

In this topic:

For more information: See Working with Existing Items (MITM) for a description of the fields on the Change Item, Change SKU, and Change SKU/Offer screens.

Maintain Item/SKU/Offer Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to update item/offer information.

How to display this screen: Enter CPIM in the Fast path field or select Maintain Item/SKU/Offer from a menu.

Field Description
Offer

A code for the catalog, space, or television advertisement from which you accept orders. See Working with Offers (WOFR).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Item

A code for a unit of inventory that you sell.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions.
SKU

A code for the unique characteristics of the item, such as its color, size, width, etc.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields.
Price

The price of a single unit of the item, as advertised in the offer.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
F/O (Feature/Option code)

This code identifies whether the item in the offer is considered a feature or option in a depiction (a photograph or drawing of the item along with other items).

If, for example, a dining room is depicted, the featured item might be the dining room table, and the options might include a place setting, crystal, and a centerpiece.

Valid values are:

Feature = Item is the featured item in the depiction

Option = Item is an option within a depiction

Optional.
P/N (Pickup/New code)

This code identifies whether the item is a carryover from a previous offer or is an item that you are just beginning to sell.

Valid values are:

Pickup = Item is a pickup item from a previous offer

New = Item is new to this offer

Optional.
Tax inclusive price

The price of a single unit of the item, as advertised in the offer, on orders which are subject to VAT. Included only if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Update the base item

Select Change for the item you want to update to advance to the Change Item Screen. See Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM).

Update a SKU

Select Change SKU for the SKU’d item you want to update to advance to the Change SKU (First Screen). See Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM)

Update a SKU/Offer

Select Change SKU offer for the SKU/Offer you want to update to advance to the Change SKU/Offer Screen. See Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM)

Maintaining Item Offers (MIOF)

Purpose: Use Maintain Item Offers to update item offer information for a specific offer, or to change item information for a specific item.

For more information: See Assigning Items/SKUs to Offers for more information on changing item or item offer information.

Maintain Item/Offer Screen

How to display this screen: Enter MIOF in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Maintain Item Offers from a menu.

Field Descriptionh
Offer

A code for a catalog, space, or television advertisement from which you accept orders. See Working with Offers (WOFR).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Item

A code for a unit of inventory that you sell. Once you have selected an offer, you can scan on this field.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.
SKUs?

Indicates whether the item contains SKUs. Valid values are:

Selected = this item contains SKUs

Unselected = this item does not contain SKUs

Price

The Price of a single unit of the item, as advertised in the offer.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
F/O (Feature/option code)

The Feature/option code identifies whether the item in the offer is considered a feature or option in a depiction (a photograph or drawing of the item with other items). If for example, a dining room is depicted, the feature item might be the dining room table and the options might include the place setting, crystal and centerpiece. Valid values are:

Feature = this item is the featured item in the depiction

Option = this item is an option in the depiction

Optional.
P/N (Pickup/new code)

The P/N (Pickup/new code) code identifies whether this item is a carryover from a previous offer or is an item that you are just beginning to sell. Valid values are:

Pickup = Item is a pickup item from a previous offer

New = Item is new to your offer

Optional.
Tax inclusive price

The Tax inclusive price of a single unit of the item, as advertised in the offer, on orders which are subject to VAT. Included only if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Change base item information

Select Change for an item to advance to the Change Item screen. See Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM).

Change item offer information

Select Change Item Offer for an item to advance to the Change Item Offer screen. See Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM).

Copying SKU/Offer Records (CSKO)

Purpose: Use this menu option to copy item/SKUs from one SKU offer to another SKU offer by selecting an offer to copy from and the new offer to be created to.

You can also copy all SKU offer records from one offer to another offer using the Copying SKU Offer Information (MCSO) menu option.

What SKU offer information is copied? When you copy a SKU offer record to a new offer, the system copies the following records for the from offer to create matching records for the to offer.

  • SKU offer
  • SKU price Note: The system copies the SKU price record for the from offer for a quantity of 1; the system does not copy any other SKU price records that exist for other quantities to the to offer.

Additionally, if you select to copy a SKU offer record for a non-SKU’d item, the system creates a SKU offer record and an item offer record for the to offer if an item offer already exists for the from offer.

Example: You select to copy items SKU202 RED SMLL and ITEM30 from offer 202 to offer 203.

Item/SKU copied From offer Records copied To offer Records created

SKU202 RED SMLL

202

SKU offer

SKU price

203

SKU offer

SKU price

ITEM301

202

SKU offer

SKU price

Item offer

203

SKU offer

SKU price

Item offer

Copy SKU/Offer Records Screen

This screen displays all SKU offer records that exist for the company you are currently in; you can select which SKU offer records you wish to copy to another offer.

To copy:

  • Optionally, scan for the SKU offer records you wish to copy by entering an offer in the Copy from offer field and an item in the Item field.
  • Next to each SKU offer record you wish to copy, enter the offer for which you wish to create a SKU offer record in the To offer field.
  • Select Accept.

Note:

The system creates a SKU offer record for the to offer that matches the SKU offer record for the from offer. You can change the information for the to offer at the Change SKU Offer screen.

How to display this screen: Enter CSKO in the Fast path field or select Copy Individual SKU Offers from a menu.

Field Description
Copy from offer

The offer from which you wish to copy SKU offer information.

You can use this field to scan for the offer whose SKU offer records you wish to copy.

Note:

The system does not verify that the offer you enter in this scan field is a valid offer.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
From offer

The offer from which the information will be copied.

Offer codes are defined in an validated against the Offer table; see Working with Offers (WOFR).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Item

The item code and SKU whose SKU offer information you wish to copy.

You can use this field to scan for the item and SKU whose SKU offer records you with to copy.

Note:

The system does not verify that the item and SKU you enter in this scan field is a valid item/SKU.

Item code: Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.

SKU code: Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; optional.
To offer

The offer to which the information will be copied.

Note:

The system does not validate that the from offer is different from the to offer.

Offer codes are defined in an validated against the Offer table; see Working with Offers (WOFR).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Display SKU offer information for the From SKU offer record

Select Display for an offer to advance to the Display SKU Offer screen.

Toggle the display of the Options field

Select Options on/off to toggle the Options field on or off.

Copy the SKU offer records of the From offer to create SKU offer records for the To offer

Select Accept.

Maintaining Purchase Orders

Topics in this part:

Maintaining Purchase Orders (MPOE)

Purpose: This topic describes how to select a purchase order for maintenance, maintain header, detail, and all related information, and accept or reject your changes.

Drop ship POs: Creating a drop ship purchase order expedites the shipment of a drop ship order to the customer. The system performs the following procedures during drop ship processing:

  • An item is flagged as “Drop Ship” in Order Entry (Open Drop Ship line).
  • The system checks the Item/SKU table to determine the primary vendor assigned to the item/SKU that was ordered.
  • The system then checks the Vendor table to determine whether this vendor creates drop ship purchase orders or drop ship pick slips. If drop ship POs are created for this vendor, PO Print automatically prints the Drop Ship PO.
  • Once confirmation has been received from the vendor, PO Receipts closes the purchase order, closes the order, and generates a billing record for the customer.

Purchase Order Outbound API: You can use the Purchase Order Outbound API to pass purchase order information to download to another system, such as a warehouse management system (WMS) or EDI vendor system. See Generic Outbound Purchase Order API the Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1) for overview and setup.

In this topic:

Related Secured Features

Selecting Purchase Orders for Maintenance

Overview: You advance to purchase order maintenance through the MPOE fast path, which brings you to the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen. From this screen, you can advance to:

From any selection screen, select a purchase order to advance to the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen.

Maintaining multiple purchase orders: You can select multiple purchase orders for maintenance at any selection screen. When you select Accept or Reject after you finish maintaining a purchase order, you advance to the next purchase order you selected for maintenance.

PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen

Use this screen to locate the purchase order number you wish to maintain.

How to display this screen: Enter MPOE in the Fast path field at the top of any menu.

Field Description
PO #

Enter a valid purchase order number to advance to the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.

Due Date

Enter a purchase order due date to advance to the Select Purchase Order by Due Date Screen.

Numeric, 6 positions; optional.

Reference #

Enter a purchase order reference number to advance to the Select P/O by Reference Number Screen.

Vendor

Enter a vendor number to advance to the Select Purchase Order by Vendor Number Screen.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Vendor name

Enter a vendor name to advance to the Vendor Selection Pop-Up Window (Selecting Purchase Orders by Vendor Name).

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
Reference

Enter a vendor reference number to advance to the Select P/O by Vendor Reference Screen.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; optional.

Vendor Item

Enter a vendor item number to advance to the Select Purchase Order by Vendor Item Screen.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.

Item/SKU

Enter a valid item/SKU to advance to the Select Purchase Order by Item/SKU Screen.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions (for item), three 4-position fields (SKU); optional.
Buyer

Enter a buyer code to advance to the Select Purchase Order by Buyer Screen.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

Select Purchase Order by Due Date Screen

How to display this screen: At the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen, enter a purchase order due date.

You can also display this screen by entering a purchase order due date at the Select Purchase Order for Inquiry Screen; however, the screen options will differ.

Field Description
Due date

The date the purchase order is due to be received.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Promise date

The date the purchase order is scheduled to arrive, or to ship. This date is user-defined and its usage depends on your organization's procedures.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
P/O #

A unique number to identify a purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Balance

The value of the merchandise ordered on the purchase order. Calculated by multiplying the quantity ordered by the vendor's cost. This is the total cost for all the detail lines on the purchase order. The system updates this value.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4 place decimal.
Vendor

A code that defines the supplier of items.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Buyer

A code to identify a person authorized to make purchases.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Status

The status of the purchase order.

Status options:

  • Cancelled
  • Docked
  • Held
  • Open
  • Suspended
  • Closed

Optional.

Note:

The Select by (field name) screens are the same in both purchase order maintenance and purchase order inquiry; however, the screen options differ.
Screen Option Procedure

Select a purchase order for maintenance

Select a purchase order (if you advanced through PO maintenance) or Select Change for a purchase order (if you advanced through PO inquiry) to advance to the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen.

Maintaining multiple purchase orders: You can select multiple purchase orders for maintenance. When you select Accept or Reject after you finish maintaining a purchase order, you advance to the next purchase order you selected for maintenance.

Select a purchase order for inquiry

Select a purchase order to advance to the First Display Purchase Order Detail Screen.

Note:

Available through PO inquiry only.

Reviewing multiple purchase orders: You can select multiple for purchase orders for review. When you select Exit after you finish reviewing a purchase order, you advance to the next purchase order you selected for review.

Copy a purchase order

Select Copy for a purchase order to copy an existing purchase order. See the Copying Purchase Orders.

Note:

This option is not available in purchase order inquiry.

Select P/O by Reference Number Screen

How to display this screen: At the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen, enter a purchase order reference number. You can also display this screen by entering a purchase order due date at the Select Purchase Order for Inquiry Screen; however, the screen options will differ.

Note:

The fields and options are similar to those described at the Select Purchase Order by Due Date Screen.

Select Purchase Order by Vendor Number Screen

How to display this screen: At the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen, enter a vendor number. You can also display this screen by entering a purchase order due date at the Select Purchase Order for Inquiry Screen; however, the screen options will differ.

Note:

The fields and options are similar to those described at the Select Purchase Order by Due Date Screen.

Vendor Selection Pop-Up Window (Selecting Purchase Orders by Vendor Name)

How to display this screen: Enter a vendor name at the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen. You can also display this screen by entering a purchase order due date at the Select Purchase Order for Inquiry Screen.

Note:

The fields and options are similar to those described at the Select Purchase Order by Due Date Screen.

Select P/O by Vendor Reference Screen

How to display this screen: At the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen, enter a vendor reference number. You can also display this screen by entering a purchase order due date at the Select Purchase Order for Inquiry Screen; however, the screen options will differ.

Note:

The fields and options are similar to those described at the Select Purchase Order by Due Date Screen.

Select Purchase Order by Vendor Item Screen

How to display this screen: At the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen, enter a vendor item number. You can also display this screen by entering a purchase order due date at the Select Purchase Order for Inquiry Screen; however, the screen options will differ.

Note:

The fields and options are similar to those described at the Select Purchase Order by Due Date Screen.

Select Purchase Order by Item/SKU Screen

How to display this screen: At the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen, enter an item/SKU code. You can also display this screen by entering a purchase order due date at the Select Purchase Order for Inquiry Screen; however, the screen options will differ.

Note:

The fields and options are similar to those described at the Select Purchase Order by Due Date Screen.

Select Purchase Order by Buyer Screen

How to display this screen: At the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen, enter a buyer code. You can also display this screen by entering a purchase order due date at the Select Purchase Order for Inquiry Screen; however, the screen options will differ.

Note:

The fields and options are similar to those described at the Select Purchase Order by Due Date Screen.

Copying Purchase Orders

Purpose: Use the Copy function to create an exact duplicate of an existing purchase order. You can copy a purchase order, regardless of the original purchase order's status. The system assigns an Open status to the new purchase order.

How to copy a purchase order:

  1. At a Select Purchase Order screen, select Copy for the PO you want to copy. See Selecting Purchase Orders for Maintenance.
  2. The system copies the PO and displays the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen for the new purchase order. The system automatically assigns a number to the new purchase order.

PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to change, cancel, display, or add a line to an existing purchase order. Up to three purchase order lines display at one time; select Next to review additional lines.

How to display this screen:

  1. Select the purchase order by number at the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen.
  2. If you do not know the exact number, enter information in one of the selection fields at the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen to advance to a Select Purchase Order screen (see Selecting Purchase Orders for Maintenance). At this screen, select a PO.
Field Description
Vendor

The code and name of the supplier.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only.
PO #

The number assigned to the purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Status

The status of the purchase order.

Status options:

  • Canceled = The purchase order was canceled through PO Maintenance; it exists on the system for historical purposes.
  • Docked = You have received inventory associated with the purchase order, but have not yet confirmed items or quantities.
  • Closed = All lines on the purchase order have been received through PO Receiving.
  • Held = The PO must be approved through PO Maintenance before receipts can occur.
  • Open = The PO exists on the system awaiting PO Receipts.
  • Suspended = Inventory has been received into suspense through the PO Receiving function.

Display-only.
Total cost

The total value of items to be purchased, calculated by the extended price (quantity ordered multiplied by price), plus additional estimated charges and line surcharges (minus any discounts). Expressed in your currency, not the vendor's.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Ln #

The purchase order detail line number. Up to 999 lines may exist on one purchase order.

Enter a number in this field and select OK to position to a specific purchase order line number.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Sts

The status of the purchase order line.

Valid values:

  • C = Canceled
  • H = Held
  • O = Open
  • S = Suspended
  • X = Closed

Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.
Item

A code representing an item on the purchase order. The description of the item is below this field.

Enter a valid item number and select OK to position to a specific item. If more than one purchase order line contains the item, the purchase orders lines that contain the item display in line number sequence.

Item: Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

Description: Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.

SKU

The SKU for the item on the purchase order line.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
UOM (Unit of Measure)

The retailer’s unit of measure. This may differ from the vendor’s unit of measure. Typical units of measure include:

  • EA = each
  • IN = inches
  • C12 = case of 12

Validated against the Unit of Measure table; see Working with Units of Measure (WUOM).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Qty ord (Quantity ordered)

The number ordered of the item, in the retailer’s unit of measure.

Numeric, 7 positions display-only.
Qty due (Quantity due)

The quantity remaining to be received.

The system uses the following calculation to determine the quantity due:

Order quantity from PO Detail table - Received quantity from PO Detail table = Quantity due.

Note:

0 indicates the quantity received is greater than the quantity ordered.
Ext cost (Extended cost)

The extended cost of this PO detail line, which is calculated by multiplying the quantity ordered and the price from the purchase order, adding the surcharge, and subtracting the discount.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Change PO detail information

Select Change for a detail line to advance to the PO Maintenance - Change PO Detail Screen. You cannot change a PO line that is in a cancelled or closed status: Cannot change a closed/cancelled PO line.

Cancel PO detail information

Select Cancel for a detail line to cancel it from the purchase order. The status (Sts field) for the item changes to C (canceled), and the On order qty reduces by the number of units canceled.

Note:

If the item is a drop ship item, and you use the Order Broker Drop Ship interface to process drop ship items for this vendor, you cannot cancel the PO from this screen unless:
  • You have authority to the Cancel OROB Drop Ship PO (J04) secured feature.
  • The item is a drop ship item, but was processed before the vendor was flagged as OROB Drop Shipping.

If you do not have authority to the Cancel OROB Drop Ship PO (J04) secured feature, the following message displays when you select Cancel for an Order Broker drop ship line:

Use D/S Status option in PO or Order Inquiry to cancel D/S integration PO line

From PO Inquiry or standard Order Inquiry, you can cancel an Order Broker drop ship item if you have authority to the secured feature Order Maintenance Access (A22).

Display PO detail information

Select Display for a detail line to advance to the Display Purchase Order Detail Screen.

Close the PO line

Select Close for a detail line to close it. The status (Sts field) for the item changes to X (closed), and the On order qty reduces by the number of units.

Note:

If the item is a drop ship item, and you use the Order Broker Drop Ship interface to process drop ship items for this vendor, you cannot close the PO from this screen. Instead, when you select Close next to an item the following message indicates:

Use D/S Status option in PO or Order Inquiry to cancel D/S integration PO line

From PO Inquiry or standard Order Inquiry, you can cancel an Order Broker drop ship item if you have authority to the secured feature Order Maintenance Access (A22).

Work with estimated charges

Select Estimated Charges for a detail line to advance to the Work with PO Detail Estimated Charges Screen.

Display PO detail history

Select History for a detail line to advance to the Display PO Detail History Screen.

Update PO detail messages

Select Messages for a detail line to advance to the Work with PO Detail Messages Screen.

Review receiving history

Select Receiving for a detail line to advance to the Purchase Receipts History Screen.

Work with vendor item notes for the last item entered

Select Vendor item notes for a detail line to advance to the Work with Vendor Item Notes Screen.

Approve PO

Select Approve to approve the PO. If you are not authorized to approve purchase orders, the screen displays an error message. The Approve Purchase Order (A31) secured feature controls this access.

Note:

If you advanced to this screen from PO inquiry, you cannot approve a purchase order. You need to select the purchase order in PO maintenance in order to approve it, regardless of your secured feature authority.

Create PO detail information

Select Create Dtl to advance to the Create PO Detail Standard Screen.

Work with PO header information

Select Header to advance to the Work with Purchase Order (Header) Screen.

Note:

If you change the buyer, ship via, offer, due date, cancel date, or promise date on the PO header, the system updates the value on each existing PO line in an open or held status. The system also updates the value for any new lines you add to the PO in PO Maintenance, unless you override the value at the detail level.

Accept the PO

Select Accept to accept the PO. See Completing PO Maintenance.

Reject the PO

Select Reject to reject the PO. See Completing PO Maintenance.

Cancel the purchase order

Select Cancel PO to cancel this purchase order.

If the PO is a drop ship PO and an authorization exists for the order, the system creates a record in the Void Auths table for the authorization amount.

If a detail line on the PO is a drop ship item, and you use the Order Broker Drop Ship interface to process drop ship items, you cannot cancel the purchase order using this option, and the following message indicates:

Must cancel drop ship lines individually

Work with vendor FOB for the PO

Select FOB to advance to the Work with FOB for Purchase Order Screen.

Add vendor notes

Select Vendor notes to advance to the Work with Vendor Notes Screen.

Display summary information

Select Summary to advance to the Purchase Order Summary Screen.

Display PO messages

Select Messages to advance to the Work with PO Messages Screen.

PO Maintenance - Change PO Detail Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to make changes to an item on a purchase order. You can also use this screen to:

  • Break up shipments for a purchase order detail line or hold shipment of the entire line until a future date.
  • Enter, display, update or delete estimated additional charges for brokerage, commission, duty, freight, import, surcharge, or other types of fees.
  • Enter, display, update or delete estimated discounts for a purchase order detail line.

How to display this screen: At the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen, select Change for an item.

Field Description
PO #

The number assigned to the purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Status

The status of the purchase order.

Status options:

  • Canceled = The purchase order was canceled through PO Maintenance; it exists on the system for historical purposes.
  • Docked = You have received inventory associated with the purchase order, but have not yet confirmed items or quantities.
  • Closed = All lines on the purchase order have been received through PO Receiving.
  • Held = The PO must be approved through PO Maintenance before receipts can occur.
  • Open = The PO exists on the system awaiting PO Receipts.
  • Suspended = Inventory has been received into suspense through the PO Receiving function.

Display-only.
Vendor #

The code and name of the supplier.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only.
Line #

The purchase order detail line number. Up to 999 lines may exist on one purchase order.

Enter a number in this field and select OK to position to a specific purchase order line number.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Status

The status of the purchase order line.

Valid values:

  • Open = The PO line is open awaiting PO Receipts.
  • Held = The PO line is held.
  • Cancelled = The PO line was canceled through PO Maintenance; it exists on the system for historical purposes.
  • Suspended = Inventory has been received into suspense through the PO Receiving function.
  • Closed = The PO line has been received through PO Receiving.

Alphanumeric; display-only.
Item

A code representing an item on the purchase order. The description of the item is below this field.

Enter a valid item number and select OK to position to a specific item. If more than one purchase order line contains the item, the purchase order lines that contain the item display in line number sequence.

Item: Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

Description: Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.

SKU

The SKU for the item on the purchase order line.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Qty

Quantity of the item that you have ordered from the vendor, in retailer’s unit of measure. The system checks:

  • Minimum quantity in the Vendor/Item table (in retailer’s unit of measure)
  • Order multiple in Vendor/Item table. (in retailer’s unit of measure)

An error message indicates if the quantity you order is less than the minimum, if the quantity is not a multiple of the quantity specified for the vendor/item, or if the quantity you enter cannot be converted to the vendor’s unit of measure. See Working with Vendor Items (WVNI).

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Cost

The unit price you pay the vendor for this item, per retailer’s unit of measure. If you do not enter a cost here, it defaults after you select OK as follows:

  • Vendor/Item cost
  • Standard cost from the SKU table

The Override PO Cost (A17) secured feature controls access to this field.

Note:

You cannot change the cost of an existing purchase order line to zero, even if the vendor/item price and price from the SKU table are zero.
Order Broker PO Changes

When you change the cost for a drop ship purchase order line which has been sent to the Order Broker Drop Ship Integration for processing, Order Management System automatically sends the changed cost information to Order Broker, where the cost on the purchase order line updates automatically.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; required.
Transit qty

The quantity that the vendor has indicated is in transit from them to you. This is merchandise that has not been received as yet; however, it has been shipped from the vendor. You can update this quantity through Working with P/O In Transit Information (MPIT) or enter it here.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Primary disc (Primary discount percentage)

The primary discount percentage defined for this vendor that is applied to all items purchased. The primary discount is established in the Vendor record. May be overridden at the line level or using PO Header Overrides; see Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Surcharge

An additional fee to purchase this item from this vendor. A surcharge is typically added to purchases from a broker. The surcharge is defined in the Vendor record. May be overridden using PO Header Overrides; see Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Ext cost (Extended cost)

The extended cost of this PO detail line, calculated by multiplying the quantity ordered and the price, adding the surcharge, and subtracting the discount.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Vendor's

The vendor's item number, as defined in the Vendor/Item table; see Working with Vendor Items (WVNI).

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only.
U/M (Unit of measure)

The vendor's unit of measure for the vendor's item. This typically describes how the item is ordered from the vendor. See Working with Units of Measure (WUOM).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Quantity

The quantity of the item you have ordered from the vendor. This quantity is expressed in the vendor's unit of measure and may be different than the Qty field, above.

For example, if your unit of measure is “eaches” and the vendor's unit of measure is cases of 24, if the Qty field is set to 48 units, the Quantity field would be 2 (representing the vendor's unit of measure).

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Vendor price

The price the vendor charges for the item, per vendor’s unit of measure. Expressed in the vendor's currency.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Vnd Dscnt (Vendor discount)

The vendor's primary discount, applied to all items purchased.

May be overridden at the line level or using PO Header Overrides; see Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Ext price (Extended price)

The extended price of this PO detail line. Calculated by multiplying the price by the quantity ordered.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Buyer

A code that identifies a person who is authorized to make purchases for your company; see Working with Buyers (WBUY).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Ship via

A code that represents a carrier used for shipping merchandise to your company; see Working with Purchase Order Ship Via (WPSV).

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Offer (Offer code)

The code for the offer (catalog). See Working with Offers (WOFR).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Warehouse

A code that represents the warehouse where the item will be received. Validated against the Warehouse table; see Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS).

You can change the warehouse on a PO line only to a warehouse where the item currently exists.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Due date

The date the purchase order is due to be received, based on the PO date and the Lead days from the Vendor/Item record, or manually entered for the PO. This date is listed in Order Entry, Order Maintenance, and standard or streamlined Order Inquiry.

Note:

Changing the date on the PO detail line does not change the date on the PO header. You must also change the header date.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Cancel date

The date the purchase order will be marked for cancellation if the order is not received. If you complete this field, you advance to the PO Auto Cancel Date Selection Pop-Up Window; from this window, you can generate the Purchase Order Auto Cancel Report.

Note:

Changing the date on the PO detail line does not change the date on the PO header. You must also change the header date.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Promise date

A user-defined date that may be used to represent the expected ship date or promised arrival date.

Note:

Changing the date on the PO detail line does not change the date on the PO header. You must also change the header date.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Work with purchase order line discounts

Select Discounts to advance to the Purchase Order Line Discount Screen.

Work with estimated charges

Select Estimated Charges to advance to the Work with PO Detail Estimated Charges Screen.

Work with vendor item notes for the last item entered.

Select Vendor Item Notes to advance to the Work with Vendor Item Notes Screen.

Display PO messages

Select Messages to advance to the Work with PO Detail Messages Screen.

Update the SKU cost

Select Update SKU Cost to advance to the Update SKU Cost Window.

An error message displays if all of the lines on the PO are cancelled or closed: No lines available for cost update.

Display Purchase Order Detail Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review information about an item on a purchase order.

How to display this screen: From the Create PO Detail Standard Screen, select Display for a detail line. You can also display this screen by selecting Display for an item at the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen.

See Second Display Purchase Order Detail Screen for field descriptions.

Work with PO Detail Estimated Charges Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create or change a charge for a specific purchase order detail line.

You can define the following types of estimated charges for a purchase order header or detail line:

  • freight
  • brokerage
  • commission
  • duty
  • import
  • prep
  • royalty
  • surcharge
  • other fees

In purchase order maintenance, you can enter the estimated charge as a unit cost or a percentage. You enter the actual charges (for freight, brokerage, etc.) for the detail line at purchase order receiving. These charges are not reflected in the extended price of the purchase order.

Changing a purchase order estimated charge in purchase order maintenance generates a purchase order history message indicating that the charge has been changed.

Purchase order additional charge codes are defined through Working With PO Additional Charges (WPAC).

Any charges that you already entered on the Work with PO Header Estimated Charges Screen display on the screen. If the Default Vendor Item Additional Charges (I21) system control value is selected, any charges defined for the item in Work with Vendor Items display on the screen.

Note:

If you enter a charge for a detail line and then enter the same charge on the header screen, the system overrides the amount you had defined for the line to the header amount.

How to display this screen:

  1. At the Create PO Detail Standard Screen, other detail entry screen or the PO Maintenance - Change PO Detail Screen select Est. Charges. This screen displays for the last PO line entered.
  2. At the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen, select Estimated Charges for a detail line.

Field descriptions: The Line #, Status, Item, SKU, and Item description fields on this screen are described below. See Work with PO Header Estimated Charges Screen for a description of the other fields on this screen.

Field Description
Line #

The number for the purchase order detail line for which you are creating or changing additional estimated charges.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Status

The status of the purchase order line.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.
Item

The code for the item on the purchase order detail line.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
SKU (Unlabeled field to the right of the Item)

The code that represents the special characteristics of the item, such as color or size.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Item description (Unlabeled field below the Item)

The description of the item on the purchase order detail line.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Toggle between add mode and change mode

Select Add/Change. The existing charges on the screen display as display-only or they are enterable fields. Complete the necessary fields.

Display PO Detail History Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review any activity against the purchase order line since it was created on the system. The system notes each time the line is maintained.

How to display this screen: At the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen or the First Display Purchase Order Detail Screen in PO inquiry, select History for an item.

Field Description
Vendor #

The name and number of the supplier.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only.
PO #

A unique number to identify the purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Ln #

The number of this line on the purchase order.

Numeric, 3 positions, display-only.
Item

A code that identifies a unit of inventory.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
B/A

A code indicating whether the history represents a before or after image of the transaction.

Values are:

  • Before = information representing the purchase order detail line before the transaction was processed.
  • After = information representing the purchase order detail line after the transaction was processed.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.
Date

The date when the activity was performed.

Numeric, 6 positions; display-only.
User

The user who performed the activity.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
Description

A description of the activity that was performed against the purchase order detail line.

Alphanumeric, 25 positions; display-only.

Work with PO Detail Messages Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to enter or update message text. These messages can print on the purchase order detail line if your print program supports it. Line messages relate to a single item on the purchase order only.

How to display this screen:

Field Description
Message

Free-form message about the item.

Alphanumeric, 60 positions (each line); optional.
Print

Valid values are:

  • Print on PO
  • Blank (Do not print)

Optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Add/Change hold and release information

Select Add/Change to activate the add or change function, and enter the required information.

Purchase Receipts History Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review receipt totals for an item on a purchase order.

How to display this screen: At the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen or the First Display Purchase Order Detail Screen in purchase order inquiry, select Receiving for an item.

Field Description
P/O #

A unique number to identify the purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Vendor

A unique number to identify the vendor. The description appears to the right. Validated against the Vendor table; see Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Vendor number: numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Description: alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only.
Line #

The purchase order detail line number.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Item

A code to represent the item on the purchase order. The description appears to the right.

Item: alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

Description: alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
SKU Qty Rcv (Quantity received)

The number of units received, presented in your unit of measure.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
SKU U/M (Unit of measure)

A standard by which an item is sold.

Typical units of measure include:

  • EA = each
  • IN = inches
  • C12 = case of 12

Validated against the Unit of Measure table; see Working with Units of Measure (WUOM).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Vendor Qty Rcv (Quantity received)

The number of units received, presented in the vendor's unit of measure.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Vendor U/M (Unit of measure)

The vendor’s unit of measure.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Date received

The date the units were received at your warehouse.

Numeric, 6 positions; display-only.
Cost at recp (Cost at receipt)

The unit cost of the item.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Date A/P

Not implemented.

Numeric, 6 positions; display-only
Cost A/P

Not implemented.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.

Work with Vendor Item Notes Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to display, add, or change free-form notes about a vendor's item. Also, you can indicate whether to print each line of message text on purchase orders. These notes are displayed at PO Inquiry/Maintenance and Receiving.

How to display this screen:

Field Description
Note

Free-form text about the item and/or vendor. The text may print on purchase orders. Select Next to display additional lines. These notes are displayed at Purchase Order Inquiry (MPOI), Maintaining Purchase Orders (MPOE), and Purchase Order Receipts.

Alphanumeric, 60 positions (each line); optional.
Print

Valid values are:

  • Print on PO
  • Do not print

Optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Add/Change vendor item notes

Select Add/Change to activate the add or change function and update the required information.

Create PO Detail Standard Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to add a new item to a purchase order.

How to display this screen: At the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen, select Create Dtl for an item.

Purpose: Use this screen to add an item to the purchase order (top half of the screen) and for Reviewing the Previous Purchase Order Detail Line (bottom half of the screen).

Certain information defaults from the Work with Purchase Order (Header) Screen, including the PO number, revision number, status, and vendor number. You can override this information for a detail line. The bottom half of the screen is updated by the system and cannot be changed.

Field descriptions: The entry fields are described here. See Reviewing the Previous Purchase Order Detail Line for the remaining fields on this screen and for screen options.

Field Description
P/O#

The number assigned to a purchase order is brought over from the PO Header screen and cannot be changed.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Revision #

The number of times a purchase order has been revised. The revision number is increased each time the PO is maintained and accepted (Accept). When you initially create a purchase order, the revision number is 0.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Status

The status of the purchase order. When you first create a PO, the status will be Open (blank) or Suspended.

Status options:

  • Canceled = The purchase order was canceled through PO Maintenance; it remains on the system for historical purposes.
  • Closed = All lines on the purchase order have been received through PO Receiving.
  • Held = The PO must be approved through PO Maintenance before receipts can occur.
  • Open (blank) = The PO is awaiting PO Receipts.
  • Suspended = Inventory has been received into suspense through the PO Receiving function.

Alphanumeric, display-only.
Total cost

A running total of the detail lines on the purchase order.

The system sums the Extended cost of each detail line to display as the total cost of the purchase order.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; updated by the system.

Vendor #

The code that identifies the vendor or supplier of an item.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Line #

The purchase order line number. Enables you to insert a line while creating the purchase order.

Example: If you just added line 9, but realized that you forgot line 7, you can enter 7 in the line number field and type the item and quantity associated with this line. The system inserts line 7 and renumbers the remaining lines.

Note:

Select P/O Detail Msg to make sure the new line has been inserted properly.

There can be up to 999 lines on one purchase order; if you try to enter more than 999 lines on a purchase order, the system displays an error message: PO cannot exceed 999 lines.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Item/Colr Size Othr

The item (and if applicable, SKU) being ordered. Must be a valid item/SKU, in retailer’s item code (not vendor item code).

To advance to the SKU Scan Screen (PO Maintenance), complete just the item code.

Item: alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.

SKU: alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; required if the item has SKUs.
Quantity

The quantity of the item (in retailer’s unit of measure) being ordered from the vendor. The system checks the minimum quantity and order multiple for the vendor/item, and displays an error message if the quantity you enter is too low or does not match.

The following message indicates if you do not enter a quantity for a SKUed item and the Quantity Required for Purchase Order SKU Scanning (F15) system control value is selected: Order quantity must be entered.

Numeric, 7 positions; required for non-SKUed items.
Cost

The unit price you pay the vendor for this item. If you do not enter a cost here, it defaults after you select OK as follows:

  • Vendor/Item cost
  • Standard cost from the SKU table

If you do not enter a cost and the system does not find one using the hierarchy described above, a pop-up window opens requiring you to confirm entry of the item at a zero price. Select OK if the price should be zero, or select Exit to cancel and enter a price for the item.

The Override PO Cost (A17) secured feature controls access to this field.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; required.
Primary disc (Primary discount)

The primary dollar discount amount to apply. If you do not specify a discount here, but there is a primary discount percentage defined for the vendor in the Discount % (Primary discount percentage) field, the system calculates and applies this discount as the primary.

For example, the Discount % specified for the vendor is 15.00%, the unit price is $10.00, and you do not specify a Primary discount at this screen. In this situation, the system calculates a unit discount of $1.50 and applies it as the primary discount. However, in the same situation, if you entered a Primary discount of $1.75, the system applies this unit discount amount as the primary discount.

Any other discounts from the Vendor Discount table apply after the primary discount has been calculated. See Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Primary Discount Overrides

 Primary Discount Overrides

If you enter a primary discount override at the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window, the system applies the override to PO lines whose primary discount defaulted from the Vendor table. However, if you manually entered a primary discount using this field, the system does not update the primary discount with the override and instead retains the primary discount you manually defined. See Overriding Discounts.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Buyer

A code that identifies a person who is authorized to make purchases for your company. The buyer you entered on the purchase order header defaults here, but you can override it. Validated against the Buyer table; see Working with Buyers (WBUY).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Warehouse

A code that represents the warehouse where the merchandise will be received. On order quantity is increased in this warehouse. The warehouse from the purchase order header defaults, but you can override it. Validated against the Warehouse table. See Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS).

Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Ship via

A code that represents a carrier used for shipping merchandise to your company. This code is validated against the PO Ship Via table. See Working with Purchase Order Ship Via (WPSV). These shippers are defined separately from, and may differ from, those who deliver merchandise to your customers.

Ship Via Hierarchy

Each detail line on the purchase order requires a ship via code.

  • If you have defined a PO ship via for the vendor/item, the system defaults this ship via to the detail line.
  • If you enter a ship via code on the PO header, the system defaults this ship via to the detail lines that do not have a PO ship via defined for the vendor/item.
  • If a PO ship via is not defined for the vendor/item and you do not enter a ship via code on the PO header, you will need to enter a ship via code for each detail line on the purchase order.

Note:

If you enter PO lines and then change the ship via on the PO Header, the system defaults the new ship via to all of the lines on the PO, regardless of how the ship via originally defaulted to the line.

Numeric, 2 positions; required.
Due date

The date the PO is due to be received, based on the PO date and the Lead days defined for the Vendor/Item, or manually entered here. This date is indicated in Order Entry, Order Maintenance, and standard and streamlined Order Inquiry.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); required.
Cancel date

The date the purchase order will be marked for cancellation if the order is not received. See Printing the PO Auto Cancel Report (MPAC).

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Promise date

You can use this date to represent the expected ship date or promised arrival date.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Offer

The code for the offer (catalog). See Working with Offers (WOFR). The system creates a SKU/Offer record for this item if one does not already exist.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; may be required (based on the System Control table value).

Completing this screen: If you enter a purchase order detail line for a SKUed item, you advance to the SKU Scan Screen (PO Maintenance). Otherwise, the information you entered is in the bottom half of the Create PO Detail Standard screen. See Reviewing the Previous Purchase Order Detail Line.

SKU Scan Screen (PO Maintenance)

Purpose: Use this screen to create a purchase order detail line for each SKU of the item you entered on the Create PO Detail Standard Screen.

Screen sort: SKUs sort on this screen alphanumerically by the SKU sort sequence number assigned to each SKU. SKUs that are not assigned a SKU sort sequence number display at the top of the list and are sorted alphanumerically by SKU code. See SKU Sort Sequence Numbers for an overview.

How to display this screen: Enter an item containing SKUs in the Item field on the Create PO Detail Standard Screen.

Field Description
P/O#

The number assigned to the purchase order, brought over from the PO Header screen.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Item

The item being ordered. The item defaults from the Create PO Detail Standard Screen.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
Item description (Unlabeled field below the Item)

The description of the item being ordered.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Discount (Purchase order discount labels)

The purchase order discount labels for discounts from the Vendor Discount table. Purchase order discount labels are from the Discount Field 1, 2, 3 system control values. See Setting Up Purchase Order Values.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
Pct (Percent discount)

The percentage the system applies against the unit cost of an item/SKU on the purchase order. Percentage discounts are defined in and validated against the Vendor Discount table (Discount in Work with Vendors).

The system calculates percentage discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Change Vendor Extended Screen.

Numeric, 11 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Unit disc (Unit discount)

The amount the system subtracts from the unit cost of an item/SKU on the purchase order. Unit discounts are defined in and validated against the Vendor Discount table (Discount in Work with Vendors).

The system calculates unit discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Change Vendor Extended Screen.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Vend disc (Vendor discount)

The unit discount amount, displayed in the vendor's unit of measure and currency.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Order qty (Order quantity)

The quantity (in retailer’s unit of measure) from the Quantity field on the Create PO Detail Standard Screen. The system sums the quantity you enter for each SKU and requires that the total equal the quantity from this field. The following error message indicates if the value in the Quantity entered field does not match this total:

Sum of order quantities entered does not equal total order quantity.

You can select Change Order Quantity to override the quantity in this field if you want to match the total quantity entered for the SKUs.

Not displayed if you did not enter a quantity on the Create Purchase Order Detail Standard screen.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Qty entered (Quantity entered)

The total quantity ordered (in retailer’s unit of measure) for all of the SKUs for this item. The system updates this field each time you enter a quantity for a SKU. The following error message indicates if the value in the Order quantity field does not match this total:

Sum of order quantities entered does not equal total order quantity.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Colr size other

The SKUs for the item you are ordering.

Enter a valid SKU to display SKUs that match your entry.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; optional.
Description (SKU description)

The description of the item's SKUs.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only.
Qty (Order quantity)

The quantity (in retailer’s unit of measure) of each SKU that you wish to order. When you enter a quantity the system updates the quantity in the Quantity entered field.

The following message indicates if you enter a quantity that is fewer than the minimum quantity for the vendor item (fast path = WVNI):

Minimum order quantity is 12.

The following message indicates if you enter a quantity that cannot be divided by the unit of measure for the vendor item (fast path = WVNI):

Order qty must be able to divide evenly by vendor UOM.

The following message indicates if you enter a quantity that is not a multiple of the order multiple (in retailer’s unit of measure) for the vendor item (fast path = WVNI):

Vendor requires that Item is ordered in multiples of 10.

See Working with Vendor Items (WVNI).

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Cost

The unit price you pay the vendor for this item. If you do not enter a cost here, it defaults after you press Enter as follows:

If you do not enter a cost and the system does not find one using the hierarchy described above, a pop-up window opens requiring you to confirm entry of the item at a zero price. Select OK if the price should be zero, or select Exit to cancel and enter a price for the item.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; required if you entered a quantity.
Vendor item

The vendor item code. Vendor item codes are defined in Work with Vendor Items (fast path = WVNI); see Working with Vendor Items (WVNI).

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only.
Vendor’s qty (Vendor’s quantity)

The SKU order quantity represented in the vendor's unit of measure. Displayed when you complete the Quantity field.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Vendor’s cost

The cost of the SKU represented in the vendor's currency. Displayed when you complete the Quantity field.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Accept your entries

Select Accept. You return to the Create PO Detail Standard Screen, with the information you entered for each SKU displaying in the bottom half of the screen; see Reviewing the Previous Purchase Order Detail Line.

Reject your entries

Select Reject.

Change the percent or unit discounts for the SKUs defined on this screen

Select Discounts to advance to the Purchase Order Line Discount Screen.

Reviewing the Previous Purchase Order Detail Line

Purpose: After you enter an item at the Create PO Detail Standard Screen, information about that item appears in the bottom half of the screen.

Field Description
Line #

The purchase order detail line number. You can enter up to 999 lines on one purchase order.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Item

The item number and description of the item being ordered.

Item: Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

Description: Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
U/M (Retailer’s unit of measure)

A standard unit by which the retailer sells the item. The retailer’s unit of measure may differ from the vendor’s unit of measure.

Typical units of measure include:

  • EA = each
  • IN = inches
  • C12 = case of 12

Validated against the Unit of Measure table (see Working with Units of Measure (WUOM)) and will default from the Default Item Unit of Measure (B33) system control value, if a value is specified.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Quantity

Quantity of the item, in retailer’s unit of measure, that has been ordered from the vendor.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Ext cost (Extended cost)

The extended cost of this PO detail line, which is calculated by multiplying the quantity ordered and the cost, adding the surcharge, and subtracting the discount.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Cost

The unit cost entered or defaulted for the item.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Primary disc (Primary discount)

The primary discount percentage to apply.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Surcharge

An additional fee to purchase this item from this vendor. A surcharge is typically added to purchases from a broker. The surcharge is defined for the vendor, but you can override it using the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Trade $ (Discount 1 percentage)

The percentage of the first discount in the Vendor Discount table. The system applies this discount against the unit cost of an item on the purchase order. The resulting dollar amount for this percentage is in the Discount field located below this field.

Blank if you have not defined a value for the Vendor/PO Discount Values (E18) system control value.

The system calculates discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Purchase Order Line Discount Screen for examples of each discount calculation method.

Note:

The system calculates primary discounts against the cost of an item before applying any other discounts.

See Overriding Discounts for more information on how the system updates the discount percentage based on any overrides you define at the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 11 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Coop % (Discount 2 percentage)

The percentage of the second discount in the Vendor Discount table. The system applies this discount against the unit cost of an item on the purchase order. The resulting dollar amount for this percentage is in the Discount field located below this field.

Blank if you have not defined a value in the Vendor/PO Discount Values (E18) system control value.

The system calculates discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Purchase Order Line Discount Screen for more information.

Note:

The system calculates primary discounts against the cost of an item before any other discounts are applied.

See Overriding Discounts for more information on how the system updates the discount percentage based on any overrides you define at the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 11 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Special % (Discount 3 percentage)

The percentage of the third discount in the Vendor Discount table. The system applies this discount against the unit cost of an item on the purchase order. The resulting dollar amount for this percentage is in the Discount field located below this field.

Blank if you have not defined a value in the Vendor/PO Discount Values (E18) system control value.

The system calculates discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Purchase Order Line Discount Screen for examples of each discount calculation method.

See Overriding Discounts for more information on how the system updates the discount percentage based on any overrides you define at the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 11 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Discount (Unit discount)

The amount of the first discount that the system subtracts from the unit cost of an item on the purchase order.

The system calculates discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Purchase Order Line Discount Screen.

See Overriding Discounts for more information on how the system updates the discount percentage based on any overrides you define at the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Discount (Unit discount)

The amount of the second discount that the system subtracts from the unit cost of an item on the purchase order.

The system calculates discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Purchase Order Line Discount Screen.

See Overriding Discounts for more information on how the system updates the discount percentage based on any overrides you define at the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Discount (Unit discount)

The amount of the third discount that the system subtracts from the unit cost of an item on the purchase order.

The system calculates discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Purchase Order Line Discount Screen.

See Overriding Discounts for more information on how the system updates the discount percentage based on any overrides you define at the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Vendor # (Vendor /item number

The Vendor item number as from the Vendor/Item table. See Working with Vendor Items (WVNI).

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
U/M (Unit of measure)

The vendor's unit of measure for the item. This is from the Vendor/Item table. See Working with Vendor Items (WVNI).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Quantity

Quantity in the vendor's unit of measure. The system automatically calculates the quantity conversion from retailer’s unit of measure to vendor’s if you have set up conversion factors through the Working with Unit of Measure Conversions (WUMC) menu option.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Vendor price

The price the vendor charges for the item. The system uses the vendor's currency, if applicable.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Ext price (Extended price)

The extended price of this PO detail line. Calculated by multiplying the price by the quantity ordered.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Vnd dscnt (Vendor discount)

The primary unit discount amount represented in the vendor's currency. Calculating discounts in a foreign currency results in inaccurate discount amounts.

See Overriding Discounts for more information on how the system updates the primary discount based on any overrides you define at the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Warehouse

A code that represents the warehouse where the item will be received.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ship via

A code that represents a carrier used for shipping merchandise to your company. See Working with Purchase Order Ship Via (WPSV).

Numeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Due date

The date the PO is due to be received.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Cancel date

The date the purchase order will be marked for cancellation if the order is not received. See Printing the PO Auto Cancel Report (MPAC).

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Promise date

You can use this date to represent the expected ship date or promised arrival date.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Offer

The code for the offer (catalog). See Working with Offers (WOFR).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Buyer

A code that identifies a person who is authorized to make purchases for your company. See Working with Buyers (WBUY).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Accept the purchase order

Select Accept to accept the purchase order. See Completing PO Maintenance.

Reject the purchase order

Select Reject to reject the purchase order. See Completing PO Maintenance

Change item information associated with any previously entered item

Select Change to advance to the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen.

Work with PO header information

Select P/O Header to advance to the Work with Purchase Order (Header) Screen.

Work with purchase order line discounts

Select Discounts to advance to the Purchase Order Line Discount Screen.

Work with estimated charges

Select Estimated Charges to advance to the Work with PO Header Estimated Charges Screen.

Work with vendor item notes for the last item entered.

Select Vendor Item Notes to advance to the Work with Vendor Item Notes Screen.

Horizontal entry

Select Horizontal Entry to create PO detail lines for items that contain multiple SKUs.

Vendor item entry

Select Vendor Item Entry to create a PO detail line by entering the vendor item number.

Non-inventory entry

Select Non Inventory Entry to create a PO line for an item that does not exist in the Item table.

Display summary information

Select Summary to advance to the Purchase Order Summary Screen.

PO detail messages

Select Line Messages to advance to the Work with PO Detail Messages Screen.

Purchase Order Line Discount Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to enter or change the discount amounts of the three discount fields for a detail line.

How to display this screen: Select Discounts on the:

Field Description
P/O #

The number assigned to this purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Line # (Detail line number)

The purchase order detail line number.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Item

The item being ordered for this detail line.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
Item description (Unlabeled field below the Item)

The description of the item on this detail line.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Order quantity

The quantity of the item, in retailer’s unit of measure, defaulted from the previous screen.

Numeric, 5. positions, display-only.
Cost

The price you pay for this item, per retailer’s unit of measure, as defined in the Vendor Item table for the vendor’s unit of measure. For example, if the vendor sells this item in pairs, for $12.00 per pair, but you resell the item as a single unit, the Cost of the item would be $6.00.

If a cost does not exist in the Vendor Item table (see Working with Vendor Items (WVNI)), the system pulls the cost from the Item SKU table.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Discount (Primary discount)

The primary discount percentage defined for this vendor that the system applies to this detail line. You establish the primary discount in the Vendor table. Any other discounts for this detail line are applied after the primary discount has been calculated.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Ext cost (Extended cost)

The extended cost of this purchase order detail line, which is calculated by multiplying the quantity ordered and the cost, adding the surcharge and subtracting the discount.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Vendor price

The price the vendor charges for the item. The system uses the vendor's unit of measure, and the vendor’s currency, if applicable.

Calculating discounts in a foreign currency results in inaccurate discount amounts.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Vendor dsct (Vendor discount)

The primary unit discount amount represented in the vendor's currency.

Calculating discounts in a foreign currency results in inaccurate discount amounts.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Ext price (Extended price)

The extended price of this purchase order detail line. Extended price is calculated by multiplying the price by the quantity ordered.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Discount (Discount fields)

The names of the three discount fields from the Vendor/PO Discount Values (E18) system control value.

Note:

The system calculates the primary discount on a purchase order before calculating other discounts.

Alphanumeric, 11 positions; display-only.
Percent (Discount percentage)

The percentage the system calculates against the unit cost of an item on the purchase order. If you enter a discount percentage, you cannot enter a unit discount for the same discount field. The system calculates discount percentages before subtracting any dollar discounts.

Note:

The system calculates percentage discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Combined Discount Calculation and Tiered Discount Calculation for examples of each discount calculation method.

See Overriding Discounts for more information on how the system updates the percent and unit discounts based on any overrides you define at the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 6 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Unit discount

The amount the system subtracts from the unit cost of an item on the purchase order. If you enter a unit discount amount, you cannot enter a discount percentage for the same discount field.

Note:

The system calculates unit discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Combined Discount Calculation and Tiered Discount Calculation for examples of each discount calculation method.

See Overriding Discounts for more information on how the system updates the percent and unit discounts based on any overrides you define at the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Vendor discount (Vendor discounts)

The unit discount amount calculated in the vendor's currency.

Calculating discounts in a foreign currency results in inaccurate discount amounts.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.

Instructions: Use the following steps to create or change a vendor discount:

  1. Complete the Percent or Unit discount field for each discount. If you leave both the Percent and Unit discount fields blank, no discount will apply.
  2. Optionally, select Change Unit Disc to change the enterable field for a discount label to the other discount field. For example, if your cursor is placed in the Percent field for discount 1, selecting Change Unit Disc will clear any amount in the Percent field and allow you the enter an amount in the Unit discount field for discount 1.
  3. Select Accept. The Confirm Accept pop-up window opens. Select OK to accept the changes you have made or select Exit to cancel.
  4. The system calculates the discounts and updates the Extended cost, Extended price, Unit discount and Vendor discount fields with the changes.

Select Exit to return to the purchase order detail entry screen from which you advanced to this screen.

For more information: See Combined Discount Calculation and Tiered Discount Calculation for examples of how the system calculates discounts based on the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table.

Applying Discounts to a Purchase Order Line

Purpose: The system calculates discounts based on the Discount calculation method field defined for the vendor on the purchase order line.

  • Combined = The discount method combines the total dollar amount of all 3 discounts to determine the net cost.
  • Tiered = The discount method calculates the largest discount against the purchase order’s gross cost, then the second largest discount is calculated against the net result of the first discount, and the third largest discount is calculated against the net result of the second discount.
  • Blank = No discount is applied; you will not be able to apply any discounts when working with a purchase order, regardless of the entries in the discount fields.

Combined Discount Calculation

The combined discount calculation method combines the values of all 3 discounts to determine the net cost. Any discount percentages defined for the discounts are calculated before the unit discounts are applied.

Example:

Cost of item = $100.00

Primary discount (defined in Vendor table) = 10%

Discount 1 = $10.00 (unit discount)

Discount 2 = 20% (percentage discount)

Discount 3 = 10% (percentage discount)

Step 1: Calculate the primary discount percentage

primary discount (10%) x cost ($100.00) = unit discount amount for primary discount ($10.00)

Step 2: Subtract the primary discount amount from the cost

primary discount ($10.00) - cost ($100.00) = cost after primary discount ($90.00)

Step 3: Calculate discount 2 percentage

discount 2 (20%) x cost ($90.00) / 100 = unit discount amount for discount 2 ($18.00)

Step 4: Calculate discount 3 percentage

discount 3 (10%) x cost ($90.00) / 100 = unit discount amount for discount 3 ($9.00)

Step 5: Add discount amounts 1, 2 and 3 together

discount 2 ($18.00) + discount 3 ($9.00) + discount 1 ($10.00) = combined discount ($37.00)

Step 6: Subtract the total combined discount amount from the cost

total combined discount ($37.00) - cost ($90.00) = net cost ($53.00)

Tiered Discount Calculation

The tiered discount calculation method calculates:

  • the largest discount against the item's cost, then
  • the second largest discount is calculated against the net result of the first discount, then
  • the third largest discount is calculated against the net result of the second discount

Any discount percentages defined for the discount fields are calculated before the unit discounts are applied.

Example:

Cost of item = $100.00

Primary discount (defined in Vendor table) = 10%

Discount 1 = $10.00 (unit discount)

Discount 2 = 20% (percentage discount)

Discount 3 = 10% (percentage discount)

Step 1: Calculate the primary discount percentage

primary discount (10%) x cost ($100.00) = unit discount amount for primary discount ($10.00)

Step 2: Subtract the primary discount amount from the cost

primary discount ($10.00) - cost ($100.00) = cost after primary discount ($90.00)

Step 3: Calculate the largest discount percentage

discount 2 (20%) x cost ($90.00) / 100 = largest discount amount ($18.00)

Step 4: Subtract the largest discount amount from cost

gross cost ($90.00) - largest discount ($18.00) = net of first calculation ($72.00)

Step 5: Calculate the 2nd largest discount percentage

discount 3 (10%) x net of first calculation ($72.00) / 100 = second largest discount amount ($7.20)

Step 6: Subtract the 2nd largest discount amount from cost

net of first calculation ($72.00) - second largest discount amount ($7.20) = net of second calculation ($64.80)

Step 7: Subtract the 3rd largest discount amount from cost

net of second calculation ($72.00) - third largest discount amount ($10.20) = net of second calculation ($54.80)

Update SKU Cost Window

Use this window to update the cost of all open and held lines on the PO that contain the item specified.

How to display this screen: Select Update SKU Cost on the PO Maintenance - Change PO Detail Screen.

Field Description
PO #

The number assigned to the purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Item #

The item number whose cost you wish to update. The system updates the cost for all SKUs of this item that are on the PO.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

Cost

The unit price you pay the vendor for this item, per retailer’s unit of measure.

Enter the new cost for the item. The system updates the cost for all open and held lines on the PO that contain the item specified.

The Override PO Cost (A17) secured feature controls access to this field.

Note:

You cannot change the cost of an existing purchase order line to zero, even if the vendor/item price and price from the SKU table are zero.
Order Broker PO Changes

When you change the cost for a drop ship purchase order line which has been sent to the Order Broker Drop Ship Integration for processing, Order Management System automatically sends the changed cost information to Order Broker, where the cost on the purchase order line updates automatically.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; required.

Instructions: Use the following steps to update the cost of all open and held lines on the PO that contain the item specified.

  1. In the Cost field, enter the cost to assign to all open and held lines on the PO that contain the specified item.
  2. Select OK. The system returns you to the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen and displays the message The SKU cost on all of the lines has been changed.

Tracking PO line changes: For each PO line whose cost was updated, the system writes a before and after record to the PO Detail Audit table to record the cost of the PO line before the SKU cost update, and the cost of the PO line after the SKU cost update. You can review PO line history on the Display PO Detail History Screen.

Work with Purchase Order (Header) Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to change the header information on an existing purchase order.

When you change PO Header information: If you change the buyer, ship via, offer, due date, cancel date, or promise date on the PO header, the system updates the value on each existing PO line in an open or held status. The system also updates the value for any new lines you add to the PO in PO Maintenance, unless you override the value at the detail level.

Tracking PO changes: When you change the information on the PO header, the system writes a before and after record to the PO Header Audit table to record the value before the change and the value after the change. If the change to the PO header also updated the lines on the PO, the system writes a before and after record to the PO Detail Audit table to record the value on the PO line before the change, and the value on the PO line after the change. You can review PO line history on the Display PO Detail History Screen.

How to display this screen: Select Header on the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen.

Field Description
PO #

The number assigned to the PO.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Ship to

You have the option to select Warehouse, Customer number, or Order number. Each option is described below.

Warehouse

If you change the warehouse on the PO header, the system updates only the PO lines that contain an item that exists in the new warehouse; any PO lines on the PO that contain items that do not exist in the new warehouse are not updated.

Note:

The warehouse code can be overridden for any line on the order. The system will track the on order total for each item in each warehouse, based on the code entered here or on the detail line. In addition, the warehouse code will control which shipping address prints on the PO or is transmitted in the EDI table. A separate PO will be printed for each warehouse to each different ship-to address.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
  Customer # or Order #

Unique numbers assigned to customers or orders for identification purposes. If you are entering a drop ship PO where the merchandise will be shipped directly to the customer, you must enter either a customer or order number. The system checks one of these tables to determine the ship-to address for the purchase order. If customer number is entered, the system does not tie this number to the order, nor does it pull through the items on the order.

Numeric, 9 positions; optional.
Status

The status of the purchase order.

Status options:

  • Cancelled
  • Docked
  • Held
  • Open
  • Suspended
  • Closed

If held, the purchase order must be approved via PO Maintenance before you can print or receive the PO.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
Vendor

The vendor assigned to the PO.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Vendor name/address

The supplier's name and address. This information defaults from the Vendor table and cannot be changed.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Warehouse/customer

The name and address of the warehouse or the customer, depending on which information you entered previously. This information defaults from the Warehouse or Customer table and cannot be changed.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Placed with

The name of the person at the vendor site with whom you placed the purchase order. This name is used for future reference. When you first enter this screen, the cursor is in this field.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Type

Indicates whether this purchase order is an initial buy (I) or a reorder (R).

Valid values are:

  • Initial Buy (default)
  • Reorder

Optional.
Buyer

A code that identifies a person who is authorized to make purchases for your company. Buyer codes are defined in and validated against the Buyer table; see Working with Buyers (WBUY).

Changing the buyer: If you change the buyer on the PO header, the system updates the buyer on each existing PO line in an open or held status: PO Dtl’Buyer’ info has been updated for open/held rcds. The system also updates the value on any new lines you add to the PO in PO Maintenance, unless you override the value at the detail level.

Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Ship via

A code that identifies the shipper to deliver the merchandise to you. This code is validated against the PO Ship Via table. See Working with Purchase Order Ship Via (WPSV). These shippers are defined separately from, and may differ from, those who deliver merchandise to your customers.

Changing the ship via: If you change the ship via code on the PO header, the system updates the ship via code on each existing PO line in an open or held status: The ship via on all of the lines has been changed. The system also updates the value on any new lines you add to the PO in PO Maintenance, unless you override the value at the detail level.

Note:

If a purchase order ship via is defined for the vendor/item, the system defaults this ship via to any new lines added to the PO in PO Maintenance instead of defaulting the ship via on the PO header.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Offer

The code for the offer (catalog) you will use to sell the merchandise. See Working with Offers (WOFR).

The system creates a SKU/Offer record for each item on the purchase order if one does not already exist.

Changing the offer: If you change the offer code on the PO header, the system updates the offer code on each existing PO line in an open or held status: The Offer number has been changed on all detail lines. The system also updates the value on any new lines you add to the PO in PO Maintenance, unless you override the value at the detail level.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; may be required.
Due date

The date the purchase order is due for receipt. This is the date the operator sees in Order Entry.

Changing the due date: If you change the due date on the PO header, the system updates the due date on each existing PO line in an open or held status: The Due Dates on all of the lines have been changed. The system also updates the value on any new lines you add to the PO in PO Maintenance, unless you override the value at the detail level.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Cancel date

The date the purchase order will be marked for cancellation if you do not receive it. See Printing the PO Auto Cancel Report (MPAC).

Changing the cancel date: If you change the cancel date on the PO header, the system updates the cancel date on each existing PO line in an open or held status: The Cancel Dates on all of the lines have been changed. The system also updates the value on any new lines you add to the PO in PO Maintenance, unless you override the value at the detail level.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Promise date

You can use this date to represent the expected ship date or promised arrival date.

Changing the promise date: If you change the promise date on the PO header, the system updates the promise date on each existing PO line in an open or held status: Promise date changed on all detail lines. The system also updates the value on any new lines you add to the PO in PO Maintenance, unless you override the value at the detail level.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Shipping info

One line of shipping instructions to print on the purchase order.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Place the purchase order on hold

Select Hold to hold the purchase order. A message informs you the purchase order is on hold.

Accept the purchase order

Select Accept to accept the changes you made to the purchase order in PO Maintenance. See Completing PO Maintenance.

Reject the purchase order

Select Reject to reject the changes you made to the purchase order in PO Maintenance. A window opens asking you to confirm the rejection. See Completing PO Maintenance.

Work with vendor  

Select FOB to advance to the Work with FOB for Purchase Order Screen.

Work with purchase order header estimated charges

Select Est Charges to advance to the Work with PO Header Estimated Charges Screen.

Work with vendor notes

Select Vendor Notes to advance to the Work with Vendor Notes Screen.

Work with PO overrides

Select P/O Overrides to advance to the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Accept and print the purchase order

Select Accept/Print to accept the purchase order changes and advance to the Print P/O Window.

Work with PO summary

Select P/O Summary to advance to the Purchase Order Summary Screen.

Work with PO messages

Select P/O Msg to advance to the Work with PO Messages Screen.

Work with FOB for Purchase Order Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create, change or delete vendor FOB records for a specific purchase order.

Note:

Any change you make from this screen updates only this purchase order and does not affect the Vendor FOB addresses defined on the Work with Vendor FOB Address Screen.

About FOB address: The FOB (freight on board) address is the location where title to merchandise being shipped passes from the seller to the buyer.

Types of FOB addresses: If the FOB address is an Origin type, ownership of the merchandise passes from seller to buyer at the origin of the shipping route, and the buyer is responsible for transportation costs and risk of loss or damage from that point. If the FOB address is a Destination type, ownership of the merchandise passes from seller to buyer at the receiving point for the merchandise, and the seller is responsible for transportation costs and risk of loss or damage until the merchandise reaches its destination.

How to display this screen:

Field Description
Vendor

The vendor number and description for this purchase order.

Vendor number: Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Vendor description: Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Type

This code identifies the FOB address as either a Destination or an Origin type.

  • Destination = the FOB address is the location to which merchandise is being shipped (its destination); title of the merchandise passes from the seller to the buyer when the merchandise reaches its destination.
  • Origin = the FOB address is the location from which the merchandise is shipped; title to the merchandise passes from the seller to the buyer when the merchandise leaves the seller's dock.

Alphanumeric, optional.
City

The city of the FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 25 positions; optional.
St

The state of the FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Postal cd

The zip code of the FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Freight terms

A brief description of the freight terms for this FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a vendor FOB address for this purchase order

Select Create to advance to the Create FOB for Purchase Order Screen.

Change an FOB address for this purchase order

Select Change for an FOB address to advance to the Change FOB for Purchase Order Screen. See the Create FOB for Purchase Order Screen for field descriptions and screen information.

Delete an FOB address for this purchase order

Select Delete for an FOB address to delete it.

Display an FOB address for this purchase order

Select Display for an FOB address to advance to the Display FOB for Purchase Order Screen. See the Create FOB for Purchase Order Screen for field descriptions.

Create FOB for Purchase Order Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a new FOB address for the purchase order.

Note:

The FOB address you create will be added to the list of FOB addresses for this purchase order only; it will not be added to the list of FOB addresses for this vendor defined through the Work with Vendor FOB Address Screen.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with FOB for Purchase Order Screen.

Field Description
PO #

The current purchase order number.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Vendor

The vendor number and description of the vendor for this purchase order.

Vendor number: Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Vendor description: Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Postal code

The zip code for the vendor.

The first three characters of the postal code are validated against the SCF (Sectional Center Facility) table, and must be valid SCF codes associated with the city and country you enter. See Working with SCF Codes (WSCF).

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; required.
City/State/Country

The city, state and country of the FOB address.

Note:

If the Use Zip/City/State Defaulting? (B13) system control value (SCV B13) is selected, the City, State, and Country fields will automatically display the correct address information when you enter a zip code in the Postal Code field.

City: Alphanumeric, 25 positions; required.

State: Alphanumeric, 2 positions; required.

Country: Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Freight terms

A brief description of the freight terms for this vendor FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; required.
FOB type

This code identifies the FOB address as either a Destination type or an Origin type.

  • Destination = the FOB address is the location to which merchandise is being shipped (its destination); title of the merchandise passes from the seller to the buyer when the merchandise reaches its destination.
  • Origin = the FOB address is the location from which the merchandise is shipped; title to the merchandise passes from the seller to the buyer when the merchandise leaves the seller's dock.

Alphanumeric, required.

Work with PO Header Estimated Charges Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to define estimated charges for every detail line on the purchase order.

You can define the following types of estimated charges for a purchase order header or detail line:

  • freight
  • brokerage
  • commission
  • duty
  • import
  • prep
  • royalty
  • surcharge
  • other fees

In purchase order maintenance, you can enter the estimated charge as a unit cost or a percentage. You enter the actual charges (for freight, brokerage, etc.) for the detail line at purchase order receiving. These charges are not reflected in the extended price of the purchase order.

Changing a purchase order estimated charge in purchase order maintenance generates a purchase order history message indicating that the charge has been changed.

Purchase order additional charge codes are defined through Working With PO Additional Charges (WPAC).

When you add, change, or delete an estimated charge at this screen, the system applies the charge to each existing detail line and each additional detail line you add to the purchase order that is in a open or held status. If an existing detail line was already associated with the same estimated charge you defined at this screen, the system overrides the charge amount defined for the detail line to the header charge amount.

How to display this screen: Select Estimated Charges on the Work with Purchase Order (Header) Screen.

Field Description
PO #

The number of the purchase order you are currently working with, defaulted from the Work with Purchase Order (Header) Screen.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Status

The status of the purchase order, defaulted from the Work with Purchase Order (Header) Screen.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
Vendor

The vendor number and vendor name defined for this purchase order, defaulted from the Work with Purchase Order (Header) Screen.

Vendor number: Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Vendor name: Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Code

A code that represents the charge to be added to the purchase order detail line.

The following message indicates if you try to enter an estimate charge that has already been defined:

PO Estimate Charge already exists.

If the estimate charge you enter on the header screen already exists on a purchase order detail line, the system allows you to create the purchase order header estimate charge. The amount you define at the header screen overrides the amount defined for the purchase order detail line. If you wish to have the amount for an estimate charge different for a specific detail line, you must first enter the header charge and then overide the amount for the detail line.

Purchase order additional charge codes are defined in and validated against the PO Additional Charge table; see Working With PO Additional Charges (WPAC).

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Complete the Unit Cost or Percent field:  
Unit cost

The unit charge (per unit in retailer’s unit of measure) for a purchase order detail line for brokerage, commission, duty, freight, import, surcharge, or other user-defined fees. The actual charges from the vendor for these fees are entered at PO Receiving.

Multiplied by the quantity ordered to determine the estimated charge. The unit cost is used in lieu of a percentage to calculate the additional estimated charge.

The following message indicates if you do not define either a unit cost or percentage for a charge code:

Unit Cost or Percent must be entered.

The following message indicates if you try to enter a charge code that has already been defined:

PO Estimate Charge already exists.

The following message indicates if you try to enter a unit cost and unit percentage for a charge code:

Enter Unit Cost or Percent; but not both.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional (required if percent is not entered).
Percent

The percentage used to calculate the additional charges on a purchase order detail line. Used in lieu of an additional charge based on unit cost. The percentage value is multiplied by the extended price on the purchase order detail line to determine the estimated charge. The actual charge for an additional charge is captured at PO Receiving.

If you do not have authority to the Access Estimated Charge Percent (B01) secured feature, the percent field is display-only and you cannot enter an estimated charge percentage.

The following message indicates if you do not define either a unit cost or percentage for a charge code:

Unit Cost or Percent must be entered.

The following message indicates if you try to enter a charge code that has already been defined:

PO Estimate Charge already exists.

The following message indicates if you try to enter a unit cost and unit percentage for a charge code:

Enter Unit Cost or Percent; but not both.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional (required if unit cost is not entered).

Instructions:

  • Select Add/Change to activate the add/change function. The system displays the same screen; however, you are able to change previously added information.
  • Complete the necessary fields.
  • When you return to the previous screen, the system displays the following message to indicate the charges have been applied to each purchase order detail line.

All detail estimated charges have been updated with changes

Screen Option Procedure

Toggle between add mode and change mode

Select Add/Change. The existing charges on the screen change to display-only or enterable fields.

Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window

Purpose: Use this window to define overrides to the vendor record for this purchase order only without updating the vendor record itself.

Overriding Discounts

If you override one or more of the vendor discount fields in PO maintenance:

  • the overrides are applied to any new PO lines added during PO maintenance.
  • the system applies the overrides only to existing PO lines that do not currently have any discount defined (a discount is not defined in the primary discount, percent discount, or unit discount fields).
  • if a PO line without discounts has already been partially received, the system applies the overrides to the remaining quantity waiting to be received.

System control value: The Apply Discount To Manual Cost (D96) system control value defines whether purchase order discounts are applied against a manually entered cost; select this system control value to receive discounts against manually entered costs.

Example: You enter a PO for a vendor with no primary discount or percent or unit discounts.

Scenario Results

You enter PO line 1 for 1 unit at 25.00.

The system creates PO line 1 with an extended cost of 25.00 (no discounts applied).

You enter PO line 2 for 1 unit at 25.00 and add a trade unit discount of 5.00.

The system applies the 5.00 trade unit discount to PO line 2, updating the extended cost to 20.00 (25.00 - 5.00 = 20.00)

In PO Maintenance:

  

At the Purchase Order Overrides window, you enter a primary discount override of 5.00%.

The system applies the 5.00% primary discount override to PO line 1. The system does not apply the 5.00% primary discount override to PO line 2 since the line currently has a 5.00 trade unit discount.

You add PO line 3 for 1 unit at 25.00.

The system applies the 5.00% primary discount override to PO line 3.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Purchase Order (Header) Screen, select P/O Overrides.

Field Description
Reference #

A reference number you can use if you have the system assign purchase order numbers and you want to track an internal purchase order number or a tracking number on the purchase order. Reference numbers can be used in P/O Inquiry to scan for a specific purchase order number.

The reference number may print on the PO, depending on the print program from the PO Print Program (C64) system control value.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; optional.
Terms

A code that represents a type of payment terms, such as net 30 days. The terms default from the Vendor table will display here, but can be overridden for any order. Terms are validated against the Terms code table.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Vendor reference #

An internal reference number that may be stored with the purchase order. For example, the reference number may represent an internal purchase order number from a preprinted purchase order, or an internal control for departmental purchase orders. Information in this field will be available to print on the PO or any report.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; optional.
Negotiate price

Determines whether the program pulls prices for items entered.

  • Selected = You must enter a price for each item.
  • Unselected = The system will automatically pull prices for each item. Prices will be pulled from:

1. Vendor/Item quantity break table

2. Vendor/Item table

3. Item table.
Primary discount %

The primary discount percentage applied to each item ordered from this vendor. The primary discount percent defaults from the Vendor table. You may enter an override to the primary discount percentage established for this vendor towards purchases. The override to the Discount % is valid only for the current purchase order.

See Overriding Discounts for more information on how the system updates the discount percentage based on any overrides you define at the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Confirming PO

Determines whether this is a confirming purchase order.

If this is a confirming purchase order, you can print confirming purchase orders and the purchase order will indicate that it is a confirming document when you print it; see Printing Purchase Orders.

If you are using EDI to transmit orders and follow up with the printed order, the system indicates on the printed document that it is a confirmation of an EDI transmission.

  • Selected = The order was placed over the phone with a vendor and this is a confirming PO.
  • Unselected = This is not a confirming PO.
Tax exempt #

The Ship to field's reseller or tax exempt certificate number for this drop ship purchase order. May default from the Tax identification field in the Customer record.

Alphameric, 15 positions; optional.
Currency rate

The currency of the vendor or broker from whom the purchase order is being placed. If a foreign currency value is entered, the system will store the vendor's currency on the PO and will calculate your currency whenever necessary, (e.g., during inquiry and reporting). See Working with Currency (WCUR).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Surcharge %

You may override or enter a surcharge that is added to purchases from this vendor. A surcharge is typically added to purchases from a broker. If a Surcharge % is defined in the Vendor table, it will default here. The surcharge percent is reflected in the price of each item.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Percent discount

The percentage the system applies against the unit cost of an item on the purchase order. Percentage discounts are defined in and validated against the Vendor Discount table. If you enter a discount percentage, you cannot enter a unit discount for the same discount field. The system calculates discount percentages before subtracting any dollar discounts.

The text for the 3 percent discounts is blank if a value has not been defined in the Vendor/PO Discount Values (E18) field in the System Control field.

Note:

The system calculates percentage discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Purchase Order Line Discount Screen for examples of each discount calculation method.

See Overriding Discounts for more information on how the system updates the percent and unit discounts based on any overrides you define at the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 11 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Unit discounts

The amount the system subtracts from the unit cost of an item on the purchase order. Unit discounts are defined in and validated against the Vendor Discount table. If you enter a unit discount amount, you cannot enter a discount percentage for the same discount field.

The text for the 3 unit discounts is blank if you have not defined a value in the Vendor/PO Discount Values (E18) field in the System Control field.

Note:

The system calculates unit discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Purchase Order Line Discount Screen for examples of each discount calculation.

See Overriding Discounts for more information on how the system updates the percent and unit discounts based on any overrides you define at the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.

Work with PO Messages Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to define or update message text that may print on the purchase order. These messages can also be displayed in PO Inquiry/Maintenance and Receiving.

How to display this screen: Select PO Msg at the:

You can also display this screen by selecting Messages at the Display Purchase Order Header Screen in PO inquiry.

Field Description
Message

Free-form message about the vendor and/or order. You can mark any portion of the message to print on the PO, or you can use the messaging capability to keep detailed notes about the order for internal use.

Alphanumeric, 60 positions (each line); optional.
Print

Select Print on PO to print on the purchase order; otherwise, leave this option blank.

Optional.

Entering messages: Select Add/Change to activate the add/change function. The system displays the same screen; however, you are able to change previously added information.

Purchase Order Summary Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review the PO detail lines that have been entered on the purchase order. You can also use this screen to view the running totals for the purchase order as a whole and the individual totals for each detail line. Up to eight purchase order detail lines appear on this screen at one time. This screen also allows you to accept or reject the entire purchase order if PO detail line entry is completed.

How to display this screen: Select Summary at the At the Create PO Detail Standard Screen, another detail entry screen, the Work with Purchase Order (Header) Screen, or the \PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen.

Field Description
P/O #

The number assigned to a purchase order, defaulted from the Work with Purchase Order (Header) Screen.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Rev # (Revision number)

The number of times a purchase order has been revised. When you initially create a purchase order, the revision number is 1.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Status

The status of the purchase order. When you first create a PO, the status will be Open or Suspended.

Status options:

  • Canceled = The purchase order was canceled through PO Maintenance; it exists on the system for historical purposes.
  • Closed = All lines on the purchase order have been received through PO Receiving.
  • Held = The PO must be approved through PO Maintenance before receipts can occur.
  • Open = The PO exists on the system awaiting PO Receipts.
  • Suspended = Inventory has been received into suspense through the PO Receiving function.

Alphanumeric, display-only.
Vendor #

The code that identifies the vendor or supplier of an item.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Ord qty (Order quantity)

The quantity of the item that has been ordered (in retailer’s unit of measure) from the vendor.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Opn qty (Open quantity)

The total quantity on the purchase order that has not been assigned to backorders through the PO layering function. The system updates this value.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Ext cost (Extended cost)

The extended cost or sum of all open PO detail lines.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Act chrge (Actual charges)

The actual additional charges associated with the purchase order. Actual charges are assigned in PO Receiving.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Est chrge (Estimated charges)

The estimated additional charges for this entire purchase order. Represents the sum of all additional charges for each line.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Weight

The cumulative weight of all items ordered on the purchase order which is calculated by multiplying the ship weight and the quantity ordered. If no Ship weight is defined in the Vendor/Item table, weight is taken from the Item table.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 3-place decimal; display-only.
Cube

The cumulative cubic volume of all items ordered on the purchase order which is calculated by multiplying the cubic volume and the quantity ordered. If no Cubic volume is defined in Vendor/Item table, cube is taken from the Item table.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Line

The purchase order line number. Up to 999 lines may exist on one purchase order.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Status

The status of the purchase order.

Status options:

  • Cancelled
  • Hold
  • Open
  • Suspended
  • Complete

Alphanumeric, display-only.
Item/Cls Size

The item number and SKU being ordered.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions (item), three 4-position fields (SKU); display-only.
U/M (Unit of measure)

A standard by which an item is sold.

Typical units of measure include:

  • EA = each
  • IN = inches
  • C12 = case of 12

Validated against the Unit of Measure table; see Working with Units of Measure (WUOM).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ord qty (Order quantity)

The quantity ordered, in retailer’s unit of measure.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Opn qty (Open quantity)

The total quantity of the line item that has not been assigned to backorders through the PO layering function. The system updates this value.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Ext cost (Extended cost)

The extended cost of this PO detail line, which is calculated by multiplying the quantity ordered and the price per retailer’s unit of measure, adding the surcharge, and subtracting the discount.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Screen Option Procedure

Accept the purchase order information

Select Accept to accept the PO. See Completing PO Maintenance.

Reject the purchase order information

Select Reject to reject the PO. See Completing PO Maintenance.

Completing PO Maintenance

Purpose: To complete PO maintenance, perform one of the following:

Accept Purchase Order

On the Work with Purchase Order (Header) Screen, select Accept/Print to accept a purchase order and advance to the Print P/O Window. This option is not available at any purchase order detail screen.

Note:

Faxing the purchase order is not currently implemented.

Accept PO without printing: To accept a purchase order without advancing to the Print P/O Window, you can select Accept at the following screens:

Screen Result

Work with Purchase Order (Header) Screen

The system accepts changes made and returns to the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen.

Create PO Detail Standard Screen

The system accepts changes made and returns to the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen.

Purchase Order Summary Screen

The system accepts changes made and returns to the PO Maintenance Select Prompt Screen.

If you cancelled one or more lines on a drop ship PO: The system displays an error message when you select Accept if you are maintaining a drop ship PO and during PO maintenance you cancelled some, but not all, of the lines on the PO: D/S PO cannot be accepted with partially cancelled lines. Please cancel all lines. To complete PO maintenance, you must cancel all of the lines on a drop ship PO.

Updates: The system performs field and table updates through a background processing job (OTHR_ASYNC) when you select Accept or Accept/Fax. See Updates During Background Processing for more information.

Reject Purchase Order

To reject a purchase order, select Reject at any of the screens listed above. A pop-up window appears prompting you to confirm. Select OK to confirm the rejection and exit the screen; otherwise, select Exit to cancel the rejection and return to the previous screen.

Note:

No changes made during this session of PO Maintenance will be recorded/accepted if you select Reject to reject.

Approve Purchase Order

Select Approve to approve the purchase order. You must have authority to the Approve Purchase Order (A31) secured feature to approve a purchase order.

Note:

If you advanced to PO Maintenance from PO inquiry, you cannot approve a purchase order. You need to select the purchase order in PO maintenance in order to approve it, regardless of your secured feature authority.

Cancel Purchase Order

To cancel the entire PO: Select Cancel PO to cancel the entire purchase order.

Note:

If a PO line contains a drop ship item, and you use the Order Broker Drop Ship interface to process drop ship items for this vendor, you cannot cancel the purchase order using the Cancel PO option: Must cancel drop ship lines individually.

To cancel individual lines: Select Cancel for a detail line to cancel it from the purchase order. The status (Sts field) for the item changes to C (canceled), and the On order qty reduces by the number of units canceled.

Note:

If you cancel some, but not all, of the lines on a drop ship PO individually and then select Accept to accept the PO maintenance changes, the system displays an error message: D/S PO cannot be accepted with partially cancelled lines. Please cancel all lines. To complete PO maintenance, you must cancel all of the lines on a drop ship PO.

Authorizations for drop ship PO: When you cancel a drop ship PO and an authorization exists for the associated order, the system creates a record in the Void Auths table for the authorization amount.

Drop ship pick: When you cancel a drop ship PO, the system also voids the associated drop ship pick.

Order Broker Drop Ship interface: If a PO line contains a drop ship item, and you use the Order Broker Drop Ship interface to process drop ship items for this vendor, you cannot cancel the PO line unless:

  • You have authority to the Cancel OROB Drop Ship PO (J04) secured feature.
  • The item is a drop ship item, but was processed before the vendor was flagged as OROB Drop Shipping.

If you do not have authority to the Cancel OROB Drop Ship PO (J04) secured feature, the following message displays when you select Cancel for a drop ship line: Use D/S Status option in PO or Order Inquiry to cancel D/S integration PO line.

Cancellation reason code: The system assigns the Auto Soldout Cancel Reason (C20) to the canceled order line(s).

From PO Inquiry or standard Order Inquiry, you can cancel an Order Broker drop ship item if you have authority to the secured feature Order Maintenance Access (A22). See Cancelling Order Broker Drop Ship Order Lines for processing details.

Print P/O Window

Use this window to print the Purchase Order.

Emailing the purchase order: Emailing the purchase order as well as printing it is available when:

You can override the email address at this window if you would like to send the purchase order to an alternate address. Your entry at this window does not update the email address in the Vendor record.

The purchase order is sent as an attachment to an email, using the PO Print Program (C64). The text in the email is derived from the Purchase Order template set up through Working with E-Mail Notification Templates (WEMT).

Note:

Faxing the purchase order is not currently implemented.

Purchase order status: The status of the purchase order determines whether it is eligible to print.

  • All open, held, and suspended purchase orders are eligible to print through this window.
  • If the Print ordered quantity field on this window is selected, closed purchase orders are eligible to print through this window; otherwise, the window does not display an error message, but no purchase order is printed.
  • Cancelled purchase orders are not eligible to print through this window, although the window does not display an error message.

Purchase order line status: The status of the purchase order line determines whether it is eligible to print on eligible purchase orders.

  • Open, held, and suspended purchase order lines are included on eligible purchase orders that you print.
  • If the Print ordered quantity field on this window is selected, closed purchase order lines are included on purchase orders that you print. If the Print ordered quantity field is unselected, closed purchase order lines are not included.
  • Cancelled purchase order lines are not included on purchase orders that you print.

For more information: See Completing PO Maintenance.

How to display this window:

Field Description
Purchase order #

The number of the purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Vendor

The name of the vendor on the purchase order.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Print PO

Controls whether the system prints the Purchase Order when you select OK at this pop-up window.

Valid values are:

  • Selected (default) = print the purchase order.
  • Unselected = do not print the purchase order.
Print ordered quantity

Controls the quantity to print on the Purchase Order when you select OK at this pop-up window.

Valid values are:

  1. Selected = Print the quantity ordered for each purchase order line. For example, if the order quantity is 10, and 7 units have been received, the purchase order lists a quantity of 10. You need to select this option to print a closed purchase order or include closed purchase order lines.

Note:

The quantity printed is the most recent order quantity on the purchase order line. For example, if the original quantity ordered was 100, but you updated the quantity to 125 in purchase order maintenance, a quantity of 125 prints on the purchase order.
  • Unselected (default) = Print the quantity due for each purchase order line. For example, if the order quantity is 10, and 7 units have been received, the purchase order lists a quantity of 3. If you select this option, the system does not print a closed purchase order.
Email purchase order

Indicates whether to email the purchase order to the vendor, or to simply produce a .PDF file for printing without emailing. This field is included only if:

  • the Email Purchase Order (K80) system control value is selected, and
  • the vendor’s Email P/O flag is selected, and
  • the vendor has a valid Email address.

Valid values are:

  • Selected (default) = Send the purchase order as a .PDF attachment to the Email address indicated, using the PO Print Program (C64). The text in the email is derived from the Purchase Order template set up through Working with E-Mail Notification Templates (WEMT). This template is available at the company level only, since the purchase order is not related to a specific entity. The .PDF file is also available for printing.
  • Unselected = Generate a .PDF file of the purchase order for printing, and do not send it by email. If you deselect this flag, you will need to clear the Email address field before you accept your entries at this window.
Email address

The email address where the purchase order should be sent. Included only if the Email purchase order flag is selected; see the description above for more information. Optionally, you can override the vendor’s email address to send the purchase order to a different address, although overriding the email here does not update the email address stored in the Vendor record.

Alphanumeric, 50 positions; required if the Email purchase order flag is selected.

Completing this window: When you complete this window, the system submits the PO_PRINT job. This job:

  • Generates the Purchase Order using the PO Print Program (C64). If you are not emailing the purchase order; the .PDF file is available at the Forms Management (My Forms) screen. Otherwise, it attaches the .PDF file to an email to the vendor’s email address as well as making the .PDF file available for printing. The text of the email is derived from the Purchase Order template set up through Working with E-Mail Notification Templates (WEMT).
  • Updates the Print date for the purchase order, displayed in purchase order inquiry.
  • Writes a PO Message if you are emailing the purchase order, indicating the email address where the purchase order was sent, for example:

PO emailed to vendor email ejohnson@example.com

Note:

The generation date is not displayed at the Work with PO Messages Screen, although it is written to the PO Message table. Also, if the entire message, including the email address, exceeds the maximum message length of 60 positions, it is truncated.

Using Purchase Order Inquiry

Topics in this part:

Purchase Order Inquiry (MPOI)

Purpose: Use purchase order inquiry to review the status, details, and other information about a purchase order.

In this topic:

Select Purchase Order for Inquiry Screen

Purpose: Use this screen is used to select a purchase order directly for inquiry; or enter information into any of the selection fields to review a list of purchase orders that closely match your entry.

How to display this screen: Enter MPOI in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu or select this option from a menu.

When you enter information at any of these fields, you advance to a Select Purchase Order screen based on the first field that you completed. For example, if you enter a vendor number and a buyer, you advance to the Select Purchase Order by Vendor Number Screen because the Vendor field is before the Buyer field.

Field Description
P/O #

The number assigned to a purchase order. Enter a PO number to advance to the First Display Purchase Order Detail Screen.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Due date

The date the purchase order is due to be received, based on the PO date and the Lead days from the Vendor/Item record, or a date entered for the PO. Enter a date to advance to the Select Purchase Order by Due Date Screen.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Reference #

An internal reference number that may be stored with the purchase order. Enter a number to advance to the Select P/O by Reference Number Screen.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; optional
Vendor (number)

The code assigned to the vendor. Enter a vendor number to advance to the Select Purchase Order by Vendor Number Screen.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Vendor name

The name of your supplier. Enter a vendor name to advance to the Vendor Selection Pop-Up Window (Selecting Purchase Orders by Vendor Name).

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Reference

The vendor's reference number. Enter a reference number to advance to the Select P/O by Vendor Reference Screen.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; optional.
Item

The vendor's item number. Enter an item code to advance to the Select Purchase Order by Item/SKU Screen.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
Item/Clr Size

The item number and SKU, if applicable.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions (item) and three 4-position fields (SKU); optional.
Buyer

A code to identify a person authorized to make purchases. Enter a buyer code to advance to the Select Purchase Order by Buyer Screen.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

First Display Purchase Order Detail Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review all aspects of a purchase order.

How to display this screen:

Field Description
P/O #

The number assigned to a purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Vendor

The name and the number of the supplier of the item. Vendor codes are defined in and validated against the Vendor table; see Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only
Buyer

A code that identifies an employee who is authorized to make purchases for your company. Buyer codes are defined in and validated against the Buyer table; see Working with Buyers (WBUY).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Status

The status of the purchase order.

Valid values are:

  • C = Cancelled. The purchase order was canceled through P.O. Maintenance; it exists on the system for historical purposes.
  • D = Docked. The purchase order has arrived at the warehouse, but the inventory has not yet been reviewed or received.
  • H = Held. If the purchase order is on hold, you cannot receive it until you approve it through purchase order maintenance.
  • O = Open. You expect to receive the items on the purchase order.
  • S = Suspended. Inventory has been received into suspense through the P.O. Receiving function. At a later point, permanent locations in the warehouse will be determined for these items.
  • X = Closed. All items on the purchase order have been received.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.
Promise (Promise date)

A user-defined date for the expected ship date or promised arrival date.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Due (Due date)

The date the purchase order is due to be received, based on the PO date and the Lead days from the Vendor/Item record or manually entered for the PO.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Print (Print date)

The date the purchase order was printed.

Numeric, 6 positions; display-only.
Cancel (Cancel date)

The date the purchase order will be flagged for cancellation if the items are not received. An auto-cancellation option is available that will produce a list of all items approaching or beyond the specified cancel date.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Total cost

The total value of items to be purchased, calculated by the extended price (quantity ordered multiplied by price), plus additional estimated charges and line surcharges (minus any discounts). Expressed in your currency, not the vendor's.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Ln # (Line number)

The purchase order detail line number. You can enter up to 999 lines on one purchase order.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only
Sts (Status)

The status of the purchase order detail line.

Valid values are:

  • C = Canceled
  • H = Held
  • O = Open
  • S = Suspended
  • X = Closed

Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.
Item

A code for an unit of inventory. Item numbers are defined in and validated against the Item table.

Item: Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

Description: Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
SKU

A code that further identifies a unit of inventory by its unique style, such as its color and size.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display only.
UOM (Unit of measure)

A standard by which an item is sold.

Typical units of measure include:

  • EA = each
  • IN = inches
  • C12 = case of 12

Unit of measure codes are defined in and validated against the Unit of Measure table; see Working with Units of Measure (WUOM).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Qty due (Quantity due)

The quantity remaining to be received from the vendor.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Qty rcv (Quantity received)

The quantity already received from the vendor. PO Receiving updates this field.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
  You can select
Qty ord (Quantity ordered)

The quantity originally ordered of the item.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Ext cost (Extended cost)

The total cost for this item. The calculation is:

(Quantity ordered * (Price from the Vendor/Item or Item record + Surcharge)) - Discount

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Display PO detail information

Select Display for an item to advance to the Second Display Purchase Order Detail Screen.

Review receiving history

Select Receiving for an item to advance to the Purchase Receipts History Screen.

View Order Broker status information about a drop ship purchase order detail line

Select DS Status next to an item to advance to the Display P/O Drop Ship Screen, if the item is a drop ship item and you use the Order Broker Drop Ship Integration to process drop ship items for this vendor. If you have authority to the Order Maintenance Access (A22) secured feature, you can initiate a cancel request for the item from the Display PO Drop Ship screen.

If the item is not a drop ship purchase order processed through Order Broker, the following message displays:

Selected line has no drop ship purchase order information.

Work with estimated charges

Select Estimated Charges for an item to advance to the Display Purchase Order Detail Charges Screen.

Work with vendor item notes

Select Vendor item notes for an item to advance to the Work with Vendor Item Notes Screen.

Work with line messages

Select Messages for an item to advance to the Work with PO Detail Messages Screen.

Display PO detail history

Select History for an item to advance to the Display PO Detail History Screen.

Maintain PO

Select Maintain to display the PO Maintenance - Maintain Detail Screen.

Note:

If you advance to PO maintenance from PO inquiry, you cannot approve a purchase order. You need to select the purchase order in Maintaining Purchase Orders (MPOE).

Display PO header information

Select Header to advance to the Display Purchase Order Header Screen.

Display the quantity due or the quantity received

Select Toggle due/rcv to switch between fields.

Display actual charges

Select Charges to advance to the Display Purchase Order Actual Charges Screen.

Display PO header history

Select History to advance to the Purchase Order Header History Screen.

Display vendor notes

Select Vendor notes to advance to the Work with Vendor Notes Screen.

Display PO messages

Select Messages to advance to the Work with PO Messages Screen.

Second Display Purchase Order Detail Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review items on a purchase order.

How to display this screen: At the First Display Purchase Order Detail Screen, select Display for an item.

All fields on this screen are display-only.

Field Description
PO #

The number assigned to this purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions.
Rev # (Revision number)

The number of times a purchase order has been revised. The revision number is increased each time the purchase order is maintained and accepted. When you initially create a purchase order, the revision number is 1.

Numeric, 3 positions.
Status

The status of the purchase order. When you first create a purchase order, the status will be Open or Suspended.

Status options:

  • Canceled = The purchase order was canceled through Purchase Order Maintenance; it exists on the system for historical purposes.
  • Closed = All lines on the purchase order have been received through Purchase Order Receiving.
  • Held = The purchase order must be approved through Purchase Order Maintenance before receipts can occur.
  • Open = The purchase order exists on the system awaiting Purchase Order Receipts.
  • Suspended = Inventory has been received into suspense through Purchase Order Receiving.

Alphanumeric.
Line #

The purchase order detail line number. There can be up to 999 lines on one purchase order.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Vendor #

The code that identifies the vendor or supplier of an item. See Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Numeric, 7 positions.
Status

The status of the purchase order line.

Valid values:

  • Canceled
  • Held
  • Open
  • Suspended
  • Closed

Alphanumeric, display-only.
Item

The item and SKU you are ordering. The description of the item is below.

Item: alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

SKU: alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.

Description: alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
U/M (Unit of measure)

A standard by which an item is sold.

Typical units of measure include:

  • EA = each
  • IN = inches
  • C12 = case of 12

Validated against the Unit of Measure table; see Working with Units of Measure (WUOM).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Quantity

Quantity of the item that has been ordered from the vendor.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Transit qty (Transit quantity)

The quantity that the vendor has indicated is in transit from the vendor to you.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Cost

The unit price for this item.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Primary disc (Primary discount)

The primary discount percentage defined for this vendor that is applied to all items purchased. The standing discount for the vendor defaults, but you can override it at the line level or using PO Header Override; see Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Surcharge

An additional fee to purchase this item from this vendor. A surcharge is typically added to purchases from a broker. The surcharge for the vendor defaults, but you can override it using PO Header Overrides; see Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Ext cst (Extended cost)

The extended cost of this PO detail line, calculated by multiplying the order quantity and the price, adding the surcharge, and subtracting the discount.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Trade % (Discount 1 percentage)

The percentage of the first discount in the Vendor Discount table. The system applies this discount against the unit cost of an item on the purchase order. The resulting dollar amount for this percentage is in the Discount field located below this field.

Discount 1 is blank if you have not defined a value in the Vendor/PO Discount Values (E18) system control value.

The system calculates discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Combined Discount Calculation and Tiered Discount Calculation.

Numeric, 11 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Coop % (Discount 2 percentage)

The percentage of the second discount in the Vendor Discount table. The system applies this discount against the unit cost of an item on the purchase order. The resulting dollar amount for this percentage is in the Discount field located below this field.

Discount 2 is blank if you have not defined a value in the Vendor/PO Discount Values (E18) system control value.

The system calculates discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Combined Discount Calculation and Tiered Discount Calculation.

Numeric, 11 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Special % (Discount 3 percentage)

The percentage of the third discount in the Vendor Discount table. The system applies this discount against the unit cost of an item on the purchase order. The resulting dollar amount for this percentage is in the Discount field located below this field.

Discount 3 is blank if you have not defined a value in the Vendor/PO Discount Values (E18) system control value.

The system calculates discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Combined Discount Calculation and Tiered Discount Calculation.

Numeric, 11 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Discount (Unit discount)

The amount of the first discount that the system subtracts from the unit cost of an item on the purchase order.

The system calculates discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Combined Discount Calculation and Tiered Discount Calculation.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Discount (Unit discount)

The amount of the second discount that the system subtracts from the unit cost of an item on the purchase order.

The system calculates discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Combined Discount Calculation and Tiered Discount Calculation.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Discount (Unit discount)

The amount of the third discount that the system subtracts from the unit cost of an item on the purchase order.

The system calculates discounts based on the method from the Discount calculation method field in the Vendor Extended table. See Combined Discount Calculation and Tiered Discount Calculation.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
 

Vendor's information (see Working with Vendor Items (WVNI)
Vendor's

The vendor's item code for the item.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only.
U/M (Unit of measure)

The vendor's unit of measure for the vendor's item.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Quantity

The quantity of the item that has been ordered from the vendor, expressed in the vendor's unit of measure. For example, if your unit of measure is eaches and the vendor's unit of measure is cases of 24, the Qty field may contain 48 units and the Quantity field would be 2 (representing the vendor's unit of measure).

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Vendor price

The price the vendor charges for the item, expressed in the vendor's currency.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Vnd disc (Vendor discount)

The primary unit discount amount represented in the vendor's currency.

Numeric, 13 positions; display-only.
Vnd disc 1 (Vendor unit discount)

The amount of the first discount displayed in the vendor's currency. Calculating discounts in a foreign currency results in inaccurate discount amounts.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Vnd disc 2 (Vendor unit discount)

The amount of the second discount displayed in the vendor's currency. Calculating discounts in a foreign currency results in inaccurate discount amounts.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Vnd disc 3 (Vendor unit discount)

The amount of the third discount displayed in the vendor's currency. Calculating discounts in a foreign currency results in inaccurate discount amounts.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Ext price (Extended price)

The extended price of this PO detail line in the vendor's unit of measure. Calculated by multiplying the price by the quantity ordered.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Prc mthd (Price method description)

The description of the pricing method used for the item on this purchase order.

Valid values are:

  • Price overridden = At purchase order maintenance, you specified the price for the item.
  • Vendor item price = The vendor item price defaulted.
  • Item standard cost = The standard cost from the SKU table defaulted. .

Unless you override it, the system uses the vendor/item price, if it exists, for the purchase order. If there is no vendor/item price, the system uses the average, standard, or last purchase cost, based on your costing method as described above.

Display-only.

Buyer

A code that identifies a person who is authorized to make purchases for your company. The buyer's name is to the right. See Working with Buyers (WBUY).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ship via

A code that represents a carrier used for shipping merchandise to your company. The description is to the right. See Working with Purchase Order Ship Via (WPSV).

Numeric, 2 positions; display-only
Offer (Offer code)

A code for the offer (catalog) in which you will sell the item. See Working with Offers (WOFR). The description is to the right.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Warehouse

A code that represents the warehouse where the item is kept. Validated against the Warehouse table. The description is to the right.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Due date

The date the PO is due to be received, based on the PO date and the Lead days for the vendor item or manually entered in Purchase Order Maintenance. This date is shown in Order Entry, Order Maintenance, and standard or streamlined Order Inquiry.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Cancel date

The date the order will be marked for cancellation if the order is not received. See Printing the PO Auto Cancel Report (MPAC).

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Promise date

A user-defined date that may be used to represent the expected ship date or promised arrival date.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Review estimated charges

Select Estimated Charges to advance to the Display Purchase Order Detail Charges Screen.

Update vendor item notes

Select Vendor Item Notes to advance to the Work with Vendor Item Notes Screen.

Update PO detail messages

Select P/O detail messages to advance to the Work with PO Detail Messages Screen.

Display Purchase Order Detail Charges Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review additional charges, such as freight, brokerage, commission, or duty charges, for this purchase order detail line. These charges are for estimating purposes only. You can assign additional charges at purchase order receiving; see Purchase Order Inquiry (MPOI).

You use the Working With PO Additional Charges (WPAC) menu option to define PO additional charges. You can enter the estimated charge as a unit cost or a percent to apply against each unit on this purchase order detail line.

How to display this screen:

Field Description
P/O #

The number assigned to a purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Line # (Line number)

The purchase order detail line number. There can be up to 999 lines on one purchase order.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Item

A code that represents a unit of inventory.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
Code

A code that represents the estimated charge for to the detail line. Validated against the PO Additional Charge table; see Working With PO Additional Charges (WPAC).

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Description

Text that describes the charge code.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Unit cost

The unit charge for this purchase order detail line for brokerage, commission, duty, freight, import, surcharge, or other user-defined fees. Actual charges from the vendor for these fees are captured at PO Receiving. The system multiplies the unit cost by the quantity ordered to determine the estimated charge.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; display-only.
Percent

The percentage used to calculate the additional charges on a purchase order detail line. The system multiplies the percentage by the extended price on the purchase order detail line to determine the estimated charge. Actual charges are captured at PO Receiving.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.

Display Purchase Order Header Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review information about the purchase order that pertains to the entire purchase order record, such as status, ship-to address, buyer, or offer.

Purchase order download triggers: If the Create Generic PO Download Triggers (K26) system control value is selected, the system generates a purchase order header (POH) trigger whenever a purchase order is printed, based on the trigger rules defined for the Purchase Order Download (PO_OUT) integration layer job. The PO_OUT integration layer job monitors for purchase order download triggers and generates a PO Download XML Message (CWPurchaseOrderOut) to send purchase order information to a remote system. See Generic Outbound Purchase Order API in the Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1) for an overview.

How to display this screen: At the First Display Purchase Order Detail Screen, select Header.

Field Description
P/O #

The number assigned to a purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions.
Ship to

The ship-to information entered for the purchase order. Each option is described below.

Warehouse: Defaults from the primary warehouse defined in the System Control table. If you do not have a default defined in the System Control table, you must enter the warehouse code.

Note:

You can override the warehouse code for any line on the purchase order. The system tracks the total on order for each item in each warehouse, based on the code entered here or on the detail line. In addition, the warehouse code controls which shipping address prints on the PO or is transmitted in the EDI table. A separate PO prints for each warehouse to each different ship-to address.

Numeric, 3 positions.
 

Customer number/Order number: Unique numbers the system assigns to customers or orders. The system requires either a customer or order number for drop ship purchase orders. If you enter the customer number, the system does not tie this number to the order or pull the items from the order through to the purchase order.

Numeric, 9 positions.
Status

The status of the purchase order.

Valid values are:

  • Canceled = The purchase order was canceled through PO Maintenance; it exists on the system for historical purposes.
  • Closed = All lines on the purchase order have been received through PO Receiving.
  • Docked = One or more deliveries against the purchase order have been docked and the purchase order is awaiting receipt.
  • Held = The PO must be approved through PO Maintenance before receipts can occur.
  • Open = At least one line on the PO is awaiting receipt.
  • Suspended = Inventory has been received into suspense through the PO Receiving function.

Alphanumeric
Vendor

A unique number to identify the supplier you are purchasing from. Validated against the Vendor table.

Numeric, 7 positions.
Vendor name/address

The supplier's name and address.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions.
Warehouse/customer

The name and address of the warehouse or the customer, depending on which information you entered.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions.
Placed with

The name of the person at the vendor site who took the purchase order originally.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions.
Shipping

One line of shipping instructions to print on the purchase order.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions.
Buyer

A code that identifies an employee who is authorized to make purchases for your company. Validated against the Buyer table; Working with Buyers (WBUY).

Numeric, 3 positions.
Ship via

A code that identifies your preferred shipper, or the shipper agreed upon with the vendor. Validated against the PO Ship Via table; see Working with Purchase Order Ship Via (WPSV).

Numeric, 2 positions.
Offer (Offer code)

The code for the offer (catalog) you use to sell this merchandise.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions.
Due date

The date the purchase order is due to be received. The due date is the date the operator always sees in Order Entry.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format).
Cancel date

The date the purchase order will be marked for cancellation if the order is not received. An auto-cancellation option is available that will produce a list of all items approaching or beyond the specified cancel date.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format).
Promise date

A user-defined date that may be used to represent the expected ship date or promised arrival date.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format).
Print date

The date the purchase order was printed.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format).
Type

Indicates whether this purchase order is an initial buy or a reorder.

Valid values are:

  • Initial Buy
  • Reorder
Entry date

The date the purchase order was entered.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format).
Receipt date

The date when the most current receiving activity was performed against this purchase order.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format).
Approve date

The date the purchase order was approved.

Numeric, 6 position (in user date format
Entered by

The ID that identifies the user who entered the order.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions.
Received by

A code that identifies the user who received the merchandise.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions.
Approved by

A code that identifies the user who approved the purchase order.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions.

Screen Option Procedure

Review purchase order details

Select Detail to return to the First Display Purchase Order Detail Screen.

Print the purchase order

Select Print to advance to the Print P/O Window.

Note:

Faxing the purchase order is not currently implemented.

Review FOB addresses for the purchase order

Select FOB to advance to the First Display FOB for Purchase Order Screen.

Display actual charges

Select Act Chgs to advance to the Display Purchase Order Actual Charges Screen.

Review purchase order history

Select P/O Hist to advance to the Purchase Order Header History Screen.

Review purchase order overrides

Select P/O Overrides to advance to the Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window.

Update purchase order messages

Select P/O Messages to advance to the Work with PO Messages Screen.

Display vendor notes

Select Vendor Notes to advance to the Display Vendor Notes Screen.

Purchase Order Header History Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review the activity that has taken place for a purchase order at the header level.

How to display this screen: Select P/O Hist at the Display Purchase Order Header Screen.

Field Description
P/O #

A unique number to identify the purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Vendor #

The name and number of the supplier.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only.
B/A

A code indicating whether the history represents a before or after image of the transaction. Values are:

  • Before = information representing the purchase order before the transaction was processed.
  • After = information representing the purchase order after the transaction was processed.

Alphanumeric, display-only.
Date

The date when the activity was performed.

Numeric, 6 positions; display-only.
User

The user who performed the activity.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
Description

A description of the activity that was performed against the purchase order.

Alphanumeric, 25 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Description

Review purchase order line history

Select Line History to advance to the Purchase Order Line History screen. See Display PO Detail History Screen for screen sample and field descriptions of this screen.

Purchase Order Line History Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review any activity against the purchase order line since it was created on the system. The system notes each time anything happens to the line (such as, maintenance, receipts, etc.).

How to display this screen: At the Purchase Order Header History Screen, select Line History.

Field Description
P/O #

The unique number which identifies the purchase order , and the description of the supplier.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only.
Line #

The number of this line on the purchase order.

Numeric, 3 positions, display-only.
Item

The code and description of the item.

Item: Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.

Description: Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.

B/A

A code indicating whether the history represents a before or after image of the transaction.

Values are:

  • Before = information representing the purchase order detail line before the transaction was processed.
  • After = information representing the purchase order detail line after the transaction was processed.

Alphanumeric, display-only.
Date

The date when the activity was performed.

Numeric, 6 positions; display-only.
User

The user who performed the activity.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
Description

A description of the activity that was performed against the purchase order detail line.

Alphanumeric, 25 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Description

Review history for the next detail line of the purchase order

Select OK.

Purchase Order Overrides Pop-Up Window

Purpose: Use this window to review overrides that have been made to the Vendor record for this purchase order only.

How to display this screen: At the Display Purchase Order Header Screen, select P/O Overrides.

Field Description
Reference #

An internal reference number to store with the purchase order. For example, this might be an internal purchase order number from a preprinted purchase order, or an internal control for departmental purchase orders.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; display-only.
Currency/Rate

The currency of the vendor or broker, and the current currency conversion rate. See Working with Currency (WCUR).

Currency: alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Rate: numeric, 13 positions with a 7-place decimal; display-only.
Vendor ref # (Vendor reference number)

The vendor's reference number, such as an alternate order number. Prints on the purchase order.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; display-only.
Terms

A code that represents the payment terms, such as net 30 days. Defaults from the Vendor table, but you can override it in purchase order maintenance.

Numeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Discount % (Discount percent)

The discount percent to apply to each item ordered from this vendor. Defaults from the Vendor table, but you can override it in purchase order maintenance.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Surcharge % (Surcharge percent)

The surcharge percentage to add to purchases from this vendor. A surcharge is typically added to purchases from a broker. Defaults from the Vendor table, but you can override it in purchase order maintenance. The surcharge percent is reflected in the cost of each item.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Tax status

The resale or exempt classification, if any, entered in purchase order maintenance. Informational.

Alphanumeric, 15 positions; display-only.
Negotiate price

Determines whether prices default for items.

  • Selected = You must enter a price for each item.
  • Unselected = The price automatically defaults for each item from:

  1. Vendor/Item quantity break table

  2. Vendor/Item table

  3. Item table

See Working with Vendor Items (WVNI).

Confirming P/O

Indicates whether this is a confirming purchase order.

When you print a confirming purchase order, it indicates if it is a confirming document.

  • Selected = The purchase order was already communicated to the vendor, and this is a confirming purchase order.
  • Unselected = This is not a confirming purchase order.

Display Purchase Order Actual Charges Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review the actual additional charges for the purchase order in terms of brokerage, commission, duty, freight, import, surcharge, or other user-defined fees.

The actual charges are captured at PO Receiving. These may be compared against the estimated charges defined for the PO during PO Maintenance. These charges represent the cumulative charges over all lines on a PO.

How to display this screen: At the Display Purchase Order Header Screen, select Act Chgs.

Field Description
P/O # (Purchase order number)

The number assigned to a purchase order.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only or required
Receipt date

The date on which the most current receiving activity was performed against this purchase order. Updated by PO Receiving.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Vendor #

The number and name of the supplier.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; display-only.
Charge code

A code that represents a type of additional charge for the purchase order, such as brokerage, commission, duty, freight, import, surcharge, or other user-defined fees. Valid additional charge codes are defined through the PO Additional Charge function; see Working With PO Additional Charges (WPAC).

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Description

Description associated with an additional charge for a purchase order detail line, for brokerage, commission, duty, freight, import, surcharge, or other user-defined fees.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Amount

The total dollar value of the actual additional charge for brokerage, commission, duty, freight, import, surcharge, or other user-defined fees. Represents the total for this type of fee across all lines of the purchase order. Updated at PO Receiving. This charge may be compared against the estimated additional charges entered during PO Maintenance.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 4-place decimal; display only.

Display Vendor Notes Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to display free-form notes about this vendor. These notes are displayed in PO Inquiry, PO Maintenance, and PO Receiving.

How to display this screen: At the Display Purchase Order Header Screen, select Vendor Notes.

Field Description
Note

Free-form text about the vendor. The text can print on purchase orders and reports. These notes are displayed in PO Maintenance, PO Inquiry, and PO Receiving. Select Next to view additional lines.

Alphanumeric, 60 positions (each line); display only.
Print

Valid values are:

  • Selected = The note will print on purchase orders for the vendor.
  • Unselected = The note will not print on purchase orders for the vendor.

First Display FOB for Purchase Order Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review vendor FOB records for a specific purchase order.

About FOB Address: The FOB (freight on board) address is the location where title to merchandise being shipped passes from the seller to the buyer. If the FOB address is an Origin type, ownership of the merchandise passes from seller to buyer at the origin of the shipping route, and the buyer is responsible for transportation costs and risk of loss or damage from that point. If the FOB address is a Destination type, ownership of the merchandise passes from seller to buyer at the receiving point for the merchandise, and the seller is responsible for transportation costs and risk of loss or damage until the merchandise reaches its destination.

How to display this screen: Select FOB at the Display Purchase Order Header Screen.

You cannot change any information on this screen. To change vendor FOB information for a purchase order, advance to the Work with FOB for Purchase Order Screen through Maintaining Purchase Orders (MPOE) (fast path = MPOE).

Field Description
Vendor

The vendor number and description for this purchase order.

Vendor number: Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Vendor description: Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

Type

Identifies the FOB address as either a Destination type or an Origin type.

  • Destination = in this field identifies the FOB address as the location to which merchandise is being shipped (its destination), and indicates that title to the merchandise passes from the seller to the buyer when the merchandise reaches its destination.
  • Origin = in this field identifies the FOB address as the location from which the merchandise is shipped, and indicates that title to the merchandise passes from the seller to the buyer when the merchandise leaves the seller's dock.

Alphanumeric, display-only.
City

The city of the FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 25 positions; display-only.
St

The state of the FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Postal cd

The zip code of the FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
Freight terms

A brief description of the freight terms for this FOB address.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Display detail information for an FOB address for this purchase order

Select Display for a vendor FOB address to advance to the Second Display FOB for Purchase Order Screen.

Second Display FOB for Purchase Order Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review details of a single FOB address for a purchase order.

How to display this screen: Select Display for an FOB address on the First Display FOB for Purchase Order Screen. See that screen for field descriptions.

Printing Purchase Orders

Topic in this part:

  • Printing Purchase Orders (MPRP) describes how to make standard print selections (sequence, date, type) and making additional print selections (vendor, buyers, and warehouses) in order to print or email the purchase order.

Printing Purchase Orders (MPRP)

Purpose: Use the Print Purchase Order menu option to print hard copies of purchase orders or to email them to the vendor.

Purchase order status: All open and held purchase orders (status = O or H) are eligible for printing or emailing through this menu option.

Purchase order download triggers: The Create Generic PO Download Triggers (K26) system control value determines whether a purchase order header (POH) trigger is generated whenever a purchase order is printed. See Generic Outbound Purchase Order API in the Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1).for an overview.

Note:

This option does not send purchase order information to Order Broker.

In this topic:

Print PO Selection Screen

How to display this screen: Enter MPRP in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Print Purchase Order from a menu.

Field Description
Sequenced by

Indicates how to sort the purchase orders, and which print program to use.

Valid values are:

Required.
Email PO

Indicates whether to email the purchase order to the vendor, provided the vendor’s Email P/O flag is selected and you have specified an email address for the vendor through Working with Vendors (WVEN); otherwise, the system produces the purchase order as a .PDF file for printing but does not email it.

This field is available only if the Email Purchase Order (K80) system control value is selected. Valid values:

  • Selected (default) = send purchase orders as email attachments to vendors whose Email P/O flags are selected and who have an email address defined, as well as producing the .PDF file; all other emails selected at this screen should be printed only but not emailed.
  • Unselected = do not send any selected purchase orders by email; print only.

When you email purchase orders, the purchase order is sent as a .PDF attachment to a plain-text email, using the print program related to your selection at the Sequenced by field. Even if a vendor receives multiple purchase orders, each is attached to a separate email. The text in the email is derived from the Purchase Order template set up through Working with E-Mail Notification Templates (WEMT).

Unprinted

This option indicates whether to print or email purchase orders that have been not yet been printed or emailed.

Valid values are:

  • Selected = Print (or email) unprinted purchase orders.
  • Unselected = Do not print (or email) unprinted purchase orders.
To restrict the range of unprinted purchase orders to print or email, complete Entry date OR Entry PO fields:

NA
Entry date

If you enter a “from” and “to” date here, the system restricts printing (or emailing) to unprinted purchase orders created on or between these dates.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format) each field; optional.

Entry PO # (Purchase order number)

If you enter a “from” and “to” purchase order number, the system restricts printing (or emailing) to unprinted purchase orders within this range.

Numeric, two 7-position fields; optional.
Revised

This option indicates whether to print or email purchase orders that have been changed since they were printed or emailed.

Valid values are:

  • Selected = Print or email revised purchase orders. Note: The system selects a purchase order only if it has a Print date earlier than a Revised date.
  • Unselected = Do not print or email revised purchase orders.
To restrict the range of revised purchase orders to print or email, complete Revised date or Revised PO fields:

NA
Revised date

If you enter a “from” and “to” date here, the system restricts printing or emailing to purchase orders revised on or between these dates.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format) each field; optional
Revised PO # (Revised purchase order number)

If you enter a “from” and “to” purchase order number, the system restricts printing or emailing to revised purchase orders within this range.

Numeric, two 7-position fields; optional.
Reprint

This option indicates whether to print or email purchase orders that have been printed or emailed previously.

Valid values are:

  • Selected = Print or email purchase orders that have printed or emailed previously. The system selects purchase orders that have a Print date.
  • Unselected = Do not print or email purchase orders that have been printed or emailed previously.
To restrict the range of printed purchase orders to reprint or email, complete the Reprint date or Reprint PO # fields:

NA
Print date (reprint date)

If you enter a “from” and “to” date here, the system restricts printing or emailing to purchase orders printed or emailed on or between these dates.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format) each field; optional.
Reprint PO # (Reprinted purchase order number)

If you enter a “from” and “to” purchase order number, the system restrict printing or emailing to purchase orders printed or emailed within this range.

Numeric, two 7-position fields; optional

Screen Option Procedure

Accept the settings to print the purchase order

Select Accept to create a batch print job. See Completing the Print Process.

Display additional selections

Select Additional Selections to advance to the PO Print Selection Window (Additional Selections).

PO Print Selection Window (Additional Selections)

Purpose: Use this window to select the specific vendors, buyers, and/or warehouses for printing or emailing purchase orders.

How to display this screen: Select Additional Selections at the Print PO Selection Screen.

Field Description
Selected vendors

This code identifies a supplier from whom you purchase merchandise. The system restricts printing or emailing purchase orders for the vendors you specify here. Vendor numbers are defined in and validated against the Vendor table; see Working with Vendors (WVEN). You can enter up to 10 vendors.

Numeric, ten 7-position fields; optional.
Selected buyers

This code identifies an individual who places purchase orders for you. The system restricts printing or emailing purchase orders for the buyers you specify here. Buyers are defined in and validated against the Buyer table; see Working with Buyers (WBUY). You can enter up to 10 buyers.

Alphanumeric, ten 3-position fields; optional.
Selected warehouses

This code identifies the warehouse where the merchandise is to be received. The system restricts printing or emailing purchase orders for the warehouses you specify here. Warehouses are defined in and validated against the Warehouse table; see Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS). You can enter up to 10 warehouses.

Numeric, ten 3-position fields; optional.

Completing the Print Process

Accepting and printing POs: To accept and print or email the Print PO selections, select Accept at the Print PO Selection Screen. The system generates a batch print job (PO_PRINT) and displays a message. This job:

  • Generates the Purchase Order using the PO Print Program for PO Print in PO Sequence (C76) if you selected Sort by P/O #; otherwise, the system uses the PO Print Program (C64) if you selected Sort by vendor.
  • If you are not emailing the purchase order; the .PDF file is available at the Forms Management (My Forms) screen. Otherwise, it attaches each purchase order as a .PDF file to a separate email to the vendor’s email address. The text of the email is derived from the Purchase Order template set up through Working with E-Mail Notification Templates (WEMT).
  • Updates the Print date for the purchase order, displayed in purchase order inquiry.
  • Writes a PO Message if you are emailing the purchase order, indicating the email address where the purchase order was sent. The generation date is not displayed at the Work with PO Messages Screen, although it is written to the PO Message table.

Note:

When the purchase order is printed, a sequence number that is assigned to each line prints rather than the actual purchase order line number. This prevents a vendor from seeing gaps in the line numbers, which can occur if a purchase order has canceled lines or has been partially received.

Printing Purchase Order Reports

Topics in this part:

Printing the Open PO Listing By Vendor Report (MPPO)

Purpose: The Open PO Listing By Vendor report lists purchase orders that have not been received in your warehouse. The report sorts by vendor number, then by descending entry date, and then by ascending PO number.

Print Open PO's By Vendor Screen

How to display this screen: Enter MPPO in the Fast path field at the top of any menu, or select Print Open PO's By Vendor from a menu.

Field Description
Starting due date

The beginning date of the time span you want the system to search for open PO's. For example, if you wanted to search for open PO's throughout the first week of July, you'd fill in 070197 (July 1) in this field.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Ending due date

The ending date of the time span you want the system to search for open PO's. For example, if you wanted to search for open PO's throughout the first week of July, you'd fill in 070797 (July 7) in this field.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.

How to print this report: Select OK to select all open POs, or enter in the date fields to select POs by due date. The system generates the Open PO’s by Vendor Report according to your selections and returns you to a menu.

Printing the PO Auto Cancel Report (MPAC)

Purpose: The Purchase Order Auto Cancel report provides a listing of purchase orders that have been flagged for cancellation.

Setting the cancel date for a PO: At the PO Maintenance - Change PO Detail Screen, enter the Cancel date (which must be greater than the current date).

Note:

There is currently no function that automatically cancels purchase orders flagged for cancellation.

PO Auto Cancel Date Selection Pop-Up Window

How to display this screen: Enter MPAC in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu or select this option from a menu.

Completing this window: Complete the latest cancel date to include on the report and Select Accept. The system automatically submits a batch job (POAUTO_CAN) and generates the Purchase Order Auto Cancel Report.

Printing the Purchase Order Expected Delivery Listing (PEXD)

Purpose: Use the Print Expected Delivery Listing menu option to generate the PO Expected Delivery Report. This report displays purchase order lines by warehouse and vendor that are due to be received within a specified date range.

PO Expected Delivery List Prompt Screen

Use this screen to generate the PO Expected Delivery Report.

How to display this screen: Enter PEXD in the Fast path field at the top of a menu or select Print Expected Delivery Listing from a menu.

Field Description
PO due date range

The date range you wish to use to generate the PO Expected Delivery report.

Enter a “from” date in the first field and a “to” date in the second field.

The “from” date must be earlier than the “to” date.

The system allows you to enter a “to” date that is greater than the current date so that you can review inventory that will be arriving in the future.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); required if a PO # is not defined.
PO #

The purchase order number for which you wish to generate the PO Expected Delivery report.

Purchase order numbers are defined in and validated against the PO Header table.

Numeric, 7 positions; required if a PO due date range is not defined.

Print SKU detail (Y/N)

Indicates if you wish to include SKU information on the PO Expected Delivery report.

Valid values:

Selected = Include SKU information on the report. The system includes the SKU code and SKU description for each item whose due date falls within the report’s date range.

Unselected (default) = Do not include SKU information on the report. The system lists each item whose due date falls within the report’s date range. If the item is a SKU item, the system does not indicate which SKU of the item is expected to be delivered.

Completing this screen:

  1. Enter a PO due date range or PO number.
  2. Indicate if you wish to include SKU information on the PO Expected Delivery report.
  3. Select Submit.
  4. If the Print SKU detail field is Selected, the system submits the EXPDLVSKU job and generates the PO Expected Delivery Report with SKUs.
  5. If the Print SKU detail field is Unselected, the system submits the EXPDLV report and generates the PO Expected Delivery Report without SKUs.

Performing Inventory Analyses

Topics in this part:

For more information see the Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1).

Using Inventory Inquiry (DINI)

Purpose: Inventory inquiry allows you to review on hand quantities in each warehouse and in each location in a warehouse. This function can be used by several departments within your organization and provides a way to display item/SKU information quickly.

Other options: You can use the following additional menu options for inventory inquiry:

In this topic:

Inventory Quantity Inquiry Prompt Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to enter information for the Item/SKU/Warehouse that you want to review.

How to display this screen: Enter DINI in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu.

Using this screen:

  • Use the top portion of the screen to enter warehouse, item and SKU information for inquiry. You advance to the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen. The Default Warehouse (A04) from the System Control table defaults.
  • If you enter only the base item code and not a specific SKU for a SKU’ed item, the quantity information you see will be the sum of all SKUs for the item.
  • Use the lower portion of the screen to scan quickly for items by class, item status, item description, buyer, department, vendor, SKU status, SKU description, compatibility, or category, or a combination of these fields. You advance to the Item/SKU Selection Screen.
Field Description
Class

A code to identify a group of items. Item class codes are used as a high- level method to sort inventory, define information templates at the item class level, assign city/state restrictions, and assign customer class restrictions, and are defined in and validated against the Item Class table; see Working with Item Classes (WICL).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Item Status

A code that represents an item's status, such as obsolete, discontinued, etc. You can define this code at the item or the SKU level. Item status codes are defined in and validated against the Item Status table; see Working with Item Status (WIST).

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Item description

The description of the item. You can enter any portion of the description.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; optional.
Buyer

A person authorized to make purchases. Buyer codes are defined in and validated against the Buyer table; see Working with Buyers (WBUY).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Department

The department to which the item belongs. Department codes are defined in and validated against the Long SKU Department table; see Working with Long SKU Departments (WLSD).

Numeric, 4 positions; optional.
Vendor

The supplier of an item. Vendor numbers are defined in and validated against the Vendor table; see Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
SKU Status

A code that represents a SKU’s status, such as obsolete, discontinued, etc. You can search for an item through either its item or SKU status.

The status might differ at the item and SKU level if, for example, you discontinue the "Green" SKU for the base item "Sweater." All other SKUs will have the status you defined at the base item level, but you assign the green sweater a discontinued SKU status in addition to the defined item status. This SKU status now overrides the base item status throughout the system.

SKU status codes are defined in and validated against the Item Status table; see Working with Item Status (WIST).

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
SKU description

The description of the SKU. You can enter any portion of the description.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.
Category

A category assigned to the item to classify and group similar items. The Item Category is a level below the Item Class. Validated against the Item Category table; see Working with Item Category Codes (WITG).

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Compatibility

A code assigned to items/SKUs to identify them as compatible items. You might assign a compatibility code of IBM, for example, to all IBM products such as a PC, printer, etc., to indicate that these items work together. The compatibility code is a user-defined code that is not validated by the system.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

Item/SKU Selection Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to select a specific item/SKU for inventory inquiry.

How to display this screen: Complete scanning information on the lower portion of the Inventory Quantity Inquiry Prompt Screen

Selecting an item: You can use the fields in the top portion of this screen to scan further for an item, or you can select an item by selecting it. See Inventory Quantity Inquiry Prompt Screen for field descriptions.

Screen Option Procedure

Select an item

Select an item to advance to the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen.

Display item details

Select Item Details for an item to advance to the Display Item Screen.

Display SKU details

Select SKU Details for a non-SKU’d item to advance to the Display SKU (Base Information) Screen (Non-SKU’ed Item); or select SKU Details for a SKU’d item to advance to the Display SKU - 1 of 2 (With Overrides) Screen.

Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review information for an item/SKU in the warehouse.

How to display this screen:

All fields are display-only.

Field Description
Item description (unlabeled field)

The description of the item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; display-only.
Item

A code to identify a unit of inventory.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
SKU

unlabeled field to the right of the item

The item’s unique characteristics, such as its color and size.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
SKU description

unlabeled field below the item description

The description of the SKU, if this is a SKU’ed item.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; display-only.
U/M

Unit of measure

The multiples in which you buy the item from the vendor. See Working with Units of Measure (WUOM).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Item status

The Status for the SKU, if any; otherwise, the Status for the item, if any. The description is to the right.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.
Whse

Warehouse

A code that represents the warehouse where the item is stored. Warehouse codes are defined in and validated against the Warehouse table; see Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS).

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Location

The “primary primary” location, which is stored in the Primary location field in the SKU table. The location code represents the area within the warehouse that contains the item/SKU. Typically, the location code is composed of a single alphanumeric character for Zone, and two numbers each for Aisle, Shelf, and Bin. For instance, the location A010201 indicates:

Zone Aisle Shelf Bin

A 01 02 01

See Creating and Maintaining Locations (WLOC).

Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Buyer

This code identifies the person who purchased this item from the vendor. Validated against the Buyer table (see Working with Buyers (WBUY)), and used primarily for reporting purposes. It does not default on POs.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Short SKU

The short SKU code for the item/SKU, as defined in the SKU table. The system assigns the short SKU number when the item/SKU is created using the next number available in the Short SKU (A12) number assignment value.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Offer

The code for the offer (catalog) where the item currently appears. You use the Create Item Offer Screen or the Create SKU Offer Screen to assign an item or SKU to an offer. Defaults from the most current SKU/offer with a current price, if any; otherwise, it defaults from the most current item/offer with a current price. If there is no current item/offer or SKU offer, the system displays a message:

NO CURRENT OFFER

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Page

The Page number for the displayed SKU/offer or item/offer, as specified at the Create Item Offer Screen or the Create SKU Offer Screen

Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Offer price

The price at which you are selling the item or SKU in this offer before applying any discounts. The price defaults from the offer.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Vendor

The primary vendor or supplier of the item, as defined in the Item table. Vendor codes are defined in and validated against the Vendor table; see Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Weight

The Ship weight for the SKU, if any; otherwise, the Ship wgt. (Shipping weight) for the item, if any.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 3-place decimal.
Kit type

Identifies a type of kit or set item. Defaults from the Kit type for the item. The description is to the right.

Alphanumeric, 1 position.
S/O control

The S/O control (Soldout control) code, if any, assigned to the item or SKU. The description is to the right.

Soldout control code: alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.

Description: alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
On hand

The number of units of this item in all locations in this warehouse.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
On order

The total quantity of this item in this warehouse that is due to be received on open purchase orders. This quantity increases when you enter a purchase order and decreases when you receive a purchase order.

If you receive purchase orders into suspense, the suspended quantity remains in this total until you place the suspended stock.

The Purchase Order Layering process updates this total if the UPDATE_ON_ORDER_FROM_PO_LAYERING property is set to TRUE. However, you should leave this property set to FALSE if you use the Enterprise Order Integration (Future Receipts and Active PO/Pre-Order Processing).

If you use the Enterprise Order Integration (Future Receipts and Active PO/Pre-Order Processing), the on-order quantity for active purchase order items is the same as the PO On Order quantity minus the PO Receipts quantity.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Next exptd delivery (Next expected delivery)

The date that you expect to receive this item from your vendor; this is the date from the PO Layering table.

Note:

If no entry exists in the PO Layering table or if the PO Layering record has a quantity of zero, then a next expected PO date does not display.

This date is displayed for drop ship items only if the Assign Drop Ship Expected Ship Date (I59) system control value is selected.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Reserved

The quantity of this item/SKU in this warehouse that is reserved for existing orders. This total increases through immediate, batch, and interactive reservation, and decreases through confirmation or pick void/reprint.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
All whses (All warehouses)

The total number of units of this item across all warehouses.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Last receipt date

The most recent date when you received the item into the warehouse. Does not update when you receive the item into a different warehouse.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Backorder

The quantity of the item/SKU in this warehouse that is currently on open orders but not available in your warehouse.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
S/H reserved

The quantity of this item/SKU in this warehouse that is reserved and flagged for some type of special handling, such as monogramming, hemming, etc. This total increases through reservation of items/SKUs assigned a special handling code in order entry or maintenance, and decreases through confirmation or pick void/reprint.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Out of stock date

The last date the on hand level for this item went to zero.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Protected

The quantity of this item or SKU that is protected from immediate or batch reservation across all locations in this warehouse. The system reserves this inventory only through Working with Interactive Reservation (MIRV), which is used for the manual disbursement of large wholesale orders or preferred mail order customers.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
SKU open

The total units remaining to be shipped for all open order detail lines, including any quantity reserved and quantity backordered.

Reset: You can use the Reset SKU Open Order Quantity (MRSO) option to reset this quantity if the total in the SKU table is incorrect.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Out of stock freq (Out of stock frequency)

Incremented whenever the on-hand level for this item or SKU reaches zero.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Available

The quantity of this item or SKU currently available to sell in this warehouse. This quantity includes only reservable locations, not locations defined as defective or return to-vendor.

Item availability is calculated as follows:

On hand - Protected - Reserved - Reserve Transfer - Backordered = Quantity available

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
SKU future

The number of units needed to fulfill future orders. Normally, you would run the Evaluate Future Orders periodic function daily to evaluate each order detail line marked as a "future order." This function calculates arrival date as described below and determines if orders should be moved to open and reserved (Immediate Reservation) or open and backordered.

Arrival Date calculation:

Arrival date - Reservation Lead Days (from system control value) = Date

If the resulting date is today's date or earlier, the system attempts to reserve inventory.

See the Reservation Lead Days (B27) system control value.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Open D/S

The total quantity on open drop-ship orders.

Reset: You can use the Reset SKU Open Order Quantity (MRSO) option to reset this quantity if the total in the SKU table is incorrect.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Pickable

The total quantity of pickable stock in this warehouse. The pickable quantity is equal to the sum of all on hand quantity in all pickable locations in the warehouse.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
SKU - susp (SKU suspended)

The total quantity received but not yet placed into a specific location. Increases through purchase order receiving and decreases through purchase order suspense placement.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Recv’d (Received)

The number of units received in this warehouse.

  • MTD = Month to date
  • YTD = Year to date
  • LTD = Life to date

These totals increase through receiving (not suspense placement).

Numeric, 7 positions each; display-only.
Issued

The total number of units shipped from this warehouse.

  • MTD = Month to date
  • YTD = Year to date
  • LTD = Life to date

These totals increase through billing. Increases occur for drop ship, variable sets, and sets. Returns do not decrease this number. If you ship merchandise without affecting inventory (e.g., express bill), this field does not update.

Numeric, 7 positions each; display-only.
Retn’d (Returned)

The total number of units that have been returned by customers into this warehouse.

  • MTD = Month to date
  • YTD = Year to date
  • LTD = Life to date.

These update through order or return authorization processing.

Numeric, 7 positions each; display-only.
Adjusted

The total number of inventory adjustments that have been made through A type inventory transactions only.

  • MTD = Month to date
  • YTD = Year to date
  • LTD = Life to date.

The net value is indicated. For example, if you adjust one location up 10 units, and another location down 3, the total adjusted quantity is 7.

Numeric, 7 positions each; display-only.
Active PO

Indicates whether this is an active purchase order item for which you can accept orders before you expect to have inventory to fulfill. The periodic functions which are part of the Enterprise Order Integration (Future Receipts and Active PO/Pre-Order Processing), set this flag and handle updates and orders for active purchase order items that are fulfilled through the integration with Order Broker. Possible settings:

  • selected = This is an active purchase order item, and orders will be submitted to Order Broker as inventory becomes available.
  • unselected = This is not an active purchase order item.

This flag is unselected at item creation, and you cannot change its setting at a screen. Only the periodic functions mentioned above update this flag.

Display-only.
PO On Order

The total quantity on purchase orders for an active purchase order item. From the RMS On-order quantity, as set by the OCDSFA periodic function. Used to determine the maximum number of active purchase order units allowed on orders before selling out the item.

This quantity does not decrease based on the PO Receipts quantity; however, the PREORDER or ACTPO periodic function sets this quantity to 0 if the PO Receipts quantity is greater than or equal to the PO On Order quantity, indicating that all open units of the active purchase order item have been received on purchase orders, and the item is no longer eligible for active PO processing. See Enterprise Order Integration (Future Receipts and Active PO/Pre-Order Processing) for more information.

Numeric, 7 positions each; display-only.
PO Receipts

The total quantity received on purchase orders for an active purchase order item. From the RMS Receipt quantity, as set by the OCDSFA periodic function. Used to determine the number of units of an active purchase order item to release to Order Broker for fulfillment. See Enterprise Order Integration (Future Receipts and Active PO/Pre-Order Processing) for more information.

Numeric, 7 positions each; display-only.
PO Updated

The most recent date when active purchase order information was updated through Enterprise Order Integration (Future Receipts and Active PO/Pre-Order Processing). From the RMS Update Date.

Date; display-only.
Released Qty

The total quantity of an active purchase order item that has been released to Order Broker for fulfillment. From the RMS Released quantity. See Enterprise Order Integration (Future Receipts and Active PO/Pre-Order Processing) for more information.

Numeric, 7 positions each; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Display inventory warehouse information

Select Whses/Item to advance to the Display Inventory Warehouses Screen.

Display inventory location information

Select Locs/Item to advance to the Display Inventory Locations Screen.

Display inventory on hand by location

Select On hand by loc to advance to the Inventory On Hand by Location Selection Screen.

Display open purchase orders

Select Open POs to advance to the Display Open Purchase Orders Screen.

Display components

Select Display Components to advance to the Work with Set (Variable, Finished good, etc.) screen. If this is a set item, you advance to the appropriate screen based on the type of set:

An error message displays if the item is not defined as a kit type (the Kit type field for the item is blank): Kit Type is blank. You cannot use Display Components.

Display item warehouse history

Select History to advance to the Display Item Warehouse History Screen.

Display Inventory Warehouses Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review quantity information for an item/SKU across all warehouses.

How to display this screen: Select Whses/Item at the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen, the Display Inventory Locations Screen, the Inventory On Hand by Location Selection Screen, or the Inventory On Hand by Location Screen. All fields are display-only.

Field Description
Item

A user-defined code that represents a unit of inventory.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
Warehouse

A code that represents the warehouse. Warehouse codes are defined in and validated against the Warehouse table. See Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS).

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
On hand

The number of units of this item across all locations in this warehouse.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Available

The quantity of this item currently available to sell in the designated warehouse. Takes into account only reservable locations (not locations defined as defective or return to-vendor).

Item availability is calculated as follows:

On hand - Protected - Reserved - Reserve Transfer - Backordered = Quantity available

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Pickable

The total quantity of pickable stock in this warehouse. The pickable quantity is equal to the quantity on hand minus the quantity printed.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
On order

The total quantity of this item in this warehouse that is due to be received on open purchase orders. This quantity increases when you enter a purchase order and decreases when you receive a purchase order.

If you receive purchase orders into suspense, the suspended quantity remains in this total until you place the suspended stock.

If you use the Enterprise Order Integration (Future Receipts and Active PO/Pre-Order Processing), the PREORDER periodic function sets the on-order quantity for active purchase order items to the PO On Order quantity minus the PO Receipts quantity.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Display buyer information

Select Buyer Info to return to the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen, where buyer information is displayed.

Display inventory location information

Select Locs/Item to advance to the Display Inventory Locations Screen.

Display inventory on hand by location

Select On hand by Location to advance to the Inventory On Hand by Location Selection Screen.

Display open purchase orders

Select Open POs to advance to the Display Open Purchase Orders Screen.

Display components

Select Display Components to advance to the Working with Set (Variable, Finished good, etc.) screen. See Working with Sets.

Note:

Select this option only for items identified as a set, finished good, or variable set.

Display Inventory Locations Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review item location information for the specified item or SKU and warehouse.

How to display this screen: Select Locs/Item at the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen, Display Inventory Warehouses Screen, the Inventory On Hand by Location Selection Screen, or the Inventory On Hand by Location Screen. All fields are display-only.

Field Description
Item

A code that represents a unit of inventory. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
Warehouse

The code and description of the warehouse. Warehouse codes are defined in and validated against the Warehouse table. See Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS).

Code: numeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Description: alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Location

A code representing the area within the warehouse that contains the item/SKU. Typically, the location code is composed of a single alphanumeric character for Zone, and two numbers each for Aisle, Shelf, and Bin. For instance, the location A010201 indicates:

Zone Aisle Shelf Bin

A 01 02 01

Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Location type

A code that defines the type of location.

Valid values are:

  • Primary = The primary, or main location where the item is picked. The system does not delete a primary item/location record when the on-hand quantity equals zero.
  • Secondary = Typically, you would use a secondary location for storage when the primary location is full. The system allocates from a secondary location when the total order quantity cannot be filled from the primary location. The system allocates from both the primary and secondary locations when neither location contains enough stock to fulfill the entire order. You can use secondary locations to replenish primary locations.
  • Bulk = Typically, you would use a bulk location to store unbroken lots or cartons. Bulk locations serve as the replenishment source for primary locations.
 
  • Temporary = Typically, you would use a temporary location to place merchandise that you want recognized as received before you have assigned a permanent location.

A temporary location cannot exist without at least one item/location record associated with it. When stock is moved into a temporary location, the system creates an item/location record. When the on-hand in the item/location reaches zero, the system will delete the location and the item/location record. Note: Order Management System will not allocate merchandise from a temporary location even if the location is defined as pickable. In order to allocate stock, you must move the merchandise to a non-temporary, pickable location.

Display-only.
Maximum

The total unit quantity of the item to keep in this location.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Minimum

The least amount of inventory on hand for this item/SKU.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
On hand

The number of units of this item in this location.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Printed

The total quantity printed on an open (unconfirmed) pick slip for the item in this location.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only
Pending

The total quantity of the item in this location with a pending batch inventory transaction or work order.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Pickable

A code indicating whether inventory can be picked from the location.

  • Selected = Inventory can be picked from the location.
  • Unselected = Inventory cannot be picked from the location. Bulk locations, or locations where you keep defective merchandise, might be defined as non-pickable.
Placement dt (Placement date)

The date when you first placed the item in this location through purchase order receiving, a customer return, or an adjustment.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Display buyer information

Select Buyer Info to return to the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen, where buyer information is displayed.

Display inventory warehouse information

Select Whses/Item to advance to the Display Inventory Warehouses Screen.

Display inventory on hand by location

Select On hand by Location to advance to the Inventory On Hand by Location Selection Screen.

Display open purchase orders

Select Open POs to advance to the Display Open Purchase Orders Screen.

Display components

Select Display Components to advance to the Working with Set (Variable, Finished good, etc.) screen. See Working with Sets.

Inventory On Hand by Location Selection Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review the locations that are available for inquiry.

How to display this screen: Select On hand by Location at the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen, the Display Inventory Warehouses Screen, or the Display Inventory Locations Screen. All fields are display-only.

Field Description
Warehouse

A code that represents the warehouse, validated against the Warehouse table. See Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS).

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Location

A that represents a warehouse location where merchandise is stored. The warehouse location code can consist of a zone/aisle/shelf/bin combination, or it can be any user-defined code. The location code prints on picks slips and reports.

Example: The location A010201 indicates:

Zone Aisle Shelf Bin

A 01 02 01

Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Type

A code that defines the type of location.

Valid values are:

  • P = Primary. The primary, or main location where the item is picked. The system does not delete a primary item/location record when the on-hand quantity equals zero.
  • S = Secondary. Typically, you would use a secondary location for storage when the primary location is full. The system allocates from a secondary location when the total order quantity cannot be filled from the primary location. The system allocates from both the primary and secondary locations when neither location contains enough stock to fulfill the entire order. You can use secondary locations to replenish primary locations.
  • B = Bulk. Typically, you would use a bulk location to store unbroken lots or cartons. Bulk locations serve as the replenishment source for primary locations.
 
  • T = Temporary. Typically, you would use a temporary location to place merchandise that you want recognized as received before you have assigned a permanent location. A temporary location cannot exist without at least one item/location record associated with it. When stock is moved into a temporary location, the system creates an item/location record. When the on-hand in the item/location reaches zero, the system will delete the location and the item/location record. Note: Order Management System will not allocate merchandise from a temporary location even if the location is defined as pickable. In order to allocate stock, you must move the merchandise to a non-temporary, pickable location.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.
Zone/Aise/Shelf/Bin #

If your warehouse locations consist of a warehouse zone, aisle, bin number, and shelf number combination, separate fields are provided for these values.

  • Zone = the warehouse zone where the location is situated. Assigning zone codes provides for inventory analysis reporting by zone. Zone codes are also used to sort pick slips when the Cart Bin Picking method is used.
  • Aisle = the warehouse aisle of the location.
  • Shelf = the location's shelf number within the aisle.
  • Bin = the location's bin number on the shelf.

Example: The location A010201 indicates:

Zone Aisle Shelf Bin

A 01 02 01

Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Units

The total number of units that can fit in the location.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Weight

The total weight the location can hold, expressed in pounds.

Numeric, 7 position with a 3-place decimal; display-only.
Volume

The cubic capacity of the location. The volume calculation multiplies the height, by the length, by the width of the location.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Display on hand information

Select a location to advance to the Inventory On Hand by Location Screen.

Display buyer information

Select Buyer Info to return to the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen, where buyer information is displayed.

Display inventory warehouse information

Select Whses/Item to advance to the Display Inventory Warehouses Screen.

Display inventory location information

Select Locs/Item to advance to the Display Inventory Locations Screen.

Inventory On Hand by Location Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review on hand inventory for items in a particular location.

How to display this screen: At the Inventory On Hand by Location Selection Screen, select a location. All fields are display-only.

Field Description
Whse (Warehouse)

A code that represents the warehouse, validated against the Warehouse table. See Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS).

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Location

A code that represents a warehouse location where merchandise is stored. The warehouse location code can consist of a zone/aisle/shelf/bin combination, or it can be any user-defined code. The location code prints on picks slips and reports.

Example: The location A010201 indicates:

Zone Aisle Shelf Bin

A 01 02 01

Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Type

A code that defines the type of location.

Valid values are:

  • P = Primary. The primary, or main location where the item is picked. The system does not delete a primary item/location record when the on-hand quantity equals zero.
  • S = Secondary. Typically, you would use a secondary location for storage when the primary location is full. The system allocates from a secondary location when the total order quantity cannot be filled from the primary location. The system allocates from both the primary and secondary locations when neither location contains enough stock to fulfill the entire order. You can use secondary locations to replenish primary locations.
  • B= Bulk. Typically, you would use a bulk location to store unbroken lots or cartons. Bulk locations serve as the replenishment source for primary locations.
 
  • T = Temporary. Typically, you would use a temporary location to place merchandise that you want recognized as received before you have assigned a permanent location. A temporary location cannot exist without at least one item/location record associated with it. When stock is moved into a temporary location, the system creates an item/location record. When the on-hand in the item/location reaches zero, the system will delete the location and the item/location record. Note: Order Management System will not allocate merchandise from a temporary location even if the location is defined as pickable. In order to allocate stock, you must move the merchandise to a non-temporary, pickable location.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.
Item

A code that represents a unit of inventory.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
SKU

The code that represents the special characteristics of the item (e.g., color, size, width).

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
On hand

The number of units of this item in this location in the warehouse.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Printed

The number of pick slips printed for this item in the specific location.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Screen Option Procedure

Display buyer information

Select Buyer Info to return to the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen, where buyer information is displayed.

Display inventory warehouse information

Select Whses/Item to advance to the Display Inventory Warehouses Screen.

Display inventory location information

Select Locs/Item to advance to the Display Inventory Locations Screen.

Display Open Purchase Orders Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to obtain information about the unreceived or partially received purchase orders for an item. This screen includes the purchase order numbers, vendors, quantities and expected delivery dates for the item.

How to display this screen: Select Open POs at the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen, the Display Inventory Warehouses Screen, or the Display Inventory Locations Screen

Field descriptions: The Item, SKU and Description fields are described at the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen. The remaining fields on this screen are:

Field Description
Whs (Warehouse)

The warehouse where the item will be delivered.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
PO#

The number of the purchase order on which you ordered the item from the vendor.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Ln#

The line number of item on the purchase order.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Vendor #

A code to identify the supplier of the item. Vendor codes are defined in and validated against the Vendor table; see Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Name

The name of the vendor associated with the vendor number. Blank if the Vendor Name Display (D41) system control value is unselected.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Qty due (Quantity due)

The number of units of the item expected in the shipment.

Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Date

The date when the shipment of the item is expected; this is the date from the PO Layering table.

If no entry exists in the PO Layering table or if the PO Layering record has a quantity of zero, then a next expected Po date does not display.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.

Display Item Warehouse History Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review sale and return information for an item in the specified warehouse.

How to display this screen: Select History at the Display Item/Warehouse Information Screen.

Field Description
Year (Accounting period year)

The year when the activity occurred.

Numeric, 2 positions (YY format); optional.
Period (Accounting period number)

The accounting period within the specified year. Accounting periods are defined in and validated against the Accounting Period table; see Working with Accounting Periods (WACP).

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Item

A code that represents a unit of inventory.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
Whse (Warehouse)

A code that represents the warehouse; defined in and validated against the Warehouse table.

Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Today

Total Sales, Value sales, returns, and Value returns for the current date. These totals are updated during billing and are cleared by the Daily Clear Process periodic function (program name MSR0574).

Sales today

The number of sales for this item/SKU in this warehouse for today.

Numeric, 20 positions; display-only.
Value sales today

The actual dollars sold (shipped and billed) for this item/SKU for today. This total is updated during billing with the actual merchandise dollars billed on the shipment.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Returns today

The number of units of this item/SKU in this warehouse returned for today. This total is updated when you receive a returned item through order entry, order maintenance, or return authorizations.

Numeric, 11 positions; display-only.
Value returns today

The value of all returns that have been received today for this item/SKU in this warehouse. This total is updated when you receive the return through order entry, order maintenance, or return authorizations, using the actual price from when you shipped the item/SKU.

Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.

Display Item Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review information for an item.

How to display this screen: Select Display for an item at the Item/SKU Selection Screen.

For more information: See Create Item Screen for field descriptions.

Display SKU (Base Information) Screen (Non-SKU’ed Item)

Purpose: Use this screen to display SKU-level detail information for a non-SKU’ed item.

Non-SKU’ed items: Although a non-SKU’ed item does not contain SKU elements such as color and size, every non-SKU’ed item has one SKU record. This SKU record contains the type of detail information that is kept at the SKU level for SKU’ed items, such as warehouse, location, and costing information.

How to display this screen: Select SKU Details for a non-SKU’d item at the Item/SKU Selection Screen.

For more information: See Create Item (Base Information) Screen for information on each field and option on this screen.

Display SKU - 1 of 2 (With Overrides) Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review information about a specific SKU.

How to display this screen: Select SKU Details for a SKU’d item at the Item/SKU Selection Screen.

For more information: See Create SKU 1 of 2 (With Overrides) Screen for information on each field and option on this screen.

Display SKU - 2 of 2 (With Overrides) Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review additional information about a specific SKU.

How to display this screen: Select OK at the Display SKU - 1 of 2 (With Overrides) Screen.

For more information: See Create SKU 2 of 2 (With Overrides) Screen for information on each field and option on this screen.

Printing Item Sales Analysis Reports (MISA)

Purpose: Use the Item Sales Analysis Reports to review inventory, cost, sales, and returns information for each item included on the report.

This menu option differs from many other report options in that you can define report selection criteria and sort options, and save your selections to run as needed.

In this topic:

Work with Report Selection Screen (MISA)

How to display this screen: Enter MISA in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Print Item Sales Analysis Report from a menu.

Field Description
User

The user ID of the person who created the report option.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Report

The name of the report.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the report.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.
Date

The last date the report was printed or the report selection was updated.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Time

The last time the report was printed or the report selection was updated.

Numeric, 6 positions (HHMMSS format); optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a report selection

Select Create to advance to the Create Report Selection Screen.

Define and save or print a report selection

Select a report selection to advance to the Item Report Selection Screen (Defining Selection Criteria/MISA).

Display a report selection

Select Display for a report to advance to the Display Sales Analysis Report Options Screen.

Create Report Selection Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create the header information for a new version of the Item Sales Analysis Report.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Report Selection Screen (MISA), Select Create.

Field Description
Report

The name of the report selection.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the report selection.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Completing this screen: See Item Report Selection Screen (Defining Selection Criteria/MISA) for information on how to continue creating a new report selection.

Item Report Selection Screen (Defining Selection Criteria/MISA)

Purpose: Use this screen to define how to select items for inclusion on the report. For example, to produce a report for items in Warehouse 1 that were supplied by vendors 100 and 200, you complete the warehouse and vendor fields at this screen.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Report Selection Screen (MISA), select a report.

Field descriptions:

Note:

When selecting items to include on the report, the system checks the item's primary assignment in the Item or SKU table. You can check an item's assignment through the Enter/Maintain Items menu option; see Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM). For example, if you specify warehouse 1 as a selection criterion, the system includes only items whose primary warehouse assignment is to this warehouse.
Field Description
Whs (Warehouse)

A code that represents the warehouse. Validated against the Warehouse table. See Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS).

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Dept (Department)

A numeric code assigned to items to group them into departments for reporting purposes. Validated against the Department table; see Working with Long SKU Departments (WLSD).

Numeric, 4 positions; optional.
Class

A code assigned to a group of items to:

  • sort inventory
  • define information templates at the item class level
  • assign city/state restrictions
  • assign customer class restrictions

See Working with Item Classes (WICL).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Vendor

A code that represents the supplier of an item. Validated against the Vendor table; see Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Buyer

A code that represents a person who is authorized to make purchases for this item. Validated against the Buyer table; see Working with Buyers (WBUY).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Cat (Category)

A code assigned to an item to classify and group like items. Item categories are used in the Item Relationship function. Validated against the Item Category table; see Working with Item Category Codes (WITG).

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Sts (Status)

A code that represents an item's status such as obsolete, discontinued, etc. This information is used for inventory reporting purposes only. See Working with Item Status (WIST).

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Completing this screen: When you complete this screen, you advance to the Item Sales Analysis Save Options Screen (Additional Report Selections).

Item Sales Analysis Save Options Screen (Additional Report Selections)

Purpose: Use this screen to:

  • select the sort order of the Item Sales Analysis Report
  • select the accounting periods to include on the report
  • indicate whether to print, save, or print and save the report
  • optionally, enter a different description

How to display this screen: At the Item Report Selection Screen (Defining Selection Criteria/MISA), select OK.

Field Description
Sort selection

The sort selection field specifies how the report will be sorted.

Valid values:

  • By Warehouse $ Sold Ascending
  • Warehouse $ Sold Descending
  • By Department $ Sold Descending
  • By Department $ Sold Ascending
  • By Item Class $ Sold Ascending
  • By Item class $ Sold Descending
  • By Vendor $ Sold Ascending
  • By Vendor $ Sold Descending
  • By Buyer $ Sold Descending
  • By Buyer $ Sold Ascending
  • By Category $ Sold Ascending
  • By Category $ Sold Descending
  • By Status $ Sold Descending
 
  • By Status $ Sold Ascending
  • By Item $ Sold Ascending
  • By Item $ Sold Descending
  • By $ Sold Ascending
  • By $ Sold Descending
  • By Units Sold Ascending
  • By Units Sold Descending

Required.
Starting period

The starting month and year used in report selection. Enter the starting date to include.

Numeric, 2 positions; required.
Ending period

The ending month and year used in the report selection. Enter the ending date to include.

Numeric, 2 positions; required.
Selection option

Enter the number associated with the options, as follows:

  • 1 = Print the Item Sales Analysis Report; do not save the selection information
  • 2 = Save the selection information; do not print the report
  • 3 = Print the report and save the selection information

Alphanumeric, 1 position; required.
Report code

The name of the report selection.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
Description

The description of the report selection.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.

Completing this screen: Based on your selection option, the system prints the Item Sales Analysis Report and/or saves your selections.

Display Sales Analysis Report Options Screen

To display: Select Display for a report at the Work with Report Selection Screen (MISA) to advance to the Display Report Selection screen. This screen displays the selection criteria and sort selection for the report. You cannot change any information on this screen.

Printing Item Stock Status Reports (MISS)

Purpose: The Print Item Stock Status Report function is used to create, delete, and display status reports for item stock.

In this topic:

Work with Report Selection Screen (MISS)

How to display this screen: Enter MISS in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu.

Field Description
Report

The name of the report.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the report.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.
Date

The last date the report was printed or the report selection was updated.

Numeric, 6 position (in user date format); optional.
Time

The last time the report was printed or the report selection was updated.

Numeric, 6 positions (HHMMSS format); optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a report selection

Select Create to advance to the Create Report Selection Screen (MISS).

Define and save report selections

Select a report selection to advance to the Item Report Selection Screen (MISS).

Display report selections

Select Display for a report selection to advance to the Display Stock Status Report Options Screen.

Create Report Selection Screen (MISS)

Purpose: Use this screen to define the name and description of the report selection.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Report Selection Screen (MISS), Select Create.

Field Description
Report

The name of the report selection which is used for future reference. The selection criteria are saved to the Item Report Selection table with this name the first time the report is run. In the future, you can call up these selection criteria by entering this report name.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the report selection which is used for future reference. If the report selection is saved, the report description is displayed on the selection screen, provided you choose to list all of the previously saved report selections.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Item Report Selection Screen (MISS)

Purpose: Use this screen to define the information that will be included on the report. For example, to produce a report for items in Warehouse 1 that were supplied by vendor's 100 and 200 you would define the warehouse and vendor fields at this screen.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Report Selection Screen (MISS), select a report.

Field descriptions:

Field Description
Whs (Warehouse)

A code that represents the warehouse, validated against the Warehouse table. See Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS).

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Dept (Department)

A numeric code used to group items into departments for reporting purposes. Validated against the Department table; see Working with Long SKU Departments (WLSD).

Numeric, 4 positions; optional.
Class

A user-defined code that identifies a group of items. Item Class codes are used as a high level method to:

  • sort inventory
  • define information templates at the item class level
  • assign city/state restrictions
  • assign customer class restrictions

See Working with Item Classes (WICL).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Vendor

A user-defined code that represents the primary vendor or supplier of the item. Validated against the Vendor table. See Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Buyer

A user-defined code that represents a person who is authorized to make purchases for this item. Validated against the Buyer table. See Working with Buyers (WBUY).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Cat (Category)

A user-defined code assigned to an item to classify and group like items. Item category is a level below the item class. Validated against the Item Category table. See Working with Item Category Codes (WITG).

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Sts (Status)

A code that represents an item's status such as obsolete, discontinued, etc. This information is used for inventory reporting purposes only. See Working with Item Status (WIST).

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Item Stock Status Save Options Screen

Purpose: Once you have defined the report information, you are ready to save this information and to print the Item Stock Status Report.

How to display this screen: At the Item Report Selection Screen (MISS), Select OK.

Field Description
Sort selection

The sort selection field specifies how the report will be sorted. You can use the prompt (click on the arrow) to view the list of available values.

Valid values:

  • By Item Warehouse
  • By Warehouse Item
  • By Depart. Item Warehouse
  • By Depart. Warehouse Item
  • By Item Class Item Warehouse
  • By Item Class Warehouse Item
  • By Vendor Warehouse Item
  • By Vendor Item Warehouse
  • By Buyer Item Warehouse
 
  • By Buyer Warehouse Item
  • By Category Warehouse Item
  • By Category Item Warehouse
  • By Status Item Warehouse
  • By Status Warehouse Item
  • By Backorder $ Ascending
  • By Backorder $ Descending
  • By Backorder Units Descending
  • By Backorder Units Ascending

Required.
Include on order

Selected = The on-order (purchase order) quantity should be included in the quantity available calculation on the Item Stock Status Report.

Unselected = The on-order quantity should not be included in the quantity available calculation on the Inventory Stock Status Report.

FIFO option

The FIFO option identifies whether the report should include held orders in the backorder calculation.

Valid values:

  • Both open and held orders
  • Open orders only

Required.
Selection option

Type the number associated with the option, as follows:

  1. Print only = Prints the Item Stock Status Report and does not save your selections. You must select the sort option the next time you run this report.

  2. Save only = Saves your selections, but does not print the report.

  3. Save and print = Saves your selections and prints the report.

Numeric, 1 position; required.
Report function

Represents the system-assigned function name of the report that is run. As each report is selected and run, the system will update this field with the name of the report. You cannot change this field.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; display only.
Report code

The name of the report selection. The selection criteria is saved to the Item Report Selection table with this code.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; required.
Description

The description of the report selection. If the report selection is saved, the report description is displayed on this screen.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.

Completing this screen: Based on your selection option, the system prints the Item Stock Status Report and/or saves your selections.

Display Stock Status Report Options Screen

Display a report selection: Select Display for a report at the Work with Report Selection Screen (MISS) to advance to the Display Report Selection screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Item Report Selection Screen (MISS) for field descriptions.

Inventory Inquiry by Item (IIQI)

Purpose: Use the Inventory Inquiry by Item function to review item information organized by the base item and the first SKU element. The information presented through this function summarizes order and fulfillment activity; backorder and purchase order dates and totals; and returns and cancellations. You can also advance from the Inventory Inquiry by Item function to additional inventory inquiries.

The information presented through this function requires at least three screens to display (more if there are many SKU combinations). You advance left to right or right to left among these screens by pressing function keys.

Other options: You can use the following additional menu options for inventory inquiry:

In this topic:

Inventory Inquiry by Item Prompt Screen (Selecting an Item)

Purpose: Use this screen to select the item and first SKU element for inventory review.

How to display this screen: Enter IIQI in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Inventory Inquiry by Item from a menu.

Field Description
Item

A code representing a unit of inventory that you sell to your customers. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.
Colr (First SKU element)

A SKU defines an item's unique characteristics, such as its color, size, width, etc. You can define up to three SKUs for each item.

You enter the value from the Split SKU Element Column 1 Heading (A34) system control value here.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; required if the item has SKUs.

Completing this screen: You advance to the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (1 of 3).

Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (1 of 3)

Purpose: Use this screen to review information about Item/SKU order activity and availability.

Note:

Each field is display-only.

How to display this screen: Enter a valid item code and first SKU element value at the Inventory Inquiry by Item Prompt Screen (Selecting an Item).

Field Description
Item

A code representing a unit of inventory you sell to your customers. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions.
Item description (unlabeled field to the right of the item code)

The description associated with the item.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions.
Retail (Retail price)

The retail price for the item defined for the most current offer. If you define the price for items with SKUs at the SKU level rather than the item level, the retail price indicated is .00.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal.
Dept (Long SKU department)

A code representing the department defined for the item. See Working with Long SKU Departments (WLSD).

Numeric, 4 positions.
COLR (First SKU element)

A SKU defines an item's unique characteristics, such as its color, size, width, etc. You can define up to three SKUs for each item.

From the Split SKU Element Column 1 Heading (A34) system control value.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions.
Description (Unlabeled field to the right of the first SKU element)

The description associated with the first SKU element.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions.
Vendor

The vendor from the Item table, if any. See Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Alphanumeric, 7 positions.
Cost

The unit cost of the item.

Each of these costs is stored in the SKU table.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal.
Class

A code to identify a group of items. You might use item classes to assign city/state or customer class selling restrictions or sort inventory. Item class codes are defined in and validated against the Item Class table. See Working with Item Classes (WICL).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions.
Colr (First SKU element)

From Split SKU Element Column 1 Heading (A34) system control value.

The figures on this row of information represent total inventory calculations for all SKUs for the item that match the SKU element 1 you selected. See field descriptions below, beginning with the Cust ord (Customer orders) field, for more information.

Item

The figures on this row of information represent item-wide total inventory calculations. See field descriptions below, beginning with the Cust ord (Customer orders) field, for more information.

Size (Second SKU element)

The second special characteristic of an item. From the Split SKU Element 2 Column Heading system control value. See Split SKU Element Column Headings (A52, A53, A54).

Alphanumeric, 4 positions.
Wdth (Third SKU element)

The third special characteristic of an item. From the Split SKU Element 3 Column Heading system control value. See Split SKU Element Column Headings (A52, A53, A54).

Alphanumeric, 4 positions.
  The following fields represent column headings for inventory information calculated for:
  • Clr: All SKUs containing the first SKU element you entered on the selection screen.
  • Item: All SKUs for the item, regardless of first SKU element.
  • Each unique SKU that contains the first SKU element you entered on the selection screen (these are the rows that display below the column headings)
TTL ord (Total ordered)

The total quantity of units ordered for this item or SKU across all offers. Includes both open and closed orders.

Numeric, 7 positions.
Avail (Available)

The total quantity on-hand, minus the quantity on order. Negative figures represent backorders.

For the SKU element 1 and Item totals, this figure represents the net of available minus backorders for all SKUs included in the calculation.

Numeric, 7 positions.
Rsv (Reserved)

The total quantity reserved.

Numeric, 7 positions.
Printed

The total quantity on printed pick slips.

Numeric, 7 positions.
O/H (On hand)

The total quantity present in your warehouses.

Numeric, 7 positions.
B/O (Backordered)

The total quantity that is backordered.

Numeric, 7 positions.
Soldout control

Indicates whether there is a soldout control code for the item or SKU. You define soldout controls with one of three values:

  • sellout immediately
  • sellout when on-hand inventory is exhausted
  • sellout when on-hand inventory plus all purchase order receipts are exhausted.

Valid values for this field are:

Selected = There is a soldout control specified for this item or SKU.

Unselected = There is no soldout control specified for this item or SKU.

Soldout controls are defined in and validated against the Soldout Control table. See Working with Soldout Controls (WSLD).

Screen Option Procedure

Advance to Inventory Quantity Inquiry

Select Inv Qty to advance to the Inventory Quantity Inquiry Prompt Screen.

Advance to Inventory Status Inquiry

Select Inv Status to advance to Inventory Status Inquiry (ISIQ).

Change the first SKU element

Select Change Colrr to advance to the Enter New SKU Pop-Up Window.

Advance to the second screen

Select Right to advance to the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (2 of 3).

Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (2 of 3)

Purpose: Use this screen to review additional information about the item, including backorder and purchase order dates and order fulfillment figures.

How to display this screen: Select Right at the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (1 of 3).

Note:

If you have advanced downward on the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (1 of 3) by pressing Next to review additional SKUs, you will retain this relative position when you advance to this screen or the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (3 of 3).

Field descriptions: The information at the top of this screen, and the item/SKU information on the left, is repeated from the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (1 of 3). The additional fields on this screen are described below.

The fields on this screen and the next are historical, representing life-to-date figures for all offers associated with the item or SKU.

Field Description
Oldest B/O (Oldest backorder)

The date of the oldest backorder for the item or SKU.

Numeric 6 positions (in user date format).
Recpt (Received)

The total received quantity for the item or SKU in all allocatable warehouses.

Numeric, 7 positions.
On PO

The total quantity of the item or SKU on purchase order and not yet

received.

Numeric, 7 positions.
Next recpt (Next receipt)

The next date that you expect to receive the item or SKU at your warehouse.

Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format).
Ship

The total quantity of the item or SKU that you have shipped to customers.

Numeric, 7 positions.
Rtn (Returned)

The total quantity of the item or SKU that has been returned by customers.

Numeric, 7 positions.
Cancel

The total quantity of the item or SKU that has been canceled.

Numeric, 7 positions.

Screen Option Procedure

Advance to Inventory Quantity Inquiry

Select Inv Qty to advance to the Inventory Quantity Inquiry Prompt Screen.

Advance to Inventory Status Inquiry

Select Inv Status to advance to Inventory Status Inquiry (ISIQ).

Change the first SKU element

Select Change Colrr to advance to the Enter New SKU Pop-Up Window.

Return to the first screen

Select Left to return to the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (1 of 3).

Advance to the third screen

Select Right to advance to the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (3 of 3).

Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (3 of 3)

Purpose: Use this screen to review exchange, net sales, lost sales and total order figures for the item or SKUs.

How to display this screen: Select Right at the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (2 of 3).

Note:

If you have advanced downward on the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (1 of 3) or the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (2 of 3) by selecting Next to review additional SKUs, you will retain this relative position when you advance to this screen.

Field descriptions: The information at the top of this screen and the item/SKU information on the left, is repeated from the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (1 of 3). The additional fields on this screen are described below.

The fields on this screen are historical, representing life-to-date figures for all offers associated with the item or SKU.

Field Description
Exchg (Exchanges)

The total quantity of the item or SKU that has been exchanged.

Numeric, 7 positions.
Net sales

Net sales for the item or SKU, calculated as:

Total quantity shipped - (returns + exchanges)

Numeric, 7 positions.
Lost sales

The total quantity of the item or SKU that customers would have ordered if the item or SKU were available. You enter lost sales through Display Item Availability Screen in Order Entry.

Numeric, 5 positions.
Cust ord (Customer orders)

The total quantity ordered but not yet shipped.

Numeric, 7 positions.

Screen Option Procedure

Advance to Inventory Status Inquiry

Select Inv Status to advance to Inventory Status Inquiry (ISIQ).

Change the first SKU element

Select Change Colrr to advance to the Enter New SKU Pop-Up Window.

Return to the first screen

Select Left to return to the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (2 of 3).

Enter New SKU Pop-Up Window

Purpose: Select Change Colrr at the Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (1 of 3), Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (2 of 3), or Inventory Inquiry by Item Screen (3 of 3) to select another first SKU element to review. The Enter New SKU pop-up window opens:

You can enter a new SKU at this window, or prompt for all valid SKUs by clicking on the arrow in this field. You then advance to the Select SKU pop-up window; when you select a SKU from this window, the system defaults the first SKU element from your selection to the Enter New SKU pop-up window.

Retail Integration (External System to Order Management System)

Topic in this part: The following topics describe the processes, setup requirements, and functions available to upload item information from your retail system into Order Management System.

Working with Retail Integration Item Upload (RIIU)

Purpose: Use the Work with Retail Integration Item Upload menu option to process, review, and correct batch item upload records passed to Order Management System from a retail master system through the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP).

About the generic RI Item Upload: This generic integration allows you to keep merchandise information at your merchandising system consistent with merchandise information in Order Management System. You can use the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP) to upload information about items and SKUs from the external system into Order Management System. The types of information you can upload include:

  • items/SKUs
  • item offers and SKU offers
  • item prices and SKU prices
  • vendor items
  • item UPC’s
  • item coordinates

See the Retail Integration (External System into Order Management System) Overview and Setup for an overview and the required setup.

RMFCS integration: The item import from Oracle Retail Merchandising Foundation Cloud Service (RMFCS) also creates records in the RI Item Upload table; however, the RMFCS import uses a different set of files than that described in Retail Integration (External System into Order Management System) Overview and Setup to populate the RI Item Upload table, and a different periodic function. See Oracle Retail Merchandising Foundation Cloud Service (RMFCS) and Oracle Retail Pricing Cloud Service (RPCS) Integration for more information.

Require long SKU information? The Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value determines whether Order Management System changes certain table structures so that it can read records you upload from a retail system, including RMFCS. When this system control value is selected, the system:

  1. uses long SKU class codes from the Retail Class table instead of long SKU class codes from the Long SKU Class table. This allows you to create a hierarchy of retail class within long SKU department. You can link retail classes to a long SKU department in Working with Long SKU Departments (WLSD).
  2. requires a value in the Long SKU department, Long SKU class (retail class), Long SKU style, and Long SKU subclass fields when you create or maintain a base item.

If you wish to selectively require certain long SKU values, you can select one or more of the following system control values instead of selecting the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value:

Create supporting tables? Order Management System creates supporting table values, such as buyer code, for items/SKUs created or updated through the item upload if they do not already exist in the Order Management System table. See Tables Updated by the RI Item Upload.

Scheduling the generic item upload process: You can schedule the periodic functions, including the UPRITEM Upload Retail Item File (Program name PFR0134, Parameter RIIUPP), the RI Item Upload Translation Program, and RI Item Upload Edit Program to run the Item Upload Process periodically. See Scheduling Jobs for background. However, a different periodic function processes the item information from RMFCS; see Oracle Retail Merchandising Foundation Cloud Service (RMFCS) and Oracle Retail Pricing Cloud Service (RPCS) Integration for background.

Active procedure: The system creates the active procedure RI ITEM UPLOAD when you submit the process to prevent more than one RI Item Upload process from running at the same time.

In this topic:

RI Item Upload Process

You can create records in the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP) by using the File Storage API, placing the file in the CWDIRECTCP_UPLOAD_DIRECTORY if the file storage API is not enabled, or Work with File Uploads (WUPL) to upload retail merchandise information into the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP).

  • If you use the File Storage API to upload the Retail Integration Item file named RIIUPP or RIIUPP.TXT into the FILE_STORAGE table and then use the UPRITEM Upload Retail Item File (Program name PFR0134, Parameter RIIUPP) periodic function to create records in the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP).
  • If you do not use the file storage API, place the upload file in the CWDIRECTCP_UPLOAD_DIRECTORY and then use the UPRITEM Upload Retail Item File (Program name PFR0134, Parameter RIIUPP) periodic function to create records in the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP).
  • If you use Work with File Uploads (WUPL), the RI Item Upload Table records are created through the upload process.

You can use the sample data provided to create records in the text file you wish to upload; see Sample Retail Integration Items Upload Data.

Note:

When populating the RI Item Upload table:

  • the information should be entered in all upper case values.
  • If you wish to leave any field in the upload file blank, pass a space in an alphanumeric field and a 0 in a numeric so that the file can be processed without errors. Leaving a field with no space or 0 is interpreted as null in the database and causes errors.
  • selecting Accept at the Copy Item to Company Window in Working with Existing Items (MITM).

Once you have passed item upload records from your retail master system to the RI Item Upload table, you process the table by selecting Process at the Work with Retail Item Upload Screen. If you are copying items, the system submits the process automatically.

RMFCS integration: The item import from Oracle Retail Merchandising Foundation Cloud Service (RMFCS) also creates records in the RI Item Upload table; however, the RMFCS import uses a different set of files than that described in Retail Integration (External System into Order Management System) Overview and Setup to populate the RI Item Upload table, and a different periodic function. See Oracle Retail Merchandising Foundation Cloud Service (RMFCS) and Oracle Retail Pricing Cloud Service (RPCS) Integration for more information.

What type of information gets passed to the RI Item Upload table? The type of information in each RI Item Upload record is indicated by its record type:

  • 01 = Item/SKU
  • 03 = Item Offer
  • 04 = SKU Offer
  • 05 = Item Price
  • 06 = SKU Price
  • 07 = Vendor Item
  • 08 = Item UPC
  • 09 = Item Coordinate

Based on the record type, the system reads information related to that type and ignores any other information defined for the record. For example, when you are creating an item, the system does not check whether there is information in the record related to SKU price or item UPC.

Request types: These codes indicate whether the system creates or maintains the related information in Order Management System. Request types are:

  • A = Add record; however, if the system finds a record in the Order Management System database that matches the information in the RI Item Upload record, the system changes the Request type to C and updates the existing record.
  • C = Change record; however, if the system cannot find a record in the Order Management System database that matches the information in the RI Item Upload record, the system changes the Request type to A and creates a new record.
  • Blank = The system compares the information in the RI Item Upload record to the existing records in the Order Management System database.

    • If the system cannot match the RI Item Upload record to an existing record in the Order Management System database, the system considers the RI Item Upload record an add request.

    • If the system can match the RI Item Upload record to an existing record in the Order Management System database, the system considers the RI Item Upload record a change request.

Key type: IT (item/SKU) indicates the system identifies the item and SKU associated with a record in the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP) using the Item and SKU passed in the record.

RI Item Upload Translation Program

The system calls the RI Item Upload translation program when you select Process File at the Work with Retail Item Upload Screen. The system also automatically calls this translation program when you select Accept at the Copy Item to Company Window in Working with Existing Items (MITM).

The RMFCS integration also uses this program. See Oracle Retail Merchandising Foundation Cloud Service (RMFCS) and Oracle Retail Pricing Cloud Service (RPCS) Integration for more information.

Scheduling the RI Item Upload process: You can also schedule the RI Item Upload Process to run periodically by setting up the RIUPLD function using the PFR0084 program. See Scheduling Jobs for background.

The RI Item Upload translation program:

# Step

1.

Creates the active procedure RI ITEM UPLOAD.

See Ending the RI Item Upload Process Before It Completes if you need to end the RI Item Upload program before it is finished.

2.

Processes records in the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP) in record type sequence:

1. Process 01 Item/SKU records.

2. Process 03 Item Offer records.

3. Process 04 SKU Offer records.

4. Process 05 Item Price records.

5. Process 06 SKU Price records.

6. Process 07 Vendor Item records.

7. Process 08 Item UPC records.

8. Process 09 Item Coordinate records.

If there are any records in I (In Process) status, changes their status to U (Unprocesssed). Order Management System only selects records to process that are in a U or blank (Unprocessed) or E (Error) status.

When Order Management System selects a record type to process, the system updates the status of all records with this record type to B (Batch Selected) in order to prevent other activity against this set of records.

3.

For the record type selected to process, Order Management System processes records in batches of 1000 records, based on:

  • Earliest date and time.
  • If there are both add records and change records, process the add records first.

When Order Management System processes a batch of 1000 records, the system updates the status of the records in the batch to I (In Process).

4.

For each record in the selected batch, identifies the Item and SKU defined for the item upload record.

5.

Checks for duplicate records in the selected batch of records.

6.

The system places any RI item upload record that fails one or more of the above edits in an error (E) status in the RI Item Upload table and in the RI Item Upload Error table. These records in error also print on the Item Upload Error Report. See Work with Retail Item Upload Errors Screen.

RI Item Upload Edit Program

Once the RI Item Upload Translation Program identifies the item/SKU associated with the item upload record the system calls the RI Item Upload Edit Program. This edit program checks for invalid field values or combinations in the RI item upload record. If the record passes all validations, the edit program:

# Step

1.

Checks the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU to determine whether to default values to any blank fields in the RI item upload record.

The system checks the **DFLT ITEM only for add and change item upload records for record type 01 (item/SKU information). See **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU.

2.

Checks the **DFTCHG Item/SKU to determine whether to update an existing item/SKU with the values in the RI item upload record.

The system checks the **DFT CHG item only for change item upload records for record type 01 (item/SKU information). See **DFTCHG Item/SKU.

Note:

If the **DFT CHG item has a value, the system does not validate that field in the RI item upload record.

3.

Creates or maintains the item/SKU, based on the Request Type for the item upload record.

If the Auto-Generate Item Keywords from Description (F79) system control value is selected, the system also creates keywords for items created through the RI Item Upload process for record type 01 Item/SKU.

4.

Changes the status of the item upload records to P (Processed).

5.

If the Create Generic Item Download Trigger Records (I15) system control value is selected, the system submits the secondary job RISECU to create item download triggers and changes the status of the item upload records to S (Other Updates).

6.

Deletes the RI item upload record from the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP).

7.

If the RI item upload record fails any validation, the edit program:

  • Changes the status of the RI item upload record to E (Error) and does not delete the record from the RI Item Upload table.
  • Creates a record in the RI Item Upload Error table which displays the reason(s) why the record failed.

8.

Once RI item upload records are processed, the records are listed on:

Retail Item Upload Email

If a valid email is defined in the Email address field for the user that submitted the RI Item Upload Program, the system sends a Retail Item Upload email to the user’s email address when the job completes indicating whether all records were processed successfully or whether any records contain errors.

Sample successful email: A sample of the retail item upload email that is generated when all of the records processed successfully is displayed below.

Address information:

From: OROMS@EXAMPLE.com

To: Thomas Russell

Subject: Retail Item Upload finished successfully

System generated text: The Retail Item Upload has run successfully with no errors.

Sample error email: A sample of the retail item upload email that is generated when one or more records contain errors is displayed below.

Address information:

From: OROMS@EXAMPLE.com

To: Thomas Russell

Subject: Retail Item Upload finished with errors

System generated text: The Retail Item Upload has run successfully but errors exist. Please review reports produced for more information.

You can use the Item Upload Error Report to review the item upload records that failed one or more edits and remain in the RI Item Upload table.

Ending the RI Item Upload Process Before It Completes

If you need to end the RI Item Upload program before it is finished (if, for example, you are processing a large number of RI item upload records), you can terminate the job by deleting the RI ITEM UPLOAD active procedure in the Purging Active Procedures (MACP) menu option.

When you delete the RI ITEM UPLOAD active procedure, the system:

  1. Finishes processing the current batch of 1000 RI Item Upload records.
  2. Terminates the RI Item Upload job.
  3. If the Create Generic Item Download Trigger Records (I15) system control value is selected, the system submits the secondary job RISECU for the RI Item Upload records that finished processing. The system changes the status of these item upload records to S (Other Updates). Once the RISECU job ends, the system deletes these RI item upload records from the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP). Note: You can submit another RI Item Upload process while the RISECU job is running.
  4. Updates the status of any remaining records in a B (Batch Selected) status to U (Unprocessed).
  5. Leaves any remaining unprocessed records until the next time you run the RI Item Upload program.

Tables Updated by the RI Item Upload

For every RI item upload record that you pass to the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP), you can create, change or delete primary item and SKU values in these tables:

  • Item
  • SKU
  • Vendor Item
  • Item/Offer
  • SKU/Offer
  • Item Price
  • SKU Price
  • Item UPC
  • Item Coordinate

Using the RI item upload, you can create values for secondary, supporting item/SKU tables. You can only create secondary table values; the system does not allow you to change already existing values. You can create values in these secondary item/SKU-related tables:

  • SKU Element 1
  • SKU Element 2
  • SKU Element 3
  • Item Warehouse
  • Item Location
  • Item Class
  • Item Status
  • Buyer
  • L/S Department
  • L/S Class
  • L/S Division
  • Retail Class
  • Item Category

RI item upload processing will not create records in the more complex or Order Management System-specific secondary tables. You must manually create these values before passing them in a retail item upload request. For example, you cannot create ship vias, warehouses, locations, drop points, seasons, entities, vendors, sold out controls, and any other table not specifically mentioned above using the item upload.

RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP)

The values you enter in the key type fields determine the fields in the RI item upload record for which you must enter a value. See:

**DFLT ITEM and **DFTCHG: You can create the following items for the system to consider when uploading RI item upload records for record type 01 (item/SKU information).

  • **DFLT ITEM: create this item to define the values to default to add or change item upload records; see **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU.
  • **DFTCHG: create this item to determine when the system updates an existing item/SKU with the values defined in a change item upload record; see **DFTCHG Item/SKU.

Note:

You are not required to create the **DFLT ITEM item or **DFTCHG item, however it is recommended.

This table indicates the name of the field in the RI Item Upload table and a description of the field.

Populating the RI Item Upload table: Create an RI Item Upload text file that contains the records you wish to upload. Run the UPRITEM Upload Retail Item File (Program name PFR0134, Parameter RIIUPP) periodic function or use the Work with File Uploads (WUPL) menu option to upload the records in the text file to the RI Item Upload table. You can use the sample data provided to create records in the text file you wish to upload; see Sample Retail Integration Items Upload Data.

When populating the RI Item Upload table, the information should be entered in all upper case.

RMFCS integration: See RMFCS to OMS Mapping for information on how the data from RMFCS maps to Order Management System.

Field Description
  Keys to the table: fields that are required for all record types

You must enter a value in these key fields. The values you enter for these keys determine:

  • What information gets passed to Order Management System.
  • Whether the RI item upload program creates or changes an item.
  • How the RI item upload program identifies the Order Management System item associated with the item upload record.

See Basic errors and Item errors.

Company

A code that represents the company to which you wish to upload retail item/SKU information. Company codes are defined in and validated against the Company table.

Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Record Created Date

The date you create the RI item upload record.

Note:

If you leave this field blank and select Change for the RI item upload record at the Work with Retail Item Upload Screen, you advance to an E2 Key Screen and will not be able to correct any errors in the record.

Numeric, 7 positions (CYYMMDD format); required.
Record Created Time

The time you create the item upload record.

Note:

If you leave this field blank and select Change for the RI item upload record at the Work with Retail Item Upload Screen, you advance to an E2 Key Screen and will not be able to correct any errors in the record.

Numeric, 6 positions (HHMMSS format), required.
Record Type

A code that defines the item/SKU information you want to add or change.

Valid values are:

  • 01 = Item/SKU
  • 03 = Item Offer
  • 04 = SKU Offer
  • 05 = Item Price
  • 06 = SKU Price
  • 07 = Vendor Item
  • 08 = Item UPC
  • 09 = Item Coordinate

Note:

You must enter the leading 0 in this field. For example, you must pass 01 and not just 1.

The record type determines which fields the system considers in the RI item upload record. For example, if you want to change a SKU’s price information, enter an 06 record type. Even if all the fields in the RI item upload record are populated for that SKU, the system only looks at information in the nine SKU price fields.

See the following for the fields and descriptions associated with each record type:

Note:

When passing information to Order Management System, you must build upon values passed in this record type. For example, you cannot create a vendor item (07 record type) until you have first created the item/SKU (01 record type).
  **DFLT ITEM and **DFTCHG

The **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU allows you to default values to blank fields in an add or change RI item upload record for an item/SKU record type. The **DFTCHG Item/SKU determines if the system updates an existing item with the values defined in a change RI item upload record for an item/SKU record type. See Creating Default and Change Item/SKU Upload Values: **DFLT ITEM and **DFTCHG.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; required.
Request Type

A code that defines whether the upload program creates or maintains item/SKU information.

Valid values are:

  • A = Add record; however, if the system finds a record in the Order Management System database that matches the information in the RI Item Upload record, the system changes the Request type to C and updates the existing record.
  • C = Change record; however, if the system cannot find a record in the Order Management System database that matches the information in the RI Item Upload record, the system changes the Request type to A and creates a new record.
  • Blank = The system compares the information in the RI Item Upload record to the existing records in the Order Management System database.
  • If the system cannot match the RI Item Upload record to an existing record in the Order Management System database, the system considers the RI Item Upload record an add request.
  • If the system can match the RI Item Upload record to an existing record in the Order Management System database, the system considers the RI Item Upload record a change request.
  Add Request Type (A)

You can pass numerous add requests for the same item/SKU with these record types:

  • 03 (item offer)
  • 04 (SKU offer)
  • 05 (item price)
  • 06 (SKU price)
  • 07 (vendor item)
  • 08 (UPC record type)
  • 09 (item coordinate)

You can pass multiple add requests for an existing item (record type 01) as long as you are creating a new SKU; see Record Type.

If you pass blank values for an item/SKU (01 record type), the system defaults values based on the **DFLT ITEM and system control values; see **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU.

  Change Request Type (C)

You can pass multiple change requests for all record types; however, the fields associated with the specified record type are overwritten with the most recent information you pass for that record type.

If you pass blank values for an item/SKU (01 record type), the system defaults values using the **DFLT ITEM and system control values. Also, if a value exists in **DFTCHG, the system does not update the existing item with the upload value; see Creating Default and Change Item/SKU Upload Values: **DFLT ITEM and **DFTCHG.

If you pass blank values for any other record type, the system updates the value for the existing item to blank.

Note:

The system does not update any history records for transactions that occurred prior to the change date.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Sequence #

A unique sequence number assigned to the RI item upload record.

Sequence numbers can be in a random order or sequentially assigned, but they must be unique for each day.

Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Key Type

A code that defines how the system identifies the Order Management System item/SKU associated with a change item upload record.

IT (Item/SKU) is the only valid key type and indicates the upload record contains the item code, and optionally SKU code, that matches a Order Management System item/SKU. If the item contains SKUs and you do not enter a SKU code, the system maintains the base item.

Note:

If you pass an invalid key type for an 01 Item/SKU record type, the system automatically corrects it.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; required.
Order Management System values  
Item

A user-defined code that represents a unit of inventory.

For an add request for an 01 Record Type, you must pass an item code unless you have the Auto Assign Item # (D46) system control value selected.

Note:

The item code you enter must identically match an item in Order Management System for the system to identify the item associated with a change item upload record.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.
SKU

The unique attributes of an item, such as color, size, and style.

Does not include distinct fields for split SKU elements; therefore, you must count positions and enter the SKU element in the respective place on the field. Spacing is as follows:

  1. SKU Element 1 = spaces 1-4
  2. SKU Element 2 = spaces 6-9
  3. SKU Element 3 = spaces 11-14

Alphanumeric, 14 positions; required if the Allow SKUs field is selected.

Status

A system-generated code that represents the record’s status in the RI Item Upload table.

Valid values are:

  • U or blank = Unprocessed
  • B = Batch Selected
  • I = In Process
  • S = Other Updates
  • P = Processed
  • E = Error
  • D = Delete Pending

When you initially upload records to the RI Item Upload table, the unprocessed records display on the Work with Retail Item Upload Screen with a blank Sts (Status) field. When you select Process File to process and edit the item upload records, the system updates all records with the appropriate status. Only records in E status remain visible at the Work with Retail Item Upload Screen so that you can correct them.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Processed Date

The date the item upload record was processed. This date is used to update the Created date and the Last change date in the Item table. This date is visible as the Last chg date (Last change date) field in Creating and Maintaining Items (MITM).

Numeric, 7 positions (CYYMMDD format); optional.
Processed Time

The time the item upload record was processed. This time is used to update the Created time and Maintained time in the Item table.

Numeric, 6 positions (HHMMSS format); optional.
Fields for 01 Item/SKU record type

See Basic errors, Item errors, and SKU errors.

Note:

This table currently does not contain the External info field; however, you can update this field on the Change Item screen.
Allow SKUs

Indicates whether the item is available in various styles, such as color, size, etc.

Valid values are:

  • Y = This item has SKUs associated with it.
  • N = There are no SKUs associated with this item.

Enter Y in this field when you pass an 01 (Item/SKU), 04 (SKU Offer), 06 (SKU Price) or 07 (Vendor Item) Record Type for upload records containing a SKU code.

Does not default from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU. If you leave this field blank, the system looks at the SKU field; if the SKU field contains a value, the system updates this flag to Y; if the SKU field does not contain a value, the system updates this flag to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Cub val

The cubic volume of the item. Controls the number of units of the item that can fit into a carton.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 1-place decimal; optional.
Drop Ship

Indicates whether you ship the item from your warehouse, or have your vendor ship it to the customer directly.

Valid values are:

  • Y = When a customer orders the item, you order the item from your vendor and the vendor ships it directly to your customer.
  • N = You ship the item from your warehouse.

If you leave this field blank, it defaults from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU. If the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU does not exist, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Height

The height measurement for an item. The Height, Length, and Width values determine the cubic volume of an item. Can be entered in feet or centimeters, or any other measurement as long as it is consistent.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Kit Type

Defines the type of kit or set functionality represented by this item.

Valid values:

  • S = Set
  • F = Finished goods
  • V = Variable set
  • Blank = none of the above

Note:

You cannot link set component items to the main set item through the item upload; you must do this within Order Management System after you create the item/SKU records.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Length

The length measurement for an item. The Height, Length, and Width values determine the cubic volume of an item. Can be entered in feet or centimeters, or any other measurement as long as it is consistent.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Long SKU Style

A user-defined field representing the long SKU style defined for the item.

If the Require L/S Style (I94) system control value is selected, the system requires a long SKU style when creating or updating a SKU and validates that the long SKU style code defined at the item level and SKU level are both unique values.

Note:

If the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected, the system ignores the setting of the Require L/S Style (I94) system control value. In this situation, the system requires a long SKU style when creating or updating an item, but it does not have to be unique.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; required if SCV H26 or SCV I94 is selected.

Retail Style #

A user-defined code used to identify the item.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
Long SKU Vendor

A user-defined field representing the long SKU vendor for the item/SKU.

Alphanumeric, 7 positions; optional.
Standard Cost

The standard cost of the item. This is the cost that appears in the Default cost field in the Item table.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Non-Inventory

Indicates whether inventory levels are maintained for the item.

  1. Y = This is a non-inventory item.
  2. N = This is a regular item that will be tracked.

If you leave this field blank, it defaults from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU. If the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU does not exist, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Pieces Per Case

The system uses this value to determine the number of units that fit in a case when suggesting location placement.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Selling Qty

The selling quantity defines the required order quantity (or multiple of) for this item. For example, an item may be stocked in single units, but must be sold in quantities of 6 (or 12, or 18, etc.).

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Selling Weight

Used to calculate the freight charge on an item when the Freight method on the order is By Item or Flat Rt/Item.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 3-place decimal; optional.
Serial # Tracking

This field is not implemented; enter N in this field.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Ship Alone

Indicates how to ship this item.

Valid value is:

S = This item must ship by itself, and each unit prints on its own pick slip.

Blank = This item can ship with other items.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Ship Weight

The actual shipping weight of the item.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 3-place decimal; optional.
User Field 1

An informational field you can use according to your organization's specific requirements.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
User Field 2

An informational field you can use according to your organization’s specific requirements.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
User Field 3

An informational field you can use according to your organization’s specific requirements.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
User Field 4

An informational field you can use according to your organization’s specific requirements.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Width

The width measurement for an item. The Height, Length, and Width values determine the cubic volume of an item. Can be entered in feet or centimeters, or any other measurement as long as it is consistent.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Allow % discount?

Determines whether certain discounts can be applied to the item.

  • Y = This item is discountable.
  • N = This item is not discountable.

If you leave this field blank, it defaults from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU. If the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU does not exist, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Oversize

Determines whether this item is considered an oversized item.

  • Y = This is an oversized item.
  • N = This is not an oversized item.

If you leave this field blank, it defaults from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU. If the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU does not exist, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Description (Item description)

The description of the item. Does not default from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU.

Note:

Although you can create an item with a description of up to 120 positions, you cannot save a record at the Change Item Upload - Item/SKU Screens if the description exceeds 40 positions.

Alphanumeric, 120 positions; required.
Second Language Desc

The second language description for the item.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.
Exclude From Flex Pay

Determines whether this item is excluded from deferred and installment payment plans.

Valid values are:

  • Y = Exclude this item from deferred and installment payment plans.
  • N = Do not exclude this item from deferred and installment payment plans.

If you leave this field blank, it defaults from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU. If the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU does not exist, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Royalty

Indicates whether sales of the item require royalty payments to an author or owner, and is used for query and reporting purposes only. Valid values are:

  1. Y = This is a royalty item.
  2. N = This is not a royalty item.

If you leave this field blank, it defaults from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU. If the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU does not exist, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Membership

Indicates that the item represents a membership program, which you can use to generate periodic orders to a customer.

Valid values are:

  • Y = This is a membership item.
  • N = This is not a membership item.

If you leave this field blank, it defaults from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU. If the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU does not exist, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Qty Threshold

You can use this field to indicate when to trigger an automatic download of item availability information to an extract table; from there, the information is available to a web storefront if you use the E-Commerce Interface. This download allows you to display an item’s availability status to web customers if your web storefront supports it.

Note:

Although this field has a 9.0 length in the RI Item Upload table, you can only pass a 5-position value. If you pass more than 5 numbers, the edit program displays an error message: Quantity must be limited to 99999.

Numeric, 9 positions; optional.
SVC type

A code that indicates the item is a stored value card, and whether the stored value card is a physical or virtual card.

  • blank (default) = The item is not a stored value card.
  • P = The item is a physical stored value card.
  • E = The item is a physical stored value card and, as soon as the stored value card is processed through billing, the system sends an email notification to the recipient card holder on the order, notifying the customer that a stored value card has been purchased and is in the process of being delivered.
  • V = The item is a virtual (non-physical) stored value card.

See Creating a Stored Value Card Item for more information on setting up a stored value card item.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Buyer

The person who is authorized to make purchases for your company.

Buyer codes are defined in and validated against the Buyer table; see Working with Buyers (WBUY).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
CTN ID # (SKU) (Carton ID)

The type of carton in which this item must be shipped.

Note:

This field is not currently implemented.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.

Inventory Value G/L #

This field is not implemented.

Numeric, 8 positions; optional.

Code (Hazard code)

A user-defined code used to categorize an item as a hazardous material that requires special storage and/or handling. Validated against the Item Hazard table; see Working with Hazardous Item Codes (WHAZ).

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Item Class

A user-defined code that identifies a group of items.

This code is validated against the Item Class table; see Working with Item Classes (WICL).

An item class code is required if the Require Item Class in Work with Items (F06) system control value is selected.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required if SCV F06 is selected.
SKU Group

A code that represents a group of common characteristics of a SKU item.

SKU Group codes are defined in and validated against the SKU Group table; see Working with SKU Groups (WISG).

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
STS (Status)

A code that represents an item's status, such as obsolete, discontinued, etc. This information is used for inventory reporting purposes, to assign a future arrival date, or to prevent the Item Selection screen from listing the item. See Working with Item Status (WIST) for background.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Location Class

A code that represents a location type, such as caged area, etc.

Validated against the location class table; see Creating and Maintaining Location Classes (WLCL).

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Class (Long SKU class)

A code to group items into classes for reporting purposes.

Required if the Use Retail Integration (H26) or Require L/S Class (I93) system control value is selected.

Long SKU Class

If the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is unselected, the system validates this field against the Long SKU Class table. Long SKU classes have only one value to an organization. For example, Long SKU Class 15 may be Men’s Shoes, and will remain Men’s Shoes regardless of the department. For more information see Working with Long SKU Classes (WLSC).

Retail Class

If the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected, the system validates this field against the Retail Class table instead of the Long SKU Class table.

Long SKU classes that are linked to long SKU departments are called retail classes. Retail classes are department specific. For example, Retail Class 10 may be Ties within Department 20 (Men’s Apparel), but within Department 30 (Women’s Apparel) Retail Class 10 may be Slacks. See the Work with Retail Class Screen.

If you pass a new retail class code to Order Management System, the system reads the long SKU department code (whether new or existing) with the new retail class code and creates the retail class and description. If you do not pass a long SKU department code and a long SKU department code does not default from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU, the system displays an error message: Long SKU Department required.

If you enter an invalid combination of codes or do not enter a long SKU department code, the system displays an error message: Invalid Long SKU Class/Department combination for item.

If you leave this field blank and a retail class code does not default from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU, the system displays an error message: Item Long SKU Class required.

Numeric, 4 positions; required if SCV H26 or SCV I93 is selected and you are using an 01 record type.

Department (L/S department)

A code used to group items into departments for reporting purposes.

Required if the Use Retail Integration (H26) or Require L/S Department (I92) system control value is selected.

Long SKU departments are defined in and validated against the Long SKU Department table; see Working with Long SKU Departments (WLSD).

When using Retail Integration from an external system into Order Management System, long SKU classes are linked to long SKU departments and become retail classes.

You can pass a new or existing long SKU department code with a new or existing retail class code and the system creates the long SKU department and the associated retail class. If you do not pass a long SKU department code and one does not default, the system displays an error message: Long SKU Department required.

 

If you enter an invalid combination of codes or do not enter a long SKU department code, the system displays an error message: Invalid Long SKU Class/Department combination for item.

If the Require Long SKU Division with Long SKU Department (E85) system control value is selected, you must enter a value in the L/S Division field or use a L/S department code that already has a L/S division code assigned to it. If the system creates the long SKU department, the system will also create the long SKU division if it does not already exist. However, if the long SKU department does not need to be created, the system will not create the long SKU division if it does not already exist.

Numeric, 4 positions; required if SCV H26 or SCV I92 is selected and you are using an 01 record type.

L/S Division

A code that represents a long SKU division. L/S divisions are used in conjunction with L/S departments and L/S classes for reporting purposes and to create a company or entity hierarchy. Long SKU division codes are defined in and validated against the L/S Division table.

If the Require Long SKU Division with Long SKU Department (E85) system control value is selected, you must specify a long SKU division when the long SKU department is either new, or does not have a L/S division associated with it. If the long L/S department already exists and is already assigned a L/S division, you do not need to enter a L/S division code.

If the L/S division is new, the system creates a new code in the L/S Division table, but only if the system is also creating the long SKU department.

Note:

Although the long SKU division field is 4 positions elsewhere, the RI Item Upload table supports just 3 positions.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required if the Require L/S Division with L/S Department (E85) system control value is selected and you are passing a new L/S department value.

UOM (Unit of Measure)

A standard by which an item is sold.

Typical units of measure include:

  • EA = each
  • IN = inches
  • C12 = case of 12

Validated against the Unit of Measure table (see Working with Units of Measure (WUOM)).

If you leave this field blank, defaults from the Default Item Unit of Measure (B33) system control value.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Vendor #

A code that defines the vendor or supplier of an item.

Vendor codes are defined in and validated against the Vendor table; see Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Ship Via Code

A code that represents the carrier that must be used when shipping this item.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Manufacturer Vendor

The vendor who manufactured the item.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Entity Number

A business unit within your company that is held accountable for sales performance; for example, mail order, retail, or e-commerce.

If the system control value Require Entity in Item File (G44) is selected, you must enter an entity code for each item you set up; entity codes for items and SKUs are defined at the item level. Informational only.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Season

Defines the season associated with this item, such as spring.

Season codes are defined in and validated against the Season table; see Working with Season Codes (WSEA).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Collating Seq #

The sequence number used to determine the order in which SKUs sort. You can use the sort sequence to display SKUs in a different order, such as by size, rather than alphanumerically by SKU code.

Required if the Require Sort Sequence Number in the SKU File (F23) system control value is selected.

See SKU Sort Sequence Numbers for an overview.

Numeric, 5 positions; required if the Require Sort Sequence Number system control value is selected.
Compatibility

A user-defined code assigned to an item/SKU.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
SKU Last purchase cost

The cost of the item from the most recent purchase order, including any discounts, surcharges, or additional charges.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Cub val (Cubing value)

The cubic volume of the SKU, which overrides the cubic volume defined at the base item level.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 1-place decimal; optional.
SKU Description

The description of the SKU element. If no value is passed, the SKU description will be blank.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.
Subscription

Indicates whether the item is a subscription item.

Valid values are:

  1. Y = Item is a subscription item.
  2. N = Item is not a subscription item.

If you leave this field blank, it defaults from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU If the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU does not exist, the system defaults this field to N.

If you identify an item as a subscription item, you must:

  1. enter Y in the Non-Inventory field to indicate that inventory levels are not maintained for the subscription item and that customer will be billed (the full price of the subscription) immediately through Express Billing.
  2. create a record for the subscription in the Item Subscriptions table to define the particulars of the subscription, such as the current issue number, length of subscription (number of intervals and number of days between issues).

See Working with Item Subscriptions (WISB).

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Height Override

The height measurement for a SKU. The Height, Length, and Width values are used to determine the cubic volume of an item/SKU. You can enter the height in feet or centimeters, or any other measurement as long as it is consistent.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Length Override

The length measurement for a SKU. The Height, Length, and Width values are used to determine the cubic volume of an item/SKU. You can enter this value in feet or centimeters, or any other measurement as long as it is consistent.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
List Price

The system uses this price when you process item to item transfers (inventory transaction code = G).

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional (required if you process item to item transfers).
Long SKU Color

A code, typically used in a retail environment, that represents the color portion of the long SKU code. Used for reporting purposes.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Long SKU Size

A code, typically used in a retail environment, that represents the size portion of the long SKU code. Used for reporting purposes.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Long SKU Width

A code, typically used in a retail environment, that represents the width portion of the Long SKU code. Used for reporting purposes.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Lowest Price

The lowest recommended sale price for the item/SKU; however, the item/SKU can be sold at a lower price.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Max Qty for Location

The SKU's recommended maximum number of units to be stored in the primary pick location.

The primary pick location refers to the code that you pass in the Location field.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Max Qty for Warehouse

The SKU's recommended maximum number of units for the warehouse specified in the Whs (Warehouse) field.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Min Qty for Location

The SKU's recommended minimum quantity to be stored in the primary pick location.

The primary pick location refers to the code that you pass in the Location field.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Min Qty for Warehouse

The SKU's recommended minimum number of units for the warehouse specified in the Whs (Warehouse) field.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
SKU Gift Certificate

This field is not implemented; enter N for this field.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Reserve Qty Limit

If the order quantity exceeds this amount, the system will not reserve the item/SKU and will display the Backorder Reason.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Restrict Orders

Indicates whether you can accept an order for this item/SKU in Order Entry and whether demand is captured.

  • Y = The operator cannot accept an order for this item/SKU.
  • N = The operator can accept an order for this item/SKU.

If you leave this field blank, it defaults from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU. If the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU does not exist, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Retail Ref #

Represents the retail reference or alternate product number. You can use this value to cross-reference an item/SKU to an external system, such as through the Generic Inventory Transaction Upload or the Generic Order Interface (Order API).

For more information see the Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1).

Numeric, 15 positions; optional.
Selling Weight Override

The system uses this value to calculate the freight charge on a SKU when the Freight method on the order is By Item or Flat Rt/Item. Overrides the selling weight, if any, defined at the base item level.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 3-place decimal; optional.
Short SKU

A unique number that the system assigns to all items and SKUs unless you pass a value for the item/SKU in the item upload.

  • For add 01 (Item/SKU) records, leave this field blank to have the system assign a unique short SKU number to the item/SKU. The system does not default the short SKU defined for the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU to a new item/SKU.
  • For change 01 (Item/SKU) records, create the **DFTCHG Item/SKU so that existing items/SKUs retain their assigned short SKU number; however, even if you pass a short SKU number for a change 01 record, the system retains the existing short SKU number that is assigned to the item/SKU.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
User field 1

An informational field you can use according to your organization's specific requirements.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
User field 2

An informational field you can use according to your organization’s specific requirements.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
User field 3

An informational field you can use according to your organization’s specific requirements.

Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Weight Override

The actual shipping weight of the SKU. The system may use this value to calculate carton weights and to determine your shipping charges if you perform manual confirmation and use cubing.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 3-place decimal; optional.
Width Override

The width measurement for an SKU. The Height, Length, and Width values are used to determine the cubic volume of an item/SKU. You can enter this value in feet or centimeters, or any other measurement as long as it is consistent.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Sale Credit Flag

Not implemented.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Harmonize Code

A code that prints on customs documents for international shipments.

Alphanumeric, 16 positions; optional.
Coord group (Coordinate group items?)

A code that may be assigned to item/SKUs to ensure that certain item/SKUs ship together when ordered together.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Average Cost

A method to determine the cost of an item. Not currently implemented.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
FIFO Cost

A method to determine the cost of an item. Not currently implemented.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
LIFO Cost

A method to determine the cost of an item. Not currently implemented.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Standard Cost

The defined cost of the item. The system does not calculate a new standard cost automatically.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Second language description

Not currently implemented.

Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.
VAT exempt flag

Indicates if the item is exempt from VAT.

  • Y = The item is exempt from VAT.
  • N = The item is not exempt from VAT.

If you leave this field blank, it defaults from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU. If the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU does not exist, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Second Compatibility

A user-defined code assigned to the item.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Hidden Tax Amount

The amount to include in the Hidden tax field for an item subject to VAT.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Hidden Tax Percent

The percentage to use when calculating hidden tax for an item subject to VAT. See How Hidden Tax is Calculated by Percentage for more information.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Suppress B/O Card

Indicates whether to produce a backorder card for the SKU.

Valid values are:

  • Y = Suppress normal backorder card generation for this item.
  • N = Do not suppress normal backorder card generation.

If you leave this field blank, the system defaults this value from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU. If the **DFLT ITEM (or NA SKU for the **DFLT ITEM) does not exist, the system defaults this value from the Unconditional Suppression of Backorder Card (F19) system control value. If this system control value is blank, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Projected Returns

The number of units you expect to receive in returns for the item.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
User Field 4

An informational field you can use according to your organization's specific requirements.

Alphanumeric, 5 positions; optional.
User Field 5

An informational field you can use according to your organization’s specific requirements.

Alphanumeric, 5 positions; optional.
Returnable

Indicates whether the item is eligible for return; informational only. Valid values are:

  • Y = The item is eligible for return
  • N (default) = This item is not eligible for return

If you leave this field blank, it defaults from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU. If the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU does not exist, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Retail X-Ref #

Represents the UPC (Universal Product Code) or Retail Reference number for the SKU. Used for informational purposes. If you want the system to create an item UPC code, you must enter values in the Fields for 08 Item UPC record type.

Numeric, 10 positions; optional.
L/S Style

The long SKU style defined for the SKU.

If the Require L/S Style (I94) system control value is selected, the system requires a long SKU style when creating or updating a SKU and validates that the long SKU style code defined at the item level and SKU level are both unique values.

Note:

If the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected, the system ignores the setting of the Require L/S Style (I94) system control value. In this situation, the system requires a long SKU style when creating or updating an item, but it does not have to be unique.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
L/S Vendor

A user-defined field that represents the long SKU vendor for the item/SKU.

Alphanumeric, 7 positions; optional.
Excl Store Restock

This field is not implemented; enter N in this field.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Original Retail Price

The original price of the item at the retail store.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
GTIN

Not currently implemented.

Numeric, 14 positions; optional.
Commodity Code

Not currently implemented.

Numeric, 8 positions; optional.
ABC Code

This field is not implemented.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Carton ID #

The type of carton in which this item must ship.

Note:

This field is not currently implemented.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Freq Code (Frequency code)

This code classifies the performance of a SKU based on the number of picks generated for the SKU over a month's time.

Note:

This field is not currently implemented.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Whs (Warehouse)

A code that represents a warehouse where this item is stocked.

Warehouse codes are defined in and validated against the Warehouse table. See Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS).

If the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU does not exist and you do not define a valid warehouse, the system defaults the warehouse defined in the Default Warehouse (A04) system control value.

Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Location

A code that represents an area within the warehouse that contains the item/SKU. Sometimes referred to as the “primary primary.” Validated against the Location table.

Alphanumeric, 7 positions; optional.
Soldout control code

A code that represents how you determine when an item/SKU is soldout.

You can define a value in the Default Soldout Control Code (D72) system control value to default automatically when you create items and SKUs; however, you can override this value.

See Working with Soldout Controls (WSLD).

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
UOM Type

A standard by which an item/SKU is sold.

Validated against the Unit of Measure table (see Working with Units of Measure (WUOM)).

Defaults from the Default Item Unit of Measure (B33) system control value if you have not defined a default value in the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU or the **DFLT ITEM does not exist.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

SEO Code

SKU element 1.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.

SEW Code

SKU element 2.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.

SET Code

SKU element 3.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.

Status

A code that represents a SKU's status, such as obsolete, discontinued, sold out, etc. This information is used for inventory reporting purposes. The status defined at the SKU level overrides the status defined at the base item level. See Working with Item Status (WIST) for background.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Category

A code assigned to the SKU to classify and group like item/SKUs for use in the Item Relationships function. Validated against the Item Category table; see Working with Item Category Codes (WITG).

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Prep Code

A code used to indicate any special preparation or handling required for the SKU. Informational only.

Note:

This field is not currently implemented.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Country of Origin

A code representing the country where the SKU originated.

Country codes are defined in and validated against the Country table; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

L/S Class

A code to group items into classes for reporting purposes. Long SKU classes are defined in and validated against the Long SKU Class table; see Working with Long SKU Classes (WLSC).

If the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected, long SKU classes are linked to long SKU departments and are called retail classes. Retail classes are department specific whereas regular long SKU classes are unique and remain constant across departments. For this reason, when the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected, you can only enter a retail class in this field that is assigned to the base item’s long SKU department. If you enter a long SKU class that is not linked to the base item’s long SKU department, the system will not let you proceed and displays an error message: L/S Class (xxxx) was not found in L/S Department (xx).

Retail classes are defined in and validated against the Retail Class table; see the Work with Retail Class Screen for more information.

Numeric, 4 positions; optional.
Zone Reservation

A code assigned to weather-sensitive items/SKUs such as plant stock to insure that the items will ship to different regions of the country within time windows suited to the regions.

See Shipping Zone Reservation Overview.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
OROB Eligible

Indicates whether to include this item when:

  1. sending item and inventory information from Order Management System to Order Broker through a stored procedure; however, this flag does not control whether to include the item through an API that uses an XML message, such as the Generic Item Download API or the Generic Inventory Download API.

    For more information see the Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1).

  2. sending backordered order lines to the Order Broker for fulfillment. See Order Broker Integration for an overview, and see Rules for Submitting Backorders to Order Broker for more rules that govern eligibility for the Order Broker.

Valid values:

  • Y = Include this item when you use a stored procedure to send item and inventory information to Order Broker; also, the item is eligible to be sent to the Order Broker for fulfillment, provided it meets the other Rules for Submitting Backorders to Order Broker.
  • N = Do not include this item when you use the stored procedure to send item and inventory information to Order Broker; also, the item is not eligible to be sent to the Order Broker for fulfillment.

If you leave this field blank, it defaults from the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU. If the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU does not exist, the system defaults this field to Y.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
ITM Image Link

The URL to the location of the item image on the external image hosting application. No validation. See Item Image/Info Link Screen.

Updates the ITM Image Link field in the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 256 positions; optional.

ITM Info Link

The URL to the location of the item information on the external image hosting application. No validation. See Item Image/Info Link Screen.

Updates the ITM Info Link field in the Item table.

Alphanumeric, 256 positions; optional.

SKU Image Link

The URL to the location of the SKU image on the external image hosting application. No validation. See Item Image/Info Link Screen.

Updates the SKU Image Link field in the SKU table.

Alphanumeric, 256 positions; optional.

SKU Info Link

The URL to the location of the SKU information on the external image hosting application. No validation. See Item Image/Info Link Screen.

Updates the SKU Info Link field in the SKU table.

Alphanumeric, 256 positions; optional.

ITM Tag Type

This field is not implemented.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.

Fields for 03 Item Offer record type

See Item Offer errors.

Offer for Item Offer

The code for the offer (catalog) in which the item/SKU appears. Validated against the Offer table. See Working with Offers (WOFR).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required (if other information is entered).
Cost

Not implemented.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Expected Return Pct

Not implemented.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

G/W Flag

Indicates whether this SKU is eligible for gift wrap.

Valid values:

  1. Y = The item/SKU can be gift wrapped.
  2. N = In this offer, the item/SKU cannot be gift wrapped.

If you leave this field blank, the system defaults Y to this field if the Gift Wrap Default (F07) system control value is selected; otherwise, this field defaults to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

G/W Price

The price for gift wrapping the item. The G/W field must be Y. The gift wrap price will be charged for each unit of this SKU that is gift wrapped.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Page #

Not implemented.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.

Projected Units

Not implemented.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.

S/H Price

The price that will be charged for special handling.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
S/H Flag

Indicates whether this item is eligible for any type of special handling in this offer (such as, monogramming, hemming, etc.).

  • Y = This item is eligible for special handling.
  • N = This item is not eligible for special handling.

If you leave this field blank, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Square Inches

Not implemented.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Freight

The freight amount to be charged for this item/SKU. Multiplied by the quantity ordered to determine the freight charge for this item. Used only if the Freight method field for the Source Code table is set to By Item or Flat Rt/Item.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Hidden Freight

Used only with item/SKU level freight methods, such as: Flat Rt/Item, Flat Rt/Qy, Flat Rt/Itm Src, and By Item.

Hidden freight represents the portion of the item's catalog price that is used for freight.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Spread

Not implemented.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

Volume Discount Y/N

Indicates whether this item is eligible for an end-of-order discount that will be applied when you accept the order during Order Entry.

  • Y = The item/SKU is eligible for the volume discount.
  • N = The item/SKU is not eligible for the volume discount.

If you leave this field blank, the system defaults this field to N.

See Item Volume Discounting.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Coupon Disc %

Represents the amount that is subtracted from the price when the SKU is ordered from this offer.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Coupon Effective Date

The date the coupon is effective until (i.e., the date expires).

Numeric, 7 positions (CYYMMDD format); optional.
Feature/option

Indicates whether the item is considered a featured or optional item in a depiction.

Valid values are:

  • F = Item is the featured item in the depiction
  • O = Item is an optional item in the depiction

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Pickup/new

Indicates whether the item has been carried over from a previous offer or is new to your product offerings.

Valid values are:

  • P = Item is a pickup item, previously sold in an offer
  • N = Item is a new addition to your offer

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Pop Up Message 1-4

For optional message lines.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions each; optional.
Warranty Item?

Indicates whether the item in this offer is a warranty item.

Valid values are:

  • Y = The item in this offer is a warranty item. When an operator adds this item to an order in order entry or order maintenance, the system adds the item to the order at no charge.
  • N = The item in this offer is not a warranty item.

If you leave this field blank, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Require Add Reason

Indicates whether an Order addition reason code is required when the item in this offer is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance.

Valid values are:

  • Y = The item in this offer requires an add reason code when the item is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance.
  • N = The item is this offer does not require an add reason code when the item is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance.

If you leave this field blank, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Curve Code

Not implemented.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.

Add’l chg code

The additional charge code associated with the type of special handling you are offering for the item.

The system validates that the additional charge code is defined as special handling, with a Type of standard or custom; the system handles each type in a different way. See Special Handling Overview for more information.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Add-On Code

Not currently implemented.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Fields for 04 SKU Offer record type

See SKU Offer errors.

Offer for SKU Offer

The code for the offer (catalog) in which the item/SKU appears. Validated against the Offer table. See Working with Offers (WOFR).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required (if other information is entered).
Cost

Not implemented.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Expected Return Pct

Not implemented.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

G/W Flag

Indicates whether this SKU is eligible for gift wrap.

Valid values:

  • Y = The item/SKU can be gift wrapped.
  • N = In this offer, the item/SKU cannot be gift wrapped.

If you leave this field blank, the system defaults Y to this field if the Gift Wrap Default (F07) system control value is selected; otherwise, this field defaults to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Page #

Not implemented.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.

Projected Units

Not implemented.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.

S/H Price

The price that will be charged for special handling.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
S/H Flag

Indicates whether this item is eligible for any type of special handling in this offer (such as, monogramming, hemming, etc.).

  • Y = This item is eligible for special handling.
  • N = This item is not eligible for special handling.

If you leave this field blank, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Square Inches

Not implemented.

Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

G/W Price

The price for gift wrapping the item. The G/W field must be Y. The gift wrap price will be charged for each unit of this SKU that is gift wrapped.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Freight

The freight amount to be charged for this item/SKU. Multiplied by the quantity ordered to determine the freight charge for this item. Used only if the Freight method field for the Source Code table is set to By Item or Flat Rt/Item.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Hidden Freight

Used only with item/SKU level freight methods, such as: Flat Rt/Item, Flat Rt/Qty, Flat Rt/Itm Src, and By Item.

Hidden freight represents the portion of the item's catalog price that is used for freight.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Coupon discount %

Represents the amount that is subtracted from the price when the SKU is ordered from this offer.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Coupon Effective

The date the coupon is effective until (i.e., the date expires).

Numeric, 7 positions (CYYMMDD format); optional.
Volume disc?

Indicates whether this item is eligible for an end-of-order discount that will be applied when you accept the order during Order Entry.

  • Y = The item/SKU is eligible for the volume discount.
  • N = The item/SKU is not eligible for the volume discount.

If you leave this field blank, the system defaults this field to N.

See Item Volume Discounting.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Spread

Not implemented.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

Feature/Option

Indicates whether the item is considered a featured or optional item in a depiction.

Valid values are:

  • F = Item is the featured item in the depiction
  • O = Item is an optional item in the depiction

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Pickup/New

Indicates whether the item has been carried over from a previous offer or is new to your product offerings.

Valid values are:

  • P = Item is a pickup item, previously sold in an offer
  • N = Item is a new addition to your offer

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.
Warranty Item?

Indicates whether the item/SKU in this offer is a warranty item.

Valid values are:

  • Y = The item/SKU in this offer is a warranty item. When an operator adds this item/SKU to an order in order entry or order maintenance, the system adds the item to the order at no charge.
  • N = The item/SKU in this offer is not a warranty item.

If you leave this field blank, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Required Add Reason?

Indicates whether an Order addition reason code is required when the item in this offer is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance.

Valid values are:

  • Y = The item in this offer requires an add reason code when the item is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance.
  • N = The item is this offer does not require an add reason code when the item is added to an order in order entry or order maintenance.

If you leave this field blank, the system defaults this field to N.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Curve Code

Not implemented.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.

Add’l chg

The additional charge code associated with the type of special handling you are offering for the item.

The system validates that the additional charge code is defined as special handling, with a Type of standard or custom; the system handles each type in a different way. See Special Handling Overview for more information.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Add-On Code

Not currently implemented.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Fields for 05 Item Price record type

See Item Price errors.

Offer for Item Price

The code for the offer (catalog) in which the item appears. Validated against the Offer table. See Working with Offers (WOFR).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Effective Date

The date the price or quantity break discount becomes valid.

Numeric, 7 positions (CYYMMDD format); required.
Qty

The amount of an item that the customer must order to receive the discounted (quantity break) price.

Numeric, 7 positions; required.
Associate Price

The price at which the item will be sold in this offer to associate customers.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Price

The price at which the item will be sold in this offer, if no discounts are applied, and the order date is on or after the effective date.

If the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is unselected, you must define a price; if this system control value is selected, you can define a price or tax inclusive price.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required if SCV E70 is unselected.
Price Column

The pricing column associated with the price entered. In the Customer table, you may assign a customer to a pricing column. This means that the customer will be charged the column price, even if the customer does not order the number of units specified for the price break.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Tax Inclusive Associate Price

The price at which the item will be sold in this offer to associate customers on orders subject to VAT.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Tax Incl Price

The price at which the item will be sold in this offer on orders subject to VAT. When an order is subject to VAT, tax does not accumulate in the Tax bucket on the order; instead, the customer pays a tax-inclusive price for the items and VAT is included as a “hidden tax” on the order detail line.

If the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is unselected, you must define a price; if this system control value is selected, you can define a price or tax inclusive price.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
No Charge?

Indicates whether this item/SKU is eligible for any type of special handling in this offer (such as, monogramming, hemming, etc.).

  • Y = The item/SKU is eligible for special handling.
  • N = The item/SKU is not eligible for special handling.

Note:

This field is not currently implemented.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Fields for 06 SKU Price record type

See SKU Price errors.

Offer SKU Price

The code for the offer (catalog) in which the SKU appears. Validated against the Offer table. See Working with Offers (WOFR).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Effective Date

The date the price or quantity break discount becomes valid.

Numeric, 7 positions (CYYMMDD format); required.
SKU Price Qty

The amount of a SKU that the customer must order to receive the discounted (quantity break) price.

Numeric, 7 positions; required.
Associate Price

The price at which the SKU will be sold in this offer to associate customers.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Price

The price at which the SKU will be sold in this offer, if no discounts are applied, and the order date is on or after than the effective date.

If the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is unselected, you must define a price; if this system control value is selected, you can define a price or tax inclusive price.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required if SCV E70 is unselected.
Price Column

The pricing column associated with the price entered. In the Customer table, you may assign a customer to a pricing column. This means that the customer will be charged the column price, even if the customer does not order the number of units specified for the price break.

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Tax Inclusive Associate Price

The price at which the SKU will be sold in this offer to associate customers on orders subject to VAT.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Tax Incl Price

The price at which the SKU will be sold in this offer on orders subject to VAT.

If the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is unselected, you must define a price; if this system control value is selected, you can define a price or tax inclusive price.

Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
No Charge?

Indicates whether this item/SKU is eligible for any type of special handling in this offer (such as, monogramming, hemming, etc.).

  • Y = The item/SKU is eligible for special handling.
  • N = The item/SKU is not eligible for special handling.

Note:

This field is not currently implemented.

Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Fields for 07 Vendor Item record type

See Vendor Item errors.

Vendor Number

A code that defines the supplier of an item. Defined in and validated against the Vendor table. See Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Numeric, 7 positions; required.
Item (Vendor item)

The code you use to identify a vendor item. If an item has SKUs, you must define the vendor item code at the SKU level. If you are creating a vendor item for a SKU, you must specify a Key Type that will be able to identify the SKU in Order Management System. For example, if you enter the RS key type and enter the base item’s retail style number, you must also enter the SKU code of the SKU.

If you are entering a change request, you cannot change the vendor item; instead, you need to create a new record.

Alphanumeric, 20 positions; required.
Cubic Volume

The cubic volume of the item, as defined by the vendor; used for informational purposes only.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the item, as defined by the vendor.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Lead Days

The number of days it takes a vendor to deliver this item when it is ordered through a purchase order.

Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Message Line 1-3

An informational message that you can use for reporting purposes. Up to 3 lines of messages are available for free-form text, such as special packing instructions.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions (each line); optional.
Min Qty

The minimum unit quantity of merchandise you are required to order from the vendor.

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Price

Represents the vendor's list price for this item.

Numeric,13 positions with a 4-place decimal; optional.
Ship Weight

The shipping weight of the item, as defined by the vendor.

Numeric, 7 positions with a 3-place decimal; optional.
Vendor ord qty multiple

The number of units by which your order quantity must be divisible when you order this item from this vendor.

Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Ship Via

A code that represents the carrier used when shipping this item to your company. If you pass a vendor item PO ship via code, it defaults on a vendor item purchase order line automatically, but you can override it. Validated against the PO Ship Via table.

Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
UOM Type (SKU)

The vendor's Unit of measure for an item (e.g. C12 = case of 12, GRS = gross). The system validates this unit of measure against the Unit of Measure table.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Country of Origin

A code representing the country where the vendor item originated.

Country codes are defined in and validated against the Country table; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY).

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

Fields for 08 Item UPC record type

See Item UPC errors.

UPC Type

The type of UPC code. Informational only.

Valid values are:

  • E13 = EAN-13, indicating a 13 position UPC code; however Order Management System does not validate the UPC length.
  • E8 = EAN-8, indicating an 8 position UPC code; however, Order Management System does not validate the UPC length.
  • UA = UPC-A, indicating a 12 position UPC code; however Order Management System does not validate the UPC length.
  • UE = UPC-E, indicating a 6 position UPC code; however Order Management System does not validate the UPC length.

Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
UPC

A UPC code defined for the item/SKU, including any leading zeros. Example: If the UPC code is 06012011, the UPC code passed should be 06012011 and not 6012011.

Alphanumeric, 14 positions; required.
UPC Vendor Nbr

A user-defined code that identifies the supplier of the item/SKU UPC. Defined in and validated against the Vendor table. See Working with Vendors (WVEN).

Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Fields for 09 Item Coordinate record type

See Item Coordinate errors.

Coordinate Item

The related item you are coordinating to the primary item (identified in the Item field) for cross-selling purposes. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table.

Note:

If you specify a SKU in an item coordinate request, the system ignores it; item coordinates are assigned to the base item only, not to individual SKUs.

Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required.
ICN Coordinate Item Type

A code representing a type of item coordinate, such as mandatory or optional. If you do not specify a coordinate type in a change request, the system clears the existing coordinate type assignment.

Coordinate type codes are defined in and validated against the Item Coordinate Type table; see Working with Item Coordinate Types (WICT).

Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Message

A persuasive or descriptive message to display on the item coordinate pop-up window in order entry. If you do not specify a message in a change request, the system clears the existing message.

Alphanumeric, 70 positions; optional.
ICN Coordinate SKU

The coordinate item's unique characteristics, such as its color or size. Required if the coordinate item has SKUs.

  1. If you define a SKU for the coordinate item that is not already defined for the primary item, the system creates a new Item Coordinate record for the primary item.
  2. If you define a SKU for the coordinate item that is already defined for the primary item, the system updates the Coordinate type and Message values for the existing Item Coordinate record.

Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; required if the item has SKUs.

Work with Retail Item Upload Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to process batch item upload records, then review and correct the records with errors.

All batch records that you pass to the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP) using the process described under RI Item Upload Process or Oracle Retail Merchandising Foundation Cloud Service (RMFCS) and Oracle Retail Pricing Cloud Service (RPCS) Integration display on this screen with a blank status. You can process the batch by selecting Process File to submit the RI_UPLD job. Any records that are in error remain on this screen, and the system places the record(s) in error status (E).

How to display this screen: Enter RIIU in the Fast Path at the top of any menu or select Work with Retail item Upload from a menu.

Field Description
Date

The date you created the item upload record.

Numeric, 6 positions; optional.
Record type

Indicates the item/SKU information you want to add, change, or delete. Valid values are:

  • Item/SKU
  • Item Offer
  • SKU Offer
  • Item Price
  • SKU Price
  • Vendor Item
  • Item UPC
  • Item Coordinate

Fields in the RI Item Upload table are categorized by record type and this code determines the group of item/SKU information fields that the item upload program evaluates to create or update an item/SKU.

Note:

Although the record type description is listed on this screen, each record type is identified by a numeric code in the table. For example, an Item/SKU is record type 01.
 

Example: If you want to change a SKUs price information, you enter a SKU Price record type. Even if all the fields in the item upload record are populated for that SKU, the system will only pass information in the nine SKU price fields.

Note:

If you maintain values (a change Request Type) for different record types and you leave blank fields in the item upload record, the system updates the associated tables with blanks.
Item/SKU Record Type (01)

When passing information to Order Management System, you must build upon values passed in this record type. For example, you cannot create a vendor item record type until you have first created the item/SKU record type).

 

The system considers fields associated with this record type. Of these fields, the following are required when the Use Retail Integration (H26) system control value is selected:

  • L/S style
  • L/S vendor
  • Item description
  • L/S class
  • L/S department
  • L/S division (if the Require Long SKU Division with Long SKU Department (E85) system control value is selected, AND you are passing a new L/S Department value)
  • Item class (if the Require Item Class in Work with Items (F06) system control value is selected)

See Fields for 01 Item/SKU record type.

 

Creating an item/SKU record is the only instance where the item and SKU code fields are evaluated outside of the Key Type, and the only instance where the item identifier values for the key type do not have to be specified.

Example: When creating an item/SKU (an add Request Type for an 01 record type), you must pass an Item code unless you have the Auto Assign Item # (D46) system control value selected.

If you do not enter an item code, a message indicates: Missing Item/SKU for Key Type IT.

You must also pass a SKU code in the above situation (an add Request Type for an 01 record type) when the Allow SKUs field is selected.

 

Note:

When you pass an add request for the 01 record type and leave various fields blank, the system tries to default values from the **DFLT ITEM or system control values. See Creating Default and Change Item/SKU Upload Values: **DFLT ITEM and **DFTCHG.
Item Offer Record Type (03)

The system considers fields associated with this record type. The Offer for item offer field is required. See Fields for 03 Item Offer record type.

SKU Offer Record Type (04)

The system considers fields associated with this record type. The SKU offer for SKU offer field is required. See Fields for 04 SKU Offer record type.

  Item Price Record Type (05)

The system considers the fields associated with the item price record type. These fields are required:

  • Offer for item price
  • Effective date
  • Quantity
  • Price

See Fields for 05 Item Price record type. You cannot create an item price record until you have created an item offer record.

  SKU Price Record Type (06)

The system considers the fields associated with the SKU price record type. These fields are required:

  • Offer for SKU price
  • SKP effective date
  • SKP quantity
  • SKP price

See Fields for 06 SKU Price record type. You cannot create a SKU price record without first creating a SKU offer record.

  07 Vendor Item Record Type

The system considers the fields associated with the vendor item record type. These fields are required:

  • Vendor for vendor item record
  • item code
  • Description

See Fields for 07 Vendor Item record type. If the item for which you are creating a vendor item has SKUs, you must enter a code in the SKU field for the item upload record.

  08 UPC Record Type

The system considers the fields associated with the UPC record type. The UPC type and UPC code are required. See Fields for 08 Item UPC record type.

09 Item Coordinate Record Type

The system considers the fields associated with the item coordinate record type. The Item coordinate is always required, and the Coordinate SKU is required if the coordinate item has SKUs. See Fields for 09 Item Coordinate record type.

Optional.
Req type (Request Type)

A code that defines whether you create or change item/SKU information. Valid values are:

  • Add = Add record; however, if the system finds a record in the Order Management System database that matches the information in the RI Item Upload record, the system updates the existing record.
  • Maintain = Change record; however, if the system cannot find a record in the Order Management System database that matches the information in the RI Item Upload record, the system creates a new record.
  • Blank = The system compares the information in the RI Item Upload record to the existing records in the Order Management System database.
  • If the system cannot match the RI Item Upload record to an existing record in the Order Management System database, the system considers the RI Item Upload record an add request.
  • If the system can match the RI Item Upload record to an existing record in the Order Management System database, the system considers the RI Item Upload record a change request.
  Add Request Type

You can pass numerous add requests for the same item/SKU with these record types:

  • 03 (item offer)
  • 04 (SKU offer)
  • 05 (item price)
  • 06 (SKU price)
  • 07 (vendor item)
  • 08 (UPC record type)
  • 09 (item coordinate)

You can also pass multiple add requests for the same item (record type 01) as long as you are creating a new SKU for that base item. See the Record Type field description for more information.

 

When adding an item/SKU (01 record type), the system tries to default values whenever you leave a record type 01 field blank. The system looks to the **DFLT item and system control values to default values whenever possible. See Creating Default and Change Item/SKU Upload Values: **DFLT ITEM and **DFTCHG.

Change Request Type

You can pass multiple change requests for all record types; however, the fields associated with the specified record type are overwritten with the most recent information you pass for that record type. Do not pass a change request trying to update only one or two fields.
 

Example: You want to change the effective date for a SKU price record (C request type, 06 record type). Assuming you enter identifier Key Type values and the system can find the SKU associated with the item upload record, if you enter the required fields for a SKU price record, updating the effective date but you leave the other fields that the system considers for the SKU price Record Type blank, the system updates the table with the values you entered in the required fields, and overwrites the rest of the data in the table with blanks.

Note:

The system overwrites data from blank fields passed in change requests for every record type except the 01 item/SKU record type. With this record type, the system defaults values whenever possible, either from the **DFLT ITEM or from system control values. See Creating Default and Change Item/SKU Upload Values: **DFLT ITEM and **DFTCHG.

Optional.
Key type (IUP Key Type)

Defines the field values the system evaluates in order to identify the Order Management System item or SKU associated with an item upload record. Valid value is Item/SKU.

The Item and SKU fields identify the item and SKU associated with the item upload record. The Item field is required and optionally the SKU field if you want to change information for a specific SKU. If the item contains SKUs and you do not enter a SKU code, the system maintains the base item for an item-level Record Type. A message indicates if you do not enter a code in the Item and SKU fields.

Optional.

Key

The information that the system/translation program retrieved to identify the item or SKU associated with the item upload record.

If the system maps the record to an item/SKU within Order Management System, the item/SKU’s full information is shown here.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Sts (Status)

The status of the item upload record.

Valid values are:

  • Unprocessed or blank = The item upload record is waiting to be processed.
  • Batch Selected = The item upload record contains the Record Type that is currently selected to process.
  • In Process = The item upload record is part of the batch of 1000 records that is currently being processed.
  • Other Updates = The item upload record is being processed by the secondary job RISECU that creates item download triggers and data warehouse triggers.
  • Deleted = The item upload record will be deleted from the table.
  • Error = The item upload record contains errors.
  • Processed = The item upload record has been processed.

When you pass records to the RI Item Upload table, the Upload Translation program creates unprocessed records that display on the Work with Retail Item Upload Screen with a blank Sts (Status) field. When you select Process File to process and edit the item upload records, the system updates all records with the appropriate status. Only records in Error status remain visible at the Work with Retail Item Upload Screen so that you can correct them.

Optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Process item upload records

Select Process File to edit and process batch item upload records. See RI Item Upload Process for more information on how the system edits and populates the tables. The system submits the RI_UPLD job.

Periodic function: You can also schedule this process to run periodically by setting up the RIUPLD function using the PFR0084 program. See Scheduling Jobs for background.

Change an item upload record

Select Change for an item upload record to advance to one of the Change Item Upload Screens.

Note:

You cannot change an item upload record if its status is B (Batch Selected), I (In Process), S (Other Updates) or P (Processed).

Delete an item upload record

Select Delete for an item upload record to delete it. When you process the batch (select Process File), the system deletes the item upload record from the RI Item Upload table.

Note:

You cannot delete an item upload record if its status is B (Batch Selected), I (In Process), S (Other Updates) or P (Processed).

Display an item upload record

Select Display for an item upload record to advance to one of the Display Item Upload Screens.

Errors

Select Errors for an item upload record to advance to the Work with Retail Item Upload Errors Screen.

Delete all records that currently exist in the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP), across all companies

Select Delete All. At the Are you sure you want to delete? window, select Delete to delete all records; otherwise, select Exit to cancel.

Print an item upload error report

Select Print Error Report to print the Item Upload Error Report. The system submits the RI_ERROR job.

Change Item Upload Screens

Purpose: Use these screens to correct batch item upload records with errors.

The system displays different information on the Change screens based on the information in the item upload record. For example, vendor item information is indicated for an item upload record containing vendor item information.

E2 Key screen: If you do not enter one of the keys to the table for the item upload record, you advance to an E2 Key Screen and are not able to advance to these screens to correct the errors.

Note:

You cannot change an item upload record if its status is B (Batch Selected), I (In Process), S (Other Updates) or P (Processed).

The following types of change screens exist:

Change Item Upload - Item/SKU Screens

Purpose: Use these screens to work with item upload records containing item/SKU information (01 Item/SKU record type).

Default values:

  • If you use the **DFLT ITEM Item/SKU to default values, the system does not default these values until you correct any errors.
  • If you use the **DFTCHG Item/SKU to keep the existing values for an item/SKU and only update the fields defined in the item upload, the system defaults the retained values to the Change Item Upload - Item/SKU screens.

For field descriptions see Keys to the table: fields that are required for all record types and Fields for 01 Item/SKU record type.

Change Item Upload - Item Offer Screens

Purpose: Use these screens to work with item upload records containing item/offer information (03 record type).

For field descriptions see Keys to the table: fields that are required for all record types and Fields for 03 Item Offer record type.

Change Item Upload - SKU Offer Screens

Purpose: Use these screens to work with item upload records containing SKU/offer information (04 record type).

For field descriptions see Keys to the table: fields that are required for all record types and Fields for 04 SKU Offer record type.

Change Item Upload - Item Price Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to work with item upload records containing item/price information (05 record type).

For field descriptions see Keys to the table: fields that are required for all record types and Fields for 05 Item Price record type.

Change Item Upload - SKU Price Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to work with item upload records containing SKU/price information (06 record type).

For field descriptions see Keys to the table: fields that are required for all record types and Fields for 06 SKU Price record type.

Change Item Upload - Vendor Item Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to work with item upload records containing vendor/item information (07 record type).

For field descriptions see Keys to the table: fields that are required for all record types and Fields for 07 Vendor Item record type.

Change Item Upload - Item UPC Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to work with item upload records containing item/UPC information (08 record type).

For field descriptions see Keys to the table: fields that are required for all record types and Fields for 08 Item UPC record type.

Change Item Upload - Item Coordinate Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to work with item upload records containing item coordinate (09 record type).

For field descriptions see Keys to the table: fields that are required for all record types and Fields for 09 Item Coordinate record type.

Display Item Upload Screens

To display: Select Display for an item upload record at the Work with Retail Item Upload Screen to advance to one of the Display Item Upload Screens. The Record Type of the item upload record determines the category of information that is indicated. See the Change Item Upload Screens for the different types of screens that display and see RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP) for an explanation of the fields.

Work with Retail Item Upload Errors Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review all errors associated with an item upload record, to review the values you passed for the keys to the table such as the created date, record type, request type, and key type, and to review the key information the translation program found for a Order Management System item associated with the item upload record.

Once you perform the RI Item Upload Process by selecting Process for the item upload batch at the Work with Retail Item Upload Screen, all item upload records that contain errors display in three places:

How to display this screen: Select Errors for an item upload record at the Work with Retail Item Upload Screen.

The top portion of the screen displays the key information you passed to the item upload table for the item upload record. See Work with Retail Item Upload Screen for descriptions of these fields.

Note:

If you do not enter values for all the Keys to the table: fields that are required for all record types, you will receive an error message displaying which value(s) you are missing. However, you cannot change these values here. You must delete the item upload record, and re-send it with the required corrections.

Retail Item Upload Errors

The following table lists some of the most common errors the Retail Item Translation Program and the Retail Integration Edit Program find during RI Item Upload Process.

Types of errors include:

Error Code Error Message Problem
Basic errors  

See Keys to the table: fields that are required for all record types and Fields for 01 Item/SKU record type.

IA

Invalid Season for Item.

The Season field contains an invalid value.

IB

SKU Group can only be entered for items which have SKUs.

The SKU Group field must be blank if the item is not SKUed.

IC

Item Drop ship and Non-inventory are mutually exclusive.

The Drop Shipfield is selected and the item is a non-inventory item.

ID

Item Drop ship and Kit Type 'S' are mutually exclusive.

The Drop Ship field is selected and the item is a set item.

IE

Entity required.

The Entity Number field is required.

IF

Item Long SKU Style required.

The Long SKU Style field is required for the item.

IG

Item Long SKU Vendor required.

The Long SKU Vendor field is required for the item.

IH

Quantity must be limited to 99999.

The Qty Threshold field must be less than or equal to 5 positions.

GA

Invalid Company

The Company does not exist.

GB

Company required

The Company is required.

GC

Item required.

The Item is required because the system could not identify the item based on the information passed for the RI Item Upload record.

GD

Invalid Item

You tried to add an 03-08 record type without first creating the item/SKU (01 record type).

GE

SKU is required for this record type.

The SKU is required.

GF

Invalid record type for an item without skus.

The Record Type is invalid for the item.

GG

Invalid SKU.

The SKU is invalid.

GH

Invalid record type.

The Record Type is invalid.

GI

Invalid request type.

The Request Type is invalid.

IN

Change of Allow SKUs is not allowed.

You cannot change the Allow SKUs field to N because SKUs exist.

IO

Invalid SVC code

You entered an invalid value in the SVC type field.

  • Valid values are:

    1. blank (default) = The item is not a stored value card.
    2. P = The stored value card item is a physical card.
    3. E = The stored value card is a physical card and, as soon as the stored value card is processed through billing, the system sends an email notification to the ship to customer on the order, notifying the customer that a stored value card has been purchased and is in the process of being delivered.
    4. V = The stored value card is a virtual (non-physical) card.

IP

Item L/S Style is Not Unique

The Require L/S Style (I94) system control value is selected and the Long SKU Style defined at the item level is also assigned to another item or SKU.

K1

Missing company

The Company field requires a value.

K2

Missing date

The Record Created Date field requires a value.

K4

Missing record type

The Record Type field requires a value.

KI

Missing Item/SKU for Key Type IT.

You must enter an Item if the Key type is IT.

KT

Invalid key type for record.

The Key Type field is invalid. The key type must be IT. If you pass an invalid key type for an 01 Item/SKU record type, the system automatically corrects it.

SC

Multiple primary locations for this Item/SKU not allowed.

The SKU already had a primary location and the Allow Multiple Primary Item Locations (D12) system control value is set to NOT ALLOW.

SD

SKU Long SKU Style required.

The Require L/S Style (I94) system control value is selected and a L/S Style is not defined at the SKU level.

SE

SKU Long SKU Style is not unique.

The Require L/S Style (I94) system control value is selected and the L/S Style defined at the SKU level is also assigned to another item or SKU.

Q1

Error on Query

The current batch of 1000 RI Item Upload records failed to process because someone was creating or updating item/SKU information in Order Management System at the same time the RI Item Upload process was processing a record for the same item/SKU information. For example, you would get this error if someone was creating an item at the same time the RI Item Upload process was trying to create this same item.

In this situation, the system updates the status of all of the records in the batch to E (Error) with the reason Error on Query.

Item errors  

See Fields for 01 Item/SKU record type.

10

Invalid Long SKU Department.

The Department (L/S department) field contains an invalid value.

11

Long SKU Department required.

The Department (L/S department) field does not contain a value.

12

Long SKU Division required.

The L/S Division field does not contain a value. This field is required if the Require Long SKU Division with Long SKU Department (E85) system control value is selected and you are passing a new Department (L/S department) value.

13

Invalid Long SKU Division.

The L/S Division field contains an invalid value.

14

Invalid UOM Type for item.

The UOM (Unit of Measure) field for the item contains an invalid value.

15

UOM - Item Required.

The UOM (Unit of Measure) field for the item does not contain a value.

16

Invalid Vendor for Item.

The Vendor # field for the item contains an invalid value.

17

Invalid Ship Via for Item

The Ship Via Code field for the item contains an invalid value.

18

Invalid Manufacturing Vendor for Item.

The Manufacturer Vendor field for the item contains an invalid value.

19

Invalid Entity for Item.

The Entity Number field for the item contains an invalid value.

1D

Invalid Kit Type

The Kit Type field must be S, F, or V.

1G

Invalid Ship Alone flag.

The Ship Alone field must be S or blank.

1J

Item Description required.

The Description (Item description) field is blank and requires a value.

1N

Invalid buyer for item.

The Buyer field contains an invalid value.

1Q

Invalid Hazard Code

The Code (Hazard code) field contains an invalid value.

1R

Invalid Item Class for item.

The Item Class field contains an invalid value for the item.

1S

Item Class Required

The Item Class field does not contain a value.

1U

Invalid Item SKU Group code for item.

The SKU Group field contains an invalid value.

1V

Invalid Item Status for item.

The STS (Status) field for the item contains an invalid value.

1W

Invalid Location Class

The Location Class field contains an invalid value.

1Y

Invalid Long SKU Class for item.

The Class (Long SKU class) field contains an invalid value.

1Z

Item Long SKU Class required.

The Class (Long SKU class) field does not contain a value.

SKU errors  

See Fields for 01 Item/SKU record type.

20

SKU Crt - SKU Exists

The SKU you are trying to create already exists.

21

Subscription must be defined as non-inventory.

The Subscription field must contain a Y or N.

22

Must enter hidden tax amount OR hidden tax percent.

You can enter a value in the Hidden Tax Amount field OR Hidden Tax Percent field, but not both.

24

Sort Sequence # required for SKU.

The Collating Seq # field must contain a value.

25

SKU not eligible for zone reservation code.

The Zone Reservation field must be blank for the SKU.

26

Coordinate Group (999) cannot be assigned to a Set/Component item.

You cannot enter a value in the Coord group (Coordinate group items?) field for a set item.

2L

Invalid Warehouse code.

The Whs (Warehouse) field contains an invalid value.

2M

Warehouse is Required.

The Whs (Warehouse) field does not contain a value.

2N

Invalid Location code.

The Location field contains an invalid value.

2O

Invalid Sold Out Control code.

The Soldout control code field contains an invalid value.

2P

Invalid UOM Type for SKU

The UOM Type field for the SKU contains an invalid value.

2Q

Invalid Item Status for SKU

The Status field contains an invalid value for the SKU.

2R

Invalid category for SKU.

The Category field contains an invalid value for the SKU.

2T

Invalid Country of origin for SKU

The Country of Origin field contains an invalid value for the SKU.

2U

Invalid Long Sku Class for SKU.

The L/S Class field contains an invalid value for the SKU.

2V

Invalid Long SKU Class/Department combination for SKU.

The L/S Class and Department (L/S department) combination is invalid for the SKU.

2W

Invalid Zone Reservation for SKU.

The Zone Reservation field contains an invalid value.

2X

Invalid SKU Element 1

The SKU field contains an invalid value for SKU element 1.

2Y

Invalid SKU Element 2

The SKU field contains an invalid value for SKU element 2.

2Z

Invalid SKU Element 3

The SKU field contains an invalid value for SKU element 3.

Item Offer errors  

See Fields for 03 Item Offer record type.

3A

Invalid Offer for Item

The Offer for Item Offer field contains an invalid value for the item.

3B

Offer is Required for item

The Offer for Item Offer field does not contain a value for the item.

3C

Item Offer Create - Item/Offer Exists

The Offer for Item Offer you are trying to create already exists.

3D

Invalid Item Offer

The Offer for Item Offer field contains an invalid value.

3H

Invalid Feature/Option flag on Item Offer.

The Feature/option field contains an invalid value for the item offer.

3I

Invalid Pickup/New flag on Item Offer.

The Pickup/new field contains an invalid value for the item offer.

3M

Invalid Additional Charge code on item offer.

The Add’l chg code field contains an invalid value for the item offer.

3N

Invalid Add-On code on item offer.

The Add-On Code field contains an invalid value for the item offer.

3P

Spcl Hand price not allowed on item offer when not eligible.

The S/H Price field does not contain a value for the item offer.

3Q

Spcl Hand code not allowed on item offer when not eligible.

The S/H Flag field does not contain a value for the item offer.

3R

Invalid Coupon Expiration Date on Item Offer

The Coupon Effective field contains an invalid date. The date must be in CYYMMDD format.

SKU Offer errors  

See Fields for 04 SKU Offer record type.

4A

Invalid Offer for SKU

The Offer for SKU Offer field contains an invalid value for the SKU.

4B

Offer is required for SKU.

The Offer for SKU Offer field does not contain a value for the SKU.

4C

SKU Offer Create - SKU/Offer Exists

You cannot create the Offer for SKU Offer because it already exists.

4D

Invalid SKU Offer

The Offer for SKU Offer you are trying to create is invalid.

4H

Invalid Feature/Option flag on SKU Offer.

The Feature/Option field contains an invalid value for the SKU offer.

4I

Invalid Pickup/New flag on SKU Offer.

The Pickup/New field contains an invalid value for the SKU offer.

4M

Invalid Additional Charge code on SKU offer.

The additional charge code in the Add’l chg field is invalid for the SKU offer.

4N

Invalid Add-On code on SKU offer.

The add-on code in the Add-On Code field is invalid for the SKU offer.

4P

Spcl Hand price not allowed on SKU offer when not eligible.

The S/H Price field does not contain a value for the SKU offer.

4Q

Spcl Hand code not allowed on SKU offer when not eligible.

The S/H Flag field does not contain a value for the SKU offer.

4R

Invalid Coupon Expiration Date on SKU Offer

The Coupon Effective field contains an invalid date. The date must be in CYYMMDD format.

Item Price errors  

See Fields for 05 Item Price record type.

5A

Invalid Offer for Item Price

The Offer for Item Price defined for the item price is invalid.

5B

Offer is required for item price.

The Offer for Item Price field does not contain a value for the item price.

5C

Effective date is required for item price.

The Effective Date field does not contain a value for the item price.

5D

Quantity is Required for Item Price

The Qty field does not contain a value for the item price.

5E

Itm Price Crt - Item Price Exists

You cannot create the item price because it already exists.

5F

Invalid item effective date or quantity.

The Effective Date or Qty is not valid for the item price record.

5G

Price required on item price.

The Price field does not contain a value for the item price.

5H

Invalid Effective Date on Item Price

The Effective Date field contains an invalid date. The date must be in CYYMMDD format.

5I

Price cannot be negative on item price.

The Price field contains a negative value for the item price.

5J

Invalid item offer for item price.

The item offer price is invalid.
SKU Price errors  

See Fields for 06 SKU Price record type.

6A

Invalid Offer for SKU Price

The Offer SKU Price is invalid for the SKU price.

6B

Offer is required for SKU price.

The Offer SKU Price field does not contain a value for the SKU price.

6C

Effective date is required for SKU price.

The Effective Date field does not contain a value for the SKU price.

6D

Quantity is required for SKU price.

The SKU Price Qty field does not contain a value for the SKU price.

6E

SKU Price Crt - SKU Price Exists

You cannot create the SKU price because it already exists.

6F

Invalid sku effective date or quantity.

The Effective Date or SKU Price Qty is not valid for the SKU price record.

6G

Price required on Sku price.

The Price field does not contain a value for the SKU price.

6H

Invalid Effective Date on SKU Price

The Effective Date field contains an invalid date. The date must be in CYYMMDD format.

6I

Price cannot be negative on Sku price.

The Price field contains a negative value for the SKU price.

6J

Invalid sku offer for sku price.

The SKU offer is invalid for the SKU price.
Vendor Item errors  

See Fields for 07 Vendor Item record type.

7A

Invalid Vendor for Vendor Item.

The Vendor Number field contains an invalid value for the vendor item.

7B

Vendor is required for vendor item.

The Vendor Number field does not contain a value for the vendor item.

7C

Vendor Item code is required for vendor item.

The Item (Vendor item) field does not contain a value for the vendor item.

7D

VIT Crt - VIT Exists

You cannot create the vendor item because it already exists.

7E

Invalid vendor item.

The Item (Vendor item) is invalid.

7F

Vendor Item Description required.

The Description field is required for vendor item.

7G

Invalid PO Ship Via code on Vendor Item.

The Ship Via field contains an invalid value for vendor item.

7H

Invalid UOM Type for Vendor Item.

The UOM Type (SKU) field contains an invalid value for vendor item.

7I

Invalid country of origin for Vendor Item.

The Country of Origin field contains an invalid value for vendor item.

Item UPC errors  

See Fields for 08 Item UPC record type.

8A

UPC type is required for Item UPC.

The UPC Type field is required.

8B

UPC # is required for Item UPC.

The UPC field is required.

8C

UPC Crt - UPC exists

You cannot create the UPC because it already exists.

8D

Invalid Item UPC

The UPC for the item is invalid.

8E

Invalid Vendor on Item UPC.

The UPC Vendor Nbr defined for the UPC is invalid.

8F

UPC already assigned to xxxx. (where xxxx is item and sku)

The UPC is already assigned to another item/SKU.

8G

UPC Length is Invalid

The UPC length is invalid for the UPC Type. Not currently implemented.

8H

UPC type is invalid for Item UPC

The UPC Type is invalid.

Item Coordinate errors  

See Fields for 09 Item Coordinate record type.

9A

Invalid Item Coordinate

The Coordinate Item specified does not exist.

9B

Invalid Item Coordinate Type.

The ICN Coordinate Item Type specified does not exist.

9C

Invalid Coordinate SKU.

A SKU is specified for a non-SKUed item, or the SKU specified for a SKUed item does not exist.

9D

Item Coordinate is required.

No Coordinate Item is specified.

9E

Can’t add Item Coordinate because Item Coordinate already ex

The non-SKUed coordinate item specified for an Add request is already assigned to the item.

9F

Can’t add Coordinate SKU. Coordinate SKU already exists.

The specified SKU of the coordinate item specified for an Add request is already assigned to the item.

9G

Coordinate SKU is required for SKU’ed item.

There is no coordinate SKU specified for the coordinate item, and it is a SKU’d item.

Creating and Maintaining Long SKU Divisions (WLDV)

Purpose: Use the Work with Long SKU Division menu option to create, change, delete or display long SKU division codes. Long SKU divisions are used in conjunction with long SKU departments and long SKU classes to establish a hierarchy within a company or entity, usually in a retail environment. For example, a company can have Men’s, Women’s and Children’s divisions, with the same departments such as Apparel, Shoes, and Accessories, with different classes in those departments.

The Require Long SKU Division with Long SKU Department (E85) system control value determines whether you must specify a long SKU division with a long SKU department.

Uploading: Options to import long SKU divisions include:

In this topic:

Work with Long SKU Division Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WLDV in the Fast Path at the top of any menu or select Work with Long SKU Division from a menu.

Field Description
Div (Division)

A code that represents a long SKU division. L/S divisions are used in conjunction with long SKU departments and long SKU classes for reporting purposes and to create a hierarchy within a company or entity. Long SKU division codes are defined in and validated against the L/S Division table.

If the Require Long SKU Division with Long SKU Department (E85) system control value is selected, you must specify a long SKU division when you create, or maintain an existing, long SKU department, or in specific situations when you populate the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP). See L/S Division for more information.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Description

The description of the long SKU division.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Screen Option Procedure

Create a L/S Division

Select Create to advance to the Create Long SKU Division Screen.

Change L/S Division information

Select Change for a long SKU division to advance to the Change Long SKU Division Screen. At this screen, you can change just the Description. See the Create Long SKU Division Screen for field descriptions.

Delete a L/S Division

Select Delete for a long SKU division to delete it. Even if long SKU departments are linked to this L/S division, you can still delete the division code. The next time you maintain the L/S department value, you receive an error message that the L/S division does not exist. You must then select or create a valid L/S division code.

Display a L/S Division

Select Display for a long SKU division to advance to the Display Long SKU Division Screen. You cannot change any information at this screen. See the Create Long SKU Division Screen for field descriptions.

Print a L/S Division list

Select Print List for a long SKU division to print it.

Create Long SKU Division Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a long SKU division.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with Long SKU Division Screen.

Field Description
L/S Division

A code that represents a long SKU division. L/S divisions are used in conjunction with long SKU departments and long SKU classes for reporting purposes and to create a hierarchy within a company or entity. Long SKU division codes are defined in and validated against the L/S Division table.

If the Require Long SKU Division with Long SKU Department (E85) system control value is selected, you must specify a long SKU division when you create, or maintain an existing, long SKU department, or in specific situations when you populate the RI Item Upload Table (RIIUPP). See L/S Division for more information.

Alphanumeric, 4 positions.

Create screen: required.

Change screen: display-only.
Description

The description of the long SKU division.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.